SmartPlant Review For Dummies

SmartPlant Review
User's Guide
Version 2010 - UPDATED

May 2011
DVIS2-PE-200001I
Copyright
Copyright 1999 - 2011 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement;
contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade
secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from
Intergraph Corporation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of
the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
P.O. Box 240000
Huntsville, AL 35813
Terms of Use
Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless
the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed
license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use
of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives
licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement
and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for
resale or redistribution.
Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software
or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this
document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes
the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, IntelliShip, INtools, ISOGEN,
MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. Other brands and product
names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 17
What's New in SmartPlant Review?......................................................................................................... 19
Welcome to SmartPlant Review ............................................................................................................... 23
Using SmartPlant Review Modules ......................................................................................................... 25
API Module............................................................................................................................................ 25
Collaboration Module ............................................................................................................................ 26
Construction Module ............................................................................................................................. 27
On-Site Drawing Generation Module .................................................................................................... 28
Photo-Realism Module .......................................................................................................................... 29
Point Cloud Integrator Module .............................................................................................................. 29
Simulation and Visual Effects Module .................................................................................................. 30
Introducing the SmartPlant Review Interface ......................................................................................... 31
Commonly-Used Commands ................................................................................................................ 31
Close Command ............................................................................................................................. 31
Save Command .............................................................................................................................. 31
Undo Command ............................................................................................................................. 31
Redo Command ............................................................................................................................. 32
Cut Command ................................................................................................................................ 32
Copy Command.............................................................................................................................. 32
Paste Command ............................................................................................................................. 32
Next Object Command ................................................................................................................... 32
Previous Object Command ............................................................................................................ 32
Menu Bar Command ...................................................................................................................... 33
Status Bar Command ..................................................................................................................... 33
Refresh Data Command ................................................................................................................. 33
Format Readouts Command .......................................................................................................... 33
Recently Used Files Command ...................................................................................................... 33
Exit Command ................................................................................................................................ 34
Display Commands ............................................................................................................................... 34
Annotations Command ................................................................................................................... 34
Activate Command ......................................................................................................................... 34
XYZ Label Command ..................................................................................................................... 35
Dashed View Cone Command ....................................................................................................... 35
Display Order Command ................................................................................................................ 35
Dot Box Command ......................................................................................................................... 35
Shaded Command.......................................................................................................................... 36
Large Plant Monument Command ................................................................................................. 36
Measurements Command .............................................................................................................. 36
Object Textures Command ............................................................................................................ 36
Outline Toggle ................................................................................................................................ 37
Perspective Command ................................................................................................................... 38
Perspective Angle Command ......................................................................................................... 38
Shaded with Outline Command ...................................................................................................... 38
SmartPlant Review User's Guide
Contents
Shaded/Wireframe Toggle ............................................................................................................. 39
Show/Hide for Main View Command.............................................................................................. 40
Show/Hide for Plan View Command .............................................................................................. 40
Show/Hide for Elevation View Command....................................................................................... 40
Stroking Tolerance Command ........................................................................................................ 40
Surface Encircle Command ............................................................................................................ 41
Wireframe with Outline Command ................................................................................................. 41
Wireframe Command ..................................................................................................................... 42
Wireframe Background Color Command ....................................................................................... 43
Common Views Commands ................................................................................................................. 43
Common Views Control .................................................................................................................. 43
Looking Plan (Top) Command ....................................................................................................... 45
Looking North (Front) Command .................................................................................................... 45
Looking West (Right) Command .................................................................................................... 45
Looking Up (Bottom) Command ..................................................................................................... 45
Looking South (Back) Command ................................................................................................... 45
Looking East (Left) Command ........................................................................................................ 45
Isometric (Top Front Right) Command ........................................................................................... 45
Isometric (Top Front Left) Command ............................................................................................. 46
Isometric (Top Back Right) Command ........................................................................................... 46
Isometric (Top Back Left) Command.............................................................................................. 46
Isometric (Bottom Front Right) Command...................................................................................... 46
Isometric (Bottom Front Left) Command ........................................................................................ 46
Isometric (Bottom Back Right) Command ...................................................................................... 46
Isometric (Bottom Back Left) Command ........................................................................................ 46
Rotate with Model Fit Command .................................................................................................... 47
Commands for Arranging the View ....................................................................................................... 47
Arrange All Command .................................................................................................................... 47
Arrange Icons Command................................................................................................................ 48
Cascade Command ........................................................................................................................ 48
Elevation Command ....................................................................................................................... 48
Four View Layout Command .......................................................................................................... 48
Full Screen Command .................................................................................................................... 48
Main Command .............................................................................................................................. 49
Plan Command ............................................................................................................................... 49
Refresh Command ......................................................................................................................... 49
Refresh All Views ........................................................................................................................... 49
Restore All Command .................................................................................................................... 49
Scroll Bars Command..................................................................................................................... 49
Single View Layout Command ....................................................................................................... 50
Text Command ............................................................................................................................... 50
Three View Layout Command ........................................................................................................ 50
Tile Horizontally Command ............................................................................................................ 50
Tile Vertically Command................................................................................................................. 50
Toolbars ................................................................................................................................................ 51
Annotation Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 51
Common Toolbar ............................................................................................................................ 52
Common View Tools Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 53
Encircle Radius Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 55
Measure Toolbar ............................................................................................................................ 55
Motion Toolbar ................................................................................................................................ 56
Navigation Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 57
Perspective Angle Toolbar ............................................................................................................. 58
Contents
Photo-Realism Toolbar ................................................................................................................... 58
Position Control Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 59
ScheduleReview Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 61
Standard Toolbar ............................................................................................................................ 62
Tags Toolbar .................................................................................................................................. 62
Tools Toolbar .................................................................................................................................. 63
Tools MiniBar .................................................................................................................................. 63
Views Toolbar ................................................................................................................................. 64
Window Toolbar .............................................................................................................................. 65
Customize Toolbars........................................................................................................................ 65
Understanding Projects and Project Databases .................................................................................... 71
Change Label Database Format ........................................................................................................... 74
Share the Project Database Over the Network ..................................................................................... 74
Performance Control ................................................................................................................................. 77
Opening a Model ........................................................................................................................................ 81
Open a Model File ................................................................................................................................. 82
Create Project Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 83
Open Model from Command Line ......................................................................................................... 88
Use the Search Path ............................................................................................................................. 89
Adjust Index Allocation for Large Datasets ........................................................................................... 91
Setting the Home View .............................................................................................................................. 91
Using 3D Navigation .................................................................................................................................. 93
3D Navigation Controls ......................................................................................................................... 93
Use Keyboard-Only 3D Navigation ....................................................................................................... 95
Use Mouse Only or Mouse + Keyboard Combinations (Fly Mode) ...................................................... 96
Use the 3D Navigator ............................................................................................................................ 99
Return to Default View.................................................................................................................. 100
Create a Custom Home View ....................................................................................................... 100
Enter Fly Mode ............................................................................................................................. 101
Look Around ................................................................................................................................. 101
Move ............................................................................................................................................. 101
Select an Object ........................................................................................................................... 102
Fit to Object(s) .............................................................................................................................. 102
3D Navigation Tips .............................................................................................................................. 103
Classic SmartPlant Review Navigation ................................................................................................. 105
Configure Motion Settings ................................................................................................................... 106
Motion Settings Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 108
Set Motion Rates .......................................................................................................................... 114
Set Single Step Motion ................................................................................................................. 115
Set Toggle Step Direction ............................................................................................................ 115
Set Continuous Motion ................................................................................................................. 115
Set Display Options ...................................................................................................................... 116
Set Bearing Angles ....................................................................................................................... 116
Use Mouse Drag Modes ..................................................................................................................... 116
Use Auto-Highlighting to Display Label Data ............................................................................... 118
Contents
Move View Cone Forward/Back, Left/Right.................................................................................. 121
Pan ............................................................................................................................................... 122
Rotate ........................................................................................................................................... 122
Manipulate the View Cube ........................................................................................................... 123
Set Priority Mode .......................................................................................................................... 123
Set Center Mode .......................................................................................................................... 123
Lock Center Point ......................................................................................................................... 124
Lock Elevation .............................................................................................................................. 124
Use the Joystick .................................................................................................................................. 124
Activate a Joystick in SmartPlant Review .................................................................................... 125
Map Joystick Commands ............................................................................................................. 125
Use the Keyboard ............................................................................................................................... 126
Shortcut Function Keys ................................................................................................................ 126
Standard Control Keys ................................................................................................................. 127
SmartPlant Review Shortcut Keys ............................................................................................... 128
Keypad Keys (Classic Navigation) ............................................................................................... 130
Set Motion Control to Eye Point .......................................................................................................... 132
Set Motion Control to Display Set ....................................................................................................... 132
Move Continuously ............................................................................................................................. 132
Move Single Step ................................................................................................................................ 133
Set Step Direction ............................................................................................................................... 133
Control Movement with Positioning Modes ......................................................................................... 134
Move Lateral ................................................................................................................................. 134
Set Horizontal Encircle ................................................................................................................. 135
Set Vertical Encircle ..................................................................................................................... 136
Clip to Encircle Sphere ................................................................................................................. 136
Set Surface Encircle ..................................................................................................................... 137
Control Movement with Directional Modes ......................................................................................... 138
Set View Dependent Mode ........................................................................................................... 138
Set View Dependent, Level Mode ................................................................................................ 139
Set View Independent Mode ........................................................................................................ 139
Set Plant North Mode ................................................................................................................... 140
Introducing the Project Manager ........................................................................................................... 141
Display or Hide Project Manager ........................................................................................................ 142
View Items in the Model with Project Manager ................................................................................... 142
Display or Hide Parts of a Model with Project Manager ..................................................................... 143
Move the Project Manager (Dock and Undock) .................................................................................. 143
Enable or Disable Immediate Update Mode ....................................................................................... 144
Working with VUE Files .......................................................................................................................... 145
Add VUE Files ..................................................................................................................................... 146
Load VUE Files ................................................................................................................................... 147
Save As VUE File................................................................................................................................ 149
Move, Rotate, and Scale a Model: VUE File Position......................................................................... 151
Viewing SmartPlant 3D Model Data ....................................................................................................... 159
Use the SmartPlant 3D Label Selector Utility ..................................................................................... 161
View SmartPlant 3D Labels in SmartPlant Review ............................................................................. 167
Map a Label Using the RelationshipMapping.txt File.......................................................................... 169
View General Notes from SmartPlant 3D ........................................................................................... 171
Contents
Review Example Workflow ................................................................................................................. 175
Troubleshoot Label Display Problems ................................................................................................ 179
Work with Aspects .................................................................................................................................. 182
Turn Aspects On and Off .................................................................................................................... 183
Add Custom Aspects .......................................................................................................................... 184
Using the UoM Converter to Change the Units of Measure for Labels .............................................. 187
Create the Units of Measure Conversion File for SmartPlant 3D Projects ......................................... 189
Load the SmartPlant 3D Units of Measure Conversion File ............................................................... 190
Find Objects in the Model ....................................................................................................................... 193
Find Object Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 194
Working with Views ................................................................................................................................. 197
Use the Common Views Control ......................................................................................................... 199
Fit Views .............................................................................................................................................. 200
Fit All to Model .............................................................................................................................. 200
Fit View to Model .......................................................................................................................... 201
Fit View to Object ......................................................................................................................... 201
Fit View to Volume........................................................................................................................ 202
Fit View to Display Set.................................................................................................................. 202
Zoom In ........................................................................................................................................ 203
Zoom Out ...................................................................................................................................... 203
Zoom About a Point ...................................................................................................................... 204
Set Zoom Amount......................................................................................................................... 204
Light Views .......................................................................................................................................... 204
Set Light Direction ........................................................................................................................ 205
Set Ambient Light Level................................................................................................................ 205
Set Brightness Level..................................................................................................................... 206
Configure View Settings ...................................................................................................................... 207
Define Display Order .................................................................................................................... 207
Maintain Display Options .............................................................................................................. 208
Maintain Render Settings ............................................................................................................. 208
Set Background Color .................................................................................................................. 208
Set Display Tag ............................................................................................................................ 208
Set Lighting Intensity .................................................................................................................... 209
Set Range Reject ......................................................................................................................... 209
Set Stroking Tolerance ................................................................................................................. 209
Set Sun Bearing Angles ............................................................................................................... 210
Set Textures ................................................................................................................................. 210
Set View Cone Perspective .......................................................................................................... 210
View Settings Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 211
Colors Dialog Box ......................................................................................................................... 219
Select Level Settings .......................................................................................................................... 219
View Current Level Settings ......................................................................................................... 220
Edit Levels .................................................................................................................................... 220
Match Files ................................................................................................................................... 220
Level Settings Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 221
Match Items Dialog Box................................................................................................................ 222
Resolve Current Level Settings Dialog Box ................................................................................. 223
Contents
Hide Levels ......................................................................................................................................... 223
Hide Level Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 224
View in Stereo ..................................................................................................................................... 224
Activate Stereo ............................................................................................................................. 225
Set Stereo Settings ....................................................................................................................... 225
Display Left Stereo View .............................................................................................................. 226
Display Right Stereo View ............................................................................................................ 226
Set Stereo Distances .................................................................................................................... 226
Using the View Cone ............................................................................................................................... 229
Set Eye Point ...................................................................................................................................... 230
Place Eye Point Only .......................................................................................................................... 231
Set View by Eye Point ......................................................................................................................... 231
Set Center Point .................................................................................................................................. 232
Place Center Point Only ...................................................................................................................... 232
View by Center Point .......................................................................................................................... 233
Set Clipping Planes ............................................................................................................................. 233
Place Near Clipping Plane .................................................................................................................. 234
Place Far Clipping Plane .................................................................................................................... 234
Applying Range Rejection ...................................................................................................................... 235
Activate Range Rejection .................................................................................................................... 235
Set All Range Rejection ...................................................................................................................... 236
Set All Range Rejection Values Dialog Box ................................................................................. 236
Set Main Range Rejection .................................................................................................................. 237
Set Plan Range Rejection ................................................................................................................... 237
Set Elevation Range Rejection ........................................................................................................... 237
Show Range Rejection Settings ......................................................................................................... 237
Working with Display Sets...................................................................................................................... 239
View Display Sets ............................................................................................................................... 241
Create New Display Set Definitions .................................................................................................... 242
Create a Display Set Definition from a SmartPlant 3D System Hierarchy ......................................... 243
Create a Nozzle Display Set Definition ............................................................................................... 243
Create a New Display Set Folder ........................................................................................................ 244
Auto-Define Display Sets .................................................................................................................... 245
Auto-Define Display Sets Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 246
Edit Display Sets ................................................................................................................................. 246
Edit a Display Set Definition ......................................................................................................... 247
Edit a Display Set Position ........................................................................................................... 259
Assign Material to Display Sets .......................................................................................................... 266
Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box ................................................................................... 267
Display Materials ................................................................................................................................. 268
Show Display Sets .............................................................................................................................. 269
Show Display Set Membership ........................................................................................................... 269
Shade Display Sets ............................................................................................................................. 269
Dim Display Sets ................................................................................................................................. 270
Reverse Dim Display Sets .................................................................................................................. 270
Show Only Selected Display Sets....................................................................................................... 270
Hide Only Selected Display Sets ........................................................................................................ 271
Move Display Sets .............................................................................................................................. 271
Contents
Delete Display Sets ............................................................................................................................. 272
Rename Display Sets ......................................................................................................................... 272
Import Display Sets ............................................................................................................................. 272
Import Display Sets Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 273
Export Display Sets ............................................................................................................................. 274
Export Display Sets Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 275
Placing 3D Points .................................................................................................................................... 277
Define a Bore Sight ............................................................................................................................. 277
Snap to an Object ............................................................................................................................... 277
Placing Measurements ............................................................................................................................ 279
Set Snaplock Measurement ................................................................................................................ 280
Set Surface Measurement .................................................................................................................. 281
Measure Shortest Distance between Objects ..................................................................................... 282
Use One Click Measurement Mode .................................................................................................... 282
Move Measurement ............................................................................................................................ 283
Restore Measurement Position ........................................................................................................... 283
Delete Last Measurement ................................................................................................................... 284
Delete All Measurements .................................................................................................................... 284
Creating Measurement Collections ....................................................................................................... 285
Create New Measurement Collection ................................................................................................. 286
Edit Measurement Collections ............................................................................................................ 286
Measurement Collections Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 287
Delete All Measurement Collections ................................................................................................... 296
Delete Active Collection Measurements ............................................................................................. 297
Communicating with Tags ...................................................................................................................... 299
Place a Tag With a Leader Line.......................................................................................................... 300
Place Tag With No Leader .................................................................................................................. 301
Edit Tags ............................................................................................................................................. 302
Edit Tags Dialog Box .................................................................................................................... 302
Delete Tags ......................................................................................................................................... 306
Delete Tag Dialog Box.................................................................................................................. 306
Find Tags ............................................................................................................................................ 306
Find Tags Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 307
View Find Tags Results ...................................................................................................................... 309
View Next Tag ..................................................................................................................................... 309
View Previous Tag .............................................................................................................................. 310
Go to Tag ............................................................................................................................................ 310
Go to Tag Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 311
Activate Tag Display ........................................................................................................................... 311
Display Only Active Tag ...................................................................................................................... 312
Display All Tags .................................................................................................................................. 312
Turn Off Tag Display ........................................................................................................................... 312
Display Tag Action Comments ............................................................................................................ 313
Import Tags ......................................................................................................................................... 313
Import Tags with Attributes and Symbology ....................................................................................... 314
Export Tags ......................................................................................................................................... 315
Contents
Placing Data Annotations ....................................................................................................................... 317
Create a Data Annotation ................................................................................................................... 317
Edit a Data Annotation ........................................................................................................................ 318
Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 318
Edit a Data Annotation Position .......................................................................................................... 321
Display Data Annotations .................................................................................................................... 321
Delete One Data Annotation ............................................................................................................... 322
Delete All Data Annotations ................................................................................................................ 322
Placing Volume Annotations .................................................................................................................. 323
Display Volume Annotations ............................................................................................................... 325
Place a Volume Annotation ................................................................................................................. 325
Create a New Volume Annotation Category ....................................................................................... 327
Find a Volume Annotation ................................................................................................................... 327
Inactivate a Volume Annotation Category .......................................................................................... 327
Edit Volume Annotations ..................................................................................................................... 328
Edit Volume Annotations Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 328
Adjust a Volume Annotation ................................................................................................................ 333
Delete a Single Volume Annotation .................................................................................................... 336
Delete All Volume Annotations ........................................................................................................... 337
Import Volume Annotations................................................................................................................. 337
Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 338
Export Volume Annotations ................................................................................................................ 338
Export Volume Annotations Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 339
Working with Clipping Volumes ............................................................................................................ 339
Activate/Deactivate Clipping Volume .................................................................................................. 340
Use Clipping Volume (3D Wireframe Box) ......................................................................................... 342
Set a Clipping Volume .................................................................................................................. 345
Turn Off Volume Clipping ............................................................................................................. 346
Use Classic Clipping Volume .............................................................................................................. 347
Attaching External Data .......................................................................................................................... 349
Open an External Database ................................................................................................................ 352
Edit Attachments ................................................................................................................................. 352
Edit Attachments Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 354
Edit Filename / Argument Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 355
Edit Types ........................................................................................................................................... 356
Edit Types Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 358
Working with Materials ........................................................................................................................... 361
Assign Materials .................................................................................................................................. 362
Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box..................................................................................... 363
Unassign Materials ............................................................................................................................. 365
Unassign Materials Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 366
Edit Materials ...................................................................................................................................... 367
Edit Materials Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 368
Adjust Pattern Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 371
Adjust Bump Map Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 372
Create Materials .................................................................................................................................. 373
10
Contents
Create Materials Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 374
Define Search Path for Material Files ................................................................................................. 375
Edit a Search Path .............................................................................................................................. 375
Search Path Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 376
Making Animations .................................................................................................................................. 377
Save and Recall Views Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 378
Copy Selected View Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 380
Create Group Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 382
Modify Frame Numbers Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 382
Move Selected Views Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 383
Rename Group Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 384
Set Up Partial View Recall Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 384
Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 385
Description Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) ................................................................... 385
Display Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) ......................................................................... 386
Outline Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) ......................................................................... 387
View Cone Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) ................................................................... 387
Lighting Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) ........................................................................ 389
Advanced Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) ..................................................................... 390
Save and Recall Views ....................................................................................................................... 391
Save the Current View.................................................................................................................. 392
Recall a Saved View..................................................................................................................... 393
Recall a Partial View..................................................................................................................... 393
Set Up Partial View Recall ........................................................................................................... 395
Copy a Saved View ...................................................................................................................... 396
Edit a Saved View ........................................................................................................................ 396
Move a Saved View ...................................................................................................................... 397
Create a View Group .................................................................................................................... 397
Rename a View Group ................................................................................................................. 397
Delete a View Group .................................................................................................................... 398
Modify Frame Numbers ................................................................................................................ 398
Import Saved Views ............................................................................................................................ 398
Import Saved Views Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 400
Export Saved Views ............................................................................................................................ 401
Export Saved Views Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 402
Take a Snapshot ................................................................................................................................. 403
Snapshot View Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 404
Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch ................................................................................................ 406
Calculate a High Resolution Snapshot ......................................................................................... 406
Set Key Frame Motion ........................................................................................................................ 407
Display Key Frame ....................................................................................................................... 409
Play Key Frame Motion ................................................................................................................ 410
Pause Key Frame Motion ............................................................................................................. 410
Stop Key Frame Motion ................................................................................................................ 411
Snapshot Key Frame .................................................................................................................... 411
Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall .................................................................................................. 413
Using SmartPlant Review in Streaming Mode ...................................................................................... 417
View Multiple VUE Files in a Single Session ...................................................................................... 423
Display Streaming Data in the Properties Window ............................................................................. 424
11
Contents
Working in an Integrated Environment ................................................................................................. 427
Configuring SmartPlant Review for Integration ................................................................................... 428
Using SmartPlant Review in an Integrated Environment .................................................................... 428
Exporting Data in PDF Format ............................................................................................................... 431
Install the 3D PDF Utility ..................................................................................................................... 432
Export to PDF ...................................................................................................................................... 433
View Generated PDF File ................................................................................................................... 433
Printing ..................................................................................................................................................... 435
Change Page Setup ............................................................................................................................ 435
Page Setup Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 436
Generate Print Preview ....................................................................................................................... 437
Print Preview Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 438
Print Views .......................................................................................................................................... 439
Print Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................ 440
Using Accessories .................................................................................................................................. 443
Load Accessories ................................................................................................................................ 444
Modify the Accessories Menu ............................................................................................................. 444
Start Programs Automatically ............................................................................................................. 446
View Point Cloud Data ........................................................................................................................ 446
Edit Images ......................................................................................................................................... 447
Manipulate Text Annotations .............................................................................................................. 447
Place Annotation Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 449
Place One Text Annotation .......................................................................................................... 450
Place Many Text Annotations ....................................................................................................... 450
Move One Text Annotation ........................................................................................................... 451
Move Many Text Annotations ....................................................................................................... 451
Edit One Text Annotation ............................................................................................................. 452
Edit Many Text Annotations ......................................................................................................... 452
Delete One Text Annotation ......................................................................................................... 452
Delete Many Text Annotations ..................................................................................................... 453
Delete All Text Annotations .......................................................................................................... 453
Display Text Annotations .............................................................................................................. 453
Turn Off Text Annotation Display ................................................................................................. 454
Create Display Set Movement ............................................................................................................ 454
Enable Collision Detection Using the Move Display Set API ....................................................... 454
Move Display Sets ........................................................................................................................ 455
Move and Rotate Display Sets ..................................................................................................... 455
Set Window Size ................................................................................................................................. 457
Set Window Size Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 458
Rendering Photo-Realistic Images ........................................................................................................ 459
Configure Photo-Realism Settings ...................................................................................................... 461
Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 462
Set Global Lighting .............................................................................................................................. 470
Global Lighting Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 471
Place a New Point Light ...................................................................................................................... 478
Place a New Distant Light ................................................................................................................... 479
12
Contents
Place a New Spot Light ....................................................................................................................... 480
New Light Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 480
Edit Source Light ................................................................................................................................. 486
Edit Source Lights Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 487
Lighten Shadows................................................................................................................................. 488
Delete a Source Light ......................................................................................................................... 488
Delete Source Lights Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 489
Raytrace a View .................................................................................................................................. 489
Set a Raytrace Range ......................................................................................................................... 490
Edit Raytracing Options ...................................................................................................................... 490
Using Collision Detection ....................................................................................................................... 491
Collision Detection Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 492
Type Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) ......................................................................... 493
Selection Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) ............................................................................ 495
Geometry Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) .................................................................. 496
Color Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) .................................................................................. 497
Sound Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) ................................................................................ 498
Run Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) .................................................................................... 499
Select Filters for Collision Types ......................................................................................................... 500
Select Graphic Element Types ........................................................................................................... 501
Select Objects and Range .................................................................................................................. 501
Select Collision Display Colors ........................................................................................................... 502
Select Collision Sounds ...................................................................................................................... 502
Run Collision Detection ....................................................................................................................... 503
Run Collision Detection Against Point Cloud Data ............................................................................. 504
View Collision Reports ........................................................................................................................ 505
Report Collision Detection Results Dialog Box ............................................................................ 506
Collaborating with Others....................................................................................................................... 507
Use NetMeeting .................................................................................................................................. 509
Start a Collaboration Session ............................................................................................................. 509
Rejoin a Collaboration Session ........................................................................................................... 510
Edit a Collaboration Session ............................................................................................................... 511
Collaboration Settings Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 511
Using ScheduleReview ........................................................................................................................... 515
Create a New ScheduleReview Project .............................................................................................. 515
New ScheduleReview Project Dialog Box .................................................................................... 518
Set the Active Project .......................................................................................................................... 518
Select ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box ............................................................................... 518
Refresh Active Project ........................................................................................................................ 518
Use Project Manager to Add a ScheduleReview Project to a Model .................................................. 519
Edit a ScheduleReview Project in Project Manager ........................................................................... 519
Define ScheduleReview Settings ........................................................................................................ 520
ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 520
Set ScheduleReview Project Settings .......................................................................................... 527
Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings ..................................................................................... 527
Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings ...................................................................................... 528
Set Review Control Settings ......................................................................................................... 528
Set Task Symbology ........................................................................................................................... 529
13
Contents
Task Symbology Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 529
Create a New ScheduleReview Query ............................................................................................... 530
New ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 531
Edit a ScheduleReview Query ............................................................................................................ 532
Edit/New ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box .............................................................................. 533
Import ScheduleReview Projects ........................................................................................................ 534
Export ScheduleReview Projects ........................................................................................................ 535
Auto-Association Tasks ...................................................................................................................... 535
Auto-Association Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 536
Add a ScheduleReview Association ................................................................................................... 537
Add Association Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 537
Remove a ScheduleReview Association ............................................................................................ 537
Delete a Project................................................................................................................................... 538
Delete ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box ............................................................................... 538
Use Review Controls .......................................................................................................................... 538
Play a ScheduleReview Project ................................................................................................... 539
View a ScheduleReview Project at a Specific Percent Complete ................................................ 539
Pause a ScheduleReview Session ............................................................................................... 539
Stop a ScheduleReview Session ................................................................................................. 540
Step Forward Through a ScheduleReview Session ..................................................................... 540
Step Back Through a ScheduleReview Session .......................................................................... 540
Restart a ScheduleReview Session ............................................................................................. 540
Go to the End of a ScheduleReview Session .............................................................................. 541
Go to a Specific Date in a ScheduleReview Session ................................................................... 541
Record a ScheduleReview Session ............................................................................................. 541
SmartPlant Review Utilities .................................................................................................................... 543
Using the Select Modules Utility ......................................................................................................... 543
Select Licenses for Modules ........................................................................................................ 544
Select Modules Utility Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 545
Using the SmartPlant License Checkout Utility .................................................................................. 546
Install SmartPlant License Checkout Utility .................................................................................. 546
Check Out a License for SmartPlant Review ............................................................................... 548
License Checkout Utility Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 549
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................... 551
Performance Tips ................................................................................................................................ 551
Troubleshooting: General Viewing Issues .......................................................................................... 556
Troubleshooting: Animation and Lighting ........................................................................................... 558
Troubleshooting: Annotations ............................................................................................................. 560
Troubleshooting: Motion ..................................................................................................................... 560
Troubleshooting: Primavera Version Changes ................................................................................... 561
Troubleshooting: Printing Limitations .................................................................................................. 562
Troubleshooting: Tips for Streaming Data .......................................................................................... 562
Troubleshooting: Viewing SmartPlant 3D Data .................................................................................. 564
Set Number of Processors for Rendering ........................................................................................... 565
Troubleshoot 3D Navigation ............................................................................................................... 565
Checking Hardware Acceleration Settings - Microsoft Vista/Windows 7
Instructions ................................................................................................................................... 568
Checking Hardware Acceleration Settings - Microsoft Windows XP Instructions ........................ 571
14
Contents
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 575
Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 583
15
Preface
This document is the user's guide for SmartPlant Review. The content is the same as the online
Help delivered inside the product.
This user's guide explains various procedures and commands needed to review a complex
model and is intended for users who are experienced with computer fundamentals. Knowledge
of 3D design systems is helpful, but not necessary.
Intergraph gives you permission to print as many copies of this document that you need for
non-commercial use at your company. You cannot print this document for resale or redistribution
outside your company.
SmartPlant Review, SmartPlant Review Publisher and other add-on utilities support both
SmartPlant 3D and SmartMarine 3D project files. For simplicity in the documentation, the
references to SmartPlant 3D imply both SmartPlant 3D and SmartMarine support.
We welcome comments or suggestions about this documentation. You can send us an email at:
PPMdoc@intergraph.com.
17
Preface
18
What's New in SmartPlant Review?

Version 2010
The SmartPlant 3D Label Selector utility has been updated to display a tree view of mapped
and unmapped label names. The mapped label names are organized in a Relationship >
Component > Label name hierarchy. A Find feature has also been added so that you can
search the tree view for specific label names. See Viewing SmartPlant 3D Model Data (on
page 159).
You can enable the display of general notes from Smart 3D project files in SmartPlant
Review. See View General Notes from SmartPlant 3D (on page 171).
The rendering of any transparent insulation aspect geometry is simplified in shaded model
views by removing its end caps and back faces.
SmartPlant Review is now supported on the following operating systems:
Microsoft 64-bit Windows Standard/Enterprise Server 2008 (R2)
Microsoft 32-bit Windows 7 Professional and Enterprise Client
Microsoft 64-bit Windows 7 Professional and Enterprise Client
The Partial Recall and Key Frame Animation functionality is now provided in the base
product. (P3 PB: 117177)
A toggle has been added that turns on or off the display of the material application assigned
to the selected display set or the selected display set folder node in the Project Manager.
See Display Materials (on page 268). (P3 PB: 117196)
Material assignments to multiple display sets can be done in a single step. See Assign
Material to Display Sets (on page 266). (P3 PB: 114658)
A gaming-style navigation method has been implemented to make it easier for users to
move through the 3D model. When you open a 3D model, you can use mouse and/or
keyboard actions that simulate walking through the model. A 3D Navigator tool is also
provided as another navigation alternative with controls that support the new move and look
motion. For users already comfortable with navigation in previous versions of SmartPlant
Review (version 2008 and earlier), the classic navigation controls are still available. The
SmartPlant Review interface actually offers the best of both worlds by enabling you to use
the classic and the 3D gaming-style navigation methods. See Using 3D Navigation (on page
93). (P1 PB:104583)
The new, game-style keyboard controls are supported in plan and elevations views as well
as the main view. See 3D Navigation Controls (on page 93).
SmartPlant Review no longer uses screen door transparency (shades surfaces by omitting
pixels). It now uses a blended transparency that combines the background pixels with the
transparent object pixels based on the transmittance material value of the transparent
object. See Edit Materials Dialog Box (on page 368).
SmartPlant Review has been implemented with Intergraph's latest performance
enhancement software. Because of the enhancements, many dialog box options that were
originally added to improve speed and overall performance, are no longer needed.
SmartPlant Review now automatically makes these settings for you. The list below shows all
options that have been removed for the current release.
View Settings/Add Current View/Edit View dialog boxes > Display tab
Backfaces
End caps
19

Quality options: Full Shading, No Specular, Coarse Facets, and Flat Shading
View Settings dialog box > Range Reject tab
Main view X/Y
Plan view X/Y
Elevation view X/Y
View Settings/Add Current View/Edit View dialog boxes > Advanced tab
Redraw on refresh
Buffered updates
Far to near clip ratio
NetMeeting
View menu > Toolbars
Key-in Toolbar
View menu > Advanced
Redraw on Refresh
Buffer Updates
Far to Near Clip Ratio
NetMeeting
Stationary Light Positions
Motion Settings dialog box > Display tab
Quality options: Full Shading, No Specular, Coarse Facets, and Flat Shading
Also, in conjunction with Intergraph's continuing effort to improve product usability, many
dialog boxes have been modified to provide a better appearance and/or workflow.
The Allow fly-to behaviors option has been added to the Display tab in the Motion
Settings dialog box. This option enables or disables the 3D Navigation fly-to mode when the
application is transitioning from one view to another. For more information, see Display Tab
(Motion Settings Dialog Box) (on page 109).
If the Allow fly-to behaviors option is selected as a motion setting, the features listed
below are supported.
For the Find Object command, you can double-click the Previous or Next buttons to
immediately jump to the located object instead of going through fly mode. See Find
Objects in the Model (on page 193).
When using the Tags > Next command, you can press F10 a second time to
immediately jump to the next tag instead of going through fly mode. When using the
Tags > Previous command, you can press Ctrl+F10 a second time to immediately
jump to the previous tag instead of going through fly mode. See View Next Tag (on
page 309).
When using the View > Save and Recall command, you can double-click the mouse as
you are moving to the view in fly mode to immediately jump to that selected view. See
Save and Recall Views (on page 391).
The main view now displays a multi-colored 3D orientation axis to help identify the
orientation of the equipment in the view. See Activate Command (on page 34). (P2 PB:
110363)
SmartPlant Review contains new color pallets that provide industry-standard color codes in
RAL format. Select Tools menu > Materials > Assign/Edit Materials to see the new
pallets. See Assign Materials (on page 362).
20
SmartPlant Review provides both the classic clipping volume functionality and an interactive
3D clipping volume wireframe, which can be manipulated by simply using your mouse to
adjust the size of the clipping volume (see Working with Clipping Volumes (on page 339)).
The Clip Volume command displays a wireframe box in the model that lets you select which
clipping plane face(s) are being adjusted. See Use Clipping Volume (3D Wireframe Box) (on
page 342). (P3 PB: 113969)
The icon for the Activate Clipping Volume toolbar button has been changed to
. Also,
this command has been moved from the Tools menu to the View menu. See
Activate/Deactivate Clipping Volume (on page 340).
An Auto adjust option has been added to the Rates tab in the Motion Settings dialog box.
This option turns on or off an automatic adjustment of the motion rate. When this option is
checked, the view automatically adjusts the forward/backward motion rate based on the
current view depth between the eye point and objects in the center of the view. The Move
field is changed to read-only when you check Auto adjust. If this option is unchecked,
SmartPlant Review uses the rate you define in the Move field. See Rates Tab (Motion
Settings Dialog Box) (on page 108).
A Dynamic option has been added to the Range Reject tab in the Motion Settings dialog
box. When this option is selected, objects that display or are drawn during motion are
determined by how fast you move the mouse as well as the defined pixel sizes. This option
is beneficial when you are viewing large models. You can also select the Dynamic option
along with the Activate range rejection option for a faster and slightly more consistent object
display. See Range Reject Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) (on page 113).
SmartPlant Review now supports the PNG graphics file format. The PCX and TGA formats
are no longer supported. See Take a Snapshot (on page 403) and Environment Tab
(Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box) (on page 462).
Axis settings are now supported in high-resolution printing.
Support for Orthographic and Perspective Mode transitions:
When changing from perspective to orthographic mode, and the Allow fly-to behaviors
option is set (see Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) (on page 109)), SmartPlant
Review performs a fly-to transition to orthographic mode. The view cones in the Plan
and Elevation views update during the transition.
When changing from orthographic to perspective mode, and the Allow fly-to behaviors
option is set, SmartPlant Review performs a fly-to transition to the previously-saved
perspective angle. If you do not have a perspective angle defined, SmartPlant Review
switches back to the default 56 degree angle. The view cones in the Plan and Elevation
views update during the transition.
The Insert and Delete key movements are always available. See Rates Tab (Motion
Settings Dialog Box) (on page 108).
The Microstation DGN file line style and weight options are now fully supported by
SmartPlant Review and SmartPlant Review Publisher. (PB: 111938 P3)
The Home feature enables you to return either to the default top-right isometric view of the
model, or to your own custom view. See Setting the Home View (on page 91).
The view cone in the plan and elevation views reflects any resizing operations in the main
view. See Working with Views (on page 197).
A Performance slider is now available to provide settings that can make SmartPlant Review
run faster or look better. There are five preset options that enable you to select the right
balance of performance and image quality. See Performance Control (on page 77).
When navigating through the model and stopping at various locations, you can use the
Undo command to return to a previous location. You can perform up to 10 undo operations.
21
22
SmartPlant Review can now export the graphics and attribute data in the main view to a
PDF file. See Exporting Data in PDF Format (on page 431). (PB: 110856 P3)
SECTION 1
Welcome to SmartPlant Review

Intergraph SmartPlant Review is the complete Microsoft Windows visualization
environment for interactively reviewing large, complex 3D models for in-depth analysis of
process/power plants and marine structures. Providing a robust set of review-oriented tools for
the clear and concise communication of spatial design well beyond low-end viewer capabilities,
SmartPlant Review provides tools for visual analysis and simulation (dynamic walk-through),
tagging, and model queries, as well as an API for complete customization. Advanced features
include construction simulation, stereo viewing, and sophisticated image generation using
textures, reflection maps, and lighting. The familiar, easy-to-use Microsoft Windows interface
allows you to navigate through the three dimensional models with a joystick, mouse, or
keyboard control.
SmartPlant Review displays and manipulates three dimensional models without translation and
is specifically designed to meet the process and power industry's requirements to dynamically
visualize computer-generated three dimensional plant models. With SmartPlant Review
walk-through and interrogation features, process plant models can now remain live throughout
the life cycle of the facility from conceptual design studies to de-commissioning.
23
Welcome to SmartPlant Review
24
SECTION 2
Using SmartPlant Review Modules

The following add-in modules further enhance the functionality found in SmartPlant Review.
API Module (on page 25)
Collaboration Module (on page 26)
Construction Module (on page 27)
On-Site Drawing Generation Module (on page 28)
Photo-Realism Module (on page 29)
Point Cloud Integrator Module (on page 29)
Simulation and Visual Effects Module (on page 30)
To see which modules are currently licensed on your computer, click the Modules list on
the Help > About SmartPlant Review dialog box.
API Module
The Application Programming Interface (API) module includes programming libraries that allow
developers to create custom programs that run with SmartPlant Review. The API module is not
a requirement to run the custom programs, only to create custom programs for SmartPlant
Review.
Key Features:
API Library - Provides two libraries, the original DRAPI C library function interface and a
newer ActiveX control interface, DRAPIX, that can be linked into your application programs
to control SmartPlant Review functions. These functions give your applications direct control
over the working of SmartPlant Review instead of just sending commands that a user would
enter. This gives your application more control and flexibility. Your Visual C or Visual C++
programs may use either interface. Your Visual Basic programs may also be linked in a
similar fashion using the ActiveX control interface.
Save VUE file - Creates a VUE file while inside SmartPlant Review. This does not include
the ability to create VUE files in a batch mode.
Snapshot - Creates an image file of the Main view, application window, or entire screen.
Snapshot can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. This
module includes support for standard output types like BMP and JPG.
See Also
Save As VUE File (on page 149)
Take a Snapshot (on page 403)
Snapshot View Dialog Box (on page 404)
25
Collaboration Module
The SmartPlant Review Collaboration module allows multiple users in different locations to view
and interrogate the model simultaneously. The Collaboration module allows enterprise-wide
coordination of design reviews for more effective communication and improved efficiency. This
feature reduces travel time and expenses.
This module serves to enhance both SmartPlant Review and NetMeeting as an add-on service
to both products. The collaboration module extends the use of NetMeeting by reducing network
traffic and improving performance during the session.
Key features:
Collaboration - Lets all team members join efforts by working together in a single design
review session. You can analyze the three-dimensional model and data as the driver or
become a passenger by passing control to someone at another location. Everyone sees the
latest version of the model and everyone sees the same thing. See Start a Collaboration
Session (on page 509).
Collaboration is supported between the same versions of Smart Plant Review. For
example, collaboration with SmartPlant Review version 6.2 will not work with collaboration in
SmartPlant Review version 7.0.
Snapshot can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution.
Snapshot includes support for standard output types like BMP and JPG. See Take a
Snapshot (on page 403).
Benefits of Collaboration module:
Reduces administration and training costs as an add-on feature to NetMeeting. The

NetMeeting toolkit allows customization of NetMeeting to accommodate SmartPlant Review
and the extensive data requirements of the process industry. The basic capabilities of
NetMeeting include security, network neighborhood, white boarding, chat, cursor tracking,
and passenger and driver controls. Customization provides improved performance and
reduced network traffic.
Improves performance with no waiting for a large set of pixels to distribute through the
network each time that the view changes. The software updates the view immediately when
a small set of instructions reach the passenger computer. Processing occurs at each
passenger computer so performance depends on each computer - not the network. This
feature allows the Collaboration module to support dynamic navigation with the mouse or
joystick at all passenger computers. All participants see the entire collection of data with no
waiting.
Reduces network traffic. This improvement occurs because only small sets of instructions
transmit to each passenger computer. The result is excellent response times and allows
collaboration even to remote locations that have less than ideal network connections.
See Also
Use NetMeeting (on page 509)
26
Construction Module
The Construction module extends the capabilities of SmartPlant Review with integrated project
scheduling and collision detection functionality. For project scheduling, ScheduleReview turns
data from your project planning software into a visual display of the construction or demolition
progress. Use ScheduleReview together with the collision detection functionality to plan safe
and timely equipment installation. Review collisions as equipment moves dynamically through
the plant. Hear sounds and see objects highlight as collisions occur.
Key features:
ScheduleReview - Helps analyze and visualize the process by showing objects in the
context of the overall project schedule. You can display the project as it should appear on a
specified day, or fly through the model while displaying the construction sequence. This
component also allows you to visualize the construction or demolition cycle in a single step by day, week, or month - or continuously. ScheduleReview supports the following popular
planning programs: Microsoft Project, Microsoft Project Professional, Primavera Project
Planner, and Primavera Engineering & Construction. See Using ScheduleReview (on page
515).
Before using the SmartPlant Review ScheduleReview Project Planner P4 Plug-In,
you must first install the Primavera SDK on your client machine and configure an SQL
Server Connection to the ODBC Name PrimaveraSDK or Primavera SDK. For more
information, see the Primavera Administrator's Guide for your version. Only a single user at
a time can access this Primavera SDK database. To access the SDK, you must be added
as a user with Administrator access rights, or be assigned the global privilege, View All
Global/Project Data via SDK.
Collision Detection - Includes static and dynamic collision detection. Colliding objects can
be highlighted in a user-definable color. Users can play a sound file each time objects
collide. Collisions can be recorded as an object (or group) is driven through the model with
precision controls or moved freely with a mouse or joystick. Collision information is written to
a log file for review. Collision detection does not take into account non-model tolerances,
such as construction tolerances, or soft boundaries, such as pipe insulation. Collision
detection runs only in an interactive mode. Batch processes are not available. For these
reasons, collision detection does not replace the PDS clash reporting detection capabilities.
See Using Collision Detection (on page 491).
Snapshot includes support for standard output types like .BMP and .JPG. See Take a
Snapshot (on page 403).
Volume Annotations - Provides a very powerful planning and tracking tool. You can use
volume annotations to represent many types of objects and areas in the model, including
scaffolds, field welds, work areas, security areas, construction parking lots, and lay down
yards. Volume annotations allow you to place three basic types of geometry that SmartPlant
Review saves only in the project database. You can place boxes, cylinders, and spheres.
SmartPlant Review also provides several specialty types of volume annotations, including
scaffolds (boxes), welds (cylinders), and clipping volumes (boxes). See Placing Volume
Annotations (on page 323).
27
On-Site Drawing Generation Module

The SmartPlant Review On-Site Drawing Generation module is a powerful, versatile product that
allows you to bring design and drawing capabilities from the office to your project site. This
module features fast, intelligent outline display capability - your drawing maintains intelligence
even when displayed in hidden-line mode. The module also improves communication, because
you control the way the drawing will appear to others. Additionally, by reducing the time required
to process and display outline removal from hours to a fraction of a second, the On-Site Drawing
Generation module saves time and money.
This module includes a wizard that places the outline view on a drawing border inside the
SmartSketch product. You can use the wizard to easily and quickly produce drawings for the
engineering design office or the construction site. In SmartSketch, you can update the drawing
in several ways:
Add notes to drawing borders
Insert overlay comments
Quickly print a drawing at a scale that you define
Add symbols
You can combine the On-Site Drawing Generation module with the Simulation and Visual
Effects module to create outline animations to improve the quality of your presentations.
Key features:
Outline Mode - Provides capabilities of a display model to navigate the model by using the
joystick, mouse, or keypad.
Labels - Assigns identifying phrases to objects in the outline view with tags, text annotation,
and measurements.
Drawing Package - Includes a full copy of SmartSketch with each module for adding notes,
comments, symbols, and drawing borders.
Snapshot includes support for standard output types like .BMP and .JPG.
Benefits of the On-Site Drawing Generation module:
Saves time by eliminating the wait for the outline display to finish
Improves communication by presenting your designs in a clear and understandable way as
you control the display of the objects in the view and their display method on the drawing
Easy to use because casual users can navigate the three-dimensional model and quickly
produce an outline drawing that is ready for printing
See Also
Manipulate Text Annotations (on page 447)
28
Photo-Realism Module
The SmartPlant Review Photo-Realism module provides features for creating realistic,
photo-quality images from a 3D model. A realistic image, rendered using textures, patterns,
bump maps, background images, environment boxes, and raytraced lighting, helps you to
visualize designs during each stage of the development process and to create powerful
presentations that communicate and sell your ideas to clients and managers.
Key features:
Display Textures - Creates a more realistic display by assigning textures to a materials and
then applying them to objects.
Material Editor - Provides complete material editor functionality for creating new material
definitions and palettes.
Lighting - Supports global (ambient, flashbulb, solar, and fog), spot, distance, and point
lights.
Raytracing - Creates more realistic 3D effects by adding reflections and shadows to
images.
High resolution - Captures the image at high resolution to produce near photo-quality plots
of the model.
Snapshot includes support for standard output types like BMP and JPG.
Stereo Viewing - Adds dramatic depth perception to models.
Patterns Plus CD - Includes several pre-defined material definitions.
See Also
Performance Tips (on page 551)
Rendering Photo-Realistic Images (on page 459)
Assign Materials (on page 362)
View in Stereo (on page 224)
Point Cloud Integrator Module

The SmartPlant Review Point Cloud Integrator module offers vendor-neutral point cloud data
integration with the modeling software environment. This module provides an interface to
products like those offered by Leica Geosystems HDS and BitWyse Solutions, allowing you to
manage existing-condition data by enabling the display of lasergrammetry point cloud data
within SmartPlant Review.
Key features:
Displays point cloud data when external software product is installed in conjunction with the
Point Cloud Integrator module.
Supports normal SmartPlant Review navigation features, including walk-through.
Provides surface measurement between the point cloud vector points and any graphic
object.
Detects collisions between point cloud elements and a graphic element.
Point clouds rendered in true color or laser intensity return color mapping.
29

Benefits:
Integration of point cloud data within SmartPlant Review helps lower the time, effort, and
cost of process retrofit engineering and construction projects.
Extends the use of 3D CAD to more projects.
Helps in the planning of existing site remodeling by coupling existing configuration data
provided by point cloud scans with 3D model displays.
See Also
View Point Cloud Data (on page 446)
Measurements Command (on page 36)
Run Collision Detection Against Point Cloud Data (on page 504)
Simulation and Visual Effects Module

SmartPlant Review's Simulation and Visual Effects module brings life to your three dimensional
model by simulating the placement or removal of equipment, reviewing physical clearances,
performing motion studies, and developing complex motion scenarios. This module works with
the Construction module to visually simulate the construction process where you can review the
simulation on- screen or create animations for output to video.
Key features:
Animation - Create animation paths - one or many - through your models by defining key
frames. Start with an aerial view of your facility, for example, and then dive into it, moving along
the animation path for an impressive flythrough. Save your animation at the resolution and size
that you need, and apply anti-aliasing to produce sharp, clear images. Import animation frames
into the non-linear digital video editor product VizFx Web Pro, provided with this module.
VizFx Web Pro - Create dynamic and original graphics, animation, and video with a
non-linear digital video editing product that includes a collection of high-end special effects.
Output file types include AVI, BMP, GIF, JPG, PICT, and TIFF.
Snapshot - Used for creating an image file of the Main view, application window, or entire
screen. Can be used to create a high quality anti-aliased image of any resolution. Includes
support for standard output types like .BMP and .JPG.
Snapshot Animation - Used to create high quality animation sequences. Snapshot is
compatible with the Construction module for SmartPlant Review to record the simulation of
the construction process. Snapshot can be used to create high quality anti-aliased images of
any resolution. The module includes support for standard output types like BMP and JPG.
You can use ViZfx Web Pro to apply sophisticated special effects to your animations,
special web projects, or video. You can download ViZfx Web Pro with your SmartPlant Review
serial number from the SmartPlant Review Download site
(http://www.intergraph.com/products/ppm/smartplant/review/download_ViZfx_Web_pro.asp).
See Also
Construction Module (on page 27)
Set Key Frame Motion (on page 407)
Display Key Frame (on page 409)
30
SECTION 3
Introducing the SmartPlant Review

Interface
This section describes the work environment and the commonly-used interface elements you
will encounter while you are using SmartPlant Review.
Commonly-Used Commands
Before you get started, take a few minutes to review commands you will use the most in
SmartPlant Review.
Close Command
File > Close
Allows you to close the current project without exiting SmartPlant Review.
Save Command
File > Save
Allows you to record information that you have updated in the model. The software posts the
changed material to the database. The Save command reads all the project information in the
current session and writes it to the .MDB file.
The software does not save text annotations when you exit SmartPlant Review unless
you turn on the Persist option when you place the annotation. If you need a record of the text
annotations that were not placed with the Persist option turned on, you can take a snapshot of
that area of the model.
Undo Command
Edit > Undo
Reverses up to the last 10 view manipulations that you completed. You can also use the Undo
command during navigation. As you stop at various locations during navigation, you can use the
Undo command to return to a previous location. This can be done when you are using classic
and 3D navigation commands Once you select the tenth undo operation in a work session, the
Undo command is disabled until you move again and the undo operation count restarts.
You can also access the Undo command by pressing Ctrl + Z on your keyboard.
31
Introducing the SmartPlant Review Interface
Redo Command
Edit > Redo
Re-applies the previously undone view manipulation.
You can also access the Redo command by pressing Ctrl + Y on your keyboard.
Cut Command
Edit > Cut
Not available in this release.
Use Ctrl + X only to remove text from fields in dialog boxes.
Copy Command
Edit > Copy
Copies the contents of the active view to the Clipboard.
You can also access the Copy command by selecting the text, right-clicking in a text
field, and then clicking Copy from the shortcut menu or by pressing Ctrl + C.
Paste Command
Edit > Paste
Not available in this release.
You can only use Ctrl + V to paste text into a dialog box text field.
Next Object Command

Edit > Next Object
When a search is performed using the Edit > Find Object command, the results of the last
query are automatically saved. Once the Find Object dialog box is closed, you can still scroll
through the objects located in the last search using the Next Object command as well as the
Previous Object command in the Edit menu.
Previous Object Command

Edit > Previous Object
When a search is performed using the Edit > Find Object command, the results of the last
query are automatically saved. Once the Find Object dialog box is closed, you can still scroll
through the objects located in the last search using the Previous Object command and also the
Next Object command in the Edit menu.
32
Menu Bar Command

View > Menu Bar
Displays or hides the Menu Bar. You can hide the menu bar to provide more space to view the
model.
Press ALT V + ALT E to re-display the menu bar when it is hidden.
Status Bar Command

View > Status Bar
Displays the Status Bar, which provides text that describes the current state of the data that you
are viewing in the window and any other contextual information.
Refresh Data Command

Tools > Refresh Data
Updates views with changed data. The software refreshes information such as measurements,
tags, and display sets. The status bar, located at the bottom of the window, provides brief
messages that state the actions of the software during the refresh operation.
If you delete a display set that had a material assignment, you may need to use the
Refresh Data command to restore the display to the proper colors.
Format Readouts Command

Tools > Format Readouts
Displays the Format Readouts dialog box which allows you to specify the way that units are
displayed.
Format Readouts Dialog Box
Recently Used Files Command

File > Recently Used Files
Provides a list of files that you recently opened during editing sessions. The files appear at the
bottom of the File menu just above the Exit command.
The list is a handy reference when you want to return to files that you have been reviewing or
editing. You can open any of the listed files by clicking the file name.
This list remains on the menu after you open a project. You can open another project without
exiting SmartPlant Review. When you select another project, the software closes the current
project and then opens the new project.
The complete path, including drive letter, appears for each listed file name.
33
Exit Command
File > Exit
Exits SmartPlant Review.
When you exit SmartPlant Review, the project's .MDB file is updated. This file, which has the
same name as your project, contains all the parameters that you have set up for the model,
such as the eye point, clipping planes, lighting, and perspective. SmartPlant Review displays a
dialog box detailing the exit process.
Display Commands
The Display commands available on the View > Display menu provide access to various
display settings that control how the model displays in the various view windows.
Annotations Command
View > Display > Annotations
Switches the display of text, volume, and data annotations on or off in the model.
See Also
Display Data Annotations (on page 321)
Activate Command
View > Display > Axis > Activate
Switches the display of the x-, y-, and z-axes on or off. When Axis is on, a small coordinate
displays (by default) in the lower left corner of the view. The coordinate triad shows which
direction is E (x axis), N (y axis), and El (z axis). The N arrow always points in the direction of
plant north in the model relative to the current view.
See Also
XYZ Label Command (on page 35)
34
XYZ Label Command

View > Display > Axis > XYZ Label
Changes the axis labels from N, E, El to X, Y, Z. The coordinate triad shows which direction is X
(east), Y (north), and Z (elevation). The Y arrow always points in the direction of plant north in
the model relative to the current view.
See Also
Activate Command (on page 34)
Dashed View Cone Command

View > Display > Dashed View Cone
Displays the view cone as a dashed line for faster wireframe updates. This option is especially
useful if you are displaying animations on a computer with a slow graphic card.
See Also
Set View Cone Perspective (on page 210)
Perspective Angle Toolbar (on page 58)
Perspective Command (on page 38)
Perspective Angle Command (on page 38)
Display Order Command

View > Advanced > Display Order
Defines the order in which the elements in the model display each time the Main view updates.
This is especially useful when you use the motion controls. If you are interested in particular
elements or if you are working in a specific area, you can define those elements to display first.
Only one display order list can exist at a time. Each time that you select this command, you
are prompted to either create a new list or add to the existing list.
This command is also available on the View > Toolbars > Tools toolbar.
See Also
Define Display Order (on page 207)
Dot Box Command

View > Display > Dot Box
Draws distant elements less precisely for improved update speed. At a distance, just a few
pixels (i.e., a dot box) are drawn, reducing the amount of data to update.
35
Shaded Command
View > Display > Shaded
Provides the highest rendering mode available. This command produces a more curved
appearance because various shades of the selected color are produced across the surface of
the elements. Therefore, the Shaded mode is the slowest to update.
You cannot shade an image in the Plan or Elevation views.
See Also
Maintain Render Settings (on page 208)
Views Toolbar (on page 64)
Common View Tools Toolbar (on page 53)
Large Plant Monument Command

View > Advanced > Large Plant Monument
Allows you to switch between large plant monument translated coordinates and MicroStation
coordinate readout without rebuilding the project database. To use this command, you must
have used large plant monument coordinates (checked the Use transform option) when you
created the project database.
Available only for translated models. If the command is used on a rotated large plant
monument model, rotated file coordinates are used when this flag is unchecked.
See Also
Open a Model File (on page 82)
Understanding Projects and Project Databases (on page 71)
Measurements Command
View > Display > Measurements
Specifies whether or not to display measurements in the view.
Only those measurement collections for which the Tools > Measure > Edit
Measurement Collections > Edit Tab > Display option is checked are displayed.
Object Textures Command

View > Display > Object Textures
Displays a textured shading view of the model.
Displaying textures while manipulating models may slow down the display.
To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.
See Also
Set Textures (on page 210)
Object Textures Command (on page 36)
36
Outline Toggle
View > Toolbars > Views > Outline
Toggles the display of the model between Wireframe with Outline and Shaded with Outline
display modes.
This toggle works in conjunction with the Shaded/Wireframe Toggle (on page 39) such that you
can cycle through all four display modes.
Toggle
Resulting Display
Full Shading
Wireframe
Wireframe with Outline
Shaded with Outline
37
Perspective Command
View > Display > Perspective
Specifies whether the model is rendered using the Perspective mode.
When unchecked, the option is set to orthographic mode. If you were in perspective mode
and the Allow fly-to behaviors option is set (see Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)
(on page 109)), SmartPlant Review performs a fly-to transition to orthographic mode. The
view cones in the Plan and Elevation views update during the transition.
When you select Perspective and the Allow fly-to behaviors option is set, SmartPlant
Review performs a fly-to transition to perspective mode. The perspective angle that was set
before your previous change to orthographic mode will be used. The view cones in the Plan
and Elevation views update during the transition.
See Also
View Cone Tab (View Settings Dialog Box) (on page 213)
Perspective Angle Command

View > Display > Perspective Angle
Displays the Set Perspective Angle dialog box, which allows you to specify the perspective
angle for rendering the view.
When you change the perspective angle, SmartPlant Review performs a fly-to transition
to that angle if the Allow fly-to behaviors option is set (see Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog
Box) (on page 109)). The view cones in the Plan and Elevation views update during the
transition.
See Also
Perspective Command (on page 38)
Advanced Tab (View Settings Dialog Box) (on page 216)
Shaded with Outline Command

View > Display > Shaded with Outline
38

Switches the display of the model to shaded outline to better show the edges of objects. This
command is available only if you install the On-Site Drawing Generation module.
The default outline color is white on dark backgrounds and black on light backgrounds. The
outline commands automatically switch between white and black based on the current
combined RGB color intensity of the background color. In other words, with a standard black
background, you get white lines. However, if you change to a white or light background, you
get black lines suitable for printing.
You can specify the thickness and color of the outline using the Outline tab on the View
Settings dialog box.
Shaded/Wireframe Toggle
View > Toolbars > Views > Shaded/Wireframe
Toggles the display of the model between wireframe and full shading display modes.
This toggle works in conjunction with the Outline Toggle (on page 37) such that you can cycle
through all four display modes.
Toggle
Resulting Display
Full Shading
Wireframe
39

Wireframe with Outline
Shaded with Outline
Show/Hide for Main View Command

View > Display > Options > Show/Hide for Main view
Switches the Project Manager-associated show/hide commands for levels and display sets as
applied to the Main view. You cannot turn off the show/hide effect in all the views at the same
time. Because of this, this command is available only if a view other than the Main view is set to
honor the show/hide commands.
See Also
Show/Hide for Plan View Command (on page 40)
Show/Hide for Elevation View Command (on page 40)
Show/Hide for Plan View Command

View > Display > Options > Show/Hide for Plan View
applied to the Plan view. You cannot turn off the show/hide effect in all the views at the same
time. Because of this, this command is available only if a view other than the Plan view is set to
honor the show/hide commands.
See Also
Show/Hide for Main View Command (on page 40)
Show/Hide for Elevation View Command

View > Display > Options > Show/Hide for Elevation View
applied to the elevation view. You cannot turn off the show/hide effect in all the views at the
same time. Because of this, this command is available only if a view other than the Elevation
view is set to honor the show/hide commands.
See Also
Stroking Tolerance Command

View > Display > Stroking Tolerance
Displays the Set Stroking Tolerance dialog box, which specifies the number of facets to render
on cylindrical objects.
Stroking Tolerance affects how the round surfaces of pipes, reducers, valves, and
elbows are rendered. The larger the tolerance, the better the display quality. However, large
tolerance values increase the view update time. The tolerance must be an integer between 4
and 100.
40

See Also
Set Stroking Tolerance (on page 209)
Stroking Tolerance Command (on page 40)
Surface Encircle Command

Motion > Positioning Modes > Surface Encircle
Locks the view cone eye point to a blue circular track that displays in the Plan and Elevation
views. The blue track is placed on the surface of the green sphere that also displays in the two
views. In the Surface Encircle mode, you can reposition the track in either view. The eye point
always remains in the center of the track as seen in the Plan view.
The eye point always looks toward the center point, the green cross, of the sphere. You can
define the current center point location using the Position Control toolbar, the View > Settings
> View Cone tab, or the View > Place > Center Point Only command. Changing the location of
the track changes the direction of the view cone. You can use the Encircle Radius toolbar to
change the radius of the green sphere.
You can rotate around either the center point or the eye point one step at a time in a
constant direction using the keypad to steer.
Click Motion > Move > Single Step. You can use the Motion Settings dialog box to
specify the step size.
You can also click Step on the Motion toolbar or press period (.) on the keypad to move a
single step as specified by the Move option on the Rates tab of the Motion Settings dialog
box.
You can use the Bearing and Elevation controls on the Position Control > View tab to
rotate around either the center point or the eye point. Rotating around the center point is the
default. To rotate around the eye point, press Ctrl while using these controls.
You can maintain your current encircle clipping plane settings when you switch from any of
the encircle positioning modes back to the lateral positioning mode by turning on the Motion
> Positioning Modes > Maintain Encircle Clipping command.
You can maintain your current lateral clipping plane settings when you switch from the
lateral positioning mode to any of the encircle positioning modes by turning off the Motion >
Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere command.
You also can use the Home key to cycle through the encircle modes without losing your
clipping plane settings. The End key cycles through the directional modes.
See Also
Set Surface Encircle (on page 137)
Control Movement with Directional Modes (on page 138)
Position Control Toolbar (on page 59)
Wireframe with Outline Command

View > Display > Wireframe with Outline
41

Switches the display of the model to outline wireframe. This command is available only if you
install the On-Site Drawing Generation module.
Wireframe with Outline mode remains active even when you recall a saved view. For example,
you have a view in Wireframe with Outline mode. When you recall the saved view manually or
by playing a key frame animation, the view remains in outline mode. You can recall all other
settings in the normal manner.
The default outline color is white on dark backgrounds and black on light backgrounds. The
outline commands automatically switch between white and black based on the current
combined RGB color intensity of the background color. In other words, with a standard black
background, you get white lines. However, if you change to a white or light background, you
get black lines suitable for printing.
You can specify the thickness and color of the outline using the Outline tab on the View
See Also
Wireframe with Outline Command (on page 41)
Wireframe Command
View > Display > Wireframe
Switches the display of the model to wireframe, which is the default rendering mode.
See Also
Wireframe Command (on page 42)
42
Wireframe Background Color Command

View > Display > Wireframe Background Color
Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to change the values of the wireframe
background color.
See Also
Set Background Color (on page 208)
Common Views Commands

SmartPlant Review provides predefined view orientations for moving around in the model in
either linear (about eye) or encircle (about center) mode.
These common view commands are available on the View > Common menu, the Common
View Tools Toolbar (on page 53), and the Common Views control.
Topics
Common Views Control ................................................................. 43
Looking Plan (Top) Command ....................................................... 45
Looking North (Front) Command ................................................... 45
Looking West (Right) Command.................................................... 45
Looking Up (Bottom) Command .................................................... 45
Looking South (Back) Command ................................................... 45
Looking East (Left) Command ....................................................... 45
Isometric (Top Front Right) Command .......................................... 45
Isometric (Top Front Left) Command ............................................ 46
Isometric (Top Back Right) Command .......................................... 46
Isometric (Top Back Left) Command ............................................. 46
Isometric (Bottom Front Right) Command ..................................... 46
Isometric (Bottom Front Left) Command ....................................... 46
Isometric (Bottom Back Right) Command ..................................... 46
Isometric (Bottom Back Left) Command ........................................ 46
Rotate with Model Fit Command ................................................... 47
Common Views Control

Displays the Common Views control, which provides a graphical display used to select the
angle from which you view the model. The control is a three-dimensional wireframe box that
consists of white circles on each corner and three white arrows that point to the faces. Each
corner circle, arrow, or face of the box highlights in yellow as you pause the pointer over it. You
can select one of the six faces of the 3D box to change your view to a 2D view, or you can
select one of the eight corner circles to change your view to an isometric view.
43
Use the Rotate with Model Fit

the common views.
44
button to update and fit the view when you switch between
You can dock the Common Views control at the edge of the window, or you can let it float
like a dialog box. The docking areas for this control are automatically restricted to help
reduce the possibility of the docking area obscuring the client area of the application
window. If you are unable to dock this control where you want it, try resizing the control to be
smaller or resizing the application window to be larger.
The views available on this control are also available on the View > Toolbars > Common
View Tools toolbar and from the View > Common menu.
If you are not in one of the encircle positioning modes and do not have the Fit View to
Model option on, the view will rotate away from what you are currently viewing.
If you are in one of the encircle positioning modes, the view will rotate around the current
center point of the view.
If you have the Fit View to Model option on, the view will effectively rotate around the
current center point of the fitted model view.
Looking Plan (Top) Command

View > Common > Looking Plan (Top)
Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking down at
the top of the model.
Looking North (Front) Command

View > Common > Looking North (Front)
Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking toward
the north direction of the model.
Looking West (Right) Command

View > Common > Looking West (Right)
the west direction of the model.
Looking Up (Bottom) Command

View > Common > Looking Up (Bottom)
Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model so that you are looking up at the
bottom of the model.
Looking South (Back) Command

View > Common > Looking South (Back)
the south direction of the model.
Looking East (Left) Command

View > Common > Looking East (Left)
the east direction of the model.
Isometric (Top Front Right) Command

View > Common > Isometric (Top Front Right)
Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the top front right (north
west).
45
Isometric (Top Front Left) Command

View > Common > Isometric (Top Front Left)
Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the top front left (north east).
Isometric (Top Back Right) Command

View > Common > Isometric (Top Back Right)
Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the top back right (south
west).
Isometric (Top Back Left) Command

View > Common > Isometric (Top Back Left)
Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the top back left (south
east).
Isometric (Bottom Front Right) Command

View > Common > Isometric (Bottom Front Right)
Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the bottom front right (north
west).
Isometric (Bottom Front Left) Command

View > Common > Isometric (Bottom Front Left)
Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the bottom front left (north
east).
Isometric (Bottom Back Right) Command

View > Common > Isometric (Bottom Back Right)
Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the bottom back right (south
west).
Isometric (Bottom Back Left) Command

View > Common > Isometric (Bottom Back Left)
Changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model from the bottom back left (south
east).
46
Rotate with Model Fit Command

View > Common > Rotate with Model Fit
Determines if SmartPlant Review updates the eye point in the Main view when you use the
common view commands to rotate the model. If this command is on, SmartPlant Review fits the
Main view to the model after you rotate the model. If this command is off, SmartPlant Review
does not fit the model in the Main view when you rotate the model.
If you want to use the common view commands to rotate about an object, turn this option
off and use the encircle mode to move around the object. For more information, see Control
Movement with Positioning Modes (on page 134).
Commands for Arranging the View

SmartPlant Review provides various commands in the Window menu for displaying, arranging,
and updating the different view windows.
Topics
Arrange All Command ................................................................... 47
Arrange Icons Command ............................................................... 48
Cascade Command ....................................................................... 48
Elevation Command ...................................................................... 48
Four View Layout Command ......................................................... 48
Full Screen Command ................................................................... 48
Main Command ............................................................................. 49
Plan Command .............................................................................. 49
Refresh Command ......................................................................... 49
Refresh All Views ........................................................................... 49
Restore All Command .................................................................... 49
Scroll Bars Command .................................................................... 49
Single View Layout Command....................................................... 50
Text Command .............................................................................. 50
Three View Layout Command ....................................................... 50
Tile Horizontally Command............................................................ 50
Tile Vertically Command ................................................................ 50
Arrange All Command

Window > Arrange All
Returns all toolbars and views back to the default configuration.
47
Arrange Icons Command

Window > Arrange Icons
Moves the collapsed window icons within SmartPlant Review so that you can see each icon.
Cascade Command
Window > Cascade
Arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that you can see part of each window.
Elevation Command
Window > Elevation
Use the Elevation command to turn on or off the Elevation view.
See Also
Arrange All Command (on page 47)
Window Toolbar (on page 65)
Working with Views (on page 197)
Four View Layout Command

Window > View Layout > Four
Opens the Plan, Elevation, Main, and Text views. Project Manager remains displayed if
active.
You can also access the Four command by clicking the Four View Layout button on the
Common toolbar or by pressing Shift + 4 on your keyboard.
Full Screen Command

View > Full Screen
Maximizes the current view layout across a single monitor or to the virtual desktop extent across
multiple monitors. Use F11 to toggle between full-screen mode and regular view. Use Alt + Tab
to switch to another application.
This command retains the show/hide and window positioning information of the Full Screen
toolbar. You can hide the Full Screen toolbar by default by dismissing it the first time it appears
in full-screen mode. You can use the Alt + V then Alt + E key sequence to display or hide the
menu bar in full screen mode, but placing the mouse at the top of the screen does not display
the menu bar.
48
Full-screen mode expands the application window to occupy the entire monitor screen. The
Main, Plan, Elevation, and Text views are not resized unless they are maximized to occupy
the entire application window.
If you have a dual monitor system, full-screen mode uses both monitors. Turning Full
Screen off causes SmartPlant Review to revert to the previous display layout on the dual
monitor system.
The menu bar, the toolbars, and Project Manager are hidden when full-screen mode is
activated.
You can also activate full screen mode by clicking the
button on the Views toolbar.
Main Command
Window > Main
Turns on or off the Main view.
Plan Command
Window > Plan
Turns on or off the Plan view.
Refresh Command
Window > Refresh
Redraws the current view to update the current window contents.
Press Esc to stop a view update in progress.
Refresh All Views

Window > Refresh All
Redraws all of the views to update the current window contents. Press Esc to stop a view
update in progress.
Restore All Command

Window > Restore All
Resets the size of all open views to the current default sizes. The default sizes are set to the
view sizes that you were using when you exited the application.
Scroll Bars Command

Turns on or off the scroll bars for the Main, Plan, and Elevation views. When displayed, these
scroll bars let you pan around the current view plane of the view. The step arrows pan by the
motion rates set in the Motion > Settings command. When scroll bars are on, the display
dynamically updates when you move each scroll bar.
See Also
Configure Motion Settings (on page 106)
49
Single View Layout Command

Window > View Layout > Single
Closes the Plan, Elevation, and Text views, leaving only the Main view active. Project Manager
remains displayed if active. The Single View Layout is useful if you are viewing the model
using Full Screen mode.
You can also access the Single command by clicking the Single View Layout button on the
Common toolbar or by pressing Shift + 1 on your keyboard.
If the Main view is not visible, the Print and Raytrace Render commands are disabled.
Text Command
Window > Text
Turns on or off the Text view.
Three View Layout Command

Displays the Plan, Elevation, and Main views while hiding the Text view if active. Project
Manager remains displayed if active.
You can also access the Three command by clicking the Three View Layout button on
the Common toolbar or by pressing Shift + 3 on your keyboard.
Tile Horizontally Command

Window > Tile Horizontally
Arranges the windows horizontally within SmartPlant Review so that each window is completely
visible.
Tile Vertically Command

Window > Tile Vertically
Arranges the windows vertically within SmartPlant Review so that each window is completely
visible.
50
SECTION 4
Toolbars
A toolbar is a row of buttons or icons displayed on the screen. When you click these buttons or
icons, certain functions of the application are activated. Toolbars can be customized and usually
can be moved around on the screen according to your preference.
Annotation Toolbar
The Annotation toolbar provides easy access to some of SmartPlant Review's most commonly
used annotation commands.
Display Annotations turns on or off the display of annotations. For more
information, see Manipulate Text Annotations (on page 447).
Text Annotations turns on or off the display of text annotations. For more
information, see Display Text Annotations (on page 453)
Data Annotations turns on or off the display of data annotations. For more
information, see Placing Data Annotations (on page 317).
Volume Annotations turns on or off the display of volume annotations. For more
information, see Placing Volume Annotations (on page 323).
Edit Data Annotation edits the selected data annotation. For more information, see
Edit a Data Annotation (on page 318).
Delete Data Annotation deletes the selected data annotation. For more information,
see Delete One Data Annotation (on page 322).
Delete All Data Annotation deletes all of the data annotations in the model. For
more information, see Delete All Data Annotations (on page 322)
Place Volume Annotation allows you to place a new volume annotation. For more
information, see Place a Volume Annotation (on page 325).
Edit Volume Annotation allows you to review, edit, or create volume annotations.
For more information, see Edit Volume Annotations (on page 328).
Adjust Volume Annotation allows you to change the location, dimensions, or
orientation of the selected volume annotation. For more information, see Adjust a
Volume Annotation (on page 333).
Delete Volume Annotation removes the selected volume annotation. For more
information, see Delete a Single Volume Annotation (on page 336).
Delete All Volume Annotations removes all of the volume annotations. For more
information, see Delete All Volume Annotations (on page 337).
51
Common Toolbar
Use the Common toolbar commands to set motion parameters.
Motion Settings displays the Edit Motion Settings dialog box, allowing you to edit
motion settings. For more information, see Configure Motion Settings (on page 106)
Auto-Highlight displays object label data in the Text window. For more information,
see Auto-Highlight Label Data (on page 118).
Forward/Back, Left/Right moves the depth of the view point forward or back by
moving the cursor up or down and left or right by moving the cursor left or right. For
more information, see Move View Cone Forward/Back, Left/Right (on page 121).
Pan moves the viewpoint of the model up, down, left or right without changing the
viewpoint depth. For more information, see Pan (on page 122).
Rotate moves the display set in incremental steps. For more information, see Rotate
(on page 122).
Lateral moves through the model laterally. For more information, see Move Lateral
(on page 134).
Horizontal Encircle places a horizontal track around the sphere. The eye point
encircles the model on this track. For more information, see Set Horizontal Encircle
(on page 135).
Lock Center Point locks the center point of the Main view so that it does not
change during navigation or motion commands. For more information, see Lock
Center Point (on page 124).
Lock Elevation locks the elevation of the Main view so that it does not change
during navigation or motion commands. For more information, see Lock Elevation
(on page 124)
Views Control lets you select any common view by selecting the face or point from
which you want to view the model. For more information, see Common Views
Control (on page 43).
View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement in relation to
the direction in which you are looking. For more information, see Set View
Dependent Mode (on page 138).
Level View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement in
relation to the direction and angle indicated by the elevation and bearing. For more
information, see Set View Dependent, Level Mode (on page 139).
Fit View to Model adjusts the view in the window so that the entire model appears.
For more information, see Fit View to Model (on page 201).
Fit View to Object fits an object that you select in the active view. For more
information, see Fit View to Object (on page 201).
Fit View to Volume zooms on the selected volume. For more information, see Fit
View to Volume (on page 202).
Center View centers the model on a defined point in a specified view. For more
information, see View by Center Point (on page 233).
52

Place Eye places the selected point as the eye point position of a new location. For
more information, see Place Eye Point Only (on page 231).
Center Point Only allows you to view the model from the center of the current view.
For more information, see Place Center Point Only (on page 232).
Zoom In zooms into the model by the current zoom factor times the distance from
the current eye and center points. For more information, see Zoom In (on page 203).
Zoom Out zooms out of the model by the current zoom factor times the distance
from the current eye and center points. For more information, see Zoom Out (on
page 203).
View Settings displays the View Settings dialog box, which allows you to edit the
view display options. For more information, see View Settings Dialog Box (on page
211).
Save and Recall Views displays the Save and Recall Views dialog box, allowing
you to save any display in the view window, which you may want to recall later. It
also allows you to recall existing views. For more information, see Save and Recall
Views (on page 391).
Snapshot View displays the Snapshot View dialog box, allowing you to create an
image file (or snapshot file) of any size by taking a snapshot of the current Main view
or screen. This functionality is available only if you have installed one of the following
SmartPlant Review modules: API, Collaboration, Construction, Photo-Realism, or
Simulation and Visual Effects. For more information, see Take a Snapshot (on page
403).
Activate Clipping Volume turns on or off the view of the clipping volume. For more
information, see Activate/Deactivate Clipping Volume (on page 340).
Common View Tools Toolbar

Use the Common View Tools toolbar commands to display any of the common view
orientations in the current window.
Common Views opens the Common Views control. For more information, see
Common Views Control (on page 43).
Rotate with Model Fit determines if SmartPlant Review updates the eye point in the
Main view when you use the common view commands to rotate the model. For more
information, see Rotate with Model Fit Command (on page 47).
Looking Plan (Top) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model
so that you are looking down at the top of the model. For more information, see
Looking Plan (Top) Command (on page 45).
Looking North (Front) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the
model so that you are looking at the north elevation of the model. For more
information, see Looking North (Front) Command (on page 45).
Looking West (Right) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model
so that you are looking at the west elevation of the model. For more information, see
Looking West (Right) Command (on page 45).
53

Looking Up (Bottom) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model
so that you are looking up at the bottom of the model. For more information, see
Looking Up (Bottom) Command (on page 45).
Looking South (Back) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the
model so that you are looking at the south elevation of the model. For more
information, see Looking South (Back) Command (on page 45).
Looking East (Left) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the model
so that you are looking at the east elevation of the model. For more information, see
Looking East (Left) Command (on page 45).
Isometric (Top Front Right) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the
model from the top front right (north west). For more information, see Isometric (Top
Front Right) Command (on page 45).
Isometric (Top Front Left) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the
model from the top front left (north east). For more information, see Isometric (Top
Front Left) Command (on page 46).
Isometric (Top Back Right) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the
model from the top back right (south west). For more information, see Isometric (Top
Back Right) Command (on page 46).
Isometric (Top Back Left) changes the orientation of the Main view to display the
model from the top back left (south east). For more information, see Isometric (Top
Back Left) Command (on page 46).
Isometric (Bottom Front Right) changes the orientation of the Main view to display
the model from the bottom front right (north west). For more information, see
Isometric (Bottom Front Right) Command (on page 46).
Isometric (Bottom Front Left) changes the orientation of the Main view to display
the model from the bottom front left (north east). For more information, see Isometric
(Bottom Front Left) Command (on page 46).
Isometric (Bottom Back Right) changes the orientation of the Main view to display
the model from the bottom back right (south west). For more information, see
Isometric (Bottom Back Right) Command (on page 46).
Isometric (Bottom Back Left) changes the orientation of the Main view to display
the model from the bottom back left (south east). For more information, see
Isometric (Bottom Back Left) Command (on page 46).
54
Encircle Radius Toolbar

The Encircle Radius toolbar increases or decreases the radius of the green sphere used in the
Horizontal Encircle, Vertical Encircle, and Surface Encircle positioning modes. A larger
radius gives the effect of standing farther away from the center point.
You can dock the Encircle Radius toolbar at the edge of the window, or you can let it
float like a dialog box.
See Also
Set Horizontal Encircle (on page 135)
Surface Encircle Command (on page 41)
Set Vertical Encircle (on page 136)
Measure Toolbar
Use the Measure toolbar to access the measurement commands and other functionality.
Display Measurements turns on or off the display of measurements. For more
information, see Measurements Command (on page 36).
One Click Measurement turns on or off the one click measurement mode. For more
information, see Use One Click Measurement Mode (on page 282)
Snaplock Measurement measures the distance between two points. For more
information, see Set Snaplock Measurement (on page 280).
Surface Measurement measures from any surface point. For more information, see
Set Surface Measurement (on page 281).
Shortest Distance measures the shortest distance between any two objects. For
more information, see Measure Shortest Distance between Objects (on page 282).
Move Measurement relocates a measurement label. For more information, see
Move Measurement (on page 283).
55

Restore Position returns to its original position the last measurement label that you
moved. For more information, see Restore Measurement Position (on page 283).
Edit Collections allows you to create or edit basic information for an existing
measurement collection. For more information, see Edit Measurement Collections
(on page 286).
New Collection automatically generates a new measurement collection and sets it
to be the active collection. For more information, see Create New Measurement
Collection (on page 286).
Delete Last Measurement removes the last measurement in the current active
collection. For more information, see Delete Last Measurement (on page 284)
Delete Active Collection Measurements removes all of the measurements in the
active collection, but does not delete the collection itself. For more information, see
Delete Active Collection Measurements (on page 297).
Delete All Measurements removes all of the measurements in each of the
measurement collections, but does not delete the collections themselves. For more
information, see Delete All Measurements (on page 284).
Delete All Collections removes all measurement collections and any associated
measurements. You do not need to delete the measurements before deleting all of
collections. For more information, see Delete All Measurement Collections (on page
296).
Motion Toolbar
Use the Motion toolbar commands to control the movement of the view cone eye point while
moving laterally and circularly through the three dimensional model and viewing various points
of interest.
Move Eye Point allows motion commands to affect the graphic views. For more
information, see Set Motion Control to Eye Point (on page 132).
Move Display Set allows motion commands to affect display sets. For more
information, see Set Motion Control to Display Set (on page 132).
Motion Settings defines the time for screen updates, the shading mode, the
keyboard motion, the clipping planes, and allows you to set up the joystick. For more
information, see Configure Motion Settings (on page 106).
Continuous Step moves the eye point or display set through the model at a
constant rate and in a constant direction, using the keypad to steer. For more
information, see Move Continuously (on page 132).
Step moves the eye point or display set through the model one step at a time in a
constant direction, using the keypad to steer. For more information, see Move Single
Step (on page 133).
Toggle Step Direction switches step direction from forward/clockwise to
backward/counter-clockwise. For more information, see Set Step Direction (on page
133).
Display Key Frames displays the Display Key Frames dialog box to set movie
56

definition items. For more information, see Display Key Frame (on page 409).
Play Key Frames plays the current key frame animation from its current starting
frame or from its current paused frame. For more information, see Play Key Frame
Motion (on page 410).
Pause Key Frames pauses the current playing key frame animation and/or resumes
the current paused key frame motion animation. For more information, see Pause
Key Frame Motion (on page 410).
Stop Key Frames stops the current playing or paused key frame motion animation.
For more information, see Stop Key Frame Motion (on page 411).
Navigation Toolbar
Use the Navigation toolbar commands to move through the model and view various points of
interest.
Auto-Highlight displays object label data in the Text window. For more information,
see Auto-Highlight Label Data (on page 118).
Forward/Back, Left/Right moves the depth of the view point forward or back by
moving the cursor up or down and left or right by moving the cursor left or right. For
more information, see Move View Cone Forward/Back, Left/Right (on page 121).
Pan moves the viewpoint of the model up, down, left or right without changing the
viewpoint depth. For more information, see Pan (on page 122).
Rotate Tilts the view cone up and down when you move the mouse up or back. For
more information, see Rotate (on page 122).
View Cube displays the model in three dimensions. For more information, see
Manipulate the View Cube (on page 123)
Lateral moves through the model laterally. For more information, see Move Lateral
(on page 134).
Horizontal Encircle places a horizontal track around the sphere. The eye point
encircles the model on this track. For more information, see Set Horizontal Encircle
(on page 135).
Vertical Encircle places a vertical track around the sphere. The eye point encircles
the model on this track. For more information, see Set Vertical Encircle (on page
136)
Surface Encircle places a track on the surface of the sphere, like a sectional cut.
For more information, see Set Surface Encircle (on page 137).
View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement in relation to
the direction in which you are looking. For more information, see Set View
Dependent Mode (on page 138).
Level View Dependent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement in
relation to the direction and angle indicated by the elevation and bearing. For more
information, see Set View Dependent, Level Mode (on page 139).
View Independent Motion displays the object (or display set) movement without
relation to the direction or angle indicated by the elevation and bearing. For more
57

information, see Set View Independent Mode (on page 139).
Plant North Motion moves the object (or display set) in relation to the plant north.
For more information, see Set Plant North Mode (on page 140).
Lock Center Point keeps the center point of the Main view constant during
navigation commands. For more information, see Lock Center Point (on page 124).
Lock Elevation keeps the eye point elevation constant during navigation
commands. For more information, see Lock Elevation (on page 124).
Perspective Angle Toolbar

The Perspective Angle toolbar allows you to increase or decrease the viewing area of the view
cone. Move the slider anywhere from two degrees (to decrease area) to 160 degrees (to
increase area).
Increasing the viewing area has a similar effect as the Zoom Out command. Everything within
the viewing area appears smaller, but the eye point or center point positions do not change.
Decreasing the viewing area has a similar effect as the Zoom In command. Everything within
the viewing area appears larger, but the eye point or center point positions do not change.
You can dock the Perspective Angle toolbar at the edge of the window, or you can let it
float like a dialog box.
The docking areas for this toolbar are automatically restricted to help reduce the possibility
of the docking area obscuring the client area of the application window. If you are unable to
dock this toolbar where you want it, try resizing the toolbar to be smaller or resizing the
application window to be larger.
See Also
Using the View Cone (on page 229)
Photo-Realism Toolbar
Allow you to place and delete source lights, and define and edit Photo-Realism settings, light
settings, and raytrace options. To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism
module.
Object Textures turns on or off texture display. For more information, see Object
Textures Command (on page 36).
Photo-Realism Settings displays the Photo-Realism Settings dialog box, allowing
you to edit the raytracing options before actually raytracing the model. For more
information, see Configure Photo-Realism Settings (on page 461).
Global Lighting displays the Global Lighting dialog box, allowing you to edit
options for controlling the lighting in the model. For more information, see Set Global
Lighting (on page 470).
Point Light allows you to place a new point light in the model. For more information,
see Place a New Point Light (on page 478).
58

Distant Light allows you to place a new distant light in the model. For more
information, see Place a New Distant Light (on page 479).
Spot Light allows you to place a new spot light in the model. For more information,
see Place a New Spot Light (on page 480).
Edit Light allows you to select a light in the model and adjust its properties. For
more information, see Edit Source Light (on page 486).
Delete Light allows you to select a light in the model and delete it. For more
information, see Delete a Source Light (on page 488).
Raytrace executes a raytrace on the Main view and displays the output in the Main
view. For more information, see Raytrace a View (on page 489).
Raytrace Range allows you to raytrace a portion of the Main view. For more
information, see Set a Raytrace Range (on page 490).
Position Control Toolbar

The Position Control toolbar dynamically displays the location of the view cone eye point and
center point and the bearing and elevation settings for movement. For users familiar with how
the Position Control worked in DesignReview, see Position Control Changes (on page 60) for a
discussion about the differences between the two controls.
View - Displays the bearing and elevation information for the View Dependent and View
Dependent Level Directional modes. The View Bearing Pointer displays the current bearing
direction of the view cone. The View Elevation Pointer displays the current elevation direction of
the view cone. You can change the direction of the View Bearing Pointer or the View Elevation
Pointer by dragging the left mouse button in either the Bearing or the Elevation compass or by
typing new bearing and elevation values.
Motion - Displays the bearing and elevation information for the View Independent Direction
Mode. The View Independent Bearing Pointer displays the forward direction in regards to
bearing. The View Independent Elevation Pointer displays the forward direction in regards to
elevation. Moving forward using View Independent mode moves you in the direction defined by
these two pointers. You use the cursor directional keys (up, down, left, and right arrow keys) or
the right mouse button to define the direction of the pointers. You also can type new bearing and
elevation values.
When you are using the View Independent Direction Mode, the View Bearing Pointer and View
Elevation Pointer, define the view cone direction (the direction in which you are looking).
59

Eye Point - Displays the current location of the view cone eye point. You can change the
location of the eye point by typing in new values in the North, East, and Elevation fields. You
also can change the eye point location using the View > Settings > View Cone tab.
Center Point - Displays the current location of the view cone center point. You can change
the location of the center point by typing in new values in the North, East, and Elevation fields.
You also can change the center point location using the View > Settings > View Cone tab.
Position Control Changes

The DesignReview Position Control dialog box is now the Position Control toolbar, which you
can display by clicking View > Toolbars > Position Control. The Position Control toolbar
appears undocked by default, but can be docked if you prefer. For more information, see
Position Control Toolbar (on page 59).
Several commands from the DesignReview Position Control have been moved to other menus
and toolbars.
60
Old Position Control

Command
New Commands
Motion Modes
Motion > Positioning Modes

Motion > Directional Modes
Motion toolbar
Select Display Sets and

Reference Points
Project Manager
Tools > Display Sets > Edit
Position
Encircle Point
View > Place > Center Point Only
Encircle Radius
View > Toolbars > Encircle Radius
Step Motion
Motion > Move > Single Step

Motion toolbar
View Independent Motion
Motion > Directional Modes > View

Independent Motion
Motion toolbar
Set motion reference angles on the
Position Control > Motion tab

Rotate about the center point When using any of the encircle
or the eye point
positioning modes, you can use
the Bearing and Elevation buttons
on the Position Control dialog
box to rotate around either the
center point or the eye point.
Rotating around the center point is
the default. To rotate around the
eye point, press Ctrl while using
these controls.
See Also
ScheduleReview Toolbar
Use the ScheduleReview toolbar commands to play, pause, stop and move around in a
ScheduleReview file. To use this functionality, you must install the Construction module.
Schedule Review Settings command displays the Schedule Review Settings
dialog box. For more information, see Define ScheduleReview Settings (on page
520).
Go to Start moves the display back to the start date. For more information, see
Restart a ScheduleReview Session (on page 540).
Back moves the display back. For more information, see Step Back Through a
ScheduleReview Session (on page 540).
Forward moves the display forward. For more information, see Step Forward
Through a ScheduleReview Session (on page 540).
Go to End moves the display to the end date. For more information, see Go to the
End of a ScheduleReview Session (on page 541).
Play starts the review process using the parameters that you define in the Review
dialog box. The review process starts on the Start Date that you defined and stops
on the End Date. For more information, see Play a ScheduleReview Project (on
page 539).
Pause pauses the current review process. For more information, see Pause a
Stop stops the current review process. For more information, see Stop a
Record records a new review. For more information, see Record a ScheduleReview
Session.
Go to Date moves the display to the date that you specify. For more information,
see Go to a Specific Date in a ScheduleReview Session (on page 541).
Percent Complete displays the percentage of the review that is complete. For more
information, see View a ScheduleReview Project at a Specific Percent Complete (on
page 539).
While in Full Screen mode, use any of the following shortcut commands to display the
ScheduleReview toolbar:
61

Press ALT + V, then T, then H.
Press ALT + V, then T, then Z and use the Customize dialog box to turn on the
ScheduleReview toolbar.
Dock the Full Screen toolbar, right-click on the docking area, and then select
ScheduleReview from the menu.
Standard Toolbar
Open allows you to select the model that you want to view using
SmartPlant Review. If there is already an open model,
SmartPlant Review closes that model and then opens the new
one. For more information, see Opening a Model (on page 81).
Save writes all project information in the current session to the
.MDB file. For more information, see Save Command (on page
31).
Print allows you to print the active drawing. For more information,
see Printing (on page 435).
Cut - Not available. Use Ctrl + X to remove the selected text
from text fields on dialog boxes and places it on the Clipboard.
Copy places a copy of the selected text on the Clipboard. For
more information, see Copy Command (on page 32).
Paste - not available. Use Ctrl + V to insert the contents of the
Clipboard at the insertion point and replace any selection.
Help displays the SmartPlant Review Help file.
Tags Toolbar
The Tags toolbar provides access to the most commonly used tags commands.
Place Tag With Leader places a new tag in the model with a leader line. For more
information, see Place a Tag With a Leader Line (on page 300).
Place Tag Without Leader places a new tag in the model without attaching a
leader line. For more information, see Place Tag With No Leader (on page 301).
Edit Tag edits the text of the active tag (the tag that appears in the text window).
For more information, see Edit Tags (on page 302).
Delete Tag deletes a display set tag by specifying the tag number. For more
information, see Delete Tags (on page 306).
Find Tags searches for matching criteria for specified data. For more information,
see Find Tags (on page 306).
Go to Previous Tag displays the tag number preceding the active tag. For more
information, see View Previous Tag (on page 310).
Next Tag displays the tag number following the active tag. For more information,
see View Next Tag (on page 309).
62

Go to Tag displays a tag number that you specify. For more information, see Go to
Tag (on page 310).
Tools Toolbar
Find Object locates objects in the model that match criteria that you specify. For
more information, see Find Objects in the Model (on page 193).
Edit Display Set allows you to edit the description, name, ID, and material for the
display set definition. For more information, see Edit a Display Set Definition (on page
247).
Assign Materials To Elements assigns material properties to model elements and
sets various rendering parameters. For more information, see Assign Materials (on
page 362).
Unassign Materials removes the assigned material properties from model elements.
For more information, see Unassign Materials (on page 365).
Edit Materials changes the properties of the assigned material properties for model
elements. For more information, see Edit Materials (on page 367).
Level Settings selects the categories (or levels) that you want to display for one or
more project files. For more information, see Select Level Settings (on page 219).
Display Order defines the order in which the elements in the model display each time
the Main view updates. For more information, see Display Order Command (on page
35).
Tools MiniBar
Provides access to some of the most commonly used commands in SmartPlant Review.
Place Tag With Leader places a new tag in the model with a leader line. For more
information, see Place a Tag With a Leader Line (on page 300)
Find Tags searches for matching criteria for specified data. For more information, see
Find Tags (on page 306).
Edit Tag edits the text of the active tag (the tag that appears in the text window). For
more information, see Edit Tags (on page 302).
Delete Tag deletes a display set tag by specifying the tag number. For more
information, see Delete Tags (on page 306).
Go to Previous Tag displays the tag number preceding the active tag. For more
information, see View Previous Tag (on page 310).
Next Tag displays the tag number following the active tag. For more information, see
View Next Tag (on page 309).
Find Object locates objects that match criteria that you specify. For more information,
see Find Objects in the Model (on page 193).
Level Settings selects the categories (or levels) that you want to display for one or
63

more project files. For more information, see Select Level Settings (on page 219).
Snaplock Measurement measures the distance between two points. For more
information, see Set Snaplock Measurement (on page 280).
Shortest distance measures the shortest distance between two objects. For more
information, see Measure Shortest Distance between Objects (on page 282).
Delete Last Measurement removes the last measurement that you placed from the
project. For more information, see Delete All Measurements (on page 284).
Views Toolbar
Use the Views toolbar commands to resize and update the image displays that appear within
the various model views.
Shaded/Wireframe toggles the Main view display between shaded or wireframe
display modes. For more information, see Shaded/Wireframe Toggle (on page 39).
Outline toggles the Main view display between wireframe outline and shaded outline
display modes. For more information, see Outline Toggle (on page 37).
Fit View to Model displays the entire model. For more information, see Fit View to
Model (on page 201).
Fit View to Object adjusts the view to fit an object that you select. For more
information, see Fit View to Object (on page 201).
Fit View to Volume adjusts the view by volume. For more information, see Fit View
to Volume (on page 202).
Center View repositions the model in a view. For more information, see View by
Center Point (on page 233).
Eye Point Only places the selected point as the eye point position of a new location.
For more information, see Place Eye Point Only (on page 231).
Center Point Only displays the model from the center of the current view. For more
information, see Place Center Point Only (on page 232).
Far Clipping Plane changes the location of the far clipping plane of the view cone.
For more information, see Place Far Clipping Plane (on page 234).
Near Clipping Plane changes the location of the near clipping plane of the view
cone. For more information, see Place Near Clipping Plane (on page 234).
Zoom In decreases the viewing area by the current zoom factor, which causes
everything within the view to appear larger. For more information, see Zoom In (on
page 203).
Zoom Out increases the viewing area by the current zoom factor, which causes
everything within the view to appear smaller. For more information, see Zoom Out (on
page 203).
Full Screen maximizes the current view layout across a single monitor or to the
virtual desktop extent across multiple monitors. For more information, see Full Screen
Command (on page 48).
64

View Settings modifies settings in the Main view. For more information, see View
Settings Dialog Box (on page 211).
Save and Recall Views defines the animation path for a movie or saves the current
view displayed in the Main, Plan, and Elevation views. For more information, see
Save and Recall Views (on page 391).
Snapshot View creates an image file (or snapshot file) of the current Main view or
screen. For more information, see Take a Snapshot (on page 403).
Window Toolbar
Cascade Windows arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that you can
see part of each window. For more information, see Cascade Command (on page
48).
Tile Horizontally arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that each
window is completely visible. For more information, see Tile Horizontally Command
(on page 50).
Tile Vertically arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review so that each window
is completely visible. For more information, see Tile Vertically Command (on page
50).
Arrange All arranges the windows within SmartPlant Review. For more information,
see Arrange All Command (on page 47).
Restore All allows you to return the view layouts to their original default
configurations. For more information, see Restore All Command (on page 49).
Single View displays the Main view only. For more information, see Single View
Layout Command (on page 50).
Three Views displays the Main view, Plan view, and Elevation view. For more
information, see Three View Layout Command (on page 50).
Four Views displays the Main view, Plan view, Elevation view, and Text view. For
more information, see Four View Layout Command (on page 48).
Refresh Active View redraws the selected view to update its contents. For more
information, see Refresh Command (on page 49).
Customize Toolbars
Toolbars contain the same commands found on menus in SmartPlant Review. These toolbars
can be customized as follows.
To show or hide a toolbar, select the toolbar from the View > Toolbars menu. A check mark
next to a toolbar name means that the toolbar will be displayed. To hide a toolbar, click the
name of the toolbar to clear the check mark.
To move a toolbar to a different location, click the toolbar's title bar and drag the toolbar to
the new location.
To add a command to a toolbar from another toolbar, press CTRL and drag the command
onto the new toolbar.
65
To add a command to a toolbar, click View > Toolbars > Customize and then click the
Commands tab. In the Categories list, click the group that contains the command that you
want to add, and then, in the Commands list, click that command and drag it to the toolbar
in your workspace.
To remove a command from a toolbar, click View > Toolbars > Customize, and then drag
the command off the toolbar and release it anywhere in the model viewing area (except on
another toolbar).
If you add commands to one of the default toolbars, such as the Photo-Realism toolbar, you
can reset the toolbar to its original state.
Customize Dialog Box (on page 67)

What do you want to do?
Create a Toolbar (on page 66)

Reset a Toolbar (on page 67)
Create a Toolbar
1. Click View > Toolbars > Customize.
2. Click New.
3. In the Toolbar name box, type a new name for the toolbar.
New Toolbar Dialog Box (on page 67)
4. Click the Commands tab, and then in the Categories list, click the group that contains the
command that you want to put on the new toolbar.
5. In the commands list, click the command that you want to put on the new toolbar, and then
drag the command onto the new toolbar displayed in your workspace.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have added all the commands that you want on the new
toolbar.
You also can add a command to a toolbar by pressing CTRL and dragging the command
from an existing toolbar.
To rename a custom toolbar, click View > Toolbars > Customize, and then click the
Toolbars tab. In the Toolbars list, select the custom toolbar that you want to rename. In the
Toolbar name box, type a new name.
To delete a custom toolbar, click View > Toolbars > Customize, and then click the
Toolbars tab. In the Toolbars list, select the custom toolbar that you want to delete, and
then click Delete.
See Also
Customize Toolbars (on page 65)
66

Allows you to create a new, empty toolbar to which you can add buttons or menus.
Custom toolbar name - Allows you to type a name for the new toolbar.
Reset a Toolbar
1.
2.
3.
4.
On the View menu, point to Toolbars, and then click Customize.

Click the Toolbars tab.
In the Toolbars box, select the toolbar that you want to reset.
Click Reset.
See Also
Customize Dialog Box

Allows you to show or hide toolbars, move them to any location within the application, add or
remove commands from toolbars, or create a new toolbar.
Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) (on page 68)
Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box) (on page 69)
67

Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Allows you to display toolbars, create a new toolbar, reset a toolbar, or change the toolbar
button display.
Toolbars in use - Lists the available toolbars. To display a toolbar, select the check box next to
the name. To hide a toolbar, clear the check box. Toolbars contain the same commands found
on menus in SmartPlant Review.
Custom name - Allows you to type a new name for the selected toolbar.
ToolTips - Displays on-screen descriptions of toolbar buttons when the pointer pauses on them.
ToolTips help you find toolbar command names. When you point to a command button on the
toolbar, a yellow tool tip label displays the command name.
Flat Look - Changes the toolbar button display from three-dimensional buttons to flat buttons.
Large Buttons - Increases the size of toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see.
New - Displays the New Toolbar dialog box, allowing you to create a new, empty toolbar to
which you can add buttons or menus.
Delete - Deletes the selected toolbar.
Reset - Removes any changes that you made to the selected toolbar and restores the original
settings. For example, if you add commands to one of the default toolbars, such as the
Photo-Realism toolbar, you can press Reset to change the toolbar back to its original state.
Reset All - Removes any changes that you made to any of the toolbars and restores the original
settings.
68

Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Allows you to view commands and command descriptions. You also can drag buttons to a
toolbar or change menu options.
Category - Displays categories of commands, organized by menu name or by type. You can
click a category to change the list of commands in the Buttons box.
Buttons - Displays a list of buttons from the category that you select in the Categories box. You
can drag the button that you want from the Buttons box onto a toolbar.
Description - Displays text explaining what the selected button does.
See Also
69
70
SECTION 5
Understanding Projects and Project

Databases
The project database is crucial to any SmartPlant Review session because it contains
information regarding on-going modifications to tags and measurements, display sets and saved
views, material assignments, project settings, as well as any other project-critical data.
When you open your model document for the first time, the Create Project dialog box opens,
allowing you to set several options for the project database. When SmartPlant Review opens a
new model for the first time, it creates two project database files:
1. projectname.mdb - contains all non-graphical project information
2. projectname.mdb2 - contains all PDS or SP3D label data information
Because these databases must be created the first time you open your model document, the
project load time will be longer than normal. However, this is a one-time occurrence and load
time should not be impacted after both the project (MDB) and label (MDB2) database files exist.
You can, however, re-create these database files by deleting the existing MDB and MDB2 files,
then opening your model document again.
SmartPlant Review requires writable databases to run. If you try to use a database that is write
protected or in a write protected folder or share, SmartPlant Review will look for a temporary
folder to copy the databases to so that they are writable and SmartPlant Review can run.
Folder Locations
If you have defined the environment variable SPRTEMP, SmartPlant Review uses the folder
path of the environment variable for the copied database. If SPRTEMP is not defined, then the
system-defined temporary folder will be used instead.
SmartPlant Review attempts the following locations:
1. The path specified by the TMP environment variable.
2. The path specified by the TEMP environment variable, if TMP is not defined.
3. The Windows folder, if neither TMP nor TEMP is defined.
To define a user environment variable, do the following:
1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel > System.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. Click Environment Variables
4. Under User variables click New.
5. Type SPRTEMP in the Variable Name field.
Type the full path to the temporary folder that you want SmartPlant Review to use in the
Variable Value field.
File Settings
Settings for large plant monument and construction text that exist in the SET file are read in and
used during this database creation period. These settings include ignore_dri_old_new_origin,
ignore_dri_transform, and ignore_construction_text. If you do not have a SET file defining the
large plant monument settings or construction text settings, you can define these values by
71
Understanding Projects and Project Databases

selecting the Options tab on the Create Project dialog box. For more information, see Options
Tab (Create Project Dialog Box) (on page 85).
If an MDB file already exists in the project directory, the Create Project dialog box does not
display when you open your model document. To access the Create Project dialog box, you
must delete the MDB file and re-open the model file.
You should back up the project databases regularly. The MDB and MDB2 database files
contain all the project data for each project and if the database files are lost or corrupted,
you must re-open your model file and let SmartPlant Review re-create the database files.
Not only will load time be impacted, but all previously-written data support files (tags,
measurements, display sets, saved views, and so on) will be lost.
When you review MicroStation or PDS projects (especially those containing Large Plant
Monument settings), setting options when the Create Project dialog box opens is especially
important because these options appear only on the Create Project > Options tab. If you
do not set these options when you first open the model files in the SmartPlant Review
project, you must delete the newly created databases and re-open the model files to access
the Create Project dialog box again.
Supported Database Types

SmartPlant Review uses the Microsoft Access 2000 database engine by default to create the
project databases, which are also compatible with Access XP and Access 2003 since they all
use the same database file format.
If you are using SmartPlant Review on a non-English operating system and locale, you must
download the appropriate locale-specific version of the Microsoft Data Access Components
(MDAC) from Microsoft so that the project databases will be created in the locale-compatible
format. SmartPlant Review may not work correctly with multi-byte characters when using the
English version of MDAC.
If you open an Access 97 database in Access 2000, do not convert the database to Access
2000 format. It is recommended to convert databases to Access 2000 format for better
support of multi-byte characters. Such a conversion renders the database unreadable by
Access 97. However, SmartPlant Review can read either format.
SmartPlant Review File Types

SmartPlant Review accesses and creates several different files for the model data.
DGN
The design files that you open in SmartPlant Review. Several design files are
referenced by one SmartPlant Review interface (DRI) file. For example,
model.dri references 40pipe01.dgn, 40eqp01.dgn, sarea39.prp, and others. (A
PRP file is another type of design file created by plant design applications.)
Each design file can have a label file associated with it. Label files are text files
that contain database information. Label files are given the design file name
with a three-character extension. For example, in the example model
(model.dri), the label files for 40pipe01.dgn, 40eqp01.dgn, and sarea39.prp are
named 40pipe01.drv, 40eqp01.drv, and sarea39.drv, respectively.
SmartPlant Review reads VUE files and label databases created by
SmartPlant Review Publisher from Microstation V8 data files. SmartPlant
Review does not directly read in the Microstation V8 data file format.
72

DRI
This is an ASCII text files and the primary way that you enter SmartPlant
Review. The DRI file references all the design files, label data files, and other
files that are associated with a model. You can create a DRI file from scratch or
by converting old PVI files. (See the SmartPlant Review Programmers online
help for more information on file formats.) This file is given the model name with
a DRI extension.
label data Text files that contain database information about elements in the design file.
There is a one-to-one correspondence with the design file. They can have any
name, and any extension or no extension. You must use a DRI file to indicate
which label files go with which design files.
tagseed.t
xt
An ASCII text file SmartPlant Review uses to establish the pre-defined template
used by the Place Tag command. You create this file, and it should be called
tagseed.txt. SmartPlant Review looks first in the folder specified by the
DR_TAGSEED_DIR variable. If it is not there, SmartPlant Review searches
your home folder and then C:\ before assuming that the file does not exist.
MAT
Text files that contain the material assignments to objects in the corresponding
design file. Each MAT file corresponds to a design file with material
assignments. An example material file might be sarea38.mat. This file would
contain the object level and color numbers, along with the material assigned to
them. For example, all elements in the file on level 8 with color number 12 might
be assigned to bronze. The material file is given the design file name with a
.MAT extension.
PAL
Palette files that contain material definitions. A palette file can be used with a
number of models. An example palette file might be metal.pal. This palette file
would contain all the material definitions for items such as bronze, iron,
aluminum, and so on. Any file with elements using these materials will
reference this palette file.
RGB
Intergraph image files with a color file format that stores the red, green, and
blue (RGB) data values of a screen image in a single file.
PVI
Files that you can access when you enter SmartPlant Review. This is an old file
type that was created by plant design applications and is in a proprietary
non-text format. The PVI file references all the DGN files, label data files, and
other files that are associated with a model.
VUE
File created in SmartPlant Review. A VUE file rapidly reads in and manipulates
data. You can create VUE files from the Save As option within SmartPlant
Review. To use this functionality, you must install the API module.
The VUE file format is only read by SmartPlant Review.
SmartPlant Review VUE files can be created by several applications, including
SmartPlant 3D, SmartMarine 3D, SmartPlant Review Publisher, and SmartPlant
Review. Each of these applications can read data from non-Intergraph
applications. For example, SmartPlant 3D and SmartMarine 3D can read PDS
or MicroStation DGN files and ACIS SAT files. Because of this, a VUE file
produced from SmartPlant 3D or SmartMarine 3D could contain PDS data,
MicroStation data, or ACIS data.
73

Working Units
When 3D-based design files are first created (in MicroStation, for example), working units are
defined. Working units are coordinate units that correspond to the position and definition of a
point in a design file. These coordinates appear in the status bar as you work in SmartPlant
Review. There are a fixed number of points on each axis of a design file. The idea in
establishing working units is to make sure that the objects that you want to draw can be entered
with adequate precision, and at the same time fit in the design plane.
Change Label Database Format (on page 74)

Share the Project Database Over the Network (on page 74)
Change Label Database Format

When upgrading from previous versions of SmartPlant Review, you must delete existing label
database (MDB2) files and allow SmartPlant Review to create a new one. To do this, go to your
project folder and delete the MDB2 file, then open the original project file to allow SmartPlant
Review to re-create the MDB2 label database file.
The changes to the label database do not impact existing project database (MDB) or VUE files.
However, to reconstruct the label data for an existing VUE file, simply rebuild the label database
as described above, then recreate the VUE file by using the Save As command.
You can also customize the units of measure for labels in imported project files using the Units
of Measure (UoM) Converter utility. For more information, see Create the Units of Measure
Conversion File for SmartPlant 3D Projects (on page 189).
Share the Project Database Over the Network

SmartPlant Review supports sharing a common project database on a server among multiple
users so that all users can share data. Although, by default, the project databases and the
graphics are kept in the same folder, you can share a remotely located database among multiple
users.
To do this, make sure each user has a VUE file (or any project data set) on their own
computers. This way they can share and create tags in a common database and still use VUE
files. The VUE file is limited to a single user at a time due to the nature of the file, thus, for best
performance, each user should have his own copy of a VUE file. The SmartPlant Review
Publisher product is a convenient tool for distributing VUE files to users. For more information
about VUE files and how to create them, see Save As VUE File (on page 149).
74
For other users to be able to share your project (MDB) and label (MDB2) databases, you
must give those users:
Read/write permissions to the folder where the databases are stored.
Read/write permissions to the databases themselves.
Read/write permissions to any necessary palette and material files.

If performance appears sluggish while sharing a database over the network, modify the
registry entry for the Microsoft Jet database PageTimeout setting to a value less than the
default 5 seconds (for example, 1/2 second). Some users have found that this default value
adversely impacts performance for frequent database access. Reducing this value may
improve performance. Any changes to the registry are at your own risk. For more
information, see Performance Tips (on page 551).
75
76
SECTION 6
Performance Control
View > Toolbars > Performance Control
The Performance Control toolbar provides settings for SmartPlant Review that enable you to
move faster through the model or improve the static model display. There are five preset options
you can use to select the best balance of motion performance and image quality. You can set
performance for each project you open in SmartPlant Review.
General Behavior
If you open the Performance Control toolbar before you open a project, the toolbar opens
in an inactive state and becomes active once you click anywhere on the control.
The Performance Control toolbar, when opened for the first time in a project, evaluates the
current project settings and selects a preset option where the setting values match to those
of the project. If no match exists, then the default toolbar option is Balanced.
When you use the toolbar in a project, its option setting as well as its size, position and
expanded state are saved and restored the next time the project is opened.
Any settings that were made in the project and not made using the toolbar are denoted in
the expanded Details section.
When you release the slider, the settings are automatically set to the selected option.
You can use the toolbar to set an option before you open a project. This can help you when
you are opening large project models. You can set the option to Performance so that the
model opens faster.
Performance Control Options

The Performance Control toolbar contains five preset options that define specific visual and
performance settings for SmartPlant Review.
Optimal Quality Settings for the best visual effects, but slowest performance.
High Quality Settings for very good visual effects settings. The performance may be slow.
Balanced (Default) Settings for the best balance of visual quality and performance
High Performance Settings for fast performance with acceptable visual quality.
Optimal Performance Settings for the fastest possible performance with the lowest visual
quality.
Details - Click the Hide/Show Details button to toggle the list of visual and performance
settings affected by the selected option. When shown, the detail section is a read-only display
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
77
Performance Control
that shows the state of a setting for the option. Most of these settings are On/Off, but some have
values or specific modes.
78
A dashed line "-" in the State column indicates that the setting for the selected option is not
applicable.
An asterisk "*" in the State column along with red text indicates that the setting for the
preset option does not match what is set in the current project. When you release the mouse
from the slider or use keyboard control keys, the setting state or value is changed in the
project to match what is defined for the selected performance option.
You can see the different values for settings as you move the slider to each option. In the
figure below, you see the settings change for certain values when you move from the
Balanced option to the High Quality option.
Performance Control
In addition, when you change a setting in the SmartPlant Review project, if it differs from the
defined setting of the option, it will show in red with an asterisk beside the state value. For
example, the High Performance option requires the Measurements setting to be turned off.
However, if you turn Measurements on as you are working in the project (View > Settings >
Display > Activate > Measurements) and then open the Performance Control toolbar, this
setting will display with an asterisk and red text to show that it does not match the setting
needed by the High Performance option.
Once you select High Performance and release the mouse, the Measurements setting will
automatically be set to Off.
Use the Performance Control

1. Select View > Toolbars > Performance Control.
If this is your first time to open the toolbar, it is set to either Balanced or to an option that
matches your project settings.
79
Performance Control
2. Click the Hide/Show Details button to see the SmartPlant Review motion and display
settings affected by the preset options.
3. Select the slider and drag it to the option you want to use.
As you move the slider over an option, the list of settings (when expanded) interactively
changes to indicate if a setting for the preset option matches what is set in the current
project. Settings that are different between the current project and the selected slider option
display in red text and have an asterisk"*" in the State column.
4. When you release the mouse button, the display and motion setting values defined for the
selected option are automatically set in the current project.
The asterisk is removed from the State column and the text changes to black. SmartPlant
Review changes the model display accordingly.
5. You can close the Performance Control toolbar, or you can leave it open as you work in the
model.
You can click in the State and Setting column headings to change the display order.
The keyboard arrows, Home, End, Page Up and Page Down keys can also be used to
set the performance slider position. When you press the key, the settings are changed
to those defined for the selected option and are applied to the current project.
As you continue working in the model, you can make changes to any of the display and motion
project settings; however, these changes are not reflected back into the Performance Control
toolbar until you click on the Performance Control toolbar. Conversely, changes made using the
Performance Control toolbar do immediately override motion and display settings, and the
changes are shown in the project (command dialog boxes).
80
SECTION 7
Opening a Model
Allows you to select the model that you want to view using SmartPlant Review. If there is
already an open model, SmartPlant Review closes that model and then opens the new one.
SmartPlant Review automatically upgrades any databases in previous versions to the current
version the first time you open the project. You can open a model from a command line prompt.
The model must exist in a format that SmartPlant Review can interpret. This format usually has
a DRI extension and consists of ASCII text. However, you can select PVI files, VUE files, SVF
files, or any model file (such as, DGN, or PRP files).
To view AVEVA PDMS RVM, AutoCAD DWG, or ACIS SAT models, you must first
publish the files using SmartPlant Review Publisher. You can then open the resulting VUE file in
SmartPlant Review. For more information, see the SmartPlant Review Publisher User's Guide.
The DRI, PVI, SVF, and VUE files display automatically in the Files of Type field. In addition,
SmartPlant Review VUE Files as SVF Files filter displays only VUE files that can be added to
create an SVF project.
You can select multiple SmartPlant Review VUE files to create a new SVF project. The SVF
project allows graphic objects from multiple SmartPlant Review VUE files and their attribute data
in the corresponding XML or DRV data files to be reviewed in a single runtime session. For any
duplicated SmartPlant 3D or SmartMarine 3D object data, the data from the most recent file
loaded will display. Operational behavior with SVF projects is similar to, but not exactly the same
as, running SmartPlant Review in streaming mode. For more information, see Using SmartPlant
Review in Streaming Mode (on page 417).
Open a Model File (on page 82)

Open Model from Command Line (on page 88)
Use the Search Path (on page 89)
Adjust Index Allocation for Large Datasets (on page 91)
81
Opening a Model
Open a Model File
If you are running in interactive licensing mode and SmartPlant Review cannot obtain
enough licenses at start up, a "not enough licenses available" error message displays and
SmartPlant Review shuts down. Before SmartPlant Review can run, you must free enough
currently in-use licenses to cover the modules you want to run, or you must use the Select
Modules utility to unselect the modules for which you cannot currently obtain a license.
Select Licenses for Modules (on page 544)
When running SmartPlant Review in remote license mode, the license and expiration
information are burned into the local SmartPlant product executable. Each time you start
SmartPlant Review during the checkout period, a message displays the expiration date for
the checked out licenses.
When the checkout period for the license expires, SmartPlant Review returns to interactive
licensing mode the next time you start the product. For example, after the license expires at
11:59PM on the expiration date, the next time you start SmartPlant Review, it attempts to
access the licensing server for base and module licenses prior to running.
1. Click File > Open.
If you are opening a model that already has project databases associated with
it (that is, you have opened the model in a previous version of SmartPlant Review), we
recommend that you allow SmartPlant Review to re-create these databases when you first
open your model in this version of the product.
2. In the Open dialog box, browse to the model file that you want to open.
3. In the Files of Type list, select the model file, and then click Open. The Create Project
dialog box appears if the model is being opened in SmartPlant Review for the first time or if
the project and/or label databases have been deleted.
Use the SmartPlant Review VUE Files as SVF Files filter to display only VUE files
that can be added to create an SVF project.
4. On the Database tab of the Create Project dialog box, browse to or type a location for the
Project Schema and Label Schema files.
Database Tab (Create Project Dialog Box) (on page 84)
5. Type a name and ID in the Site Name and Site ID boxes.
The site name and site ID provide identification information for the project. This
information is stored in the project database. Defining specific site names and IDs can help
your administrator identify where the data in the project database comes from.
6. Check the Single label database option if you want to create a single database for an SVF
project. The option is enabled only if it is an SVF project containing VUE files created by a
SmartPlant 3D application. If the option is left unchecked, multiple label databases are
created.
7. On the Options tab, specify the DRI parameters for large plant monuments options for
opening PDS documents in SmartPlant Review.
Options Tab (Create Project Dialog Box) (on page 85)
8. On the Options tab, specify the DGN file elements options for opening MicroStation
documents and PDS projects containing MicroStation .DGN files.
82
Be sure to choose the options that you want. The only way to set these options again is
to delete the project database files (.MDB and .MDB2) and then re-open the model file
Opening a Model
to create a new project database file. You also can change the name of the model file to
start over with a new name.
Because of the coordinate differences between the two formats, data such as display
sets, tags, and saved views are not guaranteed to be valid if you switch from large plant
monument format to regular format.
9. If you are opening a SmartPlant 3D .VUE file or a local SmartPlant 3D .SVF project, specify
the paths to the files requested on the SmartPlant 3D tab.
SmartPlant 3D Tab (Create Project Dialog Box) (on page 87)
10. Click OK to save the project settings.
You can change the path (folder location) to the project databases, but you cannot change
the names of the databases. The names are based on the name of the model document.
If SmartPlant Review encounters a bad element, a message appears in the text view
indicating that the software found an element of a particular geometric type. The message
also gives the block and byte location of the element in the DGN file. You can use a tool
such as MicroStation EDG to repair many bad elements.
If you do not have a SET file defining the large plant monument settings or construction text
settings, you can define it during the initial read-in of the initial database creation by
selecting the Options tab on the Create Project dialog box.
SmartPlant Review does extensive range validation on geometric elements in DGN files.
Elements that are off the design plane are considered bad elements. To accommodate large
plant monument data, the current validation range is the large plant monument point, if one
exists, plus or minus 4294967294 units of resolution (UOR). SmartPlant Review alerts you to
the problem element with a message in the Text view. You can log Text view messages to a
text file for later review.
Settings for large plant monument and construction text that exist in the SET file are read in
and used in database creation upon initial read-in to SmartPlant Review. These settings
include ignore_dri_old_new_origin, ignore_dri_transform, and ignore_construction_text.
In the standard SmartPlant Review product, there is no longer a limit on the large plant
monument range. However, if you use the API to recall saved views, the maximum new
origin is the range -2147483647 to +2147483648. You can bypass this limitation with the API
by getting the eye and center point information directly from the database after you save any
changes to views in the current session.
Create Project Dialog Box

Displays when you open a model for the first time, allowing you to set several options for the
project databases (MDB and MDB2 files). After setting the options on the Create Project dialog
box, you cannot change these options unless you delete the existing project databases and
re-open the original file.
When you review MicroStation or PDS projects (especially those containing Large
Plant Monument settings), it is especially important to set these options when the Create
Project dialog box opens because these options appear only on the Create Project > Options
tab. If you do not set these options when you first open the model files in SmartPlant Review,
you must delete the newly created databases (MDB and MDB2) and re-open the model files to
access the Create Project dialog box again.
83
Opening a Model
See Also
Database Tab (Create Project Dialog Box) (on page 84)
Options Tab (Create Project Dialog Box) (on page 85)
SmartPlant 3D Tab (Create Project Dialog Box) (on page 87)
Database Tab (Create Project Dialog Box)

Allows you to specify database information for the project that you are creating. The following
options apply to all model files being opened for review.
Name - Displays the name of the database associated with the project. The name is based on
the DRI, DGN, or VUE document name. This box is read-only. When you use the Create
Project dialog box to create a project database, the path and base file name of the database
are always the same as the path and base file name of the project file. From the Create Project
dialog box, you cannot change the name of the database unless you change the base name of
the project file. If you change the name of the document, the Create Project dialog box appears
again, allowing you to create a new database. To create or use a database in a remote location,
click Browse and navigate to that location. For more information, see Share the Project
Database Over the Network (on page 74).
Project schema - Displays the name of the project schema file. The schema file defines the
layout of tables in the database. Click Browse to select another project schema file. Although
the schema file is a text file, you should not edit it.
Label schema - Displays the name of the label schema file. The label schema file defines the
table layout in the label database. Click Browse to select another label schema file. Although
the label schema file is a text file, you should not edit it.
Site name - Sets the site name. The site name is stored in the site table and helps you to
identify the database or its origin. This fact is helpful if you want information from different sites
for activities, such as merging tables or tags.
Site ID - Sets an abbreviation for the site name identifier. You can type a maximum of four
letters or numbers in this box.
84
Opening a Model
Single label database - Allows the user to create a single label database for an SVF project.
The option is enabled only if it is an SVF project containing VUE files created by a SmartPlant
3D application. If left unchecked, multiple label databases are created.
Options Tab (Create Project Dialog Box)

Allows you to specify project-level options for the project that you are creating, including the
transformation and range of the geometry when a Large Plant Monument point is present in the
DRI file. These options also can affect the range of the model, impacting Fit and other
SmartPlant Review operations for MicroStation and PDS projects.
DRI file parameters for PDS large plant monument options - Large plant monuments are
translated from PDS to SmartPlant Review in the .DRI file using the old_origin and new_origin
entries. To use the new_origin and transform settings in the .DRI file, select both the Use
transform and Use old and new origin options. With these settings, coordinate readouts will
be translated as specified by the large plant monument point in the .DRI. The translation point
shifts the model coordinates by the specified large plant monument delta. To ignore the large
plant monument and keep the coordinate readouts the same as the MicroStation coordinate
readouts, clear both the Use transform and Use old and new origin boxes.
Use transform - Not implemented at this time.
Use old and new origin - Uses the old and new origin for PDS projects if the PDS project
contains a defined large plant monument. The old origin is the reference point for the rotation
and is used to translate coordinates prior to rotation, if any. The new origin translates the model
coordinates post rotation. Either origin may be defined as (0,0,0), implying no translation.
For example, a coordinate point will be modified as follows when you select this option:
1. point = point - old origin (in other words, the old origin is the reference point for the
rotation or simply the coordinate about which the model is rotated)
2. point = transform * point (if a transform matrix is defined and is not an identity matrix)
3. point = point + new origin (results in a translation point)
85
Opening a Model
Keep construction text - Uses the construction text in the model. For better view manipulation,
do not check this option if you have placed construction text at extreme points in the
MicroStation model or PDS project.
Keep lines and line strings - Uses the lines and lines strings in the MicroStation model or PDS
project. The model display rate is slower when this option is used, depending on the number of
lines or line strings in the model.
Keep named views - Keeps any named views found in the MicroStation design file.
MicroStation can save named views to DGN files. If you turn on this option, you can read the
named views automatically as Save/Recall views in SmartPlant Review. If there is not an
available group, the software creates a new group called Named views from dgn files in which to
save the DGN file named view. The software saves named views from DGN files the first time
that they are encountered. If the named view exists, it is not overwritten during subsequent
sessions. Because of this, any edits that you make in SmartPlant Review to the views are
preserved.
Use bright default colors - Uses a non-gamma corrected color table. Traditionally SmartPlant
Review darkened the file color table with a gamma correction. Now, you can choose the
traditional darker colors or use a non-gamma corrected color table. The non-gamma corrected
color table is typically much brighter and looks more like MicroStation colors. Turn on this option
to use the newer brighter colors. Turn this option off to use the darker colors as in previous
versions of the software.
86
Because of the coordinate differences between the two formats, data such as display sets,
tags, and saved views are not guaranteed to be valid if you switch from large plant
monument format to regular format.
Settings for large plant monument and construction text that exist in the SET file are read in
and used in database creation upon initial read-in to SmartPlant Review. These settings
include ignore_dri_old_new_origin, ignore_dri_transform, and ignore_construction_text.
If you do not have a SET file defining the large plant monument settings or construction text
settings, you can define it during the initial read-in of the initial database creation by
selecting the Options tab on the Create Project dialog box.
Opening a Model
SmartPlant 3D Tab (Create Project Dialog Box)

When you open a SmartPlant 3D VUE file or a local SmartPlant 3D SVF project, the SmartPlant
3D tab displays on the Create Project dialog box, allowing you to specify the location of all the
files required by SmartPlant Review to create the project label database (MDB2) from the
project's SP3D.xml file (or files for local SVF projects).
Schema - Specifies the P3DComponent.xml file, which is required to obtain the property
definitions and to decipher the contents of the label files published from SmartPlant 3D. The
system defaults to the file in the current project directory, if it exists. Otherwise, the file in the
product directory is used.
The P3DComponent.xml file contains properties that may never be published by
SmartPlant 3D. Therefore, some labels in the list may not actually pertain to SmartPlant Review.
Map components to disciplines - Specifies the MapComponentsToDisciplines.txt file location,
which is required by SmartPlant Review to build the label database and determine which
SmartPlant 3D components belong to which SmartPlant Review disciplines. If no path is
specified, it will, by default, use the file in the current project directory. Otherwise, the file in the
directory where SmartPlant Review is installed is used.
The MapComponentsToDisciplines.txt is also used by SmartPlant 3D when creating VUE
files to organize the graphic data into SmartPlant Review disciplines. If that version is different
from the one delivered with SmartPlant Review or SmartPlant Review Publisher, then it must be
copied to the specified location for SmartPlant Review to use also. If not, then SmartPlant
Review may not operate correctly with the label data.
Relationship mapping - Allows you to select the RelationshipMapping.txt file location, which is
required by SmartPlant Review to build the label database using the specified SmartPlant 3D
component relationships. Defaults to the file in the current project directory, if it exists.
Otherwise, the file in the product directory is used instead.
The RelationshipMapping.txt is used only by SmartPlant Review or SmartPlant Review
Publisher when creating the label database (.mdb2). There is no corresponding SmartPlant 3D
87
Opening a Model
version of this file. However, if the SmartPlant 3D data relationships change, a new version of
this file may be needed.
Optional label template file - Allows you to select a label template file (SPRSP3dLabels.bin) to
use while creating the label database (.mdb2) file for your project. The settings you specify using
this dialog box are saved in this file so that you can retrieve them each time you open or publish
the project or to use as a template each time you set up a project for publication. Defaults to the
file in the current project directory, if it exists. Otherwise, the file in the product directory is used
instead.
You may have only one label template file per project. This file must be named
SPRSP3dLabels.bin.
If a label template file is not in the specified project directory, then SmartPlant Review uses
the default template file. You can edit the default template file using the SmartPlant 3D Label
Selector utility.
You must re-create the label database (re-open or re-publish the project) each time you
want to change the set of labels available in the published project.
See Also
View Multiple VUE Files in a Single Session (on page 423)
Viewing SmartPlant 3D Data (see "Viewing SmartPlant 3D Model Data" on page 159)
Open Model from Command Line

You can start SmartPlant Review from a command line prompt.
Syntax:
SPR.exe [input file] [-a] [-c (y|n)] [-d] [-e (y|n)] [-f (y|n)] [-g (y|n)]
[-h (y|n)] [-i database file name] [-j database schema file name] [-k
database site name] [-l log file name] [-n database site id] [-o] [-p label
schema file name] [-q value] [-r value] [-s] [-t]
Where:
88
-a
Uses PDS area corner clip coordinates from the

.DRI file.
-c (y|n)
Keeps construction text.
-d
Specifies that the design file is being input.
-e (y|n)
Uses DRI file transform.
-f (y|n)
Uses DRI file old and new origin.
-g (y|n)
Turns on (y) or off (n) the use of Software GL.

This option allows you to use the Microsoft
generic software OpenGL implementation
instead of a specialized hardware video driver.
Use this option only as a last resort if there are
problems with the hardware video accelerator.
This option should be necessary only for video
accelerators that do not allow you to turn off
hardware acceleration. Most video accelerators
allow you to control this option from Control
Opening a Model
Panel > Display program.
-h (y|n)
Keeps lines and line strings.
-i [database full path

Specifies the project database file name.
file name]
-j [database schema
file name]
Specifies the project database schema file

name.
-k [database site name] Specifies the project database site name field.
-l [log file name]
Writes text window data to a log file using [log

file name].
-n [database site id]
Specifies the project database site id field,

limited to field size in schema.
-o
Turns range rejection off. This option will

override SET file or database settings.
-p [label schema file

name]
Specifies the file name for the label schema.
-q [integer value]
Specifies the subsequent index allocation in

pages. We recommend a value of -q 20.
-r [integer value]
Specifies the initial index allocation in pages. We

recommend 50 pages per MB of design data.
-s
Uses default settings (not the options currently in

SET file).
-t
Skips loading of textures for this session. If you

use this flag, you cannot view textures for the
entire session.
-?
Displays this usage statement.
Use the Search Path

The Search Path defines where the related DGN files are stored for your project. This feature
allows you to store model files and label data files in a folder other than where the project files
are stored. Multiple users sharing the same design data will find this feature useful.
The Search Path is defined in the SmartPlant Review interface (DRI) file. To use the Search
Path feature with your own projects, edit the DRI file with a text editor such as Notepad.
SmartPlant Review looks for design and label files in the folders defined in the DRI file
dgn_search_path entry. Use a semicolon (;) to separate multiple paths. For example:
dgn_search_path{d:\samples\dgndata\example;e:\projects\example;c:\dgnfi
les}
SmartPlant Review first searches for the file name as specified in the DRI file. If the file name is
not found, it then looks for the file in the project folder (where the DRI file resides), and then
searches in the list of folders in the order given in the path entry. SmartPlant Review reads the
first file found and stops the search.
SmartPlant Review assumes that the label file is in the same folder as the project file.
89
Opening a Model
Defining the Search Path is not the same as defining the search paths to the pattern,
palette, or bump map files associated with your project. To define the search paths to these
files, use the Search Path dialog box.
Search Path Dialog Box

Allows you to specify the paths to the palette, pattern, or bump map files associated with your
project. The Search Path dialog box appears while SmartPlant Review is opening your project
file for the first time if it cannot find, in the Search Path, the patterns or bump maps assigned to
the model.
Directory - Allows you to specify a folder containing the pattern or bump map file that you are
assigning to the current object.
Browse - Allows you to specify a different folder.
Search Path - Displays the folders currently in the search path and allows you to add and
remove folders, and to re-order the list of folders.
Add - Adds the current folder to the bottom of the search path list of folders to use for searching
for pattern or bump map files.
Delete - Removes the selected folder from the search path list of folders to use for searching for
pattern or bump map files.
Move Up - Moves the selected folder up one level in the search path list of folders. SmartPlant
Review searches first for folders listed closer to the top. You can find patterns and bump maps
faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list.
Move Down - Moves the selected folder down one level in the search path list of folders.
SmartPlant Review searches last for folders listed closer to the bottom. You can find patterns
and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list.
90
Setting the Home View
Adjust Index Allocation for Large Datasets

When you work with large datasets, you can improve the performance of your computer by
adjusting the Index allocation. Use the following command-line modifiers to adjust the Index
allocation:
-r specifies that the initial index allocation is in pages of 4096 bytes-per-page.
-q specifies that the subsequent index allocation is in pages of 4096 bytes-per-page.
The initial -r allocation is executed when the master index is created just before the design data
is read in. Any additional allocations will use the -q argument for additional indexes to allocate
(for example: SPR.exe -r 15000 -q 20). The previous example command sets up 15,000 pages
for indexes. Additional indexes are available in 20-page increments.
Recommendations
Estimate 50 pages (r and q units) per MB of SmartPlant Review data.

Set the -r allocation up much higher than the -q allocation. Use this feature cautiously as
you do not want to waste memory.
The default values are -r 75, -q 20 if these options are not used on the command line. This
size should accommodate smaller models like the Example model delivered with SmartPlant
Review.
See Also
Share the Project Database Over the Network (on page 74)
Understanding Projects and Project Databases (on page 71)

SmartPlant Review provides a Home feature that enables you to either return to the default
top-right isometric view of your model, or to a custom home view. Your custom home view is
only available in the current work session.
The near and far clipping planes are always reset to zero (or none) when you click
Home, or press the H key
Access the Home View

Click Default View or Home
on the 3D Navigator at any time to return to the home view.
Create a Custom Home View

You can create a customized home view in SmartPlant Review for the current work session.
1. Set up the view you want to use in the main window.
2. Press CTRL and click Home
on the 3D Navigator.
This custom view displays each time you click Home

in the current work session. The
home view (default or custom) is saved in the project database upon a successful close,
save or exit operation in SmartPlant Review.
91

Reset to the Default View
To reset a customized home view back to the original default view, press SHIFT+CTRL and
click Home
.
You can also use the keyboard to perform the above Home functionality.
Press H to return to the default view.
Press CTRL+H to create a custom home view.
Press CTRL+SHIFT+H to reset a customized home view back to the original default
home view in the current work session.
92
SECTION 8
Using 3D Navigation
SmartPlant Review provides navigation controls that enable you to move through your 3D
dataset using today's popular gaming-style navigation techniques. You can quickly explore all
objects and spaces within your model to get a better understanding of the model design. The
gaming-style navigation is referred to as 3D navigation.
In addition, for users already comfortable with navigation in previous versions of SmartPlant
Review (version 2008 and earlier), the classic navigation controls are still available. The
SmartPlant Review interface actually offers the best of both worlds by enabling you to use
classic and gaming-style navigation methods.
You can also use the classic motion commands in conjunction with the gaming-style navigation
controls. For example, you can use the Pan command and then click controls on the 3D
Navigator to move in or out. Pan mode is not disabled, so when you stop using the 3D
Navigation controls, you are immediately back to the classic panning motion.
3D Navigation Controls
Select navigation controls that are most comfortable or familiar to you. To access
navigation-specific help at any time, press Q or click the Help control
in the 3D Navigator.
To access additional product help, press F1 or go to the Help menu.
93
Using 3D Navigation
Use the 3D Navigator (on page 99)
Use Keyboard Controls
Arrow keys as well as the gaming standard W (Move In), A (Left), S (Move Out) and D (Right)
are supported.
Use Mouse Controls (Fly Mode)

Press F to enable Fly mode. You have the option to use just your mouse for navigation or use
keyboard + mouse combinations.
94
Using 3D Navigation
Application-Specific Information
The 3D Navigation component is integrated into the following Intergraph Process, Power &
Marine applications:
SmartPlant Review
SmartPlant 3D, SmartMarine 3D
SmartPlant Construction
SmartPlant Markup Plus
Any information or behavior that is specific to an application is noted. If your application is not
listed, then there is no additional information.
See Graphics Card Information for the basic requirements needed for 3D navigation.
You can press and hold the 3D Navigator Look and Move controls for continuous motion.
Press and hold the center Move control

on/off the view window.
to drag the 3D Navigator to a different location
Use Keyboard-Only 3D Navigation

You can use the keys below for 3D navigation. The keyboard can be used at all times to move
through the model data set.
The use of WASD keys offers an ergonomic solution when used in conjunction with a
right-handed mouse.
To...
Use...
Open quick-help to get

information on 3D navigation
controls
Move in
Move left
Move out
Move right
Move up
Move down
To move or walk through your model in a first-person perspective. Press and hold the
designated direction key. Move left and right is a sidestepping motion.
To...
Use...
Move forward and left.
W+A
Move forward and right
W+D
Move backward and left
S+A
Move backward and right
S+D
95
Using 3D Navigation
Walk at various angles through your model. Hold down the desired two direction keys
simultaneously.
To...
Use...
Look up
Look left
Look down
Look right
Look around the model as if you were turning your head. Simply move the mouse up/down,
left/right from the crosshair point.
To...
Use...
Return to the default,

isometric home view of your
model
Create your own custom

home view
CTRL+H
Reset a customized home

view back to the original
default home view
CTRL+SHIF
T+H
Press the H key if you are 'lost' in the model or need to return to the default model view.
Use Mouse Only or Mouse + Keyboard Combinations

(Fly Mode)
Fly mode offers a fluid, first-person movement in any direction within your model. In Fly mode
operation, use your mouse to look around as well as work in conjunction with your keyboard for
motion in all directions. You change the viewing direction with the mouse and move around with
the keyboard.
By using mouse-only or mouse + keyboard controls, you can:
Look 360 degrees around from a stationary point.
Travel through your model and move up/down stairs and ramps
Move sideways in a sidestepping motion.
Move up and down to change your elevation.
When you are in Fly mode, your cursor changes to a crosshair that is located at the center
of your view window. When you exit Fly mode, the cursor changes back to its original
pointer.
The motion in 3D navigation is always view independent. Motion settings set using the
classic navigation commands are not applied when you are using 3D navigation.
SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D Fly Mode Information
When you exit Fly mode, right-click or press ESC twice to exit 3D navigation.
96
Using 3D Navigation
SmartPlant Construction Fly Mode Information
To encircle or rotate around a selected object, use the SmartPlant Construction Encircle Model
command in the Toolbox. In SmartPlant Construction, you will not be able to use the left-mouse
drag operation to encircle objects.
Fly mode actions:

To...
Use...
Open quick-help to get

information on 3D
navigation
Enter/Exit Fly mode
F (Toggle to enter/exit)
Exit fly mode, cancel all fly

mode operations
F again (Toggle on/off), ESC or

right-click
Turn on/off crosshair
X (Toggle on/off)
Enter and exit fly mode to use mouse and keyboard combination navigation controls.
To...
Use...
Move in
Mouse Wheel Forward -or- W
Move in (factor of 2)
Middle Mouse Button/Wheel Click
Move left
Move out
Mouse Wheel Backward -or- S
Move out (factor of 2)
SHIFT + Middle Mouse Button/Wheel

Click
Move right
Move up
Move down
C
Walk through your model in the direction of the crosshair. Roll the middle mouse wheel
forward and back, or press and hold the designated WASD key. A left or right move is a
sidestepping motion.
A middle mouse click moves you halfway in to your target point. Use SHIFT + middle mouse
click to move back out the distance of the eye point from the target. The perspective angle
does not change.
To...
Use...
Move in and left.
W + A -or- Mouse Wheel Forward + A
Move in and right
W + D -or- Mouse Wheel Forward + D
Move out and left
S + A -or- Mouse Wheel Backward + A
Move out and right
S + D -or- Mouse Wheel Backward + D
97
Using 3D Navigation
Move left/right/up/down
Middle Mouse Drag
Walk at various angles through your model. Roll the mouse wheel forward and backward
while holding down the designated direction key. Or, hold down the desired two direction
keys simultaneously.
In a key combination move, if you release one directional key, you still continue moving
in the direction of the other key.
Press and hold the middle mouse button to side-step left or right. This enables you to move
the model without changing the direction in which you are looking.
To...
Use...
Look up
I -or- Mouse Move Forward
Look left
J -or- Mouse Move Left
Look down
K -or- Mouse Move Backward
Look right
L -or- Mouse Move Right
Look around the model as if you were turning your head. Simply move the mouse up/down,
left/right from the crosshair point.
To...
Use...
Return to the default view

of your model
Create your own custom

home view
CTRL+H
Reset a customized home

view back to the original
default home view
CTRL+SHIFT+H
Press the H key if you are 'lost' in the model or need to get back to a known view.
To...
Use...
Select or De-select objects
Left mouse - double click
Encircle or rotate around

an object
Left mouse - press and hold
When rotating around an object, the encircle point is the current center point; not the center of
the selected object.
98
Using 3D Navigation
Use the 3D Navigator

The 3D Navigator tool supports the common navigation movements you can perform with the
mouse and keyboard such as look and move.
SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D Navigator Information
To start 3D navigation in SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D applications, press Ctrl+Shift+F or
click Navigate View
on the main toolbar.
The Select button

on the 3D Navigator is not available. To select an object, navigate to
the required location in your model and click Navigate View to disable 3D navigation. Use
the Select command on the SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D toolbar to select objects. Use
SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D commands to perform required operations.
When you right-click to end fly mode, right-click again to exit 3D navigation.
The Close button on the 3D Navigator removes it from the display. You can still use the
keyboard for navigation.
3D Navigator Controls
Quick Help - Displays help specific to 3D navigation.

Home (Default View) - Returns to the startup view of the model. See Return to Default View
(on page 100). You can also create your own home view. See Create a Custom Home View
(on page 100).
99
Using 3D Navigation
Fly Mode - Enters Fly mode where you use the mouse and/or keyboard to interactively
move and look through the model. When you are in Fly mode, the 3D Navigator does not
display. You can press F or ESC to exit Fly mode. The 3D Navigator then displays at its last
position. See Enter Fly Mode (on page 101).
Look - Changes your view direction as if you were turning your head. You can look around
in all directions. See Look Around (on page 101).
Move In/Out - Takes you closer to or further away from model objects.
Move (Up/Down/Left/Right) - Changes your position in the model at the crosshair cursor
level as if you are 'walking' around in the model. You can move in any direction. See Move
(on page 101).
Fit - Places all visible elements in the view window if no objects are currently selected. If any
objects are selected, the control zooms to the selected objects. See Fit to Object(s) (on page
102).
Select - Turns Select mode on and off (not available in the SmartPlant and SmartMarine
applications).
Once you move your cursor off of the 3D Navigator, it fades into a transparent shadow so that it
does not distract from the current view. The 3D Navigator reappears when you move the cursor
back over it. You can select and move the 3D Navigator to place it wherever you want in or out
of your view window. To use the 3D Navigator, just click on the desired action. A single click
causes short movements while a click + hold action on the look and move controls enables you
to move continuously.
While you are using 3D Navigator controls, you can use the following mouse operations:
Mouse wheel forward/backward
Middle-mouse drag to move sideways and up/down in the model.
You can also use the keyboard in conjunction with the 3D Navigator to move in one direction
while looking in another. This can simulate walking through the plant as you are looking on
either side.
The 3D Navigator controls are synchronized with the mouse and keyboard movements to
display the current move or look action. For example, if you are pressing W to move in, the
Move In button in the 3D Navigator is highlighted.
When you are in Fly mode, the 3D Navigator does not display.
Return to Default View

Click the Default View or Home control
isometric view of your model.
at any time to return to the default top-right
Create a Custom Home View

You can also create your own home view by pressing CTRL and clicking Home
.
To reset a customized home view back to the original default view, press SHIFT+CTRL and
click Home
.
100
From the keyboard:

Press H to return to the default view.
Press CTRL+H to create a custom home view.
Press CTRL+SHIFT+H to reset a customized home view back to the original default
home view.
Using 3D Navigation
SmartPlant Review Customized Home View
You can create a customized home view in SmartPlant Review, which can be saved and used in
subsequent work sessions.
Enter Fly Mode

You can start Fly mode from the 3D Navigator by clicking the Fly Mode control
SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D Fly Mode Information
When you exit Fly mode, right-click or press ESC twice to exit 3D navigation.
You can also press the F key to start fly mode.

Once you enter Fly mode, the 3D Navigator no longer displays. Use your mouse and
keyboard to move around through the model.
To exit Fly mode, right-click, press F again or press ESC. The cursor changes back to its
original icon and the 3D Navigator displays.
In Fly mode, your cursor changes to a crosshair that is located at the center of your view
window.
Look Around
Press and hold any of the four Look controls to continuously look or turn in that direction as if
you were turning your head. Use the Look control in the 3D Navigator to look around from your
current position in the model.
Move
Move vs. Zoom: a Move operation changes the eye point as you get closer or further from the
target. A Zoom operation is a perspective angle change.
Use the Move controls in the 3D Navigator to walk smoothly in left/right/up/down directions.
Use Move In/Out controls to get closer to or further away from model objects. The
perspective angle does not change during a move operation.
Press and hold any of the Move controls to continuously move in that direction.
As you move through the model, the closer you get to your target, the slower the movement
rate becomes. The further away from the target, the faster the movement rate.
The Move operations enable you to move through solid objects such as walls, doors and
slabs.
101
Using 3D Navigation
Select an Object
Click Select
as you navigate around your model to select an object.
SmartPlant Construction Select Information
To encircle or rotate around a selected object, use the SmartPlant Construction Encircle Model
command in the Common Tools toolbox.
SmartPlant Markup Plus Select Information
A question mark icon displays to indicate the QuickPick feature is enabled. Use QuickPick to
select an object in a dense or crowded area. Each of the numbers in the QuickPick tool
corresponds to an object in the area and is highlighted when you select the number.
SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D Select Information

When an object is selected, press and hold the left mouse button to encircle or rotate
around the object. The encircle point is the current center point; not the center of the
selected object(s).
Select mode stays active until you click the Select control in the 3D Navigator.
You can use the CTRL key to select multiple objects.
SmartPlant Review Select Information

Click Select in the 3D Navigator to enable the SmartPlant Review Auto-Highlight mode.
When you select an object, it remains highlighted until you select another object or press
ESC.
Select mode/Auto-Highlight stays active until you select any other Mouse Drag mode.
Fit to Object(s)
The Fit tool places all visible objects in the active view if no objects are currently selected. If any
objects are selected, the command zooms to the selected elements. Because the display is
adjusted independently of the current view orientation, the objects in that display area are not
clipped when performing rotate operations.
In addition, the Fit tool zooms or fits to any objects that were selected before running 3D
navigation.
SmartPlant Review Fit Behavior
In SmartPlant Review, the Navigator Fit command is a conditional fit. It performs a fit based on
the objects that are selected.
1. Fits to the selected object.
2. Fits to selected item(s) in the SmartPlant Review Project Manager.
3. Fits to the whole model and any visible objects.
102
Using 3D Navigation
4. Select one or more objects in the current view.
5. Click Fit
on the 3D Navigator.
The system flies to the selected objects.
If no objects are selected, the system fits all objects into the current view.
You can also perform a SHIFT + Fit operation that enables you to view the entire
selected object within the current window size. Any rotation operations later performed
in that view do not clip the selected object.
6. When you perform a Fit operation, you can continue selecting other objects as well as
moving from the fitted location.
3D Navigation Tips
Motion Tips
As you move through the model, the closer you get to your target, the slower the movement
rate becomes. The further away from the target, the faster the movement rate.
The Move operations enable you to move through solid objects such as walls, doors and
slabs.
Press ESC to end a navigation operation.
To make small left/right/up/down movements, click and hold the middle mouse button as
you move in the desired direction. It can sometimes be difficult to make small movements
with the mouse and keyboard because the distance of motion for each key press is greater
than what is needed. This is especially true when you are close to objects within the 3D
model.
SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D Navigation Tips
The Navigate View command always sets the current tilt angle to 0 when it is enabled. The
system does not restore the previous tilt angle when 3D navigation is turned off. To get back to
the rotated view you were using before entering 3D navigation, select View menu > Previous
View.
Fine Tuning/Customization
You can change the Repeat Delay and Repeat Rate keyboard settings to fine-tune your
keyboard motion during navigation. For more information, refer to your operating system's
documentation on setting keyboard properties.
Messages
The color scheme has been changed to [Windows Vista Basic/Windows 7]. A running
program isn't compatible with certain visual elements of windows. Click here for more
information.
Meaning: This message may display when you open a 3D model. To correctly display the
cross hair (in fly mode) as well as support all capabilities of this operating system, the
application automatically unchecks the Enable desktop composition setting. This setting is
in Control Panel > System > Advanced system settings > Advanced tab > Performance
Settings > Visual Effects.
103
Using 3D Navigation
104
Recovery: If you click to see more information on the message, the Windows information
dialog box displays. Check the Don't show me this again option if you do not want the
above message to display each time a 3D model is opened.
SECTION 9
Classic SmartPlant Review Navigation

SmartPlant Review allows you to move laterally and in a circular motion through a model and
view various points of interest.
You can use the classic motion commands in conjunction with the gaming-style navigation
controls. For example, as you use the 3D Navigator controls or WASD keyboard commands to
move, the view cone in the Plan and Elevation views reflects the movement and display area.
Motion Devices
SmartPlant Review provides three different options for moving around in the model: mouse,
keypad, and joystick.
The mouse allows you to move forward and back, pan left and right, pan up and down, and
rotate in the model. You can perform any of these options in any of the views, with the exception
of rotate. You can only use the mouse to rotate in the Main view. Options for a standard mouse,
as well as a Microsoft IntelliMouse pointing device are also provided with the software.
You can perform many common SmartPlant Review tasks quickly and easily with the function,
control, shortcut, and keypad keys on your keyboard. You can use the function keys, the F-keys
across the top of your keyboard, to execute functions, invoke dialog boxes, or modify functions.
Function key equivalents and modifier keys, if any, display next to commands on menus,
according to Microsoft Windows conventions. You also can use the function keys table to view
F-keys and their corresponding functions.
SmartPlant Review also supports standard Microsoft control key and shortcut functions. You can
access these options by pressing Ctrl, Alt, or Shift + a letter. Some of these options execute
functions, while others invoke forms, display dialog boxes, or modify window layouts of the three
dimensional model. You can view the control keys or shortcuts and their corresponding
functions on the standard control key table or the SmartPlant Review shortcut key table.
You can use the keypad keys to navigate around the model or to move a selected display set. A
list of keypad keys and their corresponding functions is provided.
You also can use a joystick to move around in your model. The joystick shares the same basic
speed control settings as the mouse and keypad. However, it is important to set the speed
setting to the proper value for the model. The speed setting determines the base rate of
movement (units per move) for dynamic motion, independent of update speed. Keypad and
joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting.
Motion Types
Continuous Step moves the eye point or display set through the model at a constant
rate and in a constant direction, using the keypad to steer. Motion continues even if
you provide no input. When Continuous Step is off, you move through the model
only by command from the mouse, keypad, or joystick. Continuous motion mode
allows you to use other commands while in motion.
You also can press 0 on the keypad to toggle continuous motion. The keypad 0
movement repeats the last keypad motion key up to the rate specified by the
Maximum moves per second option on the Motion Settings > Rates tab.
Continuous motion reverses direction after you complete a single step, then select
105

Continuous, and then toggle the step direction. However, Continuous motion does
not reverse direction if the last keypad motion before you toggled the step direction
was not a step.
Single Step repeats the last direction or rotation one step. You also can press the
period (.) on the keypad to move a single step as specified by Move on the Rates tab
of the Motion Settings dialog box.
Toggle Step Direction reverses the direction you are currently traveling. You can
toggle the step direction from forward/clockwise to backward/counter-clockwise and
back again. You also can press 5 on the keypad to toggle the step direction.
Configure Motion Settings

Motion > Settings
Displays the Motion Settings Dialog Box (on page 108), allowing you to specify the time for
screen updates, the shading mode, the keyboard motion, and the clipping planes. The Motion
Settings dialog box tabs also allow you to set up a joystick.
Motion Devices
SmartPlant Review provides three different options for moving around in the model: mouse,
keypad, and joystick.
The mouse allows you to move forward and back, pan left and right, pan up and down, and
rotate in the model. You can perform any of these options in any of the views, with the exception
of rotate. You can only use the mouse to rotate in the Main view. Options for a standard mouse,
as well as a Microsoft IntelliMouse pointing device are also provided with the software.
You can perform many common SmartPlant Review tasks quickly and easily with the function,
control, shortcut, and keypad keys on your keyboard. You can use the function keys, the F-keys
across the top of your keyboard, to execute functions, invoke dialog boxes, or modify functions.
according to Microsoft Windows conventions. You also can use the function keys table to view
F-keys and their corresponding functions.
SmartPlant Review also supports standard Microsoft control key and shortcut functions. You can
access these options by pressing Ctrl, Alt, or Shift + a letter. Some of these options execute
functions, while others invoke forms, display dialog boxes, or modify window layouts of the three
dimensional model. You can view the control keys or shortcuts and their corresponding
functions on the standard control key table or the SmartPlant Review shortcut key table.
You can use the keypad keys to navigate around the model or to move a selected display set. A
list of keypad keys and their corresponding functions is provided.
You also can use a joystick to move around in your model. The joystick shares the same basic
speed control settings as the mouse and keypad. However, it is important to set the speed
setting to the proper value for the model. The speed setting determines the base rate of
movement (units per move) for dynamic motion, independent of update speed. Keypad and
joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting.
Motion Types
Continuous Step moves the eye point or display set through the model at a constant
rate and in a constant direction, using the keypad to steer. Motion continues even if
you provide no input. When Continuous Step is off, you move through the model
106

only by command from the mouse, keypad, or joystick. Continuous motion mode
allows you to use other commands while in motion.
You also can press 0 on the keypad to toggle continuous motion. The keypad 0
movement repeats the last keypad motion key up to the rate specified by the
Maximum moves per second option on the Motion Settings > Rates tab.
Continuous, and then toggle the step direction. However, Continuous motion does
not reverse direction if the last keypad motion before you toggled the step direction
was not a step.
Single Step repeats the last direction or rotation one step. You also can press the
period (.) on the keypad to move a single step as specified by Move on the Rates tab
of the Motion Settings dialog box.
Toggle Step Direction reverses the direction you are currently traveling. You can
toggle the step direction from forward/clockwise to backward/counter-clockwise and
back again. You also can press 5 on the keypad to toggle the step direction.
All three forms of dynamic motion control (joystick, discrete, and keypad) share the same basic
speed/control settings. However, it is important to set the speed setting to a proper value for the
model. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move) for dynamic
motion, independent of update speed. Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the speed
around this setting.
By default, dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one. You cannot
control motion effectively on some large models because the update time is too long. For these
large models, the Clip far option on the Motion Settings > Display tab can be very useful.
When enabled, this option sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if this value is
smaller than the current far clipping setting). By using this setting, you can reduce the amount of
graphics being drawn. This will decrease update time while allowing you to see all graphics that
are near the eye point.
For best performance during motion, use the lowest acceptable display quality and the following
settings on the Display tab on the Motion Settings dialog box:
Leave Allow all texturing unchecked.
Leave Update View Cone unchecked.
Leave Update position status unchecked.
Change the motion rates to move the largest acceptable amount.
Set Motion Rates (on page 114)

Set Single Step Motion (on page 115)
Set Toggle Step Direction (on page 115)
Set Display Options (on page 116)
Set Bearing Angles (on page 116)
107
Motion Settings Dialog Box

Provides options for defining the time for screen updates, the shading mode, the keyboard
motion, and the clipping planes. The Motion Settings dialog box tabs also allow you to set up a
joystick.
See Also
Rates Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) (on page 108)
Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) (on page 109)
Bearing Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) (on page 110)
Display Set Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) (on page 111)
Joystick Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) (on page 112)
Rates Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)

Use this tab to change the default movement and adjustment rates.
Amounts
Auto adjust - Turns on or off an automatic adjustment of the forward/backward motion rate.
When this option is checked, the view automatically adjusts the motion rate based on the
current view depth between the eye point and objects in the center of the view. The Move
field is changed to read-only once you check Auto adjust. If this option is unchecked,
SmartPlant Review uses the rate you define in the Move field for forward/backward motion.
Move - Allows you to specify in working units the distance to move in one step. When Auto
Adjust is selected, this field is changed to read-only and shows the current motion rate.
Rotate in degrees -Allows you to specify the rotation amount to move the view cone in one
step.
Increment/Decrement adjustments
Move - Allows you to specify in working units incremental adjustments to the motion rate.
Rotate in degrees - Allows you to specify incremental adjustments to the motion angle.
Maximum moves per second - Allows you to specify the maximum number of moves to
perform during any keypad motion (continuous or otherwise). This value is the same value used
for the Frames per second option in the Display Key Frame Motion dialog box. Changing one
value automatically changes the other value.
Pressing the Insert key will increase the movement and rotation rates using the values
that you specified on the Rates Tab. Pressing the Delete key will decrease the rates by the
108

specified values. The Insert and Delete key movements are always available whether or not
Auto adjust is enabled.
See Also
Motion Settings Dialog Box (on page 108)
Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)

Each time that you manipulate the Main view with a shaded image, the image updates. This can
be time-consuming, especially for large designs. You can speed up the process for motion and
static (no motion) updates of a shaded image by changing options on this tab.
Allow fly-to behaviors - Enables the 3D Navigation fly-to mode when checked. Fly-to mode
dynamically transitions you from one view point to another. It is supported by various
SmartPlant Review commands and actions that involve changing the current view point. For
example, when performing any Fit operations, uncheck this option if you do not want to see
the fly-to transition. Instead, you are immediately taken to the new view point. This option is
enabled by default.
Allow all texturing - Determines whether textures display while you are manipulating the
model. If you want textures to display in the model, you must first activate the Textures
command. Then select this option. If you already have the Allow all texturing option on and
decide that you do not want textures to display while manipulating the model, clear this
option.
Update view cone - Updates the view cone and related overlay graphics (such as the 3D
clip volume glyph) during motion.
Update position status - Specifies whether to update the position status during motion.
To use the texturing functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.
If you display textures while manipulating models, it may slow down the display. Clear the
Allow all texturing option to hide the textures and speed up the display.
Clip far - Sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if this value is smaller than the
current far clipping setting). Use this option with some large models to reduce the amount of
graphics being drawn, resulting in decreased update time while allowing you to see all graphics
near the eye point.
Clip far distance - Sets the distance of the optional far clipping plane used during motion.
See Also
109

Bearing Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)

Defines the default or starting position for the view cone and motion direction indicators on the
Position Control toolbar.
Direction from 0 to 359.9 - Allows you to select the View directional mode forward bearing or
encircle bearing angle.
Elevation from -90 to 90 - Allows you to select the View directional mode forward elevation or
encircle angle elevation.
Direction from 0 to 359.9 - Allows you to select the directional bearing of forward motion when
in non-view dependent direction mode.
Elevation from -90 to 90 - Allows you to select the directional elevation of forward motion when
in non-view dependent direction mode.
The 3D navigation controls are view independent and are not affected by settings in this
tab.
See Also
Set Bearing Angles (on page 116)
110
Display Set Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)

Defines which display set that you want to move. After selecting a display set to move, you can
use mouse drag and directional modes to move the selected display set to another location in
the model.
You must set the motion relative to display sets using the Motion > Display Set command to
move a display set. The Display Set Motion control mode command is enabled only when a
valid display set is selected in Project Manager.
To return a display set back to its original position, open Project Manager and right-click on the
display set that was moved. Then clear the Move option.
Current display set to move - Lists all defined display sets and allows you to choose a display
set to move.
Edit - Displays the Edit Display Set Position dialog box, which can be used to view or change
position settings for the selected display set.
Detect collisions on move - Starts the collision set during the movement of the selected
display set.
Collision set - Selects the existing collision set during the movement of the display set.
See Also
Set Motion Control to Display Set (on page 132)
Introducing the Project Manager (on page 141)
Use Mouse Drag Modes (on page 116)
111
Joystick Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)

Activates input from a joystick and specifies whether the joystick movement should use
keypad-defined (discrete) or mouse-defined (relative) movement.
All three forms of dynamic motion control (joystick, keypad, and discrete) share the same basic
speed/control settings. However, it is important to set the speed setting to the proper value for
the model. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move) for
dynamic motion, independent of update speed. Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary
the speed around this setting. You can set the proper speed values on the Rates tab of the
Motion Settings dialog box.
Allow joystick input - Allows you to activate joystick input.

Discrete (keypad like) - Allows movement to respond incrementally to a given direction without
a button press, much like movement using the keypad.
No buttons pushed: Forward, Backward, Left, Right mode
Button 1: Rotate mode.
Button 2: Pan mode.
Relative (mouse like) - Allows the joystick to respond relative to a point on the screen. This
option works similarly to the mouse drag modes in that the joystick does not engage a motion
mode until a button is pressed.
Button 1: Forward, Backward, Left, Right mode.
Button 2: Rotate mode.
Button 3: Pan mode.
Move threshold in percent - Describes the amount of joystick movement before the movement
is registered.
This applies only to analog joysticks and does not apply to newer USB joysticks.
Button Mapping - Maps commands to joystick buttons.
112
By default, dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one. You
cannot control motion effectively on some large models because the update time is too long.
For these large models, the Clip far option on the Display tab of the Motion Settings dialog
box can be very useful. When enabled, it sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if
this value is smaller than the current far clipping setting). By using this setting, you can
reduce the amount of graphics being drawn. This will decrease update time while allowing
you to see all graphics that are near the eye point.
For best performance, enable textures only on computers that have hardware texturing
support. You can set the global settings for texture display on the Display tab of the View
Settings dialog box. When enabled, this option allows textures to display during dynamics if
Allow all texturing is already enabled on the Display tab of the Motion Settings dialog
box.
Texturing is available in the full version of SmartPlant Review and the Photo-Realism
module.
See Also
Joystick Button Mapping Dialog Box (on page 113)
Joystick Button Mapping Dialog Box

Provides options for defining the commands mapped to the buttons on your joystick.
Button - Displays the buttons available for mapping.
Command - Displays the command SmartPlant Review has mapped to the selected button.
See Also
Use the Joystick (on page 124)
Range Reject Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)

Allows SmartPlant Review to not display very small graphical objects when moving around in
the model. This improves the time it takes to update the display by reducing the number of
objects that SmartPlant Review draws during motion. You can set different range rejection
criteria for each view by specifying the object size in pixels. Objects smaller than the
user-defined pixel size may not be drawn.
Activate - Enables motion range rejection in all views with non-zero range rejection settings.
The pixel size defined in the View ranges in pixels section determines the objects that will not
be displayed when moving around in the model.
Dynamic - Provides better motion performance and is beneficial when viewing large models.
The objects that display can vary each time you move through the model because the range
rejection is based on the following:
How fast you move the mouse.
Or, for keyboard usage, the Maximum moves per second setting in the Rates tab of the
Motion Settings dialog box. The larger the moves per second, the faster the display, but at
the cost of more objects not being displayed.
The defined object size.
If you have both Activate and Dynamic options selected, SmartPlant Review attempts to
display as many objects as possible that are larger than the defined pixel size.
View ranges in pixels
113
Main - Specifies the approximate maximum pixel size for objects to reject for display in the
Main view.
Plan - Specifies the approximate maximum pixel size for objects to reject for display in the
Plan view.
Elevation - Specifies the approximate maximum pixel size for objects to reject for display in
the Elevation view.
If range rejection is enabled, it is on for all views. You can turn range rejection off for
specific views by setting the pixel size for that view to 0.
Display Behavior in Order of Performance

The cases listed below illustrate how the Activate and Dynamic options work.
Activate Off and Dynamic Off During motion, no range rejection is done. All objects are
drawn. This is the slowest case but ensures the entire model is completely rendered.
Activate On and Dynamic Off During motion, all objects smaller than the defined pixel size in
the view are rejected. This is a faster option. It consistently rejects the smaller objects.
Active Off and Dynamic On During motion, different objects may or may not be rejected.
This is a faster option, however, the object display each time you move will be inconsistent. The
goal of this option is to allow keyboard and mouse movements to interrupt the display and show
as much as possible before you start to move again.
Activate On and Dynamic On During motion, all objects smaller than the defined pixel size in
the view are rejected. The remaining objects are drawn in decreasing sizes until you stop the
motion. This is the fastest option. Although objects less than the defined size will NOT be drawn,
the display can still be inconsistent because the remaining object display is still based on how
fast you are moving the mouse, or the maximum moves per second you have defined when
using the keyboard.
See Also
Range Reject Tab (View Settings Dialog Box) (on page 216)
Set Motion Rates

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click Motion > Settings.

Select the Rates tab.
Type the amount to Move.
Type the amount to Rotate in degrees.
Type the increment or decrement adjustment to Move.
Type the increment or decrement adjustment to Rotate in degrees.
Type the Maximum moves per second.
You also can click Motion Settings
on the Common toolbar.
See Also
Rates Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) (on page 108)
114
Set Single Step Motion

Click Motion > Move > Single Step.
Single step motion moves you through the model only one step at a time by repeating the
last movement command.
You can also click Single Step
on the View toolbar or press period (.) on the keypad to
move a single step as specified by Move on the Rates tab of the Motion Settings dialog
box.
See Also
Set Continuous Motion (on page 115)
Set Toggle Step Direction (on page 115)
Set Toggle Step Direction

Click Motion > Move > Toggle Step Direction.
Toggle step direction reverses the single step direction from forward/clockwise to
backward/counter-clockwise and back again.
You can also click Toggle Step Direction

keypad.
on the View toolbar or press 5 on the
See Also
Set Single Step Motion (on page 115)
Set Continuous Motion (on page 115)
Set Continuous Motion

1. Click Motion > Move > Continuous.
2. Click in the model.
In continuous motion, you move through the model at a constant rate and in a constant
direction, using the keypad to steer. Motion continues even if you provide no input.
You can also click Continuous

on the View toolbar or press 0 on the keypad to start
continuous motion.
If you press 0 on your keypad to start Continuous motion, the last keypad motion command
is repeated up to the rate specified by Maximum moves per second on the Motion
Settings > Rates tab. For example, if you press 5 on the keypad for Toggle Step Direction
and then press 0, Continuous will repeat the Toggle Step Direction motions.
Press Esc or 0 on the keypad to stop the motion.
115
Set Display Options

1. Click Motion > Settings.
2. Select the Display tab.
3. Specify the display settings that you want to use.
on the Motion toolbar.
See Also
Set Bearing Angles

2. Select the Bearing tab.
3. Move the slider to set the View/encircle bearing angles in degrees Direction from 0 to
359.9.
4. Move the slider to set the View/encircle bearing angles in degrees Elevation from -90 to
90.
5. Move the slider to set the Non- view motion bearing angles in degrees Direction from 0
to 359.9.
6. Move the slider to set the Non- view motion bearing angles in degrees Elevation from
-90 to 90.
See Also
Common Toolbar (on page 52)
Set Sun Bearing Angles (on page 210)
Use Mouse Drag Modes

You can use the mouse to navigate around the model to view items of interest. Each mode
enables the mouse to move the view in a different direction.
Select - Displays object label data instantly in the Text view. For
more information, see Select (see "Auto-Highlight Label Data"
on page 118).
Forward/Back, Left/Right - Moves the view cone forwards or
backwards toward the object that you are looking at in the model
when moving the mouse up or back. Moving the mouse left or
right causes the view cone to rotate about the eye point left or
right. For more information, see Move View Cone Forward/Back,
Left/Right (on page 121).
Pan - Increases and decreases the view cone elevation when
you move the mouse up or back. Moving the mouse left or right
causes the view cone to move in a line parallel to the far clipping
plane. Think of the left or right motion as taking a step
side-ways. For more information, see Pan (on page 122).
Rotate - Tilts the view cone up and down when you move the
mouse up or back. Moving the mouse left or right causes the
116

view cone to rotate left and right. This mode is similar to
standing in one place and tilting your head up and down and
looking left and right. The view cone eye point does not move
using this mode. For more information, see Rotate (on page
122).
View Cube - Points the view cone in a direction that you define
interactively. This mode is similar to standing in one place and
looking in any direction. The view cone eye point does not move
using this mode. For more information, see Manipulate the View
Cube (on page 123).
When using mouse drag motion, such as Forward/Back, Left/Right, you can release the data
button while the cursor is outside the Main, Plan or Elevation views. Mouse motion then
continues to operate without the need for you to hold down the mouse button. This mode stays
in effect until you select a data point in the Main view.
Remember the following tips and techniques when you are moving with the mouse:
When you are familiarizing yourself with mouse drag, watch the eye point and view cone in
the Plan and Elevation views as you move. As the Plan and Elevation views change, you
can see the effect of mouse drag and modifier key combinations.
The speed of movement is relative to how far you move the mouse. If you move the mouse
a short distance, speed is slow. If you move the mouse a long distance, speed is faster.
The speed of movement depends on the settings in the Motion > Settings > Rates tab.
Changing these and other settings on this dialog box affects not only speed but display
quality as well.
The origin point from which you begin movement is the position where you first click in the
Main, Plan, or Elevation view. A crosshair displays to indicate this point. A null region
surrounds the crosshair. If you drag a very small distance and remain within the null region,
no movement occurs.
When you drag the mouse, the pointer changes to a special cursor that indicates the
direction of movement.
Select to Display Label Data (see "Use Auto-Highlighting to Display Label Data" on page
118)
Move View Cone Forward/Back, Left/Right (on page 121)
Pan (on page 122)
Rotate (on page 122)
Manipulate the View Cube (on page 123)
Set Priority Mode (on page 123)
Set Center Mode (on page 123)
Lock Center Point (on page 124)
Lock Elevation (on page 124)
117
Use Auto-Highlighting to Display Label Data

The Auto-Highlighting commands enable object label data to display instantly in the Text view.
Auto-Highlight Label Data (on page 118)

Auto-Highlight Elements (on page 119)
Auto-Highlight Complex Elements (on page 119)
Auto-Highlight Components (on page 119)
Auto-Highlight All (on page 120)
Auto-Highlight Features (on page 120)
Auto-Highlight Runs (on page 121)
Auto-Highlight Label Data

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight
Displays object label data instantly in the Text view. If you are in Single View Layout (you do
not have the Text view open), you can click and accept an object to view the label data.
Auto-Highlight also displays the corresponding object surface point location in the status bar
while you drag the mouse over an object. If no object is currently under the mouse, then the
point is on the view plane at the center point location.
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight.
2. Click an object in the model.
Auto-Highlight displays object label data instantly in the Text view. If you are in Single
View Layout (you do not have the Text view open), you can click and accept an object to
view the label data.
Auto-Highlight also displays the corresponding object surface point location in the status
bar while you drag the mouse over an object. If no object is currently under the mouse, then
the point is on the view plane at the center point location.
You can also click the Auto-Highlight command
on the View toolbar.
See Also
118
Auto-Highlight Elements
Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Element
Allows you to display object label data for single elements of geometry instantly in the Text view.
If you are in Single View Layout, you can see label data by clicking and accepting the object.
The label data displays in a pop-up window.
When navigating around in the model, you can stay in Auto-Highlight Element mode to view
object label data when you are stopped, but press the Ctrl, Alt, and Shift keys to temporarily
shift into the other mouse modes to move. The Ctrl key activates the Forward/Backward,
Left/Right mode. The Shift key activates the Pan mode. The Alt key activates the Rotate mode.
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Element.
See Also
Auto-Highlight Features (on page 120)
Auto-Highlight Complex Elements

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Complex Element
Allows you to display object label data for complex elements of geometry (such as cells)
instantly in the Text view. If you are in Single View Layout, you can see label data by clicking
and accepting the object. The label data displays in a pop-up window.
When navigating around in the model, you can stay in Auto-Highlight Complex Element mode
to view object label data when you are stopped, but press the Ctrl, Alt, and Shift keys to
temporarily shift into the other mouse modes to move. The Ctrl key activates the
Forward/Backward, Left/Right mode. The Shift key activates the Pan mode. The Alt key
activates the Rotate mode.
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Complex Element.
See Also
Auto-Highlight Components
Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Components
Allows you to display object label data for components (elements grouped by DRMS linkage)
instantly in the Text view. If you are in Single View Layout, you can see label data by clicking
and accepting the object. The label data displays in a pop-up window.
When navigating around in the model, you can stay in Auto-Highlight Component mode to
view object label data when you are stopped, but press the Ctrl, Alt, and Shift keys to
temporarily shift into the other mouse modes to move. The Ctrl key activates the
Forward/Backward, Left/Right mode. The Shift key activates the Pan mode. The Alt key
activates the Rotate mode.
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Components.
119

See Also
Auto-Highlight All
Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight All
This command is available only when you are viewing SmartPlant 3D published SVF data
from SmartPlant Foundation. For more information, see Using SmartPlant Review in Streaming
Mode (on page 417).
Queries SmartPlant Foundation for the element itself when an element is selected. If returned,
then a single element component is created. If the element was previously grouped as a run or a
feature, then that run or feature is ungrouped first.
The SmartPlant Foundation Locate Filter mode determines which properties are returned and
what elements are grouped together when selected using the SmartPlant Review
Auto-Highlight modes. This Locate Filter mode in SmartPlant Foundation is set to All by
default at the start of each SmartPlant Review session launched from within SmartPlant
Foundation.
Because the SmartPlant Foundation Locate Filter default mode is separate from the Mouse
Drag modes and Auto-Highlight options persisted between SmartPlant Review sessions, the
Auto-Highlight All setting is not persisted between SmartPlant Review sessions. These Mouse
Drag and Auto-Highlight SmartPlant Review commands change the Locate Filter value inside
SmartPlant Foundation during the launched SmartPlant Review session, but do not change the
default Locate Filter mode.
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight All.
See Also
Auto-Highlight Features
Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Features
Queries SmartPlant Foundation for all the members of SmartPlant 3D feature to which the
selected element belongs. If any members are returned, then all members currently in memory
are grouped into a SmartPlant Review component, resulting in the entire feature in memory to
highlight and be selectable as a single component. If the element was previously grouped as a
run, then that run is ungrouped first.
Foundation.
Auto-Highlight Features setting is not persisted between SmartPlant Review sessions. These
Mouse Drag and Auto-Highlight SmartPlant Review commands change the Locate Filter
value inside SmartPlant Foundation during the launched SmartPlant Review session, but do not
change the default Locate Filter mode.
Mode (on page 417).
120

1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Features.
See Also
Auto-Highlight Runs
Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Runs
Queries SmartPlant Foundation for all the members of the SmartPlant 3D run that the selected
element belongs to. If any run members are returned, then all members currently in memory are
grouped into a SmartPlant Review component, resulting in the entire run in memory to highlight
and be selectable as a single component. If the element was previously grouped as a feature,
then that feature is ungrouped first.
Foundation.
Auto-Highlight Runs setting is not persisted between SmartPlant Review sessions. These
Mouse Drag and Auto-Highlight SmartPlant Review commands change the Locate Filter
value inside SmartPlant Foundation during the launched SmartPlant Review session, but do not
change the default Locate Filter mode.
Mode (on page 417).
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Runs.
See Also
Move View Cone Forward/Back, Left/Right

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Forward/Back, Left/Right
Moves the view cone forwards or backwards in reference to the object that you are looking at in
the model when moving the mouse up or back. Moving the mouse left or right causes the view
cone to rotate about the eye point left or right. When using any of the motion commands,
consider that you, the viewer, are the eye point of the view cone.
You can activate this mode by pressing the Ctrl key and clicking the command on the View
toolbar, or by clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Forward/Back, Left/Right.
The positioning and directional modes that you select affect this mouse drag mode.
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Forward/Back, Left/Right.
2. Left-click in the model.
3. Hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse.
You can also click the Forward/Back, Left/Right command
121

See Also
Using 3D Navigation (on page 93)
Pan
Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Pan
Increases and decreases the view cone elevation when you move the mouse up or back.
Moving the mouse left or right causes the view cone to move in a line parallel to the far clipping
plane. Think of the left or right motion as taking a step side-ways. When using any of the motion
commands, consider that you, the viewer, are the eye point of the view cone.
You can activate this mode by pressing the Shift key and clicking the command on the View
toolbar, or by clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Pan.
The positioning and directional modes that you select affect this mouse drag mode.
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Pan.
You can also click Pan
See Also
Rotate
Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Rotate
Tilts the view cone up and down when you move the mouse up or back. Moving the mouse left
or right causes the view cone to rotate left and right. When using any of the motion commands,
consider that you, the viewer, are the eye point of the view cone. Rotate mode is similar to
standing in one place and tilting your head up and down and looking left and right. The view
cone eye point does not move using this mode.
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Rotate.
You can also click Rotate

You can activate this mode by pressing the Alt key and clicking the command on the View
toolbar, or by clicking Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Rotate.
Mouse drag mode behaviors vary depending on the current state of several motion settings.
Combinations of the motion settings can produce many different control behaviors. For
example, when you are using the Alt key to enter the temporary rotate mouse drag mode,
rotate might not work as expected, depending on your current motion settings. For more
information, see Troubleshooting: Motion (on page 560).
See Also
Rotate Display Set (on page 266)
Move and Rotate Display Sets (on page 455)
122
Manipulate the View Cube

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes >View Cube
Points the view cone in a direction that you define interactively. When using any of the motion
commands, consider that you, the viewer, are the eye point of the view cone. View Cube mode
is similar to standing in one place and looking in any direction. The view cone eye point does not
move using this mode.
You can activate this mode by clicking the command on the View toolbar or by clicking Motion >
Mouse Drag Modes > View Cube.
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > View Cube.
See Also
Set Priority Mode

Motion > Mouse Drag Mode > Priority Mode
Sets the mouse drag motion to allow a combination between north and east axis translation.
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Priority Mode.
2. Click on an object in the model.
Turning the Priority Mode off allows a combination between north and east axis translation
(thus diagonal movements are possible).
Turning the Priority Mode on gives priority to the axis with the greatest move amount (thus
only non-diagonal movements are possible).
See Also
Set Center Mode

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Center Mode
Sets the mouse drag origin to always be the center of the view instead of the point where the
mouse drag began. The Center Mode command allows you to use motion with a selected
object based at the center.
1. Click Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Center Mode.
2. Click on an object in the model.
Center Mode changes the mouse drag motion to always be relative to the center of the
window instead of where the mouse drag began in that window.
See Also
Classic SmartPlant Review Navigation (on page 105)
123
Lock Center Point

Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Lock Center Point
Locks the center point of the Main view so that it does not change during navigation or motion
commands.
See Also
Set Center Mode (on page 123)
Lock Elevation (on page 124)
Lock Elevation
Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Lock Elevation
Locks the elevation of the Main view so that it does not change during navigation or motion
commands.
See Also
Lock Center Point (on page 124)
Use the Joystick

No matter which add-in modules you have installed, you can use a joystick to navigate in the
model after completing the following steps:
1. Install the Microsoft DirectX API interface if you are using Windows 2000.
2. Install the joystick and its driver.
3. Configure and calibrate the joystick.
4. Activate the joystick in SmartPlant Review.
Joystick Motion Types

Discrete Motion - Allows movement without a button press, much like movement using the
keypad.
No buttons pushed: Forward, Backward, Left, Right mode
Button 1: Rotate mode
Button 2: Pan mode
Relative Motion - Works similarly to the mouse drag modes in that the joystick does not engage
a motion mode until a button is pressed.
Button 1: Forward, Backward, Left, Right mode
Button 2: Rotate mode
Button 3: Pan mode
124
By default, dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one. You
cannot control motion effectively on some large models because the update time is too long.
For these large models, the Clip far option on the Motion Settings > Display tab can be
very useful. When enabled, this option sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if
this value is smaller than the current far clipping setting). By using this setting, you can
reduce the amount of graphics being drawn, decreasing the update time while allowing you
to see all graphics that are near the eye point.
For best performance, enable textures only on computers that have hardware texturing
support. You can set the global settings for texture display on the Display tab of the View
Settings dialog box. When enabled, this option allows textures to display during dynamics if
Allow all texturing is already enabled on the Motion Settings > Display tab.
When you are using relative joystick mode, position the cursor outside the Main view. If the
cursor remains on the Main view, SmartPlant Review will receive input as if the mouse were
driving the motion, which may cause unexpectedly jumpy behavior.
Activate a Joystick in SmartPlant Review (on page 125)

Map Joystick Commands (on page 125)
Activate a Joystick in SmartPlant Review

1. When you have your joystick working with the operating system, open a very small
SmartPlant Review project.
3. Click the Joystick tab.
4. Click Allow Joystick.
5. Select a Movement Type.
6. Type a value for Move Threshold.
7. On the Motion > Settings > Rates tab, set the movement and rotation settings to small
values to ensure the joystick moves properly with your movement.
The joystick shares the same basic speed control settings as the mouse and keypad.
However, it is important to set the speed setting to a proper value for the model. The speed
setting determines the base rate of movement (units per move) for dynamic motion, independent
of update speed. Keypad and joystick discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting.
Map Joystick Commands

You can map joystick command buttons to start selected SmartPlant Review commands. By
default, in relative mode, the first 3 buttons (1, 2, 3) are assigned the following commands:
Button 1 - Forward/Back, Left/Right
Button 2 - Rotate
Button 3 - Pan
You must assign the remainder of the buttons available for your particular joystick before you
can start any of the other available commands from the joystick.
You can assign any or all of these buttons to a different command. You can arrange them in any
order that you choose. SmartPlant Review saves any change in the button mapping to the
registry.
Entries in the button list that contain the letters POV are associated with the point of view switch
(POV switch) on a joystick. Typically, a joystick provides 8 available locations on the POV switch
to which you can assign a command. POV 1 refers to the 12 o'clock position on the switch and
the numbers are incremental for each additional 45 degrees moving around the switch
clockwise.
125
Use the Keyboard

You can use the following keyboard function keys, shortcuts, and keypad keys to activate
commands and move around in the model.
Shortcut Function Keys (on page 126)

Standard Control Keys (on page 127)
SmartPlant Review Shortcut Keys (on page 128)
Keypad Keys (Classic Navigation) (on page 130)
See Also
Shortcut Function Keys

The following table lists F-keys and their corresponding functions. Some keys execute functions
while others invoke dialog boxes. Press Ctrl or Shift + function key to modify the functions.
according to standard Microsoft Windows conventions.
126
F1
Help
F2
Assign Materials to Elements
Ctrl+F2
Assign Materials to Display Set
F3
Define Display Set
Ctrl+F3
Move Display Set
F4
Hide Level (Object)
Ctrl+F4
Level Settings
Shift + Ctrl + F4
Closes the window
F5
Refresh
Ctrl+F5
Refresh All
Shift+F5
Raytrace
F6
View Settings
Ctrl+F6
Save and Recall (View Operations)
Shift+F6
Photo-Realism Settings
Shift + Ctrl + F6
Shifts the focus to the next window.
F7
Frame Show Motion
Ctrl+F7
Motion Settings
Shift+F7
Global Lighting Settings

F8
Snaplock Measurement
Ctrl+F8
Surface Measurement
Shift+F8
Edit Measurement Collections
Ctrl + Shift+F8
New Measurement Collections
F9
Place Tag with leader line
Ctrl+F9
Place Tag without leader line
F10
Next Tag - Press F10 a second time

to immediately jump to the next tag
instead of going through fly mode.
Ctrl+F10
Previous Tag - Press Ctrl+F10 a

second time to immediately jump to
the previous tag instead of going
through fly mode.
F11
Full Screen Toggle
Ctrl+F11
Arrange All
F12
Collision Detection
Standard Control Keys

The following table lists the standard Microsoft shortcuts supported by SmartPlant Review. You
can access these commands by pressing Ctrl + a letter.
Ctrl+C
Copy Text
Ctrl+F
Find Object
Ctrl+O
Open
Ctrl+P
Print
Ctrl+S
Save
Ctrl+V
Paste Text
Ctrl+X
Cut Text
Ctrl+Y
Redo
Ctrl+Z
Undo
127
SmartPlant Review Shortcut Keys

The following table lists commands that you can access by pressing a combination of either
Ctrl, Alt, or Shift + a letter. Some of these options execute functions while others display dialog
boxes or modify window layouts of the model.
128
Alt + 0
View Project Manager.
Alt + 1
View the Position Control toolbar.
Alt + 2
View the Perspective Angle toolbar.
Alt + 3
View the Encircle Radius toolbar.
Alt + 4
Display the Common Views control.
Alt + 5
Displays the Clip Volume dialog box.
Alt + 6
Opens the Performance Control toolbar.
Ctrl +C
Copy.
Ctrl + D
Delete all measurement collections.
Ctrl + Alt + D
Delete all measurements.
Ctrl + F
Display the Find Object dialog box.
Ctrl + M
Delete last measurement.
Ctrl + Shift +
M
Delete measurements in the active

collection.
Shift + N
Next object.
Ctrl + O
Display the Open dialog box.
Ctrl + P
Display the Print dialog box.
Shift + P
Previous object.
Ctrl + R
Play key frame motion.
Ctrl + Space
Pause key frame motion.
Ctrl + Alt + R
Play a Schedule Review session.
Ctrl + Alt +
Space
Pause a Schedule Review session.
Ctrl + S
Save.
Ctrl + Alt + S
Stop a Schedule Review session.
Ctrl + V
Paste.
Ctrl + X
Cut.
Ctrl +Y
Redo.
Ctrl + Z
Undo.
Shift + 1
Switch to single view layout.

Shift + 3
Switch to three view layout.
Shift + 4
Switch to four view layout.
Ctrl + 1
Toggle display of the Main window.
Ctrl + 2
Toggle display of the Plan window.
Ctrl + 3
Toggle display of the Elevation window.
Ctrl + 4
Toggle display of the Text window.
F1
Display Help for the active command.
F2
Display the Assign Materials to

Elements dialog box.
Ctrl + F2
Display the Assign Material to Display

Set dialog box.
F3
Display the Edit Display Set Definition

dialog box.
Ctrl + F3
Display the Edit Display Set Position

dialog box.
F4
Hide a level.
Ctrl + F4
Display the Level Settings dialog box.
Shift + Ctrl +
F4
Closes the window.
F5
Refresh the active window.
Shift + F5
Raytrace the model.
Ctrl + F5
Refresh all windows.
F6
Display the View Settings dialog box.
Shift + F6
Display the Photo-Realism Settings

dialog box.
Ctrl + F6
Displays the Save and Recall Views

dialog box.
Shift + Ctrl +
F6
Shifts the focus to the next window.
F7
Display the Display Key Frame Motion

dialog box
Shift + F7
Display the Global Lighting Settings

dialog box.
Ctrl + F7
Display the Motion Settings dialog box.
F8
Turn on or off the measurement snaplock.
Shift + F8
Display the Edit Measurement

Collections dialog box.
129

Ctrl + F8
Turn on or off measure from surface.
Ctrl + Shift +
F8
New measurement collection.
F9
Place tag with leader.
Ctrl + F9
Place tag without leader
F10
Next tag.
Ctrl + F10
Previous tag.
F11
Display full screen.
Ctrl + F11
Arrange all windows.
F12
Display the Collision Detection dialog

box.
ESC
Stop the current view update, key frame

motion, or raytrace.
Keypad 0
Move continuous
Keypad .
Move single step.
Keypad 5
Toggle step direction.
Hold Shift
Pan mouse drag mode.
Hold Ctrl
Forward/Back, Left/Right mouse drag

mode.
Hold Ctrl +
Shift
Select - TBD
Hold Alt
Rotate mouse drag mode.
Keypad Keys (Classic Navigation)

You can use the keypad keys to navigate around the model or to move a selected display set.
All three forms of dynamic motion control (joystick, discrete, and keypad) share the same basic
speed/control settings. However, you must set the speed setting for the model to a proper value
on the Motion Settings dialog box. The speed setting determines the base rate of movement
(units per move) for dynamic motion, independent of update speed. Keypad and joystick
discrete controls can vary the speed around this setting.
By default, dynamic motion updates an entire view before moving to the next one. You cannot
control motion effectively on some large models because the update time is too long. For these
large models, the Clip far option on the Motion Settings > Display tab can be very useful.
When enabled, this option sets the far clipping plane to the specified value (if this value is
smaller than the current far clipping setting). By using this setting, you can reduce the amount of
graphics being drawn. This will decrease update time while allowing you to see all graphics that
are near the eye point.
To use the keypad keys to manipulate the position of the view cone, you must first enable
the eye point motion toggle (click Motion > Eye Point). To use the keypad keys to manipulate
130

the position of a display set, you must first select a display set in the Project Manager tree, and
then enable the Display Set motion toggle (click Motion > Display Set).
Tilt Keys - The plus key (+) on the numeric keypad tilts up the view cone or display set. The
minus key (-) on the numeric keypad tilts down the view cone/Display Set.
Elevation Keys - The Page Up and Page Down keys to the left of the numeric keypad raise or
lower the view cone or display set elevation (level) in the model when you are using the View
Independent or Plant North directional mode. In View Dependent mode, they pan up or pan
down within the current view plane dependent (perpendicular) to the current view direction. In
Level View Dependent directional mode, the same pan motion occurs as in View Dependent
directional mode but without changing the current elevation (level).
Rotation Keys - The forward backslash or divide key (/) on the numeric keypad rotates the view
cone/Display Set to the left. The asterisk or multiply key (*) on the numeric keypad rotates the
view cone or display set to the right. Use SHIFT+/ to rotate a selected display set to the left
around the view axis. Use SHIFT+* to rotate a selected display set to the right around the view
axis.
Special Keys - The Esc key cancels the current screen update. The Insert key increases the
movement and rotation rates by the amount specified on the Motion > Settings > Rates tab.
The Delete key decreases the movement and rotation rates. The Home key cycles through the
four Positioning modes. The End key cycles through the four Directional modes.
Number Keys - Use keys 1 - 9 to move through the model. Press and hold these keys to cause
continuous motion. The 0 key toggles the Continuous Motion option. The period key (.) repeats
the last direction one step. The 5 key toggles the step direction.
If you press more than one key at a time, the motion directions of each key are averaged.
For example, if you press keys 7 and 8 at the same time, the motion direction is forward and
a little to the left.
All directions and angles of motion are in relation to the selected positioning and directions
modes. For more information, see Control Movement with Positioning Modes (on page 134)
and Control Movement with Directional Modes (on page 138).
As you move through the model using the keypad, the Position Control toolbar and the
view cone continually update.
The keypad is reserved for motion and orientation control and sometimes does not let you
use the keypad to key in numbers. To avoid any problems, use the number keys at the top
row of the keyboard to enter numbers.
To use the numeric keypad for navigation, Num Lock must be on.
The Left/Right Arrows decrease/increase the View Independent Motion Elevation Angle
by the current rotation adjustment rate.
131
The Up/Down Arrows increase/decrease the View Independent Motion Bearing Angle
by the current rotation adjustment rate.
Shift + Ctrl + F4 will close the window.
Shift + Ctrl + F6 will shift the focus to the next window.
Set Motion Control to Eye Point

Motion > Eye Point
Allows motion commands to affect the graphic views.
Click Motion > Eye Point.
The eye point setting motion is relative to the current directional mode.
See Also
Control Movement with Positioning Modes (on page 134)
Set Motion Control to Display Set

Motion > Display Set Motion
Allows motion commands to affect the selected display set. This command allows you to
dynamically move the selected displays set in the model, rather than static moves using the
Tools > Display Sets > Move command.
1. In Project Manager, select the display set that you want to put in motion.
2. Click Motion > [Display Set Name].
Only the display set that is in motion is affected. All other elements are updated
according to the active view settings. User settings are maintained and honored for all other
updates.
See Also
Move Continuously
Motion > Move > Continuous
Moves the eye point or display set through the model at a constant rate and in a constant
direction, using the keypad to steer. Motion continues even if you provide no input. When
Continuous Step is off, you move through the model only by command from the mouse,
keypad, or joystick. Continuous motion mode also allows you to use other commands while in
motion.
1. Click Motion > Move > Continuous.
132
In continuous motion, you move through the model at a constant rate and in a constant
direction, using the keypad to steer. Motion continues even if you provide no input.
You can also click Continuous

on the View toolbar or press 0 on the keypad to start
Continuous motion.
If you press 0 on your keypad to start Continuous motion, the last keypad motion command
is repeated up to the rate specified by Maximum moves per second on the Motion
Settings > Rates tab. For example, if you press 5 on the keypad for Toggle Step Direction
and then press 0, Continuous will repeat the Toggle Step Direction motions.
Press Esc or 0 on the keypad to stop the motion.
Continuous, and then toggle the step direction. However, Continuous motion does not
reverse direction if the last keypad motion before you toggled the step direction was not a
step.
See Also
Set Step Direction (on page 133)
Move Single Step

Motion > Move > Single Step
Moves the eye point or display set through the model one step at a time in a constant direction,
using the keypad to steer.
Click Motion > Move > Single Step.
You can use the Motion Settings Dialog Box (on page 108) Motion Settings dialog box to
specify the step size.
You can also click Step on the Motion toolbar or press period (.) on the keypad to move a
single step as specified by Move on the Rates tab of the Motion Settings dialog box.
See Also
Move Continuously (on page 132)
Set Step Direction

Motion > Move > Toggle Step Direction
Switches step direction from forward/clockwise to backward/counter-clockwise and back again.
Click Motion > Move > Toggle Step Direction.
Toggle step direction reverses the single step direction from forward/clockwise to
backward/counter-clockwise and back again.
You can also click Toggle Step Direction

keypad.
on the View toolbar or press 5 on the
See Also
Move Single Step (on page 133)
133
Control Movement with Positioning Modes

Positioning modes control the movement of the view cone eye point.
Lateral - The eye point is free to move in any direction in the
model.
Horizontal Encircle - Eye point movement is restricted to a
circular track. The circular track is parallel to the Plan view.
You can move the center point in any direction.
Vertical Encircle - Eye point movement is restricted to a
circular track. The circular track is perpendicular to the Plan
view. You can move the center point in any direction.
Surface Encircle - Eye point movement is restricted to a
circular track. The circular track can be moved in any
orientation. You can move the center point in any direction.
Move Lateral (on page 134)

Clip to Encircle Sphere (on page 136)
Maintain Encircle Clipping (on page 137)
Move Lateral
Motion > Positioning Modes >Lateral
Allows you to move through the model in any direction that you choose using any combination of
mouse drag and directional modes. You can define the current eye point location using the
Position Control toolbar, the View > Settings > View Cone tab, or the View > Place > Eye
Point Only command.
1. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Lateral.
You can also select Lateral on the View Menu.
2. Set or adjust the center point.
Set Center Point (on page 232)
Place Center Point Only (on page 232)
3. Adjust the eye point (the blue track in the Plan and Elevation views).
Set Eye Point (on page 230)
Place Eye Point Only (on page 231)
4. Select a motion type from the Motion > Move menu.
134

To switch between encircle motion settings without losing your clipping plane settings,
use the Home key on your keyboard to cycle through the four Positioning modes. The End key
cycles through the four Directional modes.
Set Horizontal Encircle

Motion > Positioning Modes > Horizontal Encircle
Restricts the movement of the view cone eye point to a blue circular track that displays in the
Plan and Elevation views. The track is placed in a green sphere that also displays in the two
views. In the Horizontal Encircle mode, the blue track is always parallel to the Plan view and
perpendicular to the Elevation view.
define the current center point location using the Position Control toolbar, the View > Settings
> View Cone tab, or the View > Place > Center Point Only command. Changing the elevation
of the track in the Elevation view changes the direction of the view cone. You can use the
Encircle Radius toolbar to change the radius of the green sphere.
The Rotate mouse drag mode is useful when you are using this positioning mode because you
can control both the rotation of the eye point around the track and elevation of the track.
1. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Horizontal Encircle.
You can also click Horizontal Encircle
on the View Menu.
See Also
135
Set Vertical Encircle

Motion > Positioning Modes > Vertical Encircle
Restricts the movement of the view cone eye point to a blue circular track that displays in the
Plan and Elevation views. The track is placed in a green sphere that also displays in the two
views. In the Vertical Encircle mode, the blue track is locked to the center point of the Plan
view. The track is always perpendicular to the Plan view.
define the current center point location using the Position Control toolbar or the View >
Settings > View Cone tab, or the View > Place > Center Point Only command. Changing the
location of the track in the Plan view changes the direction of the view cone. You can use the
Encircle Radius toolbar to change the radius of the green sphere.
1. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Vertical Encircle.
See Also
Clip to Encircle Sphere

Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere
Maintains clipping plane settings when exiting the encircle positioning modes. When toggled on
(the default), the Far Clipping Plane clips to the encircle sphere whenever you enter one of the
encircle positioning modes. When toggled off, the Far Clipping Plane will not be reset when
entering one of the encircle positioning modes.
See Also
136
Set Surface Encircle

1. Click Motion > Positioning Modes > Surface Encircle.
You can also click Surface Encircle

on the View Menu.
You can also use the Home key to cycle through the encircle modes without losing your
See Also
Clip to Encircle Sphere (on page 136)
Motion > Positioning Modes > Clip to Encircle Sphere
Maintains clipping plane settings when exiting the encircle positioning modes. When toggled on
(the default), all clipping plane values set in any of the encircle positioning modes are
maintained when you return to the lateral positioning mode. When toggled off, when you return
to the lateral positioning mode all clipping plane values set in any of the encircle positioning
modes are reset to the values they had before entering any of the encircle positioning modes.
See Also
Move Lateral (on page 134)
137
Control Movement with Directional Modes

Directional modes define how you want to navigate around the model. The different modes
provide different types of motion. The mouse drag modes, positioning modes, and Position
Control toolbar all affect how the directional modes operate.
View Dependent Motion - Sets the motion direction relative to
where the eye is looking (i.e., forward is toward view center). This
mode allows you to move directly toward where you are looking.
Level View Dependent Motion - Sets the motion direction
relative to where the eye is looking, but remains level while
moving. This mode allows you to move toward where you are
looking without changing the elevation.
View Independent Motion - Allows you full control in defining the
forward direction by using the motion bearing and elevation
indicators on the Position Control toolbar, thus giving you the
flexibility to move forward in an arbitrary direction while looking in
another arbitrary direction.
Plant North - Sets the motion direction relative to Plant North
(that is, forward is toward Plant North). This mode allows you to
look in one direction, which the view cone defines, while moving
in another direction. This mode is similar to View Independent
mode with the exception that forward is always north.
Set View Dependent Mode (on page 138)

Set View Dependent, Level Mode (on page 139)
Set View Independent Mode (on page 139)
Set Plant North Mode (on page 140)
Set View Dependent Mode

Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent
Defines the forward, back, left, and right motions based on the direction in which you are
looking. The eye point to center point vector of the view cone defines this direction. Using the
Forward/Backward, Left/Right mouse drag mode, forward moves you towards where you are
looking. Back moves you away. Your elevation in the model changes using the View
Dependent mode if the view cone is pointed up or down.
The View Dependent mode allows you to move directly toward where you are looking. The
mouse drag modes, positioning modes, and Position Control toolbar all affect how this
directional mode operates.
Click Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent.
You can also click View Dependent
138

See Also
Set View Dependent, Level Mode

Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent, Level
Defines the forward, back, left, and right motions based on the direction in which you are
looking. The eye point to center point vector of the view cone defines this direction. Using the
Forward/Backward, Left/Right mouse drag mode, forward moves you towards where you are
looking. Back moves you away. However, your elevation in the model does not change if the
view cone is pointed up or down.
The View Dependent Level mode allows you to move toward where you are looking but keep
the same elevation. The mouse drag modes, positioning modes, and Position Control toolbar
all affect how the directional modes operate.
Click Motion > Directional Modes > View Dependent, level.
You can also click View Dependent Level
See Also
Set View Independent Mode

Motion > Directional Modes > View Independent
Gives you full control in defining the forward direction by using the motion bearing and elevation
indicators on the Position Control toolbar. You can define different view bearing and elevation
values. This gives you the flexibility to move forward in an arbitrary direction while looking in
another arbitrary direction.
For example, you could define the motion bearing as 135 degrees and the view bearing as 45
degrees. Moving forward would cause the eye point to move southeast, while looking northeast.
The mouse drag modes, positioning modes, and Position Control toolbar all affect how the
directional modes operate.
Click Motion > Directional Modes > View Independent.
You can also click View Independent
See Also
Set View Dependent Mode (on page 138)
139
Set Plant North Mode

Motion > Directional Modes > Plant North
Defines the forward, back, left, and right motions based on north in the model. Forward moves
north, back moves south, right moves east, and left moves west. North in the model is always
the top of the Plan view. Watch the Plan view when using this mode until you become familiar
with the mode.
The Plant North mode allows you to look in one direction, defined by the view cone, while
moving in another direction. This mode is similar to View Independent mode with the exception
that forward is always north.
The mouse drag modes, positioning modes, and Position Control toolbar all affect how the
directional modes operate.
Click Motion > Directional Modes > Plant North.
See Also
140
SECTION 10
Introducing the Project Manager

Project Manager provides an interactive method for viewing model data. Using Project Manager,
you can view all project files associated with the model, create and manipulate display sets, and
review ScheduleReview construction sequences.
When you display Project Manager, the items comprising the current model's structure display in
the Project Manager tree view, with the related information displaying in the list view. By
expanding the nodes, you can view parts of the model, including the project files, display sets,
and the ScheduleReview project.
Project Files - Displays the graphic files, such as .DGN and .PRP files, associated with the
model.
Display Sets - Organizes the display sets in the model and allows you to accomplish several
display set manipulations. See Working with Display Sets (on page 239).
ScheduleReview - Displays the ScheduleReview project associated with the model and allows
you to accomplish several ScheduleReview manipulations. If you have the Construction module
installed, you can also review construction sequences within Project Manager.
A shortcut menu, available by right-clicking anywhere in Project Manager, contains many of the
commands needed to manipulate display sets, project files, and ScheduleReview projects.
Project Manager also supports standard Windows functionality in the list view, such as using
CTRL + A to select all items in the list view, using SHIFT to select consecutive items (click the
first item, press and hold down SHIFT, and then click the last item), and using CTRL to select
nonconsecutive items (press and hold down CTRL, and then click each item).
In addition to hiding or displaying Project Manager using the View > Project Manager
command, you can use the Dockable command (available on the Project Manager shortcut
menu), to make Project Manager dockable so that you can place it in a fixed location within the
SmartPlant Review window.
The Immediate Update Mode option (available on the Project Manager shortcut menu) allows
you to control when changes made in Project Manager are rendered in the view.
141

Display or Hide Project Manager (on page 142)

View Items in the Model with Project Manager (on page 142)
Display or Hide Parts of a Model with Project Manager (on page 143)
Move the Project Manager (Dock and Undock) (on page 143)
Enable or Disable Immediate Update Mode (on page 144)
Enable or Disable Immediate Update Mode (on page 144)
Display or Hide Project Manager

View > Project Manager
Displays the Project Manager window. By default, Project Manager is an undocked window. If
you prefer, you can click Dockable on the Project Manager right-click menu and drag the
window to one of the edges of the SmartPlant Review window. SmartPlant Review remembers
this setting when you exit the application. If Project Manager is an undocked dialog box, the
Arrange All command does not affect its position.
Project Manager allows you to view all parts of the model, including the project files, display
sets, and the ScheduleReview project.
When using a dual-monitor configuration, do all resizing of the Project Manager window on
the primary monitor and then position the window on the secondary monitor as desired.
Click View > Project Manager.
Project Manager automatically opens to the location you placed it during a previous session.
By default, Project Manager is an undocked window.
Project Manager displays items associated with the open model. If a model document is not
open, Project Manager does not display any items.
You can display or hide Project Manager at any time.
See Also
View Items in the Model with Project Manager

1. Open a document in SmartPlant Review.
2. If Project Manager is not visible, click View > Project Manager.
3. In Project Manager, double-click the Project Files, Display Sets, or ScheduleReview
node.
142
In Project Manager, you can also manage and edit display sets and ScheduleReview
projects with commands on the shortcut menu. If a document is not open, the shortcut menu
does not appear in Project Manager.
A red checkmark by a display set indicates it was moved.
To use the ScheduleReview functionality, you must install the Construction module.
Display or Hide Parts of a Model with Project Manager

1. Open a model document in SmartPlant Review.
3. In the Project Manager tree view, expand the Display Sets node, the Project Files node, or
any of their sub-nodes. The check box beside each item in the tree indicates whether the
item is displayed or not.
4.
Indicates that the item and its sub-items appear in the view of the model.
5.
Indicates a mix of shown and hidden sub-items.
6. Clear the check box to hide one or more corresponding display sets, files, or levels in the
view of the model.
If you right-click in Project Manager, you can access commands on the shortcut menu. This
shortcut to commands is especially useful when manipulating display sets.
Use the Show/Hide for Main View, Show/Hide for Plan View, and Show/Hide for
Elevation View commands to select the views where the selected items or sub-items are
shown or hidden.
You also can also show or hide your display sets by clicking Tools > Display Sets > Show.
See Also
Move the Project Manager (Dock and Undock)

Project Manager > Dockable
Acts as a toggle, allowing you to display the Project Manager window as an undocked window
(default) or as a docked toolbar. You access this command by right-clicking anywhere in Project
Manager and selecting Dockable from the shortcut menu.
SmartPlant Review remembers this setting when you exit the application. If you are using
Project Manager as an undocked window, the Arrange All command does not affect its
position.
1. If Project Manager is not docked, click the title bar and drag the window to the new location.
2. If Project Manager is docked, click the toolbar handle and drag the window to the new
location.
When using a dual-monitor configuration, do all resizing of the Project Manager window on
the primary monitor and then position the window on the secondary monitor as desired.
Be sure to size the Project Manager window the way you want it before you dock it. You
cannot resize the window after you have docked it.
You can double-click the title bar (when undocked) or gray bar (when docked) at the top of
the Project Manager window to dock and undock it.
To display the window, click View > Project Manager. If Project Manager is hidden when
you close the software, Project Manager does not appear the next time that you open the
software.
143
Enable or Disable Immediate Update Mode

Project Manager > Immediate Update Mode
Acts as a toggle, allowing you to control when changes made in Project Manager are rendered
in the view. When on, changes (such as turning display sets on and off) are immediately made
in the view. However, because view updates can be time-consuming, turning off the Immediate
Update Mode allows you to make multiple changes and then update the view at one time.
When the Immediate Update Mode is off, an Update button displays above the project tree and
becomes active when you make your first change in Project Manager. You can click this button
any time after you make a change to update the view and commit the changes to the database.
Be sure to click Update before turning Immediate Update Mode back on. If you
toggle the mode back on while the Update button is active, all uncommitted changes are lost.
See Also
144
SECTION 11
Working with VUE Files

SmartPlant Review can read any SmartPlant Review VUE files. The VUE file format is only read
by SmartPlant Review. SmartPlant Review VUE files can be created by several applications,
including SmartPlant 3D, SmartMarine 3D, SmartPlant Review Publisher, and SmartPlant
Review. Each of these applications can read data from non-Intergraph applications. For
example, SmartPlant 3D and SmartMarine 3D can read PDS or MicroStation DGN files and
ACIS SAT files. Because of this, a VUE file produced from SmartPlant 3D or SmartMarine 3D
could contain PDS data, MicroStation data, or ACIS data.
SmartPlant Review Publisher can read and create VUE files from the following source model
data formats:
PDS/MicroStation (DGN)
ACIS (SAT)
AutoCAD (.DWG, DXF)
PDMS (RVM)
Each VUE file produced by SmartPlant Review Publisher should contain only one type of data.
For example a VUE file should only contain PDS data, or only ACIS data.
SmartPlant Review can read and create VUE files from the following source model data formats:
PDS/MicroStation (DGN)
SmartPlant Review (VUE)
If you stop loading a model when it was initially being read into SmartPlant Review, you may
invalidate display set definitions or manipulations because all the elements in the display
sets were not loaded.
If you have trouble opening an existing VUE file, generate a new SmartPlant Review VUE
file from the original model data set. SmartPlant Review supports reading any VUE file
produced by SmartPlant Review 05.00.01.02 or later. However, the VUE files produced by
SmartPlant Review 06.02.00.17 or later cannot be read by earlier, released versions of
SmartPlant Review.
Add VUE Files (on page 146)

Load VUE Files (on page 147)
Unloading a VUE File from Memory (on page 148)
Save As VUE File (on page 149)
Remove VUE File (on page 149)
Move, Rotate, and Scale a Model: VUE File Position (on page 151)
145
Add VUE Files

The Add Vue Files command becomes visible/enabled when you open or create an SVF
project. Use this command to add other VUE files to the project. The additional VUE files must
be located in the same folder as the SVF project.
Any corresponding project label database (MDB2) is also added to the project. If there is
no corresponding project label database (MDB), it is created if there is a corresponding XML file
for the SmartPlant 3D VUE file. For PDS, a project label database is created from DRV files
corresponding to the files listed in the PDS VUE file.
1. Open or create the SVF project.
2. Select File > Add Vue Files.
The additional VUE files must be located in the same folder as the SVF project.
3. From the Add Vue Files dialog box, select the file(s) you want to add to your project. Use
the Select All command, or the SHIFT+ or CTRL+ keys to select multiple files. See Add
Vue Files Dialog Box (on page 146).
4. Click OK when you have finished. The VUE file now displays in the Files list in the Add Vue
Files dialog box.
Adding a VUE file to the SVF project only places it in the Add VUE Files dialog box. The VUE
data does not appear in the session until it is loaded into memory using the Load VUE Files
command.
When you add a VUE file, any corresponding project label database (MDB2) is also
added to the project. If there is no corresponding project label database (MDB2), it is created if
there is a corresponding XML file for the SmartPlant 3D VUE file. For PDS, a project label
database is created from DRV files corresponding to the files listed in the PDS VUE file.
See Also
Adds other VUE files to the current SVF project. The VUE file(s) to be added must be located in
the same folder as the SVF project.
Files - Lists all VUE files in the current project.
146

Select All - Automatically selects all VUE files in the Files display list.
Clear All - De-selects all files selected in the display list.
Match - Displays the Match Items dialog box, allowing you to select files matching the given
pattern or selected object. See Match Items Dialog Box (on page 222).
Load VUE Files

The Load Vue Files command loads or unloads VUE files contained in the current SVF project
to memory. To add files to the project list, use the Add Vue Files command. For more
information, see Add VUE Files (on page 146).
The Load Vue Files command automatically runs whenever an SVF project is opened and can
be run any time thereafter. Selected files in the list are loaded to memory for the current work
session and displayed in the Project Manager file list.
SmartPlant Review allows you to create SVF projects with more VUE files than can fit within
available memory. However, only the selected VUE files that can fit within the available memory
are loaded (in the order listed). When the memory limit is reached, a notification is displayed.
You can continue to work with the loaded subset of your selected files, or you can run the Load
VUE Files command again to choose a different subset.
1. Open or create the SVF project.
2. Use the File > Add Vue Files command to add at least one file to the project.
3. Select File > Load Vue Files. Any files that have been added to the project display.
4. From the Load Vue Files dialog box, select the file(s) you want to load to memory. Use the
Select All command, or the SHIFT+ or CTRL+ keys to select multiple files. The VUE files
selected in the display list are loaded to memory.
Load Vue Files Dialog Box (on page 147)
5. Click OK when you have finished.
Loads or unloads VUE files contained in the current SVF project to memory. To add files to the
project list, use the Add Vue Files command.
147

The Load Vue Files command automatically runs whenever an SVF project is opened. This
dialog box displays at the beginning of each project session. Selected files in the list are loaded
to memory for the current work session. Any files that are not selected are unloaded from
memory.
SmartPlant Review allows you to create SVF projects with more VUE files than can fit within
available memory. However, only the selected VUE files that can fit within the available memory
are loaded (in the order listed). When the memory limit is reached, a notification is displayed.
You can continue to work with the loaded subset of your selected files, or you can run the Load
VUE Files command again to choose a different subset.
Files - Lists all VUE files added to the current project.
pattern or selected object.
You can unload VUE files from memory using the Load Vue Files command.
1. Open the SVF project file.
2. Select File > Load Vue Files.
3. From the Load Vue Files dialog box, clear or de-select the files in the project display list
you want to unload from memory and click OK.
See Also
148
Save As VUE File

The Save As command saves the project in VUE format. A VUE file is a container file that
allows you to quickly read and change data. This format dramatically decreases the required
time to read in large models, and all of the data associated with the model. This command is
similar to the standard Save As command in the Windows environment. However, the only use
for this command in SmartPlant Review is saving a file in VUE format.
To use this functionality, you must install the Application Programming Interface
(API) module.
1. Open the model that you want to save as a VUE file.
2. Click File > Save As.
3. Type a file name.
To avoid confusion, we recommend assigning the same name to the DRI and VUE files
(for example, mymodel.dri and mymodel.vue).
4. Select a destination folder.
5. Click Save.
We recommend that you assign the same name to both the DRI file and VUE file to avoid
confusion. The DRI file is a text file that Plant Design Integrator creates and uses to
reference all related, design label data. The DRI file is the primary method for opening
SmartPlant Review.
If you modify your DRI file by adding or removing files, you need to reopen the DRI file. This
action confirms that the software properly reads in all new data related to the DRI file
information.
If you make new material assignments while running in a VUE file, you must save a new
VUE file to retain those new material assignments.
When you use the Save As command on a VUE file originally produced by SmartPlant 3D,
the resulting VUE file will be smaller. This new VUE file will also load faster and require less
memory than the original SmartPlant 3D VUE file.
See Also
Use the Remove Vue Files command to remove one or more VUE files from the current SVF
project.
1. Open the .SVF project.
2. Select File > Remove Vue Files.
3. From the Remove Vue Files dialog box, select the files you want to remove from your
project. Use the Select All command, or the SHIFT+ or CTRL+ keys to select multiple files.
When a VUE file is removed, any corresponding project label database (MDB2) is also
removed from project use.
See Also
Removes one or more VUE files from the current SVF project.
149

You cannot remove all VUE files. At least one VUE file must remain within an SVF
project.
Files - Lists all VUE files in the current project.

150
SECTION 12
Move, Rotate, and Scale a Model: VUE File Position

Use the Vue File Position command to move, rotate and scale plant models used in the current
work session. This command helps when you have two or more plants, for example, that are
modelled using different source applications. When the plant models are brought into
SmartPlant Review, they may need to be re-sized and re-positioned so that they can be easily
viewed and edited. All edits are stored in the project database between sessions.
This command is active only when working with multiple VUE files in an SVF project.
When the Vue File Position is selected, the Edit VUE File Position Dialog Box (on page 153)
displays. Options are available in each tab to move, rotate and/or scale the model.
Move a Model
Follow the steps below to use the Vue File Position command to move a VUE file model. You
can only move or work with one VUE file at a time.
1. Select Edit > Vue File Position.
2. From the Information tab in the Edit Vue File Position dialog box, select the VUE file you
want to move from the File name menu.
3. Click the Move tab.
Move Tab (Edit VUE File Position Dialog Box) (on page 155)
4. Type the North, East, and Elevation coordinates for the Reference Origin.
5. Select Absolute, Delta Value, or Delta Direction for the Destination. Delta defines an
offset from the current position, either by a specified amount (value), or by distance and
bearing (direction), from the original reference point (the Reference Origin). Absolute
defines the exact destination of the moved display set (not an offset). Click Pick Point to
select the 3D point in the model rather than specifying each coordinate individually.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Pick the Reference Origin before you transform the VUE model position.
Type or pick the point for the North, East, and Elevation coordinates for the Destination.
Click the Information tab.
Check the Transform option to move the VUE model to the specified destination
coordinates.
Click Apply to move the VUE model to the specified destination coordinates and continue
on to transform another VUE file.
-orClick OK to move the VUE model to the specified destination coordinates and close the
dialog box.
Rotate a Model
Follow the steps below to use the Vue File Position command to rotate a VUE file model. You
can only rotate one VUE file at a time.
want to rotate from the File name menu.
3. Click the Rotate tab.
Rotate Tab (Edit VUE File Position Dialog Box) (on page 156)
151

4. Type or pick the point for the coordinates for the North, East, and Elevation coordinates for
the Reference Origin. The Rotate Reference Origin is adjusted internally by the move
deltas specified on the Move tab before the rotate angles are applied.
Click Pick Point to select the 3D point in the model rather than specifying each
coordinate individually.
Pick the Reference Origin before you transform the VUE model position.
5. Specify the Plan, Front, and Side angles.
6. Click back to the Information tab and check the Transform option.
7. Click Apply to rotate the VUE file model around the specified Reference Origin and continue
on to rotate another VUE file.
-orClick OK to rotate the VUE file model around the specified Reference Origin and close the
dialog box.
Scale a Model
Follow the steps below to use the Vue File Position command to rotate a VUE file model. You
can only scale one VUE file at a time.
want to resize from the File name menu.
3. Click the Scale tab.
Scale Tab (Edit VUE File Position Dialog Box) (on page 157)
4. Type in the desired scale factor.
Apply the scale factor to the VUE file first to specify the move and/or rotate
information relative to the scaled VUE file. Scaling is always applied internally before the
move and/or rotate. The specified move and/or rotate information is NOT scaled by the
scale factor.
5. Click the Information tab and check the Transform option to scale the model.
6. Click Apply to scale the VUE model and continue on to size another VUE file.
-orClick OK to scale the VUE model and close the dialog box.
The VUE file model is always scaled from its origin (0, 0, 0).
152

Changes the position and size of VUE models in the current work session. After editing the
position information, select Transform to apply the edits to the VUE model.
Dialog Box Tabs:

Information Tab (Edit VUE File Position Dialog Box) (on page 154)
Move Tab (Edit VUE File Position Dialog Box) (on page 155)
Rotate Tab (Edit VUE File Position Dialog Box) (on page 156)
Scale Tab (Edit VUE File Position Dialog Box) (on page 157)
153

Allows you to select and transform a VUE model position by moving, rotating and/or scaling.
This information is stored in the project database between sessions.
File Name - Displays the name of the VUE file you are transforming.
Transform - When checked, the model is transformed by the specified positional information
when you click Apply or OK.
You can only edit one VUE file model position at a time. If you make edits and want to go
on to the next VUE file listed in the File name menu, you must first click Apply or your edits will
not be saved.
Reset - Sets the move, rotate and scale values to zero.
Minimum range
North - Displays the current minimum north coordinate of a bounding box enclosing the
VUE model.
East - Displays the current minimum east coordinate of a bounding box enclosing the VUE
model.
Elevation - Displays the current minimum elevation of a bounding box enclosing the VUE
model.
Maximum range
154
North - Displays the current maximum north coordinate of a bounding box enclosing the
VUE model.
East - Displays the current maximum east coordinate of a bounding box enclosing the VUE
model.
Elevation - Displays the current maximum elevation of a bounding box enclosing the VUE
model.
Move Tab (Edit VUE File Position Dialog Box)

Allows you to define the distance from or destination to which the VUE model is moved. While
defining the destination coordinates, keep in mind that they are relative to the reference origin
(where the model started out).
Reference origin
North - Specifies the north coordinate for the move reference origin.
East - Specifies the east coordinate for the move reference origin.
Elevation - Specifies the elevation coordinate for the move reference origin.
Pick Point - Allows you to pick a 3D point in the model using the mouse rather than typing
specific coordinate values. For more information, see Placing 3D Points (on page 277).
Pick the Reference Origin before you transform the .VUE model position.
Destination
Absolute - Switches the move coordinate fields to accept absolute destination values for the
new model position. This option allows you to move the display set a specified amount from the
original reference point.
Delta value - Switches the move coordinate fields to accept delta offset values for the new
model position. The Delta options allow you to define an offset, either a specified amount or a
distance and bearing, from the original reference point.
Delta direction - Switches the move coordinate boxes to accept delta directional offset values
for the new model position. The Delta options allow you to define an offset, either a specified
amount or a distance and bearing, from the original reference point.
North - Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta direction for the north coordinate
for the new position.
155

East - Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta direction for the east coordinate for
the new position.
Elevation - Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta direction for the elevation
coordinate for the new position.
Pick Point - Allows you to pick a 3D point in the model for the destination point rather than
specifying each coordinate individually.
Rotate Tab (Edit VUE File Position Dialog Box)

Allows you to specify the reference origin coordinates for the point around which the current
model will rotate. This tab also allows you to specify the plan, front, and side angles, in degrees
from 0 to less than 360, for rotating the model.
Reference origin
North - Specifies the north coordinate for the reference origin point around which the model
rotates.
East - Specifies the east coordinate for the reference origin point around which the model
rotates.
Elevation - Specifies the elevation coordinate for the reference origin point around which the
model rotates.
Pick Point - Allows you to pick a 3D point in the model for the reference origin rather than
specifying each coordinate individually. For more information, see Placing 3D Points (on page
277).
The Reference origin is adjusted internally by the move deltas specified on the Move
tab before the rotate angles are applied.
Pick the Reference Origin before you transform the .VUE model position.
156

Angles in degrees from 0 to less than 360
Plan - Specifies the angle in the plan direction to rotate the model.
Front - Specifies the angle in the front direction to rotate the model.
Side - Specifies the angle in the side direction to rotate the model.
Scale Tab (Edit VUE File Position Dialog Box)

Allows you to resize the selected VUE model. Because various applications can use different
scaling systems, use this option to size each model as needed in the current work session.
Scale - Type in a uniform scale factor. This scale factor applies equally to the north, east, and
elevation coordinates of the VUE file model.
Apply the scale factor to the VUE file first to specify the move and/or rotate information
relative to the scaled VUE file. Scaling is always applied internally before the move and/or
rotate.
The specified move and/or rotate information is not scaled by the scale factor.
157
158
SECTION 13
Viewing SmartPlant 3D Model Data

SmartPlant and SmartMarine 3D (SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D) objects contain numerous
properties that can be exported to SmartPlant Review. Because SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D
applications maintain a relational database (Oracle, for example) and SmartPlant Review
implements an MS Access database, the SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D properties and their
hierarchy do not match or 'look' the same within the applications. To bridge this gap, mapping
files are generated and then used to relate model data properties (also referred to as attributes)
to labels for display in SmartPlant Review.
Process Overview
The information below briefly summarizes the key pieces used in the SmartPlant/SmartMarine
3D-to-SmartPlant Review publishing process.
Exported VUE and XML Files - SmartPlant and SmartMarine 3D applications enable you to
create a 3D Model Data component. You can then export the component to generate VUE and
XML files for SmartPlant Review. The VUE file contains the graphic object data, and the XML
file contains the property data from the 3D Model Data component. For more information on
setting up a 3D Model Data component and then exporting it, see Setup a 3D Model Data
component in the SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D Integration Guide. The Integration Guide also
provides the Schema Mapping section which contains mapping information, rules, and
limitations on how the system correlates 3D model data to label data in SmartPlant Review.
P3DComponent.xml and SP3DPublishMap.xml - These files are used to generate XML
data for a 3D model during the export process. They contain the SmartPlant 3D schema and
the mapping relations between SmartPlant 3D objects, such as classes and interfaces, and
the SmartPlant Review labels.
The P3DComponent.xml file is derived from the SmartPlant schema and is delivered with
both SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D and SmartPlant Review applications. The
P3DComponent.xml must be on the SmartPlant 3D system that will be publishing the data.
SmartPlant 3D uses this input schema file to generate the [3D Model Data Component
Name].xml.
SmartPlant Review and SmartPlant Review Publisher also deliver a copy of the
P3DComponent.xml file that is installed in the SmartPlant Review and SmartPlant
Review Publisher installation folder. This copy enables SmartPlant Review to build the
sample label database (MDB2) file.
When opening the generated VUE file in SmartPlant Review, make sure you select the
P3DComponent.xml file that was used for the export process.
If you are not adding custom objects such as classes or interfaces to your 3D model, you
should not need to modify any of these files. If you need custom objects, we recommend
that you contact Intergraph Customer Support for instructions.
RelationshipMapping.txt - This file is used to organize, filter, and map SmartPlant/Marine 3D
components and relationships of label data in SmartPlant Review. You may need to edit this file
if you are not seeing certain labels in SmartPlant Review. See Troubleshoot Label Display
Problems (on page 179) for cases where a SmartPlant 3D class defined in the
P3DComponent.xml file does not display in SmartPlant Review.
159

SmartPlant 3D Label Selector Utility and the SPRSP3dLabels.bin - SPRSP3dLabels.bin is
a label template file that is generated only by the Label Selector utility when you define the
SmartPlant/Marine 3D properties that you want displayed in SmartPlant Review as label data. In
SmartPlant Review, label data displays in the Text window during Auto-Highlight functions and
can be used as standard label data when creating display sets or using the SmartPlant Review
Find Object command.
SmartPlant Review and SmartPlant Review Publisher deliver an SPRSP3dLabels.bin file
to support the sample model data. Use the Label Selector utility to generate an
SPRSP3dLabels.bin file in a separate folder that is specific to your dataset.
General Workflow
The steps below briefly outline the overall SmartPlant/Marine 3D-to-SmartPlant Review export
process.
The use of the SmartPlant 3D Label Selector utility is optional. You do not have to run the
utility to view labels in SmartPlant Review; however, if you have a 3D model with many labels, it
would be useful to limit the label display to make viewing in SmartPlant Review more efficient.
1. Locate the VUE and XML files generated from SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D.
2. Locate the P3DComponent.xml file associated to the exported files and copy it to one of the
SmartPlant Review file load locations:
The directory containing the SmartPlant 3D project files. ([project].VUE and
[project].XML)
The directory where the SmartPlant Review executable file is installed.
3. Optionally, use the SmartPlant 3D Label Selector utility (SP3DLabelSelector.exe) to
generate a new SPRSP3dLabels.bin template file.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
SmartPlant Review provides an SPRSP3dLabels.bin file to support the display of

sample models. You can modify this file, but we recommend that you create a new template
file specific to your display requirements.
From SmartPlant Review, select File > Open.
Select the SmartPlant 3D VUE file and click Open.
Click the SmartPlant 3D tab in the Create Project dialog box.
Set the following files:
Schema - Browse to the P3DComponent.xml file that was generated by the SmartPlant
3D project files.
Map components to disciplines - Browse to select the
MapComponentsToDisciplines.txt file.
Relationship mapping - Browse to select the RelationshipMapping.txt file provided with
SmartPlant Review. You may need to edit this text file to make the information display
as you need it in SmartPlant Review. See Troubleshoot Label Display Problems (on
page 179).
Optional label template - Browse to select the SPRSP3dLabels.bin file generated if
you used the SmartPlant 3D Label Selector utility to create a new template file.
Otherwise, leave this field blank.
Click OK to open the SmartPlant 3D model in SmartPlant Review. This automatically
generates a new MDB2 label database for the project.
You can also use the SmartPlant 3D Label Selector Utility with SmartPlant Review
Publisher to create an MDB2 label database containing the SmartPlant 3D label data.
160

Use the SmartPlant 3D Label Selector Utility (on page 161)

View SmartPlant 3D Labels in SmartPlant Review (on page 167)
Map a Label Using the RelationshipMapping.txt File (on page 169)
Review Example Workflow (on page 175)
Troubleshoot Label Display Problems (on page 179)
Use the SmartPlant 3D Label Selector Utility

Enables you to specify the SmartPlant 3D label data to be added to the SmartPlant Review label
database (MDB2). In turn, the label database defines the labels that display in SmartPlant
Review. Label data in SmartPlant Review displays in the Text window during Auto-Highlight
functions and can be used as standard label data when creating display sets or using the Find
Object command.
161

SmartPlant 3D Label Selector Dialog Box Options
Relationship mapping hierarchy:
The contents of the tree view are taken from the selected P3DComponent.xml and the
RelationshipMapping.txt files. The text field at the top is read-only and shows the path taken to
get to the currently-selected node. The label data is organized in two basic nodes: Mapped
Labels and Unmapped Labels.
162

Mapped Labels - This node is organized in a Relationship > Component > Label name
hierarchy. The Name, Component, and Description labels are common to all label relationships.
Unmapped Labels - This node lists the labels that have not been mapped in the
RelationshipMapping.txt file. The component name enclosed in parentheses beside each
unmapped label is the name that needs to be added to the RelationshipMapping.txt file.
Additionally, a label name can have multiple components that can be used for the relationship
mapping. By default, all labels are checked and listed in the Select label to display list view.
To map a label so that you can see it in the tree view hierarchy, you must edit the
RelationshipMapping.txt file. You can then re-open the Label Selector to see the added label in
the Mapped Labels node of the tree view. For steps on how to add an example unmapped
label, see Map a Label Using the RelationshipMapping.txt File (on page 169).
Visual Cues:
In addition to the Name, Component, and Description labels, there are other label names
that are common to several relationships and components which are denoted by an asterisk
(*). In the Mapped Labels node, these label names are organized under all the
corresponding Relationship/Component branches. In the Unmapped Labels node, label
names and the components that can be associated to them are shown in parentheses.
163
The horizontal line separates the common label names from the Components under each of
the Relationship nodes in the tree view.
A filled-in checkbox
beside a Relationship or Component node indicates that it contains
one or more labels that have been selected for display.
Find label:
Type in the name or part of a name of the label you want to find. Keep in mind that a label can
reside under one or more nodes/branches in the tree view. Wildcard character values are not
supported. Use Match case and Whole word to further refine your search.
Next - Locates the next occurrence of the search text going down the tree view.
Previous - Locates the previous occurrence of the search text going back up the tree view.
Check All - Automatically checks all occurrences of the search text and places the labels in the
Selected label to display view.
Uncheck All - Automatically unchecks all occurrences of the search text in the Labels tree view
and removes them from the Selected label to display view.
Schema file name - Specifies the P3DComponent.xml file. Make sure that you select the XML
file used by your SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D session file.
164

Relationship mapping file name - Select the RelationshipMapping.txt file
Optional input template file - Enables you to load an existing SPRSP3dLabels.bin file.
You may have only one label template file per project and the file must be named
SPRSP3dLabels.bin.
You must re-create the label database (re-open or re-publish the project) each time you
want to change the set of labels available in the published project.
File output directory - Specifies the location for the label template file. This default path points
to the same folder where the SmartPlant Review or SmartPlant Review Publisher executable is
located. If an SPRSP3dLabels.bin file is not available, all SmartPlant 3D label data is added to
the label database as if all labels were checked.
Select label to display:

Displays the labels that you have checked in the tree view that will be added to the label
database. Click the arrow in the column header to sort this list alphabetically, either ascending
or descending. In this list, you can uncheck the labels that you do not want added to the label
database, and they will be automatically removed from the list.
Save - Saves the specified list of labels to the label template file (SPRSP3dLabels.bin), which is
then used by SmartPlant Review and SmartPlant Review Publisher to add the selected label
data to the label database (MDB2) during the publishing process.
Use the Utility

If you are changing the label display for a project that has already been opened in
SmartPlant Review, you must delete the label database file (MDB2). Changes to the
SPRSP3dLabels.bin file are not automatically made to the existing label database file.
165

1. From the Start menu, select Intergraph SmartPlant Review > SmartPlant 3D Label
Selector.
2. Click the browse button to locate the following required files and file locations:
Schema file name - Select the P3DComponent.xml used by SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D to
generate the VUE and XML files.
Before you select this file, make sure that you copied the P3DComponent.xml file
used by SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D to generate the VUE and XML files to the folder
containing the generated VUE and XML files.
Relationship mapping file name - Select the RelationshipMapping.txt file. You can use the
one delivered with SmartPlant Review located in the SmartPlant Review installation folder.
File output directory - Select the location of the SPRSP3dLabels.bin file to use when you
save your edits.
3. Use the Find Label feature to search for specific labels. Any labels you check in the Labels
tree view are automatically placed in the Selected label to display list view.
The Check All and Uncheck All operations apply only to labels located using Find
Label.
4. In the Selected Label to display list view you can uncheck any label(s) you decide not to
use. The label is immediately removed from the list.
5. When you have finished defining your labels for display, click Save. The
SPRSP3dLabels.bin template file is generated.
166
View SmartPlant 3D Labels in SmartPlant Review

After you have selected the labels for 3D Model objects you want to see in SmartPlant Review,
open the VUE file and check the label data.
1. In SmartPlant Review, select File > Open.
2. Select the SmartPlant 3D project files and click Open.
3. Click the SmartPlant 3D tab in the Create Project dialog box. When you open a SmartPlant
3D VUE file or a local SmartPlant 3D SVF project, the SmartPlant 3D tab displays on the
Create Project dialog box, allowing you to specify the location of all the files required by
SmartPlant Review to create the project label database (MDB2).
4. Set the following required files:

Schema - Browse to the P3DComponent.xml file that was generated by the SmartPlant
3D project files.
Relationship mapping - Browse to select the RelationshipMapping.txt file that came
with SmartPlant Review. You may need to edit this text file to make the information
display as you need it in SmartPlant Review.
Optional input template file - Enables you to load the SPRSP3dLabels.bin file
generated from the Label Selector utility.
5. Click OK to open the SmartPlant 3D project in SmartPlant Review, which automatically
6. Open the generated log file or the Microsoft Event Viewer to verify that there were no
problems. When an MDB2 label database is generated, information, including any
generation problems, is written to a log file ([project nameTimeLogRelease.txt] located in the
project folder. In addition, any error information is recorded in the operating system Event
Log.
167
An example log file entry is Bad character at line number [19734] and
position [117] in file:///D:/Example/InvalidChar.xml.
For the Event Viewer, go to Event Viewer > Application > [Event name] > Event
Properties to see a description of each problem. The source is Intergraph XML
Processing.
7. In SmartPlant Review, select an object using Auto-Highlight mode to view the additional
label data in the Text view. The example below shows the text of a slab in SmartPlant
Review.
168
Map a Label Using the RelationshipMapping.txt File

The Unmapped Labels node in the Label Selector tree view lists labels that have not been
mapped in the RelationshipMapping.txt file. The component name(s) enclosed in parentheses
beside each unmapped label are the name(s) that need to be added to the
RelationshipMapping.txt file.
General Workflow
1. In the SmartPlant 3D Label Selector utility, note the component names in the Unmapped
Labels node that you want to move. The component names are enclosed in parentheses in
the tree view. You also need to decide the Relationship to which you want to associate the
label name.
2. Open the RelationshipMapping.txt file and increase the number of mapped components
listed in the file by one. Then scroll down to the end of the component list and type in the
component name and Relationship you want to associate.
3. Save your edits to the file.
4. Go back to the Label Selector utility. Make sure that you are pointing to the
RelationshipMapping.txt file that you just edited.
5. Go to the Mapped Labels node and locate the Relationship and then the label names you
just added.
Example
Follow the steps below to map a label so that you can see it in the Mapped Labels node of the
Label Selector tree view. As an example, you will map the weld labels in the P3DWeld
component to the Feature Relationship in the RelationshipMapping.txt file
Selector.
169

2. In the Unmapped Labels node of the tree view, locate the weld labels.
The P3DWeld is shown in parentheses and is the component you need to use for the
association.
3. Close the Label Selector utility. You do not need to save any edits.
4. Locate the RelationshipMapping.txt file that you want to use.
This file is delivered with SmartPlant Review in the default installation folder. You can
use this file, or you can make a copy of it to modify.
5. Open the RelationshipMapping.txt file using any ASCII text editor and increase the number
of mapped components listed in the file by one. By default, the number is 66, so you would
need to change that number to 67.
6. Scroll down to the end of the component list and type in the line below:
7. Save your edits and close the file.

8. Re-open the Label Selector and in the Mapped Labels node, expand Feature Relationship
and scroll down to the Weld component node.
170

The system now displays all the weld label names. They are no longer listed in the
Unmapped Labels node.
9. Click Save and close the Label Selector utility.
View General Notes from SmartPlant 3D

The steps in this section show you how to enable the display of general notes from Smart 3D
project files in SmartPlant Review.
1. Locate the VUE and XML files generated from SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D.
2. Locate the P3DComponent.xml file associated to the exported SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D
files and copy it to one of the SmartPlant Review file load locations:
The directory containing the SmartPlant 3D project files ([project].VUE and
[project].XML).
3. Open the RelationshipMapping.txt file delivered with SmartPlant Review and add the
ItemWithNote relationship to the relationship section. This involves:
a. Updating the number of relationships at the top of the section. By default, the number
must be incremented from 11 to 12. If you have added other relationships, then you
must increment that number by one.
171

b. Adding the line: ItemWithNote at the end of the section. The example below shows
the line after it has been added in the default RelationshipMapping.txt file. You must
increment the relationship number column, enter Note in the component prefix column,
and set the property value to 1.
4. In the component section of the file, add the P3DGeneralNote component. This includes:
a. Updating the number of components at the top of the section. By default, the number
must be incremented from 66 to 67.
b. Adding the line: P3DGeneralNote at the end of the section. The example below shows
the line after it has been added in the default RelationshipMapping.txt file. You must
enter Note in the component prefix column.
5. Save your edits and close the RelationshipMapping.txt file.

6. Open the SmartPlant 3D Label Selector utility (SP3DLabelSelector.exe) and click the
browse button to locate the following required files and file locations:
Schema file name - The P3DComponent.xml used by SmartPlant 3D to generate the VUE
and XML files.
Relationship mapping file name - Select the RelationshipMapping.txt file you just edited.
File output directory - Select the location of the SPRSP3dLabels.bin file that will be
generated by the Label Selector utility. Intergraph recommends that you designate the folder
containing the VUE and XML files being used.
172

7. In the Relationship mapping hierarchy display, scroll down to the Note node and expand
it to see the Generate note component as shown in the example below.
8. Ensure the note information you want to display is checked and click Save in the SmartPlant
3D Label Selector.
173

9. Open the SmartPlant 3D VUE file in SmartPlant Review to see the note information. The
example below shows a pump selected in the main view and the note information is shown
in the text view.
174
Review Example Workflow

The example below shows you how to (a) use the Label Selector utility to limit the label display
in SmartPlant Review, and (b) open the generated VUE file in SmartPlant Review to see the
corresponding, selected labels.
The graphic below shows the Weight and CG category properties for a pump named
Pump-002 in SmartPlant 3D.
Use the Label Selector utility to limit the label display to show only the Dry Weight, DryCGX,
DryCGY, DryCGZ, and Dry WCG Origin properties as labels in SmartPlant Review.
Use the SmartPlant 3D Label Selector

Selector.
2. Click the browse button to locate the following required files and file locations:
Schema file name - The P3DComponent.xml used by SmartPlant 3D to generate the VUE
and XML files.
Before you select this file, make sure that you copied the P3DComponent.xml file
used by SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D to generate the VUE and XML files to the folder
containing the generated VUE and XML files.
175

Relationship mapping file name - Select the RelationshipMapping.txt file. You can use the
file delivered with SmartPlant Review located in the default SmartPlant Review installation
folder.
File output directory - Select the location of the SPRSP3dLabels.bin file that will be
generated by the Label Selector utility. Intergraph recommends that you designate the folder
containing the VUE and XML files being used.
3. By default, all label names in the tree view are checked. Because you are going to limit the
display to just a few labels in this example, uncheck them. You can uncheck all of them by
removing the checkmark from the top Labels node. This also clears out the contents of the
Selected label to display list view.
4. In the Find Label section, type in dry and click Check All.
The utility automatically checks label names containing the word dry. The checked label
names display in the Selected label to display view.
5. In the Selected Label to display list view you can uncheck any labels you decide not to
use. The label is immediately removed from the list. For this example, do not uncheck any
labels.
6. Click Save. The resulting SPRSP3dLabels.bin template file is generated.
Use SmartPlant Review

1. In SmartPlant Review, open the SmartPlant 3D VUE file.
176

2. Click the SmartPlant 3D tab in the Create Project dialog box.
3. Set the following files:

Schema - Browse to the P3DComponent.xml file used by SmartPlant 3D.
Relationship mapping - Select the RelationshipMapping.txt file. You can use the file
delivered with SmartPlant Review located in the default installation folder. See
Troubleshoot Label Display Problems (on page 179).
Optional label template - Browse to select the SPRSP3dLabels.bin file generated from
the Label Selector utility.
4. Click OK to open the SmartPlant 3D model in SmartPlant Review. This automatically
177

The figure below shows that Pump-002 is selected in SmartPlant Review, and the text view
displays just the 'dry' labels set in the Label Selector utility.
The corresponding properties as displayed in SmartPlant 3D are shown below.
178
Troubleshoot Label Display Problems

Problem: Labels not displaying in SmartPlant Review
Make sure that the Displayname property is defined in your P3DComponent.xml file.
Edit the RelationshipMapping.txt file for a SmartPlant 3D component defined in the
P3DComponent.xml file that is not showing up in SmartPlant Review.
Make sure that the relationship order is sequential and complete. The total number of
relationships must match the index number at the top of the file.
Edit the RelationshipMapping.txt File
1. Determine in which relationships the SmartPlant 3D component is involved. For example,
the P3DSpool component is a member of the AssemblyHierarchy and Spoolable_Spools
relationships.
Use Schema Editor to view the relationships in the P3DComponent.xml file.
2. Add the relationships to the RelationshipMapping.txt file. For example, to add the
AssemblyHierarchy and Spoolable_Spools relationships, use the following format for each
relationship:
<relationship name> <resolved order> <prefix> <UID1>
where
11 = Number of relationships to be traversed. Must be changed whenever
a new relationship is added or deleted.
<relationship name> = AssemblyHierarchy or Spoolable_spools
<resolved order> = 9 or 11, respectively
<prefix> = Assembly or Spool, respectively
3. After adding both relationships, the resulting first section in the RelationshipMapping.txt file
should look like the following (new information bolded for emphasis).
179

Problem: Nozzle Information Display
Before you open your SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D project in SmartPlant Review, you can edit
the RelationshipMapping.txt file delivered with SmartPlant Review to set up the display of nozzle
information in SmartPlant Review.
1. Change the nozzle relationship UID1 property from 1 to 0 in this file. This prevents the
nozzle grouping, but it results in the equipment information also appearing with the selected
nozzle's information.
Change:
EquipmentNozzle
Nozzle
EquipmentNozzle
Nozzle
To:
-orTo prevent the nozzle grouping AND prevent equipment information from appearing with the
individual nozzle display:
a. Remove the single nozzle relationship mapping from the file.
Make sure you correctly re-number all the counts and indices in this file as
appropriate.
Change:
180

To:
b. Remove the P3DComponent name-to-nozzle relationship mapping lines from the file:
P3DCableTrayNozzle
Nozzle
P3DCableNozzle
Nozzle
P3DConduitNozzle
Nozzle
P3DHVACNozzle
Nozzle
P3DPipeNozzle
Nozzle
2. Follow the workflow described in Viewing SmartPlant 3D Model Data (on page 159) to open
the SmartPlant 3D project.
When locating nozzle geometry using the mouse, you may need to right-click on the
located equipment geometry to reject it and to select the nozzle geometry.
The 2007 HotFix 5 and 2008 or later versions of SmartPlant 3D and SmartMarine 3D now
publish nozzle geometry separately in addition to the nozzle geometry also published as part
of the equipment geometry. They also use a different P3DComponent.XML and
MapComponentsToDisciplines.txt file than are currently delivered with SmartPlant Review or
SmartPlant Review Publisher.
The MapComponentsToDisciplines.txt file organizes all nozzle geometry under the
SmartPlant Review discipline of Equipment. The delivered SmartPlant Review
RelationshipMapping.txt file currently groups all nozzle label data onto the associated piece
of equipment.
Problem: Incorrect Display Set Resolution

A label displays in SmartPlant Review when you select an object; however, the display set
definition query using "FIND LABEL" with that label name and value fails to resolve the selected
object.
The issue may be with the MapComponentsToDisciplines.txt file, which maps the
SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D Component Name to a file discipline in SmartPlant Review, and to
a level under that file that is named for that component. The MapComponentsToDisciplines.txt
file delivered with SmartPlant Review is used to support the application's sample data. This file
181
Work with Aspects

is also delivered with SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D to organize the label data during the export to
SmartPlant Review process.
When opening the project in SmartPlant Review, you must use the same
MapComponentsToDisciplines.txt file that was used to export the VUE and XML files from
SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D. If the VUE file and label database organization is out of sync,
problems with display set resolution can occur. Contact your administrator for information on the
location of configuration files in SmartPlant/SmartMarine 3D, or contact Intergraph customer
support.
See Also
Review Example Workflow (on page 175)
Map a Label Using the RelationshipMapping.txt File (on page 169)
Work with Aspects

An aspect is a geometric area or space related to an object. The aspect represents information
about the object, such as its physical shape or the space required around the object. Aspects
are associated parameters for an object, representing additional information needed for
placement, such as clearances for safety or maintenance, additional space required during
operation, or simple and detailed representations of the object. You define aspects when you
model a part class for the reference data.
Aspect Behavior
All aspects are selected by default after creating a new project database.
All geometry published by SmartPlant 3D is placed in an aspect, including MicroStation data
imported into SmartPlant 3D.
You can select any combination of aspects on the Aspects Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)
(on page 218). If you do not select an aspect, then nothing is displayed in the view windows.
Aspect display is the same for all views: Main, Plan, or Elevation.
Aspect selection does not override elements hidden due to the current level or
display set settings.
The current aspect selections are saved to the project database when you close the project
or click File > Save. The saved aspect settings are recalled when the project is re-opened.
You can undo and redo changes in the aspect selections using the Edit > Undo and Edit >
Redo commands.
Only the visible elements of the currently selected aspects can be located and/or
highlighted. Aspects are component elements of complex elements. Use the Motion >
Mouse Drag Modes > Auto-Highlight Elements option to locate a specific component
element in the graphic object's aspect.
Surface and snaplock measurement can be taken with any located visible aspect
component element. The "shortest distance between two objects" measurement cannot be
taken between two component elements of the same object. However, the command does
measure only between the displayed aspects of two selected objects.
Collision detection tests only those elements of the currently selected aspects.
The collision detection Use Hidden elements option does not apply to aspects. If an
aspect is not selected, its elements are not used for collision detection, even if this option is
enabled. This option applies only when an element is hidden by level settings or display set
settings.
182
Work with Aspects
Raytracing renders only the visible elements of the currently selected aspects.
Collaboration supports sending and receiving changes to the current aspect selections
between the driver and passengers in the collaboration session.
Display set resolution is not affected by the current aspect selections. There is no display
set definition support for querying for elements of a specific aspect.
No aspect-specific information is given for the object data in the Text view for selected
elements of an object.
Saved views, such as those in the View > Save and Recall command do not support
saving or recalling aspect selections.
The Edit > Find Object command returns objects based on display set definitions, not
based on any current aspect or object visibility settings. Turning aspects on/off does not
change the Find Object behavior.
All Fit commands honor the total range of all aspects for a graphic object. Turning aspects
on/off does not change Fit behaviors.
The rendering of the Insulation aspect geometry is simplified in shaded model views when it
is transparent by removing geometry end caps and back faces.
Turn Aspects On and Off (on page 183)

Add Custom Aspects (on page 184)
Turn Aspects On and Off

1. Click View > Settings.
2. Click the Aspects tab.
3. Select the aspects you want to turn on.
An aspect is turned on if it is highlighted in the Selected aspects list.
You can select one or multiple aspects in the Selected aspects list.
4. Click OK.
The View Settings > Aspect tab displays only when you are reviewing a VUE file produced
by SmartPlant 3D.
SmartPlant Review can display only those aspects that were selected in the SmartPlant 3D
workspace session at the time the .VUE file was created. If the VUE file does not contain the
actual model geometry for the selected aspect, it cannot be displayed.
The rendering of any transparent insulation aspect geometry is simplified in shaded model
views by removing its end caps and back faces.
183
Work with Aspects
Add Custom Aspects

To add your custom aspect names and numbers to the View Settings > Aspects tab, you must
add your custom aspect names and numbers to the SmartPlant Review SPRSchema.txt project
database schema file before creating a new project database. This file is delivered by default to
the C:\Program Files\SmartPlant\Review folder.
1. Open the SPRSchema.txt file in Notepad, then scroll down to the sp3d_aspects create
table section.
2. Add your custom aspect names to the end of the current values in the aspect_names field,
separated by commas.
184
Work with Aspects

3. Add your custom aspect numbers to the end of the current values in the aspect_numbers
field, separated by commas.
4. Save and close the SPRSchema.txt file.

5. Create a new project database. For more information, see Open a Model File (on page 82).
The order of the aspect names and the order of the aspect numbers must match in both
lists.
Numbers 19 through 30 are available for custom aspects.
Aspect numbers 1 through 3 and 9 through 18 are reserved for use by the software and
should not be modified.
Do not define an aspect code of 31 or greater.
Aspect names may not contain commas.
See Also
Work with Aspects (on page 182)
Aspects Tab (View Settings Dialog Box) (on page 218)
185
Work with Aspects
186
SECTION 14
Using the UoM Converter to Change the

Units of Measure for Labels
By default, SmartPlant 3D and SmartPlant Marine 3D publish all label data in System
International (SI) units. The UoM (Units of Measure) Converter utility enables you to change the
units of measurement for labels in SmartPlant 3D project files that are imported into SmartPlant
Review. For example, you can change temperature measurement from Kelvin to Fahrenheit,
and meters to feet for distance measurements.
The UoM Converter utility, accessed from Start > Intergraph SmartPlant Review > UoM
Converter, uses the Sx3D-generated schema file, P3DComponent.xml. This file contains
metadata information that lists the attributes and types of measurement units used in the file,
and how they relate to each other. The UoM Converter utility reads and displays information
from this file so that you can edit the desired units of measurement. Once you set the new units
of measurement, the UoM Converter utility generates the UoMConversions.xml file, which is
read by SmartPlant Review the next time the project file is opened and a new label database
(MDB2) file is generated. Your changes are reflected in the SmartPlant Review Object Data text
window when you select graphic elements using the updated units of measure.
Key Components of the UoM Converter

SmartPlant 3D (SP3D) project - Currently, the UoM Converter utility only uses schema files
from SmartPlant 3D projects, which contain .XML and .VUE files.
P3DComponent.xml file - SmartPlant 3D schema file used to create the project .XML file.
Because you can have multiple P3Dcomponent.xml schema files, each used to create a
different project .XML file, you must make sure you use the correct P3Dcomponent.xml file when
running the UoM Converter utility. You must always load the P3Dcomponent.xml file that was
used to create the SmartPlant 3D project .XML file you are working with to create the desired
conversion file.
UoMConversions.xml - Conversion file generated by the UoM Converter utility. You can
rename the file once it has been generated, if needed. However, SmartPlant Review only
recognizes the UoMConversions.xml filename as the conversion file.
.MDB2 label database file - File containing label information for SmartPlant Review. An .MDB2
file is automatically generated when you open a project in SmartPlant Review for the first time.
When you create a new conversion file, you must move the current .MDB2 file to another
location or delete it so that SmartPlant Review can generate a new .MDB2 file containing your
conversions.
UoM Converter Dialog Box

Enables you to customize the units of measure for labels in SmartPlant Review. You can only
use the UoM Converter utility with files imported from the SmartPlant 3D application.
Options:
Schema file name (P3DComponent.xml) - Shows the P3DComponent.xml file to be used for
the customization. Browse to the P3DComponent.xml file generated by SP3D you want to use to
customize the units of measure. A P3DComponent.xml file is generated when you create project
files in SmartPlant 3D. The P3DComponent.xml file contains the schema information related to
187
Using the UoM Converter to Change the Units of Measure for Labels
the SmartPlant 3D project, and it is generated in the same folder as the SmartPlant 3D project
file.
You can only use the schema files generated by SmartPlant 3D.
File output directory - Shows the path of the resulting conversion file (UoMConversions.xml)
containing your changes. Browse to or type in the desired path location. The conversion files in
SmartPlant Review are (1) the folder containing the project files, and if not found there, then (2)
the folder where the SmartPlant Review executable file is installed.
You should not change the name of the conversion file, UoMConversions.xml. It is
automatically created when you save your changes in the UoM Converter dialog box.
If you do not specify an output directory, the UoMConversions.xml file is saved in the root
directory where the UoM Converter utility is installed.
Conversion rules - Lists all the measurement types and units that are available in the selected
SmartPlant 3D schema file, P3DComponent.xml.
Type - measurement unit type (for example, Angle, Length and Temperature).
Convert From - measurement unit that you want to change. Click in the field to display
a pull-down list with unit currently available for the selected measurement type.
Convert To - updated measurement unit. Click in the field to display a pull-down list
with the unit you want to have display in SmartPlant Review labels.
Precision - number of decimal places to use to express the measurement value. The
measurement value is rounded to fit the selected precision. You can type in an integer
value 0 - 30 to represent the number of decimal places to use. For example, if you typed
in 5 as the precision for the value 12.345, then the decimal value is displayed as
12.34500. If you used 2 as the precision, then the displayed decimal value is 12.35.
Using a precision of 0 during a conversion may not give you the desired result.
For example, when a value of six inches is converted to feet with a zero (0) precision,
the result is one foot because of rounding:
6 inches / 12 inches per foot = 0.5 feet (with zero (0) precision rounds 0.5 up to 1) = 1
foot.
Default precision - Precision value (0 - 30) used if no value is set for the conversion rule. If you
type in a value in the Precision column of the conversion rule, that value overrides the Default
precision setting.
Conversion rules in effect - Lists the measurement conversions you want to use. When you
click Add, all rows you have selected in the Conversion rules section are placed in this section.
Load - Appends or replaces the conversion rules you have set in another UoMConversions.xml
file. When you click Load, a message displays asking if you want to append to or replace all of
the current conversion rules. If you click Yes, then the conversion rules are added to the bottom
of the current conversion rules displayed in the dialog box. If you select No, then the current
conversion rules are replaced by those in the other file. This enables you to create different sets
of customized conversion rules.
Save - Saves the UoMConversions.xml file in the directory specified in the File Output
Directory box. All conversions that are in the Conversion rules in effect section when you
click Save are placed in the UoMConversions.xml file.
Close - Exits the UoM Converter utility. If modifications have been made, a confirmation
message is displayed before the application closes.
Add - Copies all measurement rows you have selected in the Conversion rules section into the
Conversion rules in effect section of the dialog box.
Delete - Removes the selected row(s) from the Conversion rules in effect section.
188
Create the Units of Measure Conversion File for SmartPlant 3D Projects (on page 189)
Load the SmartPlant 3D Units of Measure Conversion File (on page 190)
Create the Units of Measure Conversion File for

SmartPlant 3D Projects
1. Select Start > Intergraph SmartPlant Review > UoM Converter to open the UoM
Converter dialog box.
SmartPlant Review provides a sample P3DComponet.xml file. When you first open
the UoM Converter utility, this sample file is used and the Conversion rules section in the
dialog box is automatically populated with the available sample measurement units.
2. In the Schema file name (P3DComponent.xml) box, browse to the P3DComponent.xml
file that you want to use to customize the units of measure. A P3DComponent.xml file is
generated when you create project files in SmartPlant 3D and it contains the schema
information related to the SmartPlant3D project.
The UoM Converter utility only reads P3DComponent.xml for the schema
filename.
After you select a P3DComponent.xml file, the Conversion rules section is automatically
populated with measurement units. All the measurement units and related unit types that are
used in the selected SmartPlant 3D project file display.
3. In the File output directory box, browse to or type in the location for the
UoMConversions.xml file, which is the conversion file generated by the UoM Converter
utility. The file is read by SmartPlant Review when the SmartPlant 3D project file is opened.
For SmartPlant Review to use the conversion file, it must be placed in either (a) the
directory containing the SmartPlant 3D project file you are importing into SmartPlant
Review, or (b) the directory where the SmartPlant Review executable file is installed.
If you save the file to a different location, you must manually move the
UoM_converter_utility.xml file to one of the two above locations before you open the
project file in SmartPlant Review.
You should not change the name of the UoMConversions.xml conversion file. The file is
automatically created when you save your changes in the UoM Converter dialog box.
If you do not specify an output directory, the UoMConversions.xml file is saved in the
root directory where the UoM Converter utility is installed.
4. The Conversion rules section is where you set your conversion changes or rules:
a. Move to the row containing the units that you want to change.
b. Click in the Convert From box to display a pull-down list containing units that relate to
the selected measurement type. Select the unit that you want to convert.
c. Click the Convert To box to display a pull-down list containing related units. Select the
unit that you want to use.
189
d. In the Precision box, type in the number of decimal places (0 - 30) to use to format the
measurement value. The measurement value is rounded to fit the selected precision. If
no value is entered, the Default precision value is used.
e. Repeat steps a-d for each unit of measure that you want to convert. All changes are
marked in red text.
5. Use CTRL+ or SHIFT+ to select all the rows you edited and click Add.
You can also click and hold your mouse button to select multiple rows.
After you click Add, all selected rows are placed in the Conversion rules in effect section.
6. If you want to append or replace conversion rules in effect from another
UoMConversions.xml file created using the UoM Converter utility, click Load; otherwise,
skip to step 9.
7. Browse to the location of the other UoMConversions.xml file and click Load.
A message box displays to ask you if you want to Append or Replace the conversion rules
you have set in the Conversion rules in effect section.
8. Click Yes to append the conversion rules to the bottom of the Conversion rules in effect
list. If you select No, then the current conversion rules are replaced by those in the other file.
9. To remove one or more conversion rules in the Conversion rules in effect section, select
the row(s) and click Delete.
10. Click Save to save your conversion rules to the UoMConversions.xml file.
This file can now be used and read by SmartPlant Review the next time the SmartPlant 3D
project file is opened.
Load the SmartPlant 3D Units of Measure Conversion

File
1. Use the UoM Converter utility to create a UoMConversions.xml file containing measurement
unit conversions.
2. Place the conversion file in one of the following locations for SmartPlant Review:
The directory containing the SmartPlant 3D project files.
3. If you have previously opened the SmartPlant 3D project files into SmartPlant Review,
delete or move the the .MDB2 label database file to another location. A new MDB2 label
database file will be created by SmartPlant Review and the label data will reflect the desired
unit conversions from the UoMConversions.xml file.
4. Import or open the SmartPlant 3D project file in SmartPlant Review. See Open a Model File
(on page 82).
190
To verify your unit conversions, open the project in SmartPlant Review, select a graphic object,
and look in the Object Data text box at the displayed label values.
191
192
SECTION 15
Find Objects in the Model

Edit > Find Object
Searches for objects in the model that match criteria that you specify. The search options can
include a combination of the display list criteria, data criteria, graphic criteria, graphic volume
(area), and individual elements.
The search criteria for a display list is set using the Edit Definition command. See Edit a
Display Set Definition (on page 247) for more information. You can also set up custom search
criteria to locate specific objects.
1. Click Edit > Find Object.
You can also click Find Object
on the Tools MiniBar or press Ctrl+F.
2. Compose the search criteria on the Find Object dialog box. See Find Object Dialog Box (on
page 194) for a description of each dialog box option.
3. Click Execute when you are ready to run the search.
The number of objects found displays in the Query results field. Each object is numbered
for reference purposes.
4. Use the Previous and Next buttons to look at each of the located objects.
If the Allow fly-to behaviors option is selected as a motion setting (see Motion menu >
Settings > Display tab), you can double-click the Previous or Next buttons to
immediately jump to the located object instead of going through fly mode.
Press ESC to cancel the find operation.
5. You can click Restore to restore the main view to its previous state.
6. Click Close when you have finished.
The results of the last query you perform is automatically saved. Once the Find
Object dialog box is closed, you can still scroll through the objects located in the last search
using the Next Object and Previous Object commands in the Edit menu.
193
Find Object Dialog Box

Allows you to search for objects according to a defined search criteria.
Name - Selects a display set containing the desired search object(s), or select <Custom> to
create your own search. If you have a display set already selected in the Project Manager, the
display sets displays in the Name field when you open the Find Object dialog box.
Edit - Allows you to edit or create custom search criteria for objects. When you click Edit, the
Edit Definition dialog box displays where you can add, remove, copy and paste constructs
defining your search. Once you create a new criteria, the Name field is automatically set to
<Custom>. See Edit Definition Dialog Box (on page 248).
Criteria - Displays in read-only format the constructs of the criteria for the display set, or for the
custom search set in the Name field. Each display set's criteria definition can be used as the
current search definition.
Execute - Runs the specified search. Located objects matching the search definition are
numbered and can be previewed in the Query results section of the Find Object dialog box.
Restore - Resets the main view to its previous state and restores the display to normal material
colors.
Close - Closes the Find Object dialog box.
Fit
None - Omits the fit operation when you start the selected query.
All - Fits all objects into the Main view when you start the selected query.
Query results - Fits all objects that match the currently selected query into the Main view
when you start the query.
Display
All - Displays both matching and non-matching elements when you start the currently
selected query.
194
Query results - Displays only matching elements when you start the currently selected
query.
All but query results - Displays only non-matching elements when you start the currently
selected query.
Style - Defines the style for highlighting objects that your query finds. You can select
Wireframe, Transparent (90% - 10%), Shaded, or Normal.
The Transparent option specifies how much you can see through an object. You can vary
the percentage of transparency from 10% (least transparent) to 90%.
Use the Normal style if you want to prevent the symbology from changing from its normal
(as-is) state.
Color - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to change the highlight color for the objects
that your query finds.
Query results
Total - displays the number of objects located in the search.
Current objects - lists the object number. Each object located in the search is automatically
assigned a number that can be used as a reference when reviewing the object and its
attributes.
Fit to object - check this option to fit current object into the Main view when it is located in
the current query result.
This option overrides the query Fit options when selected.

This option is automatically saved when you exit or close the Find Object dialog
box and applies to the Edit > Previous Object and Edit > Next Object command
behavior.
Previous - becomes enabled once the search has been executed. Click Previous to return
to the previous object in the query results list.
Next - becomes enabled once the search has been executed. Click Next to go on to the
next object in the query results list.
Settings > Display tab), you can double-click the Previous or Next buttons to
immediately jump to the located object instead of going through fly mode.
Press ESC to cancel the operation.
See Also
Find Objects in the Model (on page 193)
Edit Definition Dialog Box (on page 248)
195
196
SECTION 16
Working with Views
197
Working with Views

The primary SmartPlant Review user interface consists of a set of image displays, which appear
within views. Images and information appear in the following view types.
Main view - Serves as the primary working view and is always displayed, unless the Single
View Layout option is turned on and the view is switched from the Main view. Most of the
review and positioning changes that you make appear here. The Main view can be displayed in
either shaded or wireframe form. For more information on changing what and how objects
display in the Main view, see Main Command (on page 49).
198
Working with Views

Plan View - Displays an overview of the area or location in which you are working, your position,
and a view cone. The Plan view displays the top view (how the model appears when you look
down on it from directly above) and appears only in wireframe form.
Elevation View - Displays an overview of the area or location in which you are working, your
position, and a view cone. The elevation view displays the front view of the model and appears
only in wireframe.
Text View - Displays information appropriate to the current command context, such as, but not
limited to, the text for the active tag, label search data, measurement data, and component
attribute data. You can copy text from the Text view to the Clipboard for pasting into another
field or application.
You can resize each view. Views are updated according to the action that you are
performing in the views. The view cone in the plan and elevation views reflects any resizing
operations performed in the main view.
The Copy command is available for copying text from the Text view. The Copy command is
also available in the graphical views for copying the view image to the Clipboard.
You can use the Window > View Layout commands to display or cycle through one, three,
or all four views.
Use the Common Views Control

1. Click Common Views
in the Common View toolbar.
2. From the Common Views control, click on one of the six faces of the 3D box to change
your view to a 2D view, or you can select one of the eight corner circles to change your view
to an isometric view.
-orYou can use the pull-down menu to select the available common views. See Common
Views Commands (on page 43).
3. You can dock the Common Views control at the edge of the window, or you can leave it
undocked or 'floating'.
The docking areas for this control are automatically restricted to help reduce the possibility
of the docking area obscuring the client area of the application window. If you are unable to
dock this control where you want it, try resizing the control to be smaller or resizing the
application window to be larger.
The views available on this control are also available on the View > Toolbars > Common
View Tools toolbar and from the View > Common menu.
199
Working with Views
Fit Views
SmartPlant Review provides several options for manipulating a view. For example, you can
adjust all the windows to display the entire model, adjust only the active window to display the
entire model, or adjust the active window to display a selected object or display set.
You also can increase or decrease the viewing area. Decreasing causes everything within the
window to appear larger, while increasing causes everything within the window to appear
smaller.
In most cases, view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Fit, affect the active window
only. Therefore, the active window must be selected prior to using any of the view related
commands.
Fit All to Model (on page 200)

Fit View to Model (on page 201)
Fit View to Object (on page 201)
Fit View to Volume (on page 202)
Fit View to Display Set (on page 202)
Zoom In (on page 203)
Zoom Out (on page 203)
Zoom About a Point (on page 204)
Set Zoom Amount (on page 204)
Fit All to Model

The View > Fit > All to Model command displays the entire model in all views. SmartPlant
Review moves the center point toward the true center of the fit volume.
When viewing streaming data and the Main view has the focus, this command requests
ALL of the data for the model to be streamed but fits in the view only to the range of graphics
current streamed (and visible). This allows you to force all data to be streamed while actually
fitting to only currently visible data. For more information about fitting streamed data, see Using
SmartPlant Review in Streaming Mode (on page 417).
1. Click View on the Menu bar.
2. From the drop down menu, click Fit.
3. Click All to Model.
See Also
Fit View to Object (on page 201)
Fit View to Volume (on page 202)
Fit View to Display Set (on page 202)
200
Working with Views
Fit View to Model

Adjusts the display in the Main view so that the entire model is visible. The view cone in the
Plan and Elevation views adjusts accordingly.
Fit the view to your model using one of the following methods:
Click View > Fit > View to Model.
Click Fit View to Model
The Fit View to Model command adjusts the view window so the entire model appears. The
view cone in the Plan and Elevation views adjust accordingly.
If you are not in one of the encircle positioning modes and do not have the Fit View to
Model option on, the view will rotate away from what you are currently viewing.
If you have the Fit View to Model option on, the view will effectively rotate around the
current center point of the fitted model view.
When viewing streaming data and the Main view has the focus, this command requests ALL
of the data for the model to be streamed but fits in the view only to the range of graphics
current streamed (and visible). This allows you to force all data to be streamed while actually
fitting to only currently visible data. For more information about fitting streamed data, see
Using SmartPlant Review in Streaming Mode (on page 417).
See Also
Fit Views (on page 200)
Fit View to Object

Use the View > Fit > View to Object command to adjust the display in the Main view so that
the view is zoomed in on the selected object. The view cone in the Plan and Elevation views
adjusts accordingly.
This command honors the Auto-Highlight mouse drag modes so that you can fit to an
element, to a complex element (cell or symbol), or to a component (normal or special
SmartPlant 3D component).
1. Click View, point to Fit, and click View to Object. The software prompts you to select an
object in the model. The pointer changes to crosshairs.
2. Move the crosshairs pointer over the object and click on the object.
3. Left-click again to accept or right- click to reject the object and select the next object (if any)
behind the currently selected object.
See Also
201
Working with Views
Fit View to Volume

Zooms in on the selected volume. SmartPlant Review displays a tracking rectangle from
your first point to your second point. The current model coordinates of your mouse position
display in the status bar. After you place your second point, the Fit View to Volume command
adjusts the view window to display the volume selected. The view cone in the Plan and
Elevation views adjusts accordingly.
1. Click View > Fit > View to Volume.
You also can click Fit View to Volume
2. Place the first point to select the first corner of the volume to which the view will be fit.
Placing 3D Points (on page 277)
3. Place the second point to select the second opposite corner of the volume to which the view
will be fit.
The Fit View to Volume command adjusts the view window to display the volume
selected. The view cone in the plan and elevation views adjusts accordingly.
See Also
Fit View to Display Set

The View > Fit > View to Display Set command prompts you to select one or multiple display
sets that you need to fit to the active view. Then, matches the view to the selected display set.
1. Select one or more display sets in Project Manager to fit to the current view. While clicking,
use the Shift or Control keys to select multiple display sets.
2. Click View > Fit > View to Display Set.
SmartPlant Review does not limit the number of display sets. However, the capacity of your
computer can limit the number of display sets that are available.
A display set must contain one or more graphic objects or at least one or more display sets.
Display sets can contain their own graphic objects or other display sets to any level of
nesting that you need.
Project Manager displays items associated with the model when you open a document. If a
model document is not open, Project Manager does not display any items.
Double-clicking a display set in Project Manager displays the Edit Display Set Definition
dialog box.
See Also
202
Working with Views
Zoom In
Zooms into the model by a zoom factor that you specify. SmartPlant Review zooms
multiplies the zoom factor that you specify by the distance between the current eye and center
points.
1. Click in the view that you want to zoom in (if that view is not already active).
2. Click View > Zoom > In.
Use this command in any view, but note that if you use the Main view, the eye point and
center point positions are affected.
Each time that you zoom in, you increase the detail by the current zoom factor. For
example, if the zoom factor is 1.5, the detail will increase by 1.5 each time that you zoom in.
For more information, see Set Zoom Amount (on page 204).
You can change the perspective angle of the Main view to produce zoom effects without
changing the eye point position.
See Also
Zoom Out
Zooms out of the model by a zoom factor that you specify. SmartPlant Review multiplies the
zoom factor that you specify by the distance between the current eye and center points to
determine the distance for each zoom.
1. Click in the view that you want to zoom out of (if that view is not already active).
2. Click View > Zoom > Out.
Zooming out increases the viewing area, which causes everything within the window to
appear smaller, providing an overview of that portion of the model. This command operates
in the same way as all zoom commands in Windows products, except that each time that
you zoom out, you increase the viewing area by the current zoom factor. You specify the
zoom factor by using the View > Zoom > Amount command.
You can use this command in any view. However, if you use the command in the Main view,
the eye point and center point positions are affected.
You also can produce zoom effects without changing the eye point position simply by
changing the perspective angle of the Main view.
See Also
203
Working with Views
Zoom About a Point

The View > Zoom > About Point command lets you specify a point in the model about which to
zoom. If this command is on, you select the point in the model each time that you zoom. If this
command is off, SmartPlant Review zooms about the current eye point position.
You can specify the point anywhere in the model. Depending on the location of the point that
you select and the current eye point location, it is possible to create the illusion that you are
zooming in the opposite direction from that which you would expect.
You specify the zoom factor by using the View > Zoom > Amount command. See Set
Zoom Amount (on page 204) for more information.
See Also
Set Zoom Amount

The View > Zoom > Amount command lets you specify the zoom factor for zoom commands.
SmartPlant Review zooms multiplies the zoom factor that you specify by the distance between
the current eye and center points.
See Also
Light Views
SmartPlant Review provides various commands for controlling the general lighting in a view,
including lighting direction, ambient, and brightness levels.
204
Set Light Direction (on page 205)

Set Ambient Light Level (on page 205)
Set Brightness Level (on page 206)
Working with Views
Set Light Direction

The View > Display > Lighting > Direction command displays the Set Light Direction Dialog
Box (on page 205) to specify the direction of light in the model.
See Also
Light Views (on page 204)
Set Light Direction Dialog Box

Specifies the horizontal or vertical direction of light in the model in degrees. The light angle can
range from -180 to +180.
Angle - Allows you to enter a numerical value for the direction of light in the model.
Next - Accepts the current horizontal value and prompts you for the vertical value.
Back - Allows you to change a previously entered value when specifying multiple values.
Set Ambient Light Level

The View > Display > Lighting > Ambient command displays the Set Ambient Light Level
Dialog Box (on page 206) to specify the amount of ambient light to be used in the model. The
ambient light values can range from 0 to 100.
See Also
Set Light Direction (on page 205)
Rendering Photo-Realistic Images (on page 459)
205
Working with Views
Set Ambient Light Level Dialog Box

Specifies the amount of ambient light to be used in the model. The ambient light values can
range from 0 to 100.
Level - Allows you to enter a numerical value for rendering the ambient or ground light in the
model.
See Also
Set Ambient Light Level (on page 205)
Set Lighting Intensity (on page 209)
Configure View Settings (on page 207)
Set Brightness Level

The View > Display > Lighting > Brightness command displays the Set Brightness Level
Dialog Box (on page 206) to specify the brightness of the light in the model.
See Also
Troubleshooting: Animation and Lighting (on page 558)
Set Brightness Level Dialog Box

Specifies the amount of brightness in the model. The ambient light values can range from 0.0 to
10.0.
206
Working with Views

Level - Allows you to enter a numerical value for rendering the brightness in the model.
Configure View Settings

View > Settings
Displays the View Settings dialog box, which contains several tabs of options, allowing you to
edit the view display options. SmartPlant Review offers full customization of the Main, Plan, and
Elevation views. All display settings are stored to the project database and are maintained
when exiting and entering the project.
View settings enable you to define simple details, such as the shaded or wireframe background
color in the model, as well as more complex settings such as the amount of non- directional light
that displays in the model.
The software also provides range rejection options for reducing the number of small graphical
elements that SmartPlant Review draws, thus improving display time. You can specify different
range rejection criteria for each view.
Maintain Display Options (on page 208)

Set Display Tag (on page 208)
Set Range Reject (on page 209)
Set Stroking Tolerance (on page 209)
Set View Options
Define Display Order

1. Click View > Advanced > Display Order.
You can also select Display Order
on the Tools toolbar.
2. Select the object that you want to display first.
3. Continue selecting objects that you want to display, in order, until the entire list is complete.
4. Right-click to save the list.
Defines the order in which the elements in the model display each time the Main view
updates. This is especially useful when you use the motion controls. If you are interested in
particular elements or if you are working in a specific area, you can define those elements to
display first.
Only one list can exist at a time. Each time that you select this command, you are prompted
to either create a new list or add to the existing list.
207
Working with Views

See Also
Maintain Display Options

2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select the Options to display.
Maintain Render Settings

3. Select Shaded to display the model as shaded in the active display.
You also can also switch between shaded or wireframe modes by clicking Tools > Display
Sets > Shade.
Set Background Color

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Click View > Settings.

Click the Display tab.
Click Edit in the Shaded Background section.
Click a color.
Click OK on the Colors dialog box.
Click Edit in the Wireframe Background section.
Click a color.
Click OK on the Colors dialog box.
Click OK on the View Settings dialog box.
You can also change the wireframe background color by clicking View > Display >
Wireframe Background Color.
Set Display Tag

3. Select Tags from Options.
The Display Tag command allows you to display the actual tags in the model.
208
Working with Views
Set Lighting Intensity

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select the Lighting tab.
Move the Ambient from 0 to 100 slider to change the ambient lighting level.
Move the Brightness from 0 to 10 slider to change the brightness level.
The ambient light is the light that surrounds everything and does not appear to come from a
single source in the display. You can set the ambient light from low (0), which displays a
darker image, to high (100), which displays a whiter image. A high ambient light level
creates lighter shadows, while a low ambient light level creates darker shadows.
The brightness setting determines the exposure of light on the model, which changes the
intensity of the image's colors. If you select a low brightness (exposure), the colors become
darker. If you select a high brightness, the colors become brighter.
You also can set the lighting intensity by clicking View > Display > Lighting.
See Also
Anti-alias Option (Raytrace Tab) (on page 467)
Set Range Reject

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Click the Range Reject tab.
Select Activate to use range rejection.
Type in the Main, Plan and Elevation coordinate values in pixels.
Click OK when you have finished.
You can also access the range rejection commands by clicking View > Display > Range
Rejection.
See Also
Performance Tips (on page 551)
Set Stroking Tolerance

2. Select the Advanced tab.
3. Type a Stroking tolerance.
The stroking tolerance affects how the round surfaces of pipes, reducers, valves, and
elbows are rendered. The larger the tolerance, the better the display quality. However, large
tolerance values increase the view update time. The tolerance must be an integer between 4
and 100.
You also can set the stroking tolerance by clicking View > Display > Stroking Tolerance.
209
Working with Views
Set Sun Bearing Angles

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the Lighting tab.
Move the Horizontal from -180 to 180 slider to change the setting.
Move the Vertical from -180 to 180 slider to change the setting.
Select Relative to plant north to align light from the plant north setting.
Sun bearing angles allow you to determine the horizontal and vertical light angles in
degrees.
You can also set the sun bearing angle by clicking View > Display > Lighting > Direction.
Set Textures
3. Click Object textures.

The defined textures display in the Main view.
If you started SmartPlant Review from a command line using the -t option, you cannot view
textures until you restart SmartPlant Review without using the -t option.
Set View Cone Perspective

1.
2.
3.
4.

Click the View Cone tab.
Move the slider to set the Perspective in degrees from 2 to 160.
Select Dashed to display the view cone as dashed lines.
You can also display the view cone as dashed lines by clicking View > Display > Dashed
View Cone.
Set the view cone perspective by typing a value in the box next to the slider on the view
cone tab or by clicking View > Display > Perspective Angle.
Set the perspective angle interactively by dragging the view cone sides with the mouse
toward or away from the view cone eye point. You can right-click or press ESC to cancel the
perspective angle adjustment without saving the changes. Any changes to the perspective
angle made in this manner can be reversed using the Edit > Undo command.
210
Working with Views
View Settings Dialog Box

Allows you to fully customize the Main, Plan, and Elevation views. All display settings are
stored to the project database and are maintained when exiting and entering the project. This
dialog box displays when you click View > Settings.
The default settings allow for a rapid display at a lower stroking resolution. However, the View
Settings dialog box contains several tabs that offer options that affect speed and display quality.
You can use these options to choose between a more rapid update with a lower display quality
and a slower update with a higher display quality. This choice is similar to that offered on
printers with draft quality and letter quality printing.
For faster updates, use the following settings:
On the Advanced tab, enter 16 in the Stroking tolerance from 4 to 100 box.
Check Activate on the Range Reject tab.
Select the Single layout on the Window > View Layout menu to save rendering time for
the other panes.
For the highest quality updates, use the following settings:
On the Advanced tab, enter 100 in the Stroking tolerance from 4 to 100 box.
On the Range Reject tab, leave Activate unchecked.
211
Working with Views
Display Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)

Allows you to modify view rendering and display options.
Render
Shaded - Specifies whether or not the view displays as shaded or wireframe. When
checked, the view displays in shaded mode.
Object textures - Determines whether textures appear while you are manipulating the
model. Displaying textures while manipulating models may slow down the display.
Dot box - Draws distant elements less precisely for improved update speed. At a distance,
these items will be represented by a small box of pixels instead of a full rendering.
Shaded Background Color - Displays the shaded background color.
Wireframe Background Color - Specifies the color used to display wireframe rendering. Click
Edit to display the Color dialog box, which allows you to change the Shaded color.
Activate
All tags - Specifies whether or not the tags appear.
Active tag only - Specifies whether or not only the active tag appears.
All annotations - Specifies whether or not to display annotations in the view.
Data annotations - Specifies whether or not to display data annotations in the view.
Text annotations - Specifies whether or not to display text annotations in the view.
Volume annotations - Specifies whether or not to display volume annotations in the view.
Measurements - Specifies whether or not to display measurements in the view. Only
measurement collections that are turned on can be displayed.
Axis - Specifies whether or not to display a small coordinate triad in the bottom left corner of
the view showing which direction is East, North, and Elevation.
Levels - Displays the Level Settings dialog box.
212
Working with Views
Outline Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)

Allows you to modify the outline rendering mode options. This tab displays only if you have
installed the On-Site Drawing Generation module.
Draw outline of objects - Toggles the display of outline mode.

Width - Specifies the width of the outline drawn around display objects. Select 3 for the thickest
outline. Select 1 for a subtle rimming effect.
Color Options
Use a single default outline color - Displays outlines using the default outline color, which
is white on dark backgrounds and black on light backgrounds. The outline commands
automatically switch between white and black based on the current combined RGB color
intensity of the background color.
Use a single specified outline color - Displays outlines in the color you select.
Edit - Displays the standard Colors dialog box, allowing you to select or create a color. This
option is not enabled if the Use a single default outline color option is selected.
Use the colors of the objects - Outlines each object using their own colors. This option
makes the outline less obvious, but enhances the edges of objects.
View Cone Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)

Defines the boundaries of the view displayed in the Main window. The view cone changes as
you change the viewing angle, viewing direction, eye point, and as you define motion using the
motion/orientation controls.
213
Working with Views

Eye Point North - Specifies the eye point position of the view cone in relation to the north
direction (Y coordinate). You can use this box to change the eye point by typing a new north
coordinate.
Eye Point East - Specifies the eye point position of the view cone in relation to the east
direction (X coordinate). You can use this box to change the eye point by typing a new east
coordinate.
Eye Point Elevation - Specifies the height of the eye point of the view cone in relation to the
model (Z coordinate). You can use this box to change the eye point by typing a new elevation.
Center Point North - Specifies the center point position of the view cone in relation to the north
direction (Y coordinate). You can use this box to change the center point by typing a new north
coordinate.
Center Point East - Specifies the center point position of the view cone in relation to the east
direction (X coordinate). You can use this box to change the center point by typing a new east
coordinate.
Center Point Elevation - Specifies the height of the center point of the view cone in relation to
the model (Z coordinate). You can use this box to change the center point by typing a new
elevation.
Clipping plane distances
Clipping Plane Near - Specifies the absolute distance from the eye point to the center of
the near clipping plane (when Reference is set to Eye) or the location of the center point of
the near clipping plane along the Reference axis (when Reference is set to North, East, or
Elevation).
Clipping Plane Far - Specifies the absolute distance from the eye point to the center of the
far clipping plane (when Reference is set to Eye) or the location of the center point of the far
clipping plane along the Reference axis (when Reference is set to North, East, or Elevation).
Clipping Plane Reference - Displays the reference point (if set to Eye) or the reference
axis (if set to North, East, or Elevation) for the values displayed in the Far and Near boxes.
When you select Eye from the Reference list, the Near and Far boxes display the absolute
distance from the eye point to the center point of the respective clipping plane. When you
select North, East, or Elevation from the Reference list, the clipping plane fields display the
location on that Reference coordinate of the center point of the respective clipping plane.
For example, the eye point is at 100 feet North, -500 feet East, 200 feet Elevation and is
looking straight down. You do not want to see anything above 15 feet high in the model. To
accomplish this, you would select Elevation for the Reference and set Near to 15.
SmartPlant Review automatically calculates the correct clipping distance from the eye to the
near clipping plane as 185 feet.
A value of none or 0 (zero) for the near and/or far clipping planes enables the
automatic calculation of near and far clipping planes. This automatic calculation is a fast,
approximate best-fit approach and it prevents clipping objects in the view while attempting to
maximize rendering quality. The automatically-calculated clipping planes are displayed as
the yellow lines of the view cone in the Plan and Elevation views. You can then adjust the
near and/or far clipping plane values in some cases to further improve rendering quality
beyond the automatic calculation.
Perspective angle - Allows you to increase or decrease the viewing area of the view cone
without changing the locations of the clipping planes or the eye and center points. Move the
slider anywhere from 2 degrees (to decrease area) to 160 degrees (to increase area). You can
also type in the degree value. Click the TAB key when you have entered the value and the slider
bar will also show the degree setting.
214
Working with Views

Box) (on page 109)). It will also adjust the eye point to keep the model in the view. The view
cones in the Plan and Elevation views update during the transition.
Dashed - Displays the view cone in the Plan and Elevation views using dashed lines instead of
solid lines. The dashed view cone allows faster updates on slow graphic cards and some
notebook computers.
Lighting Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)

This tab is not available if the selected saved views are in an Elevation or Plan type of
view group.
Allows you to set the light intensity and sun bearing angles to control lighting for the shaded
model. Lighting settings allow you to determine the exposure of light on the model, which
changes the intensity of the image's colors.
Ambient from 0 to 100 - Specifies the light that surrounds everything in your display. A
common value of ambient light is 25.
Brightness from 0 to 10 - Specifies the exposure of light on the model that changes the
intensity of the colors in the image. This is similar to setting the aperture and shutter speed of a
camera. The value for this field is between 0 and 10.
Horizontal from -180 to 180 - Defines the horizontal angle of the sunlight coming into the
model. The values for this field are between -180.0 and +180.0. Positive values are
counterclockwise along a horizontal plane.
Vertical from -180 to 180 - Defines the vertical angle of light coming into the model. The values
for this field are between - 180.0 and +180.0.
Relative to plant north - Specifies whether the horizontal and vertical angles of light are
relative to Plant North or relative to the direction of the Main view.
Two-sided lighting - Produces a major reduction in thin-volume coincident surface flashing
during animations (especially on thin I-beams). Using this option requires more processing
resources and may result in decreased performance, which will vary by video driver and
graphics card.
See Also
View Settings Dialog Box (on page 211)
215
Working with Views
Range Reject Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)

Allows you to disregard very small graphical elements. This change improves display time by
reducing the number of elements that SmartPlant Review draws. You can specify different range
rejection criteria for each view.
You specify the range in pixels for each view. Objects smaller than the range (less than or equal
to the dimensions specified) are not drawn. However, you still can highlight these small objects.
Activate - Enables range rejection in any view with non-zero range rejection settings.
View ranges in pixels
Main - Specifies the approximate maximum pixel size for objects to reject in the Main view.
Plan - Specifies the approximate maximum pixel size for objects to reject for display in the
Plan view.
Elevation - Specifies the approximate maximum pixel size for objects to reject for display in
the Elevation view.
You can activate range rejection without changing the settings. If range rejection is on, it
is on for all views. You can turn range rejection off for specific views by setting the pixel size for
that view to 0.
See Also
Range Reject Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) (on page 113)
Advanced Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)

Provides options for more sophisticated scenarios of SmartPlant Review, such as fine tuning
stereo glasses.
Options
Perspective - Specifies whether to display the view using perspective rendering or
orthographic rendering. Perspective rendering is characterized by:
Objects being drawn smaller as their distance from the observer increases.
216
Working with Views
The size of object dimensions along the line of sight are smaller relative to to the
dimensions across the line of sight.
When unchecked, the option is set to orthographic mode. If you were in perspective
mode and the Allow fly-to behaviors option is set (see Display Tab (Motion Settings
Dialog Box) (on page 109), SmartPlant Review performs a fly-to transition to
orthographic mode. The view cones in the Plan and Elevation views update during the
transition.
Review performs a fly-to transition to the previously-saved perspective angle. If you do
not have a perspective angle defined, SmartPlant Review switches back to the default
56 degree angle. The view cones in the Plan and Elevation views update during the
transition.
Time display - Toggle on to display the time that it takes to update the Main view. The
update time appears in the Text view.
Stroking tolerance - Defines the stroking tolerance for the round surfaces of pipes,
reducers, valves, and elbows. The larger the tolerance, the better the display quality.
However, large tolerance values increase the view update time. The tolerance must be an
integer between 4 and 100. For faster updates, the recommended tolerance is 16. For the
highest quality update, the recommended tolerance is 100.
Stereo
Activate - Enables stereo viewing. See the SmartPlant Review Installation Guide for system
requirement and supported hardware for using this option.
Stereo viewing is available in the full product and the Photo-Realism module.
Set your video driver to Stereo interlaced mode before you run SmartPlant Review.
If the Stereo option is disabled, verify that Stereo Display is selected in the Advanced
Video Attributes dialog box in the Video Configuration application in Control Panel.
If the Stereo option on the Advanced tab is not available, make sure your video driver
is set to stereo. In some driver versions/configurations, the menu selection may be
available, even when the stereo is not enabled on the driver.
You do not have to remove stereo glasses when switching between stereo mode and
regular mode. SmartPlant Review automatically switches to regular mode when you
select a menu command or dialog box.
Eye separation - Specifies the actual distance between your eyes in model units. Typically,
this value is about 2.2 inches or 5.6 centimeters. A larger value exaggerates the effect, while
a smaller value reduces the effect. An accurate value produces realistic depth perception.
This option only effects stereo viewing.
Focal length - Specifies the distance to the selected object. The f distance is the point at
which objects are level with the screen. For example, closer objects appear to be coming out
of the screen and objects that are further away appear to be behind the screen. This option
only effects stereo viewing.
Aspect - Displays the value for the ratio of the Main view window width to height (X to Y value)
at the time that the view was saved. However, when the view is recalled, the aspect ratio is that
of the current view. The aspect ratio is not saved or restored.
217
Working with Views
Aspects Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)

Allows you to turn on and off the display of SmartPlant 3D aspects. Aspects are parameters that
represent additional information needed for placement, such as safety or maintenance
clearance.
This tab displays only when you are viewing a VUE file produced by SmartPlant 3D.
SmartPlant Review can display only those aspects that were selected in the SmartPlant 3D
workspace session at the time the .VUE file was created. If the .VUE file does not contain
the actual model geometry for the selected aspect, it cannot be displayed.
Selected aspects - Provides a list of available aspects that you can turn on or off.
Supported Aspects
218
Simple Physical - Includes primitive shapes. The space could be a field junction box
displayed in both the model and in drawings.
Detailed Physical - Provides a more detailed view of equipment in the model. For example,
certain types of equipment may include legs and lugs. You can select the Simple Physical
aspect to create a less cluttered view of the object, showing only the body of the equipment.
However, the Detailed Physical aspect shows all of the graphical details associated with the
equipment.
Insulation - Shows an area around a piece of equipment, indicating insulation is present.
For example, a 4-inch pipe with insulation might look like an 8-inch pipe when you select the
Insulation aspect.
Operation - Includes the area or space around the object required for operation of the
object. This space shows in the model but not in drawings. For example, this aspect leaves
enough space around a motor for a person to operate the motor.
Maintenance - Includes the area or space around the object required to perform
maintenance on the object. This space may appear in the model but not in drawings. This
aspect leaves enough space around a motor to perform maintenance on the motor, including
space to remove the motor, if necessary.
Reference Geometry - Allows you to construct or add graphical objects that do not
participate in interference checking. For example, a reference geometry object could be the
obstruction volume for a door on a field junction box. Another example is a spherical control
point.
Working with Views

Custom Aspects
If the VUE file contains custom aspects, they are turned on and displayed by default.
To add your custom aspect names and numbers to the View Settings > Aspects tab, you must
add your custom aspect names and numbers to the SmartPlant Review SPRSchema.txt project
database schema file before creating a new project database. For more information, see Add
Custom Aspects (on page 184).
Colors Dialog Box

Enables you to select or create a color. From the Standard tab, click Select to use a standard
color. From the Custom tab, type in the required color settings or click Select to pick a color.
Select Level Settings

Tools > Level Settings
Displays the Level Settings dialog box, which allows you to select the categories (or levels) that
you want to display for one or more design files. You can turn on a level by selecting a category;
or, if you already know the level of a category, you can turn it on by selecting the level number.
You also can read the current level settings in the Plan, Elevation, or Main views and change
the level settings for designated views.
The design area is composed of 63 identically sized, overlay planes. These overlays or levels,
can be thought of as stacked panes of glass, with a group or category of drawings on each
pane. For example, SPRdemo.dri is designed with the handrails on one level, the platforms on
another, ladders on another, and so on. You can view each level of the stacked drawings by
turning on the individual level or you can view a complete model by turning on all the levels. You
can also view any combination of these levels.
Level Settings Dialog Box (on page 221)

View Current Level Settings (on page 220)

Edit Levels (on page 220)
Match Files (on page 220)
219
Working with Views
View Current Level Settings

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Tools > Level Settings.

Select the view for which you want to see the current level settings.
Select the file for which you want to see the current level settings.
Click the Current button.
If conflicting level settings exist, the Resolve Current Level dialog box will display. You
then can reduce level selections or select one of the level combination buttons.
Edit Levels
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click Tools > Level Settings.

Select the view for which you want to edit levels.
Select the files for which you want to edit levels.
Click Current to see the currently defined level settings.
Select the levels that you want on or off.
Click Apply.
The design area is composed of 63 identically sized, overlay planes. These overlays or
levels are similar to stacked panes of glass, with a group or category of drawings on each
pane. For example, model.dri is designed with the handrails on one level, the platforms on
another, ladders on another.
You can view each level of the stacked drawings by turning on the individual levels.
You can view a complete model by turning on all the levels. You also can view any
combination of the levels.
Match Files
1. Click Tools > Level Settings.
2. Click Match.
3. Type the matching criteria in the Matching file name field.
You do not have to know the design file name to find a specific file. You can click Pick
Object to select an item in a view, and the design file name containing the selected object is
returned.
220
Working with Views

4. Click Select to highlight the matched files in the Files list on the Level Settings dialog box.
The Clear button allows you to unselect all selected files in the Files list on the Level
Level Settings Dialog Box

Allows you to select the levels that you want to display for one or more design files. SmartPlant
Review supports up to 63 levels.
Views - Allows you to select the views for which you want to view or change level settings.
Files - Allows you to select the project files in which to change the level settings.
221
Working with Views

Select All - Allows you to select all of the listed project files in which to change the level
settings.
Clear All - Allows you to unselect all of the listed project files.
Levels - Shows which levels are selected. Each button represents an available level, and an
indented button indicates that the level is displayed.
All On - Allows you to turn on all the levels at once for the selected views and project files.
All Off - Allows you to turn off all the levels at once for the selected views and project files.
Current - Displays the current levels for the selected views and project files.
Category or Level Name - A multi-column table that displays all the level names and numbers
for the selected files. Click a column header to sort the column either ascending or descending.
Match Items Dialog Box

Allows you to narrow your item (file, level, color, or lights) selection by searching for and
selecting items (model files, levels, colors, or lights) based on their names or name groupings.
You can work in this dialog box while also working in the Level Settings, Find Object's and Edit
Definition's Find Files, Find Levels, or Find Colors, or Edit Source Lights dialog boxes.
Matching item name - Allows you to narrow your item selection by defining matching criteria for
item names listed on the Level Settings, Find Object's and Edit Definition's Find Files, Find
Levels, or Find Colors, or Edit Source Lights dialog boxes. For example, you can select all files
whose file names contain the word "pipe" by typing *pipe* in this field.
Pick Object - Allows you match an item (file, level, or color) by selecting an object from that file.
For example, you can click an object in one of the views to select the associated model file.
Select - Highlights the matched items in the Files/Levels/Colors/Lights list on the Level Settings,
Find Object's and Edit Definition's Find Files, Find Levels, or Find Colors, or Edit Source Lights
dialog boxes.
Clear - Clears the selection of the matched file items listed on the Level Settings, Find Object's
and Edit Definition's Find Files, Find Levels, or Find Colors, or Edit Source Lights dialog boxes.
Matched - Displays the number of items in the Files/Levels/Colors/Lights list that were matched
using the Matching item name criteria.
222
Working with Views
Resolve Current Level Settings Dialog Box

Displays the current levels and any conflicting level settings for the selected views and project
files. You can also use the options on this dialog box to combine or intersect level settings that
are turned on in any of the selected items.
This dialog box displays automatically when conflicting level settings exist within the
selected views and project files in the Level Settings dialog box.
Views - Allows you to select the Main, Plan, or Elevation view in which to change or view level
settings.
Any - Resolves the level setting conflicts by selecting only those levels that are turned on in any
of the selected items.
All - Resolves the level setting conflicts by selecting only those levels that are turned on in all of
the selected items.
Names - Contains the file names with level settings to use for resolving conflicts.
Select All - Selects all files for which you want to change or view level settings.
Clear All - Clears all files selections.
Match - Displays the Match Files dialog box, which allows you to choose objects in a view to
select the file.
Hide Levels
Tools > Hide Level
Allows you to select an object to hide and then determine the views in which to hide the item.
1. Click Tools > Hide Level.
Hide Level Dialog Box (on page 224)
2. Select the object whose level you want to hide.
3. Select the views in which you want to turn off the levels.
4. Click Apply.
You can select another object by clicking Pick Object.

You can also access this command by pressing F4 on your keyboard.
223
Working with Views
Hide Level Dialog Box

Allows you to determine the views in which to hide a selected object.
Views - Allows you to select the Main, Plan, or Elevation view in which to change or view level
settings.
Number - Indicates the level on which the current selection object exists.
Category or level name - Displays all the level names and numbers for the selected files.
File - Allows you to select the files for which you want to view or change level settings.
Pick Object - Allows you to select an object with a level that you want to hide.
View in Stereo
Add dramatic depth perception to models with the stereo viewing capability of SmartPlant
Review. The stereo feature takes SmartPlant Review to a new level of realism and gives
presentations or walkthroughs exceptional impact. You can adjust stereo settings to achieve
realistic or exaggerated depth perception. Stereo mode supports all display operations, including
the Display Key Frame Motion command.
When you take a snapshot in Stereo mode, the system creates an image that has the left eye on
the left side of the image and the right eye on right side of the image. The overall width of the
image is doubled and the height is unchanged.
Recommended Stereo Viewing Hardware
224
Video card with 3-pin mini-DIN stereo sync output

StereoGraphics CrystalEyes interlaced glasses (model CrystalEyes Workstation)
CrystalEyes infrared transmitter (model E-2)
Non-LCD monitor capable of 95 mHz refresh rate (LCD monitors and LCD projectors are not
suitable for stereo viewing due to inherently slow refresh rate. For quality stereo viewing, a
monitor must be capable of at least 95 mHz refresh, with 120 mHz or better recommended.
High performance DLP projectors also work well.)
Stereo viewing is available only with the Photo-Realism module.
Working with Views
Ensure that you have properly installed the correct display driver for your video card and
that you have turned on the Crystal Eyes infrared transmitter. You must have the correct
display driver for stereo capabilities to function properly.
To enhance depth perception, click View > Full Screen or press F11. This maximizes the
current view layout on the screen and may prevent window borders from disrupting the
stereo visual cues.
To enhance performance, turn off the Motion > Settings > Display > Update View Cone
option and turn off the Plan and Elevation views.
You do not have to remove the StereoGraphics Crystal Eyes glasses when switching
between stereo mode and regular mode. SmartPlant Review automatically switches to
regular mode when you select a menu command or dialog box.
Activate Stereo (on page 225)

Set Stereo Settings (on page 225)
Display Left Stereo View (on page 226)
Display Right Stereo View (on page 226)
Set Stereo Distances (on page 226)
Activate Stereo
View > Advanced > Stereo > Activate
Turns on stereo viewing.

To view in stereo, you must have the Crystal Eyes infrared transmitter turned on.
Set the video driver to stereo interlaced mode before you run SmartPlant Review.
Set Stereo Settings

1.
2.
3.
4.

Click the Advanced tab.
Type a value for Between eyes.
Type a value for Focal.
The Between Eyes is the actual distance between your eyes in model units. Typically,
this value is about 2.2 inches or 5.6 centimeters. You will need to convert your actual distance
values for the model. A larger value exaggerates the effect, while a smaller value reduces the
effect. An accurate value produces realistic depth perception.
225
Working with Views

See Also
View in Stereo (on page 224)
Display Left Stereo View

View > Advanced > Stereo > Left View
Displays the left eye image of the stereo view.
See Also
Troubleshooting: Motion (on page 560)
Display Right Stereo View

View > Advanced > Stereo > Right View
Displays the right eye image of the stereo view.
See Also
Troubleshooting: Motion (on page 560)
Set Stereo Distances

View > Advanced > Stereo > Distances
Displays the Stereo Distances dialog box, which allows you to adjust the stereo distances to
create realistic depth perception.
1. View a model in Stereo mode while wearing the interlaced glasses.
2. Click View > Advanced > Stereo > Distances.
Stereo Distances Dialog Box (on page 227)
3. Click Pick Focal Point.
4. Click an object in the Main view that is approximately halfway between the eye point and the
backmost object displayed.
5. Click again to accept the object.
6. Click Apply.
7. Edit the default Between Eyes value to equal the approximate distance between your eyes.
Typically, this value is about 2.2 inches or 5.6 centimeters. A larger value exaggerates the
effect, while a smaller value reduces the effect. An accurate value produces realistic depth
perception.
8. Click Apply.
9. Adjust the Between Eyes value as needed to achieve the most realistic depth perception.
10. When you finish adjusting stereo effects, click OK.
226
Working with Views
After setting the Focal Distance, elements behind the focal point appear to recede into the
distance, while elements in front of the focal point appear to be in front of the monitor. The
Focal Distance field displays the location of the selected object.
Screen updates may take slightly longer than normal because SmartPlant Review is actually
drawing two images on screen.
See Also
Stereo Distances Dialog Box (on page 227)
Stereo Distances Dialog Box

Allows you to create realistic depth perception by adjusting the stereo distances. To use this
functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.
Between Eyes - Specifies the actual distance between your eyes in model units. Typically, this
value is about 2.2 inches or 5.6 centimeters. A larger value exaggerates the effect, while a
smaller value reduces the effect. An accurate value produces realistic depth perception.
Focal distance - Specifies the distance to the selected object. The Focal distance is the point at
which objects are level with the screen. For example, closer objects will appear to be coming out
of the screen and objects that are further away will appear to be behind the screen.
Pick Focal Point - Allows you to specify the focal point by selecting a point in the model using
the mouse rather than typing specific coordinate values.
227
Working with Views
228
SECTION 17
Using the View Cone

The view cone defines the boundaries of the area being displayed in the Main view. The view
cone updates as you change the viewing angle, viewing direction, eye point, and as you define
motion with the mouse or keypad. The view cone appears in the Plan and Elevation views.
Assume that you, the viewer, are in the eye point position (A). You are looking toward the center
point of the view cone (D). The limits of your view are defined by the far-clipping plane (C) and
the near-clipping plane (B). You see whatever lies between the two planes.
You can set the eye point and center point positions by dragging them with the mouse, or using
either the View > Settings > View Cone tab on the Position Control toolbar.
You can set the near and far clipping planes by dragging them with the mouse, or using the
Place Far Clipping Plane command, or the Place Near Clipping Plane command.
The upper right side of the view cone is red, and the upper left side is green. The angle between
the red and green lines is the view perspective. You can set the view perspective by dragging
the edges of the view cone with the mouse, or by using either the View > Settings > View Cone
tab or the Perspective toolbar.
View Cone Manipulation Tips

Use the following tips to manipulate the view cone more easily.
To drag the view cone to place it without changing the current view orientation, click
anywhere in the plan or elevation view except on the view cone lines or crosshairs.
229
Using the View Cone
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To rotate the view cone about the center point, click the view cone eye point crosshairs.
To rotate the view cone about the eye point, click the view cone center point crosshairs.
To change the perspective angle, click the sides of the view cone.
To adjust the clipping planes, click the clipping planes in the view cone. If there is no near
clipping plane, right-click while dragging the far clipping plane to switch to dragging the near
clipping plane. Dragging the clipping planes behind the eye point turns them off.
The view cones in the Plan and Elevation views update during any fly-to transitions that are
being performed in the main view.
When using the mouse to change the view cone, if any of the regions overlap, SmartPlant
Review resolves the conflict in the following order:
Eye point crosshairs
Center point crosshairs
Near clipping plane
Far clipping plane
View cone sides

Set View by Eye Point (on page 231)
View by Center Point (on page 233)
Set Clipping Planes (on page 233)
Place Near Clipping Plane (on page 234)
Place Far Clipping Plane (on page 234)
Set Eye Point

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
230

Select the View Cone tab.
Verify the North eye point setting.
Verify the East eye point setting.
Verify the Elevation eye point setting.
If the eye and center points get too close together, some viewing operations will cease to
function properly. To correct this problem, do one of the following:
Place a new center point. For more information, see Set Center Point (on page 232).
On the View > Settings > View Cone tab, enter new values for the eye and/or center
points, as well as the viewing angles.
Using the View Cone
Use the Position Control toolbar to adjust the eye point, center point, and viewing angles.
For more information, see Position Control Toolbar (on page 59).
You also can place the eye point by clicking View > Place > Eye Point Only, which allows
you to place the eye point by locating a 3D point using one or more of the graphic views. For
more information, see Placing 3D Points (on page 277).
You also can place the eye point by clicking View > Place > View by Eye Point, which
allows you to place a view based on eye point, which involves the perspective that you have
when viewing the file.
You also can set the eye point interactively by using the mouse to drag the eye point of the
view cone in the plan or elevation views. You must hold the left mouse button down for at
least 1 second or drag it at least 8 pixels before the eye point adjustment mode allows the
eye point to change. You can right- click or press Esc to cancel the eye point adjustment
without saving the changes. Any changes to the eye point made in this manner can be
reversed using the Edit > Undo command.
See Also
Place Eye Point Only

View > Place > Eye Point Only
Places the selected point as the eye point position of a new location. You can place the eye
point by locating a three dimensional point using one or more of the graphic views. The model
coordinates of the mouse position display in the status bar. The view cone displays in the plan
and elevation views while you position it.
If the eye and center points get too close, some viewing operations will cease to function
properly.
See Also
Set View by Eye Point

View > Place > View by Eye Point
Places the current active view at the selected point in the model, moving the eye point and
adjusting the center point in the corresponding manner. The model coordinates of the mouse
position display in the status bar. The view cone displays in the plan and elevation views while
you position it.
The eye point setting motion is relative to the direction in which you are looking.
You can change the location of the eye point by typing in new values in the North, East,
and Elevation boxes on the View tab of the Position Control toolbar. Also, you can change
the eye point location using the View > Settings > View Cone tab.
231
Using the View Cone

See Also
Set Center Point

2.
3.
4.
5.
You also can click the Center View command

Verify the North center point setting.
Verify the East center point setting.
Verify the Elevation center point setting.
You also can place the center point by clicking View > Place > Center Point Only, which
allows you to place the center point by locating a 3D point using one or more of the graphic
views. For more information, see Placing 3D Points (on page 277).
You also can place the center point by clicking View > Place > View by Center Point,
which repositions the model in a view and is useful for seeing different portions of the model.
You also can set the center point interactively by using the mouse to drag the center point of
the view cone in the plan or elevation views. You must hold the left mouse button down for
at least 1 second or drag it at least 8 pixels before the eye point adjustment mode allows the
center point to change. See the README file for information about changing these defaults.
You can right-click or press Esc to cancel the center point adjustment without saving the
changes. Any changes to the center point made in this manner can be reversed using the
Edit > Undo command.
If the eye and center points get too close together, some viewing operations will cease to
function properly. To correct this problem, place a new center point, enter new values for the
eye and/or center points and viewing angles on the View > Settings > View Cone tab, or
use the Position Control toolbar to adjust the eye point, center point, and viewing angles.
See Also
Place Center Point Only

View > Place > Center Point Only
Allows you to view the model from the center of the current view. The model coordinates of the
mouse position display in the status bar. The view cone displays in the plan and elevation views
while you position it.
If the eye and center points get too close, some viewing operations will cease to function
properly. To correct this problem, place a new center point, enter new values for the eye and/or
center
points and viewing angles on the View > Settings > View Cone tab, or use the Position
Control toolbar to adjust the eye point, center point, and viewing angles.
232
Using the View Cone

See Also
View by Center Point

View > Place > View by Center Point
Centers the model on a defined point in the specified view. The model coordinates of the mouse
position display in the status bar. The view cone displays in the plan and elevation views while
you position it.
You can also click the Center View command on the Common toolbar.
You can change the location of the eye point by typing in new values in the North, East,
and Elevation boxes on the View tab of the Position Control toolbar. Also, you can change
the eye point location using the View > Settings > View Cone tab.
See Also
Set Clipping Planes

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Verify the Near clipping plane setting.
Verify the Far clipping plane setting.
Verify the Reference clipping plane setting.
The limits of your view are defined by the far-clipping plane and the near-clipping plane. You
see whatever lies between the two planes.
The Reference clipping plane setting allows you to choose Eye point, North, East, or
Elevation for the reference point.
You can also set the clipping planes interactively by dragging the plane with the mouse. You
can right-click or press Esc to cancel the clipping plane adjustment without saving the
changes. Any changes to the clipping planes made in this manner can be reversed using the
Edit > Undo command.
the encircle positioning modes back to the lateral positioning mode by turning On the Motion
lateral positioning mode to any of the encircle positioning modes by turning Off the Motion >
See Also
233
Using the View Cone

Place Near Clipping Plane

View > Place > Near Clipping Plane
Changes the location of the near clipping plane of the view cone. The model coordinates of the
See Also
Place Far Clipping Plane

View > Place > Far Clipping Plane
Changes the location of the far clipping plane of the view cone. The model coordinates of the
See Also
234
SECTION 18
Applying Range Rejection

The Range Rejection commands allow you to disregard very small graphical elements, which
improves display time by reducing the number of objects that SmartPlant Review draws. You
can specify different range rejection criteria for each view. Each view (Main, Plan, and Elevation)
has its own range rejection settings.
Activate Range Rejection (on page 235)

Set All Range Rejection (on page 236)
Set Main Range Rejection (on page 237)
Set Plan Range Rejection (on page 237)
Set Elevation Range Rejection (on page 237)
Show Range Rejection Settings (on page 237)
Activate Range Rejection

View > Display > Range Rejection > Activate
Defines a range around very small graphical elements that you do not want to display. The
criteria is the maximum object length in screen pixels. For example if the Main view range
rejection value is 50 pixels, then when a pipe takes up less than 50 pixels in any direction, that
pipe run will not be displayed in the Main view. As you get closer to the pipe, it takes up more
distance on the screen and will be visible whenever it takes up more than 50 pixels.
The Activate command turns on range rejection so that the elements do not display in the
model.
Reducing the number of elements that SmartPlant Review draws improves display time.
See Also
Range Reject Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box) (on page 113)
235
Set All Range Rejection

View > Display > Range Rejection > All
Displays the Set All Range Rejection Values Dialog Box (on page 236), which allows you to
specify display rejection criteria for main, plan and elevation views.
See Also
Set All Range Rejection Values Dialog Box

Displays a series of Set All Range Rejection Values dialog boxes, prompting you to specify
display rejection criteria for each view. The figure below represents the initial dialog box that
displays.
Main value - Allows you to enter the maximum length (in pixels) of an object before it is rejected
for the Main view.
Plan value - Allows you to enter the maximum length (in pixels) of an object before it is rejected
for the Plan View.
Elevation value - Allows you to enter the maximum length (in pixels) of an object before it is
rejected for the Elevation View.
Next - Accepts the current values and prompts you for the next requested value.
Back - Allows you to change a previously entered value when specifying multiple values.
236
Set Main Range Rejection

View > Display > Range Rejection > Main
Displays the Set Main Range Rejection dialog boxes, which allow you to specify display
rejection criteria for the Main view.
See Also
Set Plan Range Rejection

View > Display > Range Rejection > Plan
Displays the Set Plan Range Rejection dialog boxes, which allow you to specify display
rejection criteria for the Plan view.
See Also
Applying Range Rejection (on page 235)
Set Elevation Range Rejection

View > Display > Range Rejection > Elevation
Displays the Set Elevation Range Rejection dialog boxes, which allow you to specify display
rejection criteria for the Elevation view.
See Also
Show Range Rejection Settings

View > Display > Range Rejection > Show Settings
Displays the range rejection on or off status and pixel ranges for each view.
See Also
237
238
SECTION 19
Working with Display Sets

Display sets greatly extend the review process by allowing you to isolate and separate objects
within huge projects so that you can more easily perform an in-depth review analysis of your
model.
Display sets are collections of graphic objects that are grouped together according to specific
definition criteria. SmartPlant Review does not limit the number of display sets you can create.
However, your hardware capability can limit your number of display sets.
A display set definition can contain one or more criteria, allowing you to place objects in display
sets based on object attributes, model attributes, highlighted objects, or other display sets.
Display sets can contain their own graphic objects or other display sets to any level of nesting
that you require. However, a display set cannot contain itself (to prevent recursive or looping
organization structures).
Display set ID numbers determine the order of precedence when you assign conflicting display
characteristics to the same elements. The lower the display set number is, the higher the
precedence. Therefore, an element that is a member of two different display sets appears with
the characteristics of the lower numbered display set, assuming both sets have different display
characteristics turned on.
Once a display set is defined, it can be manipulated independent of the model. For instance, you
can review different material assignments on a single structure rather than the entire facility, or
wireframe the HVAC data in a shaded model of a plant.
SmartPlant Review does not limit the number of display sets you may have. However, your
hardware capability can limit the number of display sets you can have.
When display set settings are read from the database (for instance, when opening a model
file or selecting the Tools > Refresh Data command), the display set ID number determines
the order of precedence when conflicting display characteristics are assigned to the same
elements. The lower the display set ID number, the higher the precedence. This means that
an element that is a member of two different display sets will appear with the characteristics
of the lower numbered display set, assuming both sets have different display characteristics
turned on.
Display sets that use the search criteria, Picked Object(s), can be lost when the definition is
edited in a subsequent SmartPlant Review session, or if the display set definition is loaded
using the Import Display Set dialog box. The selected elements are lost if the files
containing these elements are modified. For this reason, we recommend that you use the
Picked Object(s) search criteria only for temporary display sets.
When you open an SVF streaming session, any previously-created display set definitions
are not resolved.
Display sets are selected from the Project Manager. Commands to create and edit the selected
display set can be accessed from shortcut context menus in the Project Manager and from
Tools on the main menu.
Sub-definitions
Sub-definitions may be needed to create more complicated definitions. Sub-definitions are
created by placing an operation on a line by itself, and then using the FIND operator on the
following line. Each line in a sub-definition works similarly to the definition itself. The FIND
239

operator selects a group of elements. For each of the following lines, up to the end of the
sub-definition, FIND operates on the previous result to create a new group of elements. Mark
the end of a sub-definition by choosing the END FIND option, which appears on the continuation
operator list.
The end of a sub-definition results in a group of elements that meet the sub-definition criteria.
This sub-definition group is then applied to the search criteria of any previous FIND criteria to
produce the completed set of elements. Definitions can be nested indefinitely and can be nested
multiple times. The following example definition contains one sub-definition:
FIND Volume 123 N, 444 E, 377 El - 400 N, 550 E, 500 El
KEEP ONLY Display Set Firewater
THROW AWAY Data Diameter > 12
ADD
FIND Volume 375 N, 600 E, 377 El - 500 N, 700 E, 500 El
KEEP ONLY Level 7, 8, 9, 31
THROW AWAY File steel.dgn
THROW AWAY Color 3
END FIND
ADD Picked Objects
Lines 1 through 3 define the group of elements in the specified volume that belong to the
Firewater display set and are <= 12 inches in diameter.
Line 4 adds the sub-definition to the group.
Line 5 begins the sub-definition by selecting a volume to start with.
Lines 6, 7, and 8 keep only the elements on certain levels and then throw away anything left that
is in file steel.dgn with color number 3. The END FIND operator on line 9 ends the sub-definition.
The group that results from this sub-definition is then added to the results from line 3 to yield a
new group. The last line adds some selected elements to the group to yield a final set of
elements.
Additional Information
Auto-Define - Allows you to define display sets based on selected label data. SmartPlant
Review automatically creates these display sets for you based on the label data criteria that you
select. For more information, see Auto-Define Display Sets (on page 245).
Import/Export - You can import and export display sets in their existing folders, allowing you to
create libraries of specific definition information for display sets. For more information, see
Import Display Sets (on page 272) and Export Display Sets (on page 274).
Show Membership - Allows you to show display set membership in the Text view for an
auto-highlighted element. For more information, see Show Display Set Membership (on page
269).
Dim - Decreases the brightness of the selected display set, allowing you to more easily contrast
members of the display set with other objects in the model. This setting can be applied to a
single display set, multiple selected display sets, or to a parent folder containing a group of
display sets. For more information, see Dim Display Sets (on page 270).
240

View Display Sets (on page 241)

Create New Display Set Definitions (on page 242)
Create a Display Set Definition from a SmartPlant 3D System Hierarchy (on page 243)
Create a Nozzle Display Set Definition (on page 243)
Create a New Display Set Folder (on page 244)
Auto-Define Display Sets (on page 245)
Edit Display Sets (on page 246)
Assign Material to Display Sets (on page 266)
Display Materials (on page 268)
Show Display Sets (on page 269)
Show Display Set Membership (on page 269)
Shade Display Sets (on page 269)
Dim Display Sets (on page 270)
Reverse Dim Display Sets (on page 270)
Show Only Selected Display Sets (on page 270)
Hide Only Selected Display Sets (on page 271)
Move Display Sets (on page 271)
Delete Display Sets (on page 272)
Rename Display Sets (on page 272)
Import Display Sets (on page 272)
Export Display Sets (on page 274)
View Display Sets

1. Open the Display Set node in Project Manager.
2. Check the
check box next to the display set(s) that you want to display. Uncheck the box
to hide the display set.
elements. The lower the display set number, the higher the precedence. This means that an
element that is a member of two different display sets will appear with the characteristics of
the lower numbered display set, assuming both sets have different display characteristics
turned on.
Objects can be in more than one display set at a time. However, if your new display set
does not seem to display properly, overlapping display sets may be the problem. The last
action performed on the object by corresponding display set manipulations wins. For
example, if Object 1 is in both DisplaySet1 and DisplaySet2, and you turn off DisplaySet1,
241

then Object 1 is off, even though DisplaySet2 is still on. Once DisplaySet2 is toggled off and
then on, Object1 will appear again.
See Also
Working with Display Sets (on page 239)
Create New Display Set Definitions

Tools > Display Sets > New > Display Set
-orProject Manager > Display Sets > New > Display Set > Definition
Displays the Edit Display Set dialog box, allowing you to create a new display set definition.
1. Click Tools > Display Sets > New > Display Set.
Edit Display Set Dialog Box (on page 247)
You can also right-click in Project Manager and select New > Display Set.
2. Type a name for the display set that you are defining.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If you have an editable display set selected in the display set tree control in Project
Manager, the display set name defaults to Copy of and the selected display set name
(for example, Copy of Reboiler System).
If you do not have an editable display set selected in the display set tree control in
Project Manager, BUT the current criteria definition in memory for the Find Object
command is not empty, then the new display set's description is set to Copy of Find
Object.
Type a display set ID number. The new display set ID default is the first non-zero and
unused user ID available in the project.
Click Edit in the Definition group.
Click Insert and define the selection criteria for the display set.
Optionally, assign a default material to the display set by clicking Edit in the Default
Material group.
When you assign a material name to the display set, all elements in the set appear in
the Main view using those material properties (color, surface characteristics, and so on)
when applied.
7. Type a Description for the display set.
242
elements. The lower the display set number, the higher the precedence. This means that an
element that is a member of two different display sets will appear with the characteristics of
the lower numbered display set, assuming both sets have different display characteristics
turned on.
Objects can be in more than one display set at a time. However, if your new display set
does not seem to display properly, overlapping display sets may be the problem. The last
action performed on the object by corresponding display set manipulations wins. For
example, if Object 1 is in both DisplaySet1 and DisplaySet2, and you turn off DisplaySet1,
then Object 1 is off, even though DisplaySet2 is still on. Once DisplaySet2 is toggled off and
then on, Object1 will appear again.
The portion of display sets that use the search criteria Picked Objects can be lost when you
edit the definition in a subsequent SmartPlant Review session. The loss also can occur if the
display set definition is loaded using the Import Display Set dialog box. The selected
elements are lost if you modify the files containing these elements. For this reason, use the
Picked Objects search criteria only in temporary display sets.
You can click Cancel on the Edit Display Set Definition dialog box at any time to exit the
definition creation process without saving your changes.
Create a Display Set Definition from a SmartPlant 3D

System Hierarchy
1. Be sure the data you want to view has been published by using the Save As SmartPlant
Review command in SmartPlant 3D.
Viewing SmartPlant 3D Data (see "Viewing SmartPlant 3D Model Data" on page 159)
2. In SmartPlant Review, click Tools > Display Sets > New > Display Set.
3. Type a name for the display set that you are defining.
4. Type a display set ID number.
5. Click Edit in the Definition group.
6. Click Insert and define the selection criteria for the display set.
Use the System path attribute published by SmartPlant 3D to define the display set
definition. For example:
FIND DATA System path = Plant A\Reboiler Unit\93_001
7. Type a Description for the display set.
For more information about creating display sets, see Create a Display Set Definition.
The System path attribute specifies the complete system hierarchy per object.
See Also
Create a New Display Set Folder (on page 244)
Create a Nozzle Display Set Definition

The 2007 HF and 2008 or later versions of SP3D/SM3D now publish nozzle geometry
separately in addition to the nozzle geometry published as part of the equipment geometry.
They also use a different P3DComponent.XML and MapComponentsToDisciplines.TXT file than
currently delivered with SmartPlant Review or SmartPlant Review Publisher. The new
MapComponentsToDisciplines.TXT file now organizes all nozzle geometry under the SmartPlant
Review discipline of "Equipment".
As always, SmartPlantReview or SmartPlant Review Publisher must use the exact same
SP3D/SM3D configuration files (P3DComponent.XML and MapComponentsToDisciplines.TXT)
used to produce the VUE and XML file data when it creates the SmartPlant Review project
243

(MDB) and label databases (MDB2). The label filtering SPRSP3DLabels.bin file (if used) must
be regenerated also.
Also, note that the currently delivered SP3D/SM3D configuration file, RelationshipMapping.TXT
groups all nozzle attribute/label data onto the associated piece of equipment. The 2007HF and
2008 or later version SP3D/SM3D users should toggle the nozzle relationship UID1 property
from 1 to 0 in this file.
Note: When locating nozzle geometry using the mouse, the SmartPlant Review user may need
to reject (right-click) the located equipment geometry to select it.
1. Copy the NEW SP3D P3DComponent.XML and MapComponentsToDisciplines.TXT to
desired SPR project directory and use them when creating the SPR project and label
databases from the NEW SP3D vue and XML files.
2. Edit the SPR RelationshipMapping.TXT file and remove the nozzle relationship (only if you
do not want to see the nozzle information for every nozzle on the peice of equipment
selected). Recommended for label database performance.
3. Create a new SPRSP3DLabels.bin file using these configuration files (if using it).
4. Open the project with SmartPlant Review and pick all these NEW configuration files.
5. Locate desired nozzle, right click to "drill" down to the nozzle. Note that the nozzle
properties are available now.
Limitations
The nozzle geometry appears twice now. Once as a piece of the equipment, and again as a
standalone item. SmartPlant Review has no knowledge about which standalone nozzle goes
with which peice of equipment.
The user may have to "drill" down when locating the nozzle to get to the standalone nozzle
properties.
Create a New Display Set Folder

Tools > Display Sets > New > Folder
Creates a new display set folder in Project Manager. You can also access this command on the
Project Manager shortcut menu by right-clicking on a display set and selecting New > Display
Set > Folder.
1. Open a model. If a model document is not open, display sets do not appear in Project
Manager.
2. In Project Manager, expand the Display Sets node. See Introducing the Project Manager
(on page 141).
3. Right-click in Project Manager and select New > Display Set > Folder. The new folder
appears under the Display Sets node with the default name highlighted.
4. Type a name for the new folder and press Enter. If the folder name is not selected,
right-click on the folder and select Rename.
5. Drag a display set to the new folder.
6. Double-click the folder to see the display set that you dragged.
If you want to remove a display set from a folder, drag the display set to the left of the
Display Sets area. The cursor changes to indicate that you can drop the display set. The
244

display set now appears in a higher level of the Display Sets tree and is removed from the
folder.
Auto-Define Display Sets

Tools > Display Sets > Auto-Define
-orProject Manager > Display Sets > New > Display Set > Auto-Define
Displays the Auto-Define Display Sets dialog box, allowing you to pick items to include in a
new display set by their PDS label data. The software automatically creates an individual display
set for each value of the label data that you select.
1. Click Tools > Display Sets > Auto-Define.
Or, from the Project Manager, select Display Sets in the tree view and then right-click to
open a shortcut menu. Select New > Display Set > Auto-Define.
Auto-Define Display Sets Dialog Box (on page 246)
2. Select the labels for which you want to create display sets.
The Auto-Define Display Sets dialog box supports the standard Windows functionality
of using SHIFT to select consecutive items (click the first item, press and hold down SHIFT,
and then click the last item) and using CTRL to select non-consecutive items (press and
hold down CTRL, and then click each item).
3. Specify a starting ID.
4. (Optional) Check the Delete existing display sets with the same names option if you
want the software to delete existing display sets when it automatically generates new ones.
The labels that you select from are read in from all of the labels files associated with the
.DRI file that you opened.
The Start ID field defaults to the first unused ID. Once the automatic definition process
begins, the Start ID increments once per generated display set, skipping any ID already in
use.
The Delete existing display sets with the same name option overwrites existing display
sets that have the same names as the new ones being generated. In other words, the
existing displays sets will be overwritten if they have the same names as the display sets
being defined, if they are stored in a folder with the same name as the folder Auto-Define is
creating, and they contain Auto-Define Display Set or AutoGroup Display in their
description.
You can stop an auto-definition run by pressing the ESC key. SmartPlant Review will stop
the process at the next label.
To automatically define display sets, PDS or SP3D label data must exist.
245
Auto-Define Display Sets Dialog Box

Allows you to pick items to include in a new display set by their PDS label data. The software
automatically creates an individual display set for each value of the label data that you select.
Label fields for display set creation - Allows you to pick items by label to include in a new
display set.
Delete existing display sets with the same name - Overwrites existing display sets that have
the same names as the new ones being generated. In other words, the existing displays sets will
be overwritten if they have the same names as the display sets being defined, if they are stored
in a folder with the same name as the folder Auto-Define is creating, and they contain
Auto-Define Display Set or AutoGroup Display in their description.
Start ID - Allows you to type a numerical display set ID to start with. You can specify any
unused ID. Any used IDs encountered after the start ID that you specify are skipped
automatically when new display sets are generated.
See Also
Auto-Define Display Sets (on page 245)
Edit Display Sets

Use Edit commands to change a display set definition and reposition a display set, independent
of its default location.
246
Edit a Display Set Definition (on page 247)

Edit a Display Set Position (on page 259)
Edit a Display Set Definition

Tools > Display Sets > Edit Definition
-orProject Manager > [Display Set] > Edit > Display Set > Definition
Displays the Edit Display Set dialog box, allowing you to edit an existing display set definition.
1. Click Tools > Display Sets > Edit Definition.
You can also click Edit Display Sets
on the Tools toolbar or double-click on the
display set in Project Manager.
2. Click Edit in the Definition group.
3. Change the selection criteria to meet your needs.
4. Optionally, assign a default material to the display set by clicking Edit in the Default
Material group.
When you assign a material name to the display set, all elements in the set appear in
the Main view using those material properties (color, surface characteristics, and so on). For
more information, see Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box (on page 267).
Edit Display Set Dialog Box

Allows you to create a new or edit an existing display set definition.
Name - Displays the name of the display set for the definition that you are creating or editing.
ID - Displays the ID of the display set for the definition that you are editing. This ID must be
unique.
Criteria - Displays the defined search criteria for retrieving the graphic objects that you want to
include in the display set.
247

Edit - Displays the Edit Definition dialog box, allowing you to specify criteria describing the
graphic objects that you want to include in the display set.
Default Material Name - Displays the name of the material file to assign to the display set.
Edit - Displays the Assign Material to Display Set dialog box, which allows you to select a
material to assign to the display set and to specify the properties for that material.
Clear - Removes the current material assignment for the display set.
Description
Text - Displays the text description associated with the current display set. You can edit these
notes to describe the display set definition that you are creating.
Clear - Removes the text description associated with the display set.
See Also
Edit Definition Dialog Box

Allows you to edit the definition that the software uses to combine the objects that compose the
selected display set.
248

If you select an editable display set in the Project Manager tree view, then that display set's
criteria definition is used as the current criteria definition for the command. This allows you to
select a display set, then run the Find Object command and find all the objects in that display
set without having to manually re-enter its definition.
Criteria - Provides access to the constructs needed to define the search criteria for retrieving
the graphic objects that you want to include in the display set. Display set definition strings are
limited to 32K. If the display set definition character limit is exceeded, then a warning message
appears in the text window and SmartPlant Review truncates the string at the limit.
Insert - Begins a new line in the definition. Selecting a line in the definition and then clicking
Insert places a blank line above the selected line in the definition. If you want to add a line
below the currently defined lines, click in the blank line below the definition and then click Insert.
The subsequent constructs (discussed below) automatically appear as you step through
creating the definition.
Delete - Removes the selected line in the definition.
Clear - Removes all criteria in the definition.
Copy - Copies the current, complete definition (even if it is blank) from the clipboard.
Paste - Pastes the current complete text from the clipboard to replace the current complete
criteria definition. If there is no text on the clipboard, then the criteria definition is not changed.
Click anywhere outside a pop- up selection list to dismiss the list.

Click Cancel to exit the dialog box while a pop-up selection list is active.
Press Enter to select an item from a pop-up selection list. Using the arrow keys allows you
to scroll through the list without making a selection.
Composing the Definition

Defining the search criteria for the objects to include in the display set definition involves various
operators that display in pop-up selection lists. The main operators are FIND and FIND ALL
BUT.
FIND - Produces a group consisting of all the elements that meet the specified criteria.
FIND ALL BUT - Produces a group consisting of all the elements that do not meet the
specified criteria.
249

After selecting either FIND or FIND ALL BUT, you are prompted to select the definition type of
the criteria: Data, File, Level, Color, Display Set, Volume Inside, Volume Overlap, Picked
Objects, or Linkages.
Data - Allows you to search for the definition type by a data field name, a data operator, and a
match string. An element matches data criteria if it has the specified application label data field,
and the data in that field matches the match string according to the data operator. An element
will not match if it does not have the specified label data field name or if it has no label data at
all.
After you select the Data criteria type, the available data field names appear in a list.
The data field names are derived from the label data as follows: Each line in the label data is
scanned for a colon (:) character. If a colon exists, then all the text to the left of the colon is
considered the data field name. For example, the line: Equip no: G-7708A would yield:
data field name = Equip no:
data field data = G-7708A
If there is no colon in the line, then the first white space after the first text is used to delimit the
name. Everything to the right of the first white space is considered the data field data. For
example, the line: Equip no G-7708A would yield:
data field name = Equip
data field data = no G-7708A
250

File - Displays the Files dialog box, which allows you to select the files in which to search for the
graphic objects.
Level - Displays the Levels dialog box, which allows you to select one or more level numbers to
search for the graphic objects. An element matches if it is located on one of the levels.
251

Color - Displays the Colors dialog box, which allows you to select the colors of the graphic
objects to search. You can choose one or more color numbers for your definition criteria. An
element matches if it coincides with one of the chosen color numbers.
The Match button on the Files, Levels, and Colors dialog boxes displays the Match Items
dialog box, allowing you to either select files, levels, or colors matching the given pattern or
selected object. For more information, see Match Items Dialog Box (on page 222).
Display Set - Allows you to search for graphic objects by selecting one or more display set
names. An element matches if it is in one of the display sets. However, the definition list cannot
reference display sets that refer to themselves, even if the reference is through another display
set, because this would create a "circular" definition.
252

Volume Inside and Volume Overlap - Allows you to search for graphic objects by specifying a
volume definition (a portion of the model) by placing data points. An element matches Volume
Inside if it lies completely inside the volume (area). An element matches Volume Overlap if it
intersects or overlaps the volume (selected area), or if it lies completely inside the area. For
more information, see Find Volume Inside/Overlap Dialog Box (on page 258).
Picked Object(s) - Displays the Pick Objects dialog box, which allows you to select an object
by clicking the graphic in the Main view. For more information, see Pick Objects Dialog Box (on
page 257).
The portion of display sets created using the Picked Object search criteria can be lost when
the definition is edited in a subsequent SmartPlant Review session. The picked objects
portion will also be lost if the display set definition is loaded using the Load Display Set
form, or if the files containing these elements are modified. For these reasons, the Picked
Objects search criteria should be used only in temporary display sets.
If data has streamed since the display set was created or loaded from the database, you
must use the Tools > Refresh Data command to resolve the display set using the new data
in memory. For performance reasons, display sets do not automatically re-resolve as new
data streams in. For more information, see Refresh Data Command (on page 33).
Because the order of the streaming .VUE files varies with point of view and user actions
and/or launching SmartPlant Foundation, object numbers are valid only per SmartPlant
Review session. That is, any display sets created with Picked Objects may not be correctly
resolved in the next SmartPlant Review session or after running the Refresh Data
command, because the data may arrive in a different order. To avoid this situation, create
display sets by DRMS Linkage instead. For more information, see Using SmartPlant Review
in Streaming Mode (on page 417).
253

Linkages - Displays the PDS DRMS linkage associated with the object.
After you select the definition type and object, a list of data operators displays:
Equals (=) - Specifies that the data field information equals the match string.
Greater Than (>) - Specifies that the first number in the data field data is greater than the match
number.
Greater Than or Equal To(>= ) - Specifies that the first number in the data field data is greater
than or equal to the match number.
Less Than (<) - Specifies that the first number in the data field data is less than the match
number.
Less Than or Equal To (<=) - Specifies that the first number in the data field data is less than
or equal to the match number.
Not Equals (<>) - Specifies that the data field information does not equal the match string.
Wildcards are not allowed with this operator.
Combining the Equals (=) and FIND ALL BUT operators at the beginning of the line
creates a similar but subtly different effect from using the Not Equals (<>)operator. For
example,
254
Criteria
Result
FIND Item Type Equipment

List, Number <> 100
Returns only the graphics objects in the

model within the Equipment List item
type (view definition) that have the
Number property with a value not equal
to 100.
FIND ALL BUT Item Type

Equipment List, Number = 100
Returns ALL graphic objects in the model

except for the few specific ones within
Equipment List item type (view definition)
that have the Number property with a
value equal to 100.

After you select the operator, the Enter Data dialog box appears, which allows you to create
and edit the value selection for the label name.
For data operators <, >, >=, and <=, this value is simply a number to compare to. For the = data
operator, this value is treated as a text string to match. The match string can contain the special
characters * and ?, where * matches any number (even zero) of characters and ? matches
exactly one character.
For example, the match string: *77?3*line matches the following cases of data field data:
12347713line, 7783line, 1247723 line, and 123477a3 water line.
The match string is case insensitive. For example, if a label value is stored exactly as "New" in
the label database, the following definitions will return the same results:
Find DATA Construction status = New
Find DATA Construction status = new
Find DATA Construction status = nEw
Find DATA Construction status = NEW
All known values for the currently selected label name display automatically in the Data box
on the Enter Data dialog box upon selection of the drop-down list.
When switching operators from non-numerical to numerical data, the current value is
converted, if possible, to a numerical value.
All values are still presented (even non-numerical values) when entering numerical data for
inequality operators.
When switching attribute names in existing definitions, the current attribute value is not
changed automatically. You must edit the current attribute value.
After you have defined a single criteria line, the following criteria operators become available for
additional criteria lines in the definition:
ADD - Allows you to create a group that consists of the previous results, plus all the
elements that meet the current criteria.
ADD ALL BUT - Allows you to create a group that consists of the previous results,
excluding all the elements that do not meet the current criteria.
KEEP ONLY - Allows you to create a group that consists of only the elements from the
previous results that meet the current criteria.
255
THROW AWAY - Allows you to create a group that consists of the previous results, minus
all the elements that meet the current criteria.
An element is added to a group only once, even if it meets multiple definition criteria. This
list is followed by a list of criteria for your second line, and so on. Thus, you build the definition
by selecting from lists, and these lists vary in content according to each stage. For more
information about sub-definitions, see Working with Display Sets (on page 239).
Example: Basic Search

The following definition defines the search criteria for all pipes that are 10 inches or larger
(assuming a Data Diameter field name in inches), in line 8011, intersect a certain section of the
plant, and are not on level 12 or 15:
FIND Data Diameter >= 10
KEEP ONLY Data Line No = *8011*
KEEP ONLY Volume Overlap 123 N, 444 E, 377 El - 400 N, 550
E, 500 El
THROW AWAY Level 12,15
The first line creates a group of all the elements that have a number greater than or equal to 10
in the Diameter field. The second line searches this new group for elements that have the text
8011 somewhere in the Line No field. In this way, the previous group is narrowed down to a
new group that includes only the elements that meet both criteria lines. The third criteria line
creates a new group by searching the last group that was created for elements that are inside or
overlapping the specified volume. The fourth line then throws away any elements in the group
that are on levels 12 or 15. Because this is the last line, this final group of elements is the one
selected by the Search For Objects Matching Criteria command.
Example: Search for "Null" Fields

The following display set definition is based on a search for any element that has an empty field
in the Service category.
FIND Data Service: = *
THROW AWAY Data Service: = ?*
The first line creates a group on all elements that contain a Service field. Then an additional
search criteria is used to throw away any element that contains at least one character in the
Service field. The elements remaining will contain no entry (null) in the Service field.
See Also
256
Pick Objects Dialog Box

Allows you to define a display set by selecting the objects in the Main view.
Pick Object - Allows you to graphically indicate, by clicking in the Main view, the object that you
want to select. The elements comprising the object you clicked are added to the Picked objects
list.
Picked objects - Displays the search criteria for the graphic object that you selected using the
Pick Object button.
Count - Displays the number of graphic objects found to comprise the object you selected.
Display set name - Displays the name of the display set that you are defining.
See Also
Match Items Dialog Box (on page 222)
257
Find Volume Inside/Overlap Dialog Box

Allows you to specify defining points for the volume.
First - Allows you to specify the north, east, and elevation coordinates for the first point in the
volume definition.
North - Allows you to enter the north coordinate for the first point in the volume definition.
East - Allows you to enter the east coordinate for the first point in the volume definition.
Elevation - Allows you to enter the elevation for the first point in the volume definition.
Pick Point - Allows you to graphically indicate, by placing a 3D point, the object that you
want to select. For more information, see Placing 3D Points (on page 277).
Second - Allows you to specify the north, east, and elevation coordinates for the second point in
the volume definition.
North - Allows you to enter the north coordinate for the second point in the volume
definition.
East - Allows you to enter the east coordinate for the second point in the volume definition.
Elevation - Allows you to enter the elevation for the second point in the volume definition.
Pick Point - Allows you to graphically select the second 3D point for the volume definition.
For more information, see Placing 3D Points (on page 277).
Display set name - Displays the name of the display set that you are defining.
See Also
258
Edit a Display Set Position

Tools > Display Sets > Edit Position
-orProject Manager > [Display Set] > Edit > Display Set > Position
Displays the Edit Display Set Position dialog box, which allows you to change the position of
the selected display set. This command works in conjunction with the Tools > Display Sets >
Move command to allow you to reposition display sets independent of their default location. This
functionality is a very useful tool for checking clearances and provides the ability to temporarily
move a group of objects around in the model.
1. Select a display set from the list in Project Manager.
2. Right-click in Project Manager and select Edit > Display Sets > Edit Position.
3. On the Information tab, specify the current display set Range, activate/deactivate display
set Move (based on current display set positional information), or Reset the Move and
Rotate deltas back to zero (effectively returning the moved display set back to its original
position).
Information Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box) (on page 260)
4. On the Move tab, specify the move amounts for the current display set positional
information.
Move Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box) (on page 261)
5. On the Rotate tab, specify the rotate amounts for the current display set positional
information.
Rotate Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box) (on page 263)
Move a Display Set (on page 265)

Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box

Allows you to define the distance or destination path to move a selected display set. After
assigning the distance or destination path, use the Move tab on this dialog box to move the
display set.
See Also
Rotation Points per Axis Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box) (on page 264)
259

Information Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box)
Allows you to select and move a display set.
Display Set Name - Displays the name of the display set that you are moving.
ID - Displays the ID of the display set that you are moving.
Move - When checked, the display set will be moved by the specified amount when the dialog
box is closed.
Reset - Sets the Move Destination Delta values and Rotate Angles values to zero. The Move
Reference Origin and the Rotate Reference Origin are not reset.
Minimum range
260
North - Displays the current minimum north coordinate of a bounding box enclosing the
display set.
East - Displays the current minimum east coordinate of a bounding box enclosing the
display set.
Elevation - Displays the current minimum elevation of a bounding box enclosing the display
set.

Maximum range
North - Displays the current maximum north coordinate of a bounding box enclosing the
display set.
East - Displays the current maximum east coordinate of a bounding box enclosing the
display set.
Elevation - Displays the current maximum elevation of a bounding box enclosing the display
set.
See Also
Move Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box)

Allows you to define the distance or destination path in which the display set will be moved.
While defining the destination coordinates, keep in mind that they are relative to the reference
origin (where the display set started out).
Reference origin
North - Specifies the north coordinate for the move reference origin.
East - Specifies the east coordinate for the move reference origin.
261

Elevation - Specifies the elevation coordinate for the move reference origin.
Pick Point - Allows you to pick a 3D point in the model using the mouse rather than typing
specific coordinate values. For more information, see Placing 3D Points (on page 277).
Destination
Absolute - Switches the move coordinate fields to accept absolute destination values for the
new display set position. This option allows you to move the display set a specified amount from
the original reference point.
Delta value - Switches the move coordinate fields to accept delta offset values for the new
display set position. The Delta options allow you to define an offset, either a specified amount or
a distance and bearing, from the original reference point.
Delta direction - Switches the move coordinate boxes to accept delta directional offset values
for the new display set position. The Delta options allow you to define an offset, either a
specified amount or a distance and bearing, from the original reference point.
North - Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta direction for the north coordinate
for the new position.
East - Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta direction for the east coordinate for
the new position.
Elevation - Specifies the absolute destination delta value or delta direction for the elevation
coordinate for the new position.
Pick Point - Allows you to pick a 3D point in the model for the destination point rather than
specifying each coordinate individually.
See Also
262

Rotate Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box)
Allows you to specify the reference origin coordinates for the point around which the current
display set will rotate. This tab also allows you to specify the plan, front, and side angles, in
degrees from 0 to less than 360, for rotating the display set.
Reference origin
North - Specifies the north coordinate for the reference origin point around which the display set
rotates.
East - Specifies the east coordinate for the reference origin point around which the display set
rotates.
Elevation - Specifies the elevation coordinate for the reference origin point around which the
display set rotates.
Pick Point - Allows you to pick a 3D point in the model for the reference origin rather than
specifying each coordinate individually. For more information, see Placing 3D Points (on page
277).
The Reference origin is adjusted internally by the move deltas specified on the Move
tab before the rotate angles are applied.
263

Angles in degrees from 0 to less than 360
Plan - Specifies the angle in the plan direction to rotate the display set.
Front - Specifies the angle in the front direction to rotate the display set.
Side - Specifies the angle in the side direction to rotate the display set.
See Also
Rotation Points per Axis Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box)
Allows you to rotate a display set around a point along each of the three axis in any possible
order.
Use rotation points on each axis - Check this option to set a separate rotation point on each
of the three axes ( X, Y or Z ).
Three axis rotation order - Allows you to select a preferred matrix multiplication order.
Because matrix multiplication is not commutative, the order of applying the rotation around each
axis is important. A rotation matrix is first built from each rotation point data, then the three
points are built into 3 rotation matrices that are then multiplied to compute the final rotation
264

matrix. The order of composition of the matrix does control the final orientation of the rotated
display set.
Plan (Elevation or Z axis) reference origin - Allows you to either key in or pick the the Z axis
reference origin point. The key in fields are the North, East, and Elevation coordinates. Pick
Point allows you to select a 3D rotation point graphically.
Front (North or Y axis) reference origin - Allows you to either key in or pick the the Y axis
Side (East or X axis) reference origin - Allows you to either key in or pick the the X axis
For more information about selecting 3D points using the Pick Point command, see
Placing 3D Points (on page 277).
See Also
Move a Display Set

1. Select the display set that you want to move from the list in Project Manager.
3. Click the Move tab.
4. Type the coordinates for the North, East, and Elevation coordinates for the Reference
Origin.
5. Select Absolute, Delta Value, or Delta Direction for the Destination. Delta defines an
offset from the current position, either by a specified amount (value), or by distance and
bearing (direction), from the original reference point (the Reference Origin). Absolute
defines the exact destination of the moved display set (not an offset).
6. Type the North, East, and Elevation coordinates for the Destination.
7. Click the Information tab.
8. Check the Move option to move the display set to the specified destination coordinates.
After the display set destination has been defined in the Edit Position dialog box, use the
Display Sets > Move command to toggle the Move property without having to return to the
Information tab on the Edit Display Set Position dialog box. You also can dynamically
move display sets using the Motion > Display Set control mode command.
If an object is a member of more than one display set with different offsets, the object is
displayed using the offset assigned to the display set with the lowest ID number.
Although you can select multiple display sets in Project Manager, you can select only one
display set at a time for dynamic motion.
You can also use the keypad to manipulate the position of a display set.
265

See Also
Rotate Display Set

1. Select the display set that you want to rotate from the list in Project Manager.
3. Click the Rotate tab.
4. Type the coordinates for the North, East, and Elevation coordinates for the Reference
Origin.
5. Specify the Plan, Front, and Side angles.
If an object is a member of more than one display set with different offsets, the object is
displayed using the offset assigned to the display set with the lowest ID number.
The Rotate Reference Origin is adjusted internally by the move deltas specified on the
Move tab before the rotate angles are applied.
Although you can select multiple display sets in Project Manager, you can select only one
display set at a time for dynamic motion.
See Also
Assign Material to Display Sets

Tools > Display Sets > Assign Material
OR
Project Manager > Shortcut menu (Edit > Display Set > Material Assignment.)
Displays the Assign Material to Display Set dialog box, allowing you to quickly assign material
in a palette file to elements in one or more selected display sets. You can select materials from
multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics before assigning them to the
display set.
The following conditions must be met to assign materials to a three dimensional model:
The material definitions in palette files that you want to assign to the model must already be
created. The files must be in a folder that you can access from SmartPlant Review.
When you assign a material to a model surface, that material is applied to every model
element that is in that display set. If an element is a member of more than one display set
with different display properties, the element is displayed using the properties assigned to
the display set with the lowest ID number.
1. Highlight or select one or more display sets or display set folders in the Project Manager.
You must select a display set in Project Manager before this command becomes available.
Use SHIFT+ or CTRL+ keys to select multiple display sets or folders.
266

2. Click Tools > Display Sets > Assign Material.
OR
Right-click in the Project Manager and select Edit > Display Set > Material Assignment.
Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box (on page 267)
3. Select a palette file and then the material name that you want to use. Click OK to assign that
material to the selected display set(s). If you selected one or more display set folders, every
display set in each folder is assigned to the material you just selected. Any previous display
set material assignments are overwritten.
Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box

Assigns materials in a palette file to elements in a display set. You can select materials from
multiple palette files and preview their display characteristics. You must select the display set in
Project Manager before you can access this command.
Display Set - Displays the display set name that you have selected in Project Manager.
Palette File - Displays the name of the active palette file. You can type the name of, or browse
to, an existing palette file.
Browse - Allows you to navigate to the palette file location.
Name - Displays the names of the material definitions in the selected palette file. Select a
material from this list to make it the active material.
Preview - Shows the display properties of the active material definition as it is mapped onto a
spherical surface.
You can use the Tools > Materials > Edit Materials command to create or edit a
material definition. For more information, see Edit Materials (on page 367).
267

See Also
Display Materials
Tools > Display Sets > Material
OR
Project Manager > Shortcut menu
Provides a quick way to turn on or off the display of the materials assigned to all display sets
under the Display Sets node, all display sets under the selected display set folder node(s), or
all of the selected display sets.
1. Open the Project Manager (View > Project Manager) and select the top Display Sets
node, the specific display set folder node(s), or the display sets that you want to work with.
2. Right-click to open the shortcut menu, and then select Material to toggle on or off the
material display.
This same functionality is also provided by the Material command. When you have selected
display sets in the Project Manager, click Tools > Display Sets > Material to toggle the material
display. If you do not have a display set node or any display sets selected in the Project
Manager, the Material command is not active.
Only the assigned materials for display sets contained within the selected nodes are toggled on
or off. If you directly select display sets without material assignments, the Assign Material
dialog box activates for you to specify the material.
If an element is a member of more than one display set with different display properties,
the element is displayed using the properties assigned to the display set with the lowest ID
number.
268

See Also
Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box (on page 267)
Show Display Sets

Tools > Display Sets > Show
-orProject Manager > Display Sets > Show
Switches the visible or hidden display of the selected display set. This command can be applied
to a single display set, multiple selected display sets, or to a parent folder containing a group of
display sets.
Elevation View commands to select the views where the selected display sets are shown or
hidden.
See Also
View Display Sets (on page 241)
Show Display Set Membership

Tools > Display Sets > Show Membership
Allows you to show display set membership for an auto- highlighted element. The display set
membership is stored in the project database.
See Also
Select Label Data (see "Auto-Highlight Label Data" on page 118)
Shade Display Sets

Tools > Display Sets > Shade
-orProject Manager > Display Sets > Shade
Switches between shaded or wireframe display of the selected display set. This command can
be applied to a single display set, multiple selected display sets, or to a parent folder containing
a group of display sets.
You can also switch between shaded or wireframe by clicking View > Settings, View >
Display, or by right-clicking on a display set or folder in Project Manager and selecting Shade.
See Also
269
Dim Display Sets

Tools > Display Sets > Dim
-orProject Manager > Display Sets > Dim
Decreases the brightness of the selected display set, allowing you to more easily contrast
members of the display set with other objects in the model. You can switch from a dimmed level
to normal brightness. This command can be applied to a single display set, multiple selected
display sets, or to a parent folder containing a group of display sets.
See Also
Reverse Dim Display Sets (on page 270)
Reverse Dim Display Sets

Tools > Display Sets > Reverse Dim
Allows you to reverse the brightness rendering state for all dimmed display sets. When checked,
all dimmed display sets are rendered in the Highlight brightness state. When un-checked, all
dimmed display sets are rendered in the Dim brightness state.
See Also
Dim Display Sets (on page 270)
Show Only Selected Display Sets

Tools > Display Sets > Show Only
-orProject Manager > Display Sets > Show Only
Allows you to show all selected display sets and hide all other display sets. This command can
1. Expand the Display Sets node in Project Manager.
2. Highlight the display set or folder containing the display sets whose display you want to
remain active.
3. Click Tools > Display Sets > Show Only.
You can identify the on/off status of a display set from its appearance within Project
Manager. When a display set is on, or visible, a check mark appears next to the display set
item
. When a display set is off, or hidden, the check mark does not appear.
hidden.
See Also
270
Hide Only Selected Display Sets

Tools > Display Sets > Hide Only
-orProject Manager > Display Sets > Hide Only
Allows you to hide all selected display sets and show all other display sets. This command can
2. Highlight the display set whose display you want to hide.
3. Click Tools > Display Sets > Hide Only.
You can identify the on/off status of a display set from its appearance within Project
Manager. When a display set is on, or visible, a check mark appears next to the display set
item
. When a display set is off, or hidden, the check mark does not appear.
Click View > Project Manager to enable Project Manager, and verify that there are some
display sets already created.
Use the Show/Hide for Main view, Show/Hide for Plan View, and Show/Hide for
hidden.
See Also
Move Display Sets

Tools > Display Sets > Move
-orProject Manager > Display Sets > Move
Switches the display set position from the static moved position to the unmoved position. By
using the Move command in conjunction with the Edit Display Set Position dialog box, you can
move an entire display set of objects rather than moving each object separately. This command
can be applied to a single display set, multiple selected display sets, or to a parent folder
containing a group of display sets.
You can access the Edit Display Set Position dialog box by clicking Tools > Display Sets
> Edit Position.
To dynamically move displays sets in the model, use the Motion > Display Set command.
See Also
Set Motion Control to Display Set (on page 132)
271
Delete Display Sets

Tools > Display Sets > Delete
-orProject Manager > Display Sets > Delete
Allows you to delete selected display sets. This command can be applied to a single display set,
multiple selected display sets, or to a parent folder containing a group of display sets.
2. Highlight the display set or folder containing the display sets you want to delete.
3. Right-click and select Delete > Display Set.
4. Confirm that you want to delete the selected display set.
If the deleted display set had a material assignment, you may need to use the
Refresh Data command to restore the display to the proper colors.
See Also
Rename Display Sets

Tools > Display Sets > Rename
-orProject Manager > Display Sets > [Display Set Name] > Rename
Allows you to change the name of an existing display set or display set folder.
See Also
Import Display Sets

File > Import > Display Sets
Imports display sets and display set folders from another data file into the active project
database. A display set is a collection of graphic objects that are grouped together according to
specific definition criteria.
1. Click File > Import > Display Sets.
Import Display Sets Dialog Box (on page 273)
2. Browse to the database file containing the display sets to be imported.
3. Click each display set or display set folder to be imported into the active project.
272
You can use the Select All button to import all of the display sets in the file.
SmartPlant Review does not verify the fitness of use for any type of data that you import or
export between project databases. SmartPlant Review assumes that all projects used during
import or export activities contain equivalent model space and unit settings. Therefore, it is
possible to import or export project data that is not relevant to the project that receives the
data.

See Also
Import Display Sets Dialog Box

Allows you to import display sets by folder or by selecting individual display sets. After selecting
the data file (.DST or .MDB) containing the display sets you want to import, the dialog box
displays a list of all the display sets contained in that file, allowing you to select the display set(s)
that you want to import.
If you import a subset of a display set folder, a corresponding folder is created in the current
project database. If a corresponding folder already exists, then the imported display sets are
merged with the folder's existing contents.
A DST file is a legacy format that is no longer used by SmartPlant Review.
However, display sets that are saved in a DST file can be imported into the active project
database for use by SmartPlant Review.
Database file name - Provides a space for you to enter the name of the existing display set file.
Browse - Allows you to navigate to the data file containing the display sets you want to import.
From a single selected folder - Displays the individual display sets by folder. When this option
is turned on, the Folder name list contains the display set folders in the database file.
Folder name - Allows you to select the display set folder you want to import. This option is
available only when the From a single selected folder check box is turned on.
ID - Lists all the display sets that are available for import by ID.
Name - Lists all the display sets that are available for import by name.
Import - Imports the selected display sets without closing the dialog box.
Select All - Allows you to select all of the display sets in the list.
273

Clear All - Allows you to clear the selection of display sets shown in the list.
See Also
Export Display Sets

File > Export > Display Sets
Exports display sets and display set folders to a database that you have defined or to a different
project file. This feature allows you to create libraries of specific definition information for display
sets.
1. Click File > Export > Display Sets.
Export Display Sets Dialog Box (on page 275)
2. Type a File name or click Browse to locate the file.
3. Click each display set or display set folder to be exported from the active project.
A display set is a collection of graphic objects that are grouped together according to
specific definition criteria.
You can use the Select All button to select all the display sets in the file for exporting.
data.
See Also
274
Export Display Sets Dialog Box

Allows you to select a display set from the current project to export to an .MDB file. If you export
a subset of a display set folder, a corresponding folder is created in the target external
database, if necessary. If a corresponding folder already exists, then the exported display sets
are merged with the folder's existing contents.
Database file name - Displays the file to which the exported display set will be placed. Select
an existing file or type the name of a new file.
Browse - Allows you to navigate to a file or folder.
From a single selected folder - Displays the individual display sets by folder. When this option
is turned on, the Folder name list contains the display set folders in the database file.
Folder name - Allows you to select the display set folder you want to export. This option is
available only when the From a single selected folder check box is turned on.
Folder - Lists all the display sets that are available for export.
Export - Exports the selected display sets without closing the dialog box.
Select All - Allows you to select all display sets that are shown in the list.
Clear All - Allows you to clear all the display sets that are shown in the list.
See Also
275
276
SECTION 20
Placing 3D Points
Many SmartPlant Review commands prompt you to place 3D points. For example, when you
place tags with leader lines, take measurements, or window in an area, you can place three
dimensional points for more precision control.
Define a Bore Sight (on page 277)

Snap to an Object (on page 277)
Define a Bore Sight

1. Set up all views such that the area of interest for the 3D point is displayed.
2. In the Main, Plan, or Elevation view, right-click twice (very quickly) to identify where you
want to place the point. A yellow line (called a bore sight) passes through that point in the
other views (if the view is fitted to the locate area). The possible locate coordinate values
are now constrained to this line.
3. In a different view than the one you selected in step #2, move the cursor along the bore
sight line and click on the location for the desired point.
If you do not select an object, the tag is placed at the location of the view center point.
Snap to an Object
In the Main view, left-click an object in the model. The object highlights in wireframe.
Left-click to accept the highlighted element. The coordinates of the point appear in the message
field. SmartPlant Review uses the point where you initially selected the object as the 3D point.
277
Placing 3D Points
278
SECTION 21
Placing Measurements
You can place measurements and create measurement collections in SmartPlant Review.
Measurements consist of key-point to key-point precision measuring and are stackable,
persistent, and available in English and Metric units regardless of the project environment.
For each measurement, you can measure the distance between two highlighted snaplock
points, two surface points, the shortest distance between two objects, or between a surface
point and a snaplock point. SmartPlant Review shows you the points you selected, a line
between the two points, and the distance between the points.
In SmartPlant Review, there are now two methods to measure points, continuous and
non-continuous. Continuous measurements work like a "rolling tape measure," with a
continuous connection between each selected point. Because each measurement requires two
points, for N number of measurements, you must select N + 1 number of points. Non-continuous
measurements consist of measurements between pairs of unique points. In non- continuous
measurement, there is no connection between each pair of points and the next pair. To create N
measurements using non-continuous measurement, you must select 2 * N points. The points
comprising either this "rolling tape measure" or the non-continuous measurements are grouped
together in a measurement collection. You can create your own collections, which is useful if
you need more than one set of measurements, or use the default collection provided.
Set Snaplock Measurement (on page 280)

Set Surface Measurement (on page 281)
Measure Shortest Distance between Objects (on page 282)
Use One Click Measurement Mode (on page 282)
Move Measurement (on page 283)
Restore Measurement Position (on page 283)
Delete Last Measurement (on page 284)
Delete All Measurements (on page 284)
279
Set Snaplock Measurement

Tools > Measure > Snaplock
Allows you to measure from a repeatable point on a selected piece of geometry.
SmartPlant Review generates snaplock points at fixed locations on a given piece of geometry
for use during snaplock measurement. A snaplock point is displayed as either a small square or
round tag point on a surface, as shown in the picture below. The location of a given snaplock
point is always in the same place for a specific type of geometry, making snaplock measurement
more precise because it is repeatable.
1. Click Tools > Measure > Snaplock.
2.
3.
4.
5.
280
You also can access this command by pressing F8 or by clicking Snaplock Measure
on the Tools MiniBar.
Select an object.
Accept the object by left-clicking anywhere in the view.
Select the snaplock point on the object from which to measure.
Double right-click to exit the command before selecting the snaplock point.
When measuring a distance, you must access the Snaplock command twice because it
takes two selection points to define the distance to be measured.
Because measurements occur for every single selection point, use the Tools > Measure >
Edit Collection command to delete any unnecessary measurements. For more information,
see Edit Measurement Collections (on page 286).
You can use any of the standard motion commands or view manipulation commands to
move to a different part of the model between defining snaplock points.
Snaplock measurements allow you to define formats for the line, snaplock points, and text.
The linear distance and cumulative distance display in the Text view. In addition, the text
view displays the location of each initial snaplock point as you place them.
If you have rubber banding turned on, you can cycle through the snaplock points to select
the starting point for the rubber band. Right-click to cycle through the available points.
Set Surface Measurement

Tools > Measure > Surface
Allows you to measure from any point on a piece of geometry.
Surface points can be any point on any piece of geometry in shaded mode, not including
background points. While they work well for quick measurements between two or more objects,
surface point measurements are difficult to repeat precisely because they can be at any point on
a given surface.
1. Click Tools > Measure > Surface.

2. Click the first point on the model.
3. Click Tools > Measure > Surface.
4. Click the second point on the model.
5. Continue to identify end points.
6. Double right-click to exit the command before selecting the next surface point.
When measuring a distance, you must access the Surface command twice because it takes
two selection points to define the distance to be measured.
Surface measurement allows you to select any surface point on any object.
Because measurements occur for every single selection point, you can use Tools >
Measure > Edit Collection to delete any unnecessary measurements. You can also use
this command to customize all measurement symbology for lines, text, formats, range
boxes, and snaplock points.
The measurement is saved in the active collection.
The linear distance and cumulative distance display in the Text view.
When working with point cloud data, surface measurements measure between model points
and vector points in the point cloud.
See Also
Move Measurement (on page 283)
Delete Last Measurement (on page 284)
Restore Measurement Position (on page 283)
281
Measure Shortest Distance between Objects

Tools > Measure > Shortest Distance between Objects
Allows you to measure the shortest distance between two objects that you select.
This command honors the selection of a single element in a complex object when the
Auto-highlight elements mode is turned on. Otherwise, this command assumes that the entire
complex element is to be tested for the shortest distance between the two selected objects.
1. Click Tools > Measure > Shortest Distance between Objects.
2. Click the first point on the model.
3. Click to accept the highlighted element.
4. Click the second point on the model.
5. Click to accept the highlighted element.
The One Click Measurement Mode should not be used with the Measure Shortest
Distance between Objects command.
The measurement is saved in the active collection.
You can define formats for the measurement line, points, and text. For more information,
see Creating Measurement Collections (on page 285).
The linear distance and cumulative distance display in the Text view.
See Also
Placing Measurements (on page 279)
Use One Click Measurement Mode

Tools > Measure > One Click Measurement Mode
Allows you to enter into Surface or Snaplock measurement and stay in the command until you
right click. When you are in One Click measurement mode, you do not have to keep using the
mouse or function keys to restart the Snaplock or Surface measurement commands before
entering the next measurement point. One Click mode does not allow you to change the view or
move around. You can exit the measurement command, modify the view location or settings,
and then return to measurement to select the next point.
See Also
282
Move Measurement
Tools > Measure > Move Measurement
Allows you to reposition measurement labels. When clicked, the Move Measurement command
displays the label position markers (red squares). Click the position marker for the measurement
that you want to move and then click where you want the new position to be. The moved
measurement is attached to the original connecting line.
1. Click Tools > Measure > Move Measurement.
2. Click any square red label position marker.
3. Click any point in the Main view to reposition the lower left corner of the measurement field.
Move Measurement displays the label position markers (red squares). Click the position
marker for the measurement that you want to move and then click where you want the new
position to be.
The moved measurement is attached to the original connecting line with another line.
You can click anywhere on the label to move or restore the measurement.
See Also
Restore Measurement Position

Tools > Measure > Restore Position
Allows you to reposition a measurement label. When clicked, the Restore Position command
displays the label position markers (red squares). Click the position marker for the measurement
that you want to restore.
1. Click Tools > Measure > Restore Position.
2. Click the red label marker of the label that you want to restore.
The selected label returns to the original position when you click the red label position
marker.
283
See Also
Delete Last Measurement

Tools > Measure > Delete Last Measurement
Allows you to remove the last measurement added to the currently active collection.
Delete Last removes the last measurement made in the active collection.
You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking Delete Last
Measurement
See Also
Delete All Measurements

Tools > Measure > Delete All Measurements
Removes all of the measurements in each of the measurement collections, but does not delete
the collections.
284
This command removes all measurements in all collections, but does not delete the
collections themselves.
You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl+Alt+D or by clicking Delete All
Measurements
SECTION 22
Creating Measurement Collections

SmartPlant Review groups Measurements together in Measurement Collections. A
measurement collection is a named group of measurements that connect together within each
collection. One collection is independent of all other collections, allowing you to display or hide
measurement collections independently in the model.
For example, one collection could be named "Footings" and contain a connected series of
footings measurements. Another collection could be named "I-Beams" and contain a series of
I-Beam measurements. The footings measurement collection will not connect to the I-Beam
collections of measurements.
You can create your own Measurement Collections or use the default measurement collection
provided. You can have any number of named measurement collections, up to the limit of
records allowed in the project database. All measurement information is stored in the project
database.
You can also customize how the measurement symbology (lines, snaplock points, and text)
appears in your project by using the Tools > Measure > Edit Collection command.
User-defined collections can display measurements in English or Metric units regardless of the
project environment.
As you place measurements, all selection points are placed in the current or active collection.
Measurements occur for every single point. You can delete specific measurements in a
collection by using the Point Range options on the Edit tab on the Measurement Collections
dialog box.
Create New Measurement Collection (on page 286)

Edit Measurement Collections (on page 286)
Delete All Measurement Collections (on page 296)
Delete Active Collection Measurements (on page 297)
285
Create New Measurement Collection

Tools > Measure > New Collection
Generates a new measurement collection and automatically sets it to be the active collection.
The default name for the new collection is prefixed with AUTO_COLLECTION followed by the
project site name and an incremented integer (for example, AUTO_COLLECTION_mysite_4).
This name cannot be edited.
You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl + Shift + F8 or by clicking New
Measurement Collection on the Tools toolbar.
This command automatically generates a new measurement collection and sets it to be the
active collection.
The default name for the new collection is prefixed with AUTO_COLLECTION followed by
the project site name and an incremented integer (for example,
AUTO_COLLECTION_mysite_4). This name cannot be edited.
To edit the newly created measurement collection, click Tools > Measure > Edit
Collections.
Edit Measurement Collections

Tools > Measure > Edit Collections
Groups Measurements together in Measurement Collection. A measurement collection is a
named group of measurements that connect together within each collection. One collection is
independent of all other collections, allowing you to display or hide measurement collections
independently in the model. For example, one collection could be named "Footings" and contain
a connected series of footings measurements. Another collection could be named "I- Beams"
and contain a series of I-Beam measurements. The footings measurement collection will not
connect to the I- Beam measurement collection.
The Edit Collections command allows you to customize the measurement symbology (for
example, lines, snaplock points, measurement units, and text, and so forth) for each
measurement collection in your project.
1. Click Tools > Measure > Edit Collections.
2. Select the appropriate settings on the Measurement Collections Dialog Box (on page 287).
You also can access this command by pressing Shift+F8 or by clicking Edit
Measurement Collections
See Also
Create New Measurement Collection (on page 286)
286
Measurement Collections Dialog Box

Allows you to create or edit basic information for existing measurement collections. You can
customize all measurement symbology for lines, text, formats, range boxes, and snaplock
points. Also, you can display user defined collection measurements in English and/or Metric
units regardless of the project environment.
Edit Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) (on page 287)
Line Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) (on page 291)
Text Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) (on page 292)
Format Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) (on page 293)
Snaplock Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) (on page 294)
Range Box Snaplock Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box) (on page 295)
Edit Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box)

Allows you to create or edit basic information for an existing measurement collection. With the
Edit tab, you also can display each collection independently from the other collections or select
a specific range of measurements in a collection to display or delete.
The active measurement collection is the last measurement collection selected immediately
before exiting the Edit tab.
Measurement collection names cannot contain single tick marks ( ' ).
Name - Allows you to enter the required name of the measurement collection.
Delete - Removes the selected measurement point range in the active collection.
Description - Allows you to enter an optional description of the measurement collection.
On - Displays all or part of a measurement collection using the selected point range.
287

Continuous measurement - Displays measurements between the points that you select with
the rolling measuring tape. The software displays one measurement between each point
continuously. For example, points 1 to 2, 2 to 3, and 3 to 4 will have measurements. You will see
three measurements if you provide four points.
Turn this option off to display measurements between each two pairs of points but not display
measurement between multiple pairs of points. For example, points 1 to 2 and 3 to 4 will have
measurements but points 2 to 3 would not have a measurement. You will see two
measurements displayed if you provide four points. You can turn this option on or off at any time
to meet your needs.
288

Dynamic measurement rubberband - Measures dynamically and interactively from one
selected measurement point over any graphic in the model until the next measurement point is
selected.
Use range box snaplocks - Specifies that you want to use the snaplocks for the range box
instead of geometric snaplocks on a graphic element.
289

Turn this option off to use the geometric snaplocks on the graphic element instead of those on
the range box.
Range box on measurement points - Displays the rangebox around the measurement points.
Measurement of graphic range box - Displays the range box dimensions of measured graphic
elements in the text window.
From - Selects the starting measurement point in a collection for display or deletion.
To - Selects the ending measurement point in a collection for display or deletion.
Display - Displays the selected measurement point range to assist you in determining which
measurement points to delete.
Delete - Removes the currently selected point range.
See Also
Measurement Collections Dialog Box (on page 287)
Creating Measurement Collections (on page 285)
290
Line Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box)

Defines the properties for the line that displays to show the distance being measured. The Line
tab also allows you to control the line color, width, and display pattern.
Collection - Displays the collection name of the currently selected measurement collection.
Measurement Color - Allows you to select a color for the measurement leader line.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to select a line color.
Width - Allows you to select a line width for connecting line measurements.
Solid - Allows you to select a solid line style for connecting line measurements.
Dash - Allows you to select a dashed line style for connecting line measurements.
Dot-dash - Allows you to select a dot-dashed line style for connecting line measurements.
Dot - Allows you to select a dotted line style for connecting line measurements.
Range Box Color - Allows you to select a color for the range box lines.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to select a line color.
Edge width - Allows you to select a line width for the range box lines measurements.
Solid - Allows you to select a solid line style for the range box.
Dash - Allows you to select a dashed line style for the range box.
Dot-dash - Allows you to select a dot-dashed line style for the range box.
291

Dot - Allows you to select a dotted line style for the range box.
See Also
Text Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box)

Defines the display properties for the measurement text. You can define different text properties
for each measurement collection and change the font, text color, background color, and position
along the measure line where the measurement text displays.
Collection - States the name of the measurement collection that is currently selected.
Background Transparent - Allows you to select a transparent background for measurement
text.
Background Color - Displays the background color for the measurement labels that are
currently selected.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to change the background color associated
with the measurement.
Position from 0.0 to 1.0 - Allows you to select the position for the measurement label between
start and end points for a measurement.
Font Name - Displays the name of the currently selected font for the measurement labels.
Font Edit - Displays the Font dialog box, allowing you to select font parameters.
Font Type - Displays the currently selected font type for the measurement labels. Supported
font types include regular, bold, italic, and bold italic.
Font Size - Displays the currently selected font size for the measurement labels.
Font Color - Displays the font color for the measurement labels that are currently selected.
292

See Also
Format Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box)

Allows you to select the display of only master units or both master and sub units on the
measurement label. You also can define whether measurements display in metric or imperial
units and the amount of precision after the decimal place.
Collection - Displays the name of the measurement collection that is currently selected.
Readout - Allows you to select the display of the measurement label.
Precision - States the maximum number of digits to the right of the decimal on measurement
labels.
Display North - Displays the north measurement.
Display East - Displays the east measurement.
Display Elevation - Displays the elevation for the measurement.
293

Display order for two or more delta distances - Specifies the display order for the delta
distances that you have turned on. You can select any order from the list.
See Also
Snaplock Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog Box)

Defines the measurement line terminator display properties for the active collection. These
terminators indicate the points between which you are measuring. You also can define the point
color, style, and size using this tab.
Collection - Name of the measurement collection that is currently selected.

Current - States the color of the snaplock measurement point that is currently displayed for a
selected piece of geometry.
Alternate - States the color of all alternate, non-selected snaplock measurement points for a
selected piece of geometry.
Final - States the color of the final displayed snaplock measurement point for a selected piece
of geometry.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to select the snaplock point color.
Square - Allows you to specify square snaplock measurement points.
Round - Allows you to specify small, round snaplock measurement points.
Size from 6 to 10 pixels - Allows you to specify snaplock point size from 6 to 10 pixels.
294

See Also
Range Box Snaplock Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog

Box)
Defines which snaplocks are available on the range box. The active range box snaplocks
display on the figure at the bottom of the dialog box.
Collection - Name of the measurement collection that is currently selected.
Group snaplock point selection

All points - Activates all of the snaplock points on the range box.
Graphically selected - Activates the snaplock points that you select on the figure at the bottom
of the dialog box.
Groups of points - Lets you select logical groups of snaplock points.
295

Corner points (circles) - Activates the corner snaplock points.
Edge midpoints (rectangles) - Activates the midpoint snaplock points for each edge of the
range box.
Face midpoints (triangles) - Activates the midpoint snaplock points for each face of the range
box.
Range box center point (diamond) - Activates the center point snaplock point for the range
box.
Graphical point selection - Displays the active snaplock points for the range box. Active points
display as yellow. Inactive points display as white.
See Also
Delete All Measurement Collections

Tools > Measure > Delete All Collections
Removes all measurement collections and any associated measurements. You do not need to
delete the measurements before deleting all of collections.
296
You do not need to delete the measurements before deleting the collections.
To see the measurements contained in each collection before deleting them, click Tools >
Measure > Edit Collections, select a collection Name, then click the Display option to view
the measurements in the Main view.
You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl+D or by clicking Delete All
Collections
Delete Active Collection Measurements

Tools > Measure > Delete Active Collection Measurements
Allows you to remove all of the measurements in the active collection, but does not delete the
collection.
This command removes all measurements in the active collection, but does not delete the
collection itself.
To see which collection is the active collection, click Tools > Measure > Edit Collections
and note the name highlighted in the Collection Name box.
You can also access this command by pressing Ctrl+Shift+M or by clicking Delete Active
Collection Measurements
See Also
Delete All Measurement Collections (on page 296)
297
298
SECTION 23
Communicating with Tags

Tags provide a means of communication between the people who design a plant and the people
who construct a plant. Tags can provide information such as the name of a piece of equipment,
its location, its type or classification, or general comments made during a walk-through of the
design. Essentially, tags are labels that provide additional information about items in a plant.
You can import and export tags directly to and from project databases. All tag attributes are
available for you to use when you query for tags.
In SmartPlant Review, you can place tags with leader lines or without leader lines, edit tags, and
delete tags. When you create a new tag, it is assigned the next available tag number, and the
tag becomes the active tag. The software saves the corresponding view, including levels and
clipping planes, when you place a new tag. Then, when you display the tag, the corresponding
view also displays. You can search for a tag by entering text that appears in the tag label and
you can directly go to a tag by entering a tag number.
You can step through the tag list to view each tag. The tag that you are currently at is the active
tag. You can display all tags, only the active tag, or no tags. You also can display action
comments, which are additional text fields associated with tags that were placed during project
design.
You can import and export tags to an ASCII tag file. This ASCII file is used in other Intergraph
Process, Power and Offshore products to allow users to review tags placed within SmartPlant
Review. After reviewing the tags, users can make comments that are written back to the same
ASCII file. The user can then import the modified ASCII file to SmartPlant Review and show the
comments placed by other products.
Place a Tag With a Leader Line (on page 300)

Place Tag With No Leader (on page 301)
Edit Tags (on page 302)
Delete Tags (on page 306)
Find Tags (on page 306)
View Find Tags Results (on page 309)
View Next Tag (on page 309)
View Previous Tag (on page 310)
Go to Tag (on page 310)
Activate Tag Display (on page 311)
Display Only Active Tag (on page 312)
Display All Tags (on page 312)
Turn Off Tag Display (on page 312)
Display Tag Action Comments (on page 313)
Import Tags (on page 313)
Import Tags with Attributes and Symbology (on page 314)
Export Tags (on page 315)
299
Place a Tag With a Leader Line

Tags > Place > Leader
Places a new tag in the model with a leader line. The new tag is assigned the next available tag
number, and the tag becomes the active tag. When you place the new tag, the software saves
the corresponding view.
If the message Tag display is currently off appears, the Tags > Display > None
command is active. This means that the tags do not appear in the design.
1. Click Tags > Place > Leader. You can also access the Leader command by pressing F9 on
your keyboard.
2. Double-click the object at the location where you want the tag leader line to begin.
The beginning of the leader line can also be placed using a 3D data point or by simply
single-clicking a point in space. However, these methods will not associate the tag with
an object in the model.
Double-clicking causes the object to highlight. You then will be able to see the object's
attributes in the Text view and accept or reject the placement point. The leader line will
start at the point where you clicked the object. However, you will not see the leader line
until the bubble is placed.
Tag placement prompts display in the status bar.
3. Left-click to accept the placement point for the beginning of the leader line.
The first placement point is used to set the target depth for your bubble in the
current view, as well as the starting point for the leader line.
4. Single-click at the location where you want to place your bubble.
5. Type your text in the Edit Tags dialog box. The software automatically assigns the next
available tag number to the new tag. The new tag becomes the active tag.
300
Tags appear in all three views. The text and tag number from the active tag appear in the
text window.
When you place a new tag, the corresponding view is also saved. The view settings saved
with a tag are the levels, the Eye and Center point locations, and the clipping planes. Each
time that you display a tag, the corresponding view is also displayed. These view
parameters associated with a tag cannot be edited.
You can establish the predefined template used by the Place Tag command by creating
an ASCII text file named tagseed.txt. SmartPlant Review searches first in the folder specified
by the DR_TAGSEED_DIR variable. If it is not there, SmartPlant Review searches your
home folder and then C:\ before assuming that the file does not exist.
If the message "Tag display is currently off" appears, the Tags Off command is active. This
means that the tags do not appear in the design.
When you place a tag by first double-clicking on an object in the model, SmartPlant Review
saves the link between the tag and the selected object. When you open the model in PDS
and select the tag, the associated object appears highlighted.
Place Tag With No Leader

Tags > Place > No Leader
Places a new tag in the model without attaching a leader line. Tags appear in all three views.
The software automatically assigns the next available tag number to the new tag. The new tag
then becomes the active tag. When you place the new tag, the software saves the
corresponding view.
1. Click Tags > Place > No Leader. You can also access the No Leader command by
pressing Ctrl + F9 on your keyboard.
2. Double-click the object at the location where you want the tag to be placed.
The tag can also be placed using a 3D data point or by simply single-clicking a point in
space. However, these methods will not associate the tag with an object in the model.
Double-clicking causes the object to highlight. You then will be able to see the object's
attributes in the Text view and accept or reject the placement point.
The status bar, the horizontal strip at the bottom of the active window, displays the tag
placement prompts.
3. Left-click to accept the placement point for the tag.
4. Type your text in the Edit Tags dialog box. The software automatically assigns the next
available tag number to the new tag. The new tag becomes the active tag.
The Place Tag Without Leader command places a new tag in the model without attaching
a leader line. Tags appear in all three views.
The text and tag number from the active tag appear in the text window.
When you place a new tag, the corresponding view is also saved. The view settings saved
with a tag are the levels, the Eye and Center point locations, and the clipping planes. Each
time that you display a tag, the corresponding view is also displayed. These view
parameters associated with a tag cannot be edited.
You can establish the predefined template used by the Place Tag command by creating an
ASCII text file named tagseed.txt. SmartPlant Review searches first in the folder specified by
the DR_TAGSEED_DIR variable. If it is not there, SmartPlant Review searches your home
folder and then C:\ before assuming that the file does not exist.
If the message "Tag display is currently off" appears, the Tags Off command is active. This
means that the tags do not appear in the design.
When you place a tag by first double-clicking on an object in the model, SmartPlant Review
saves the link between the tag and the selected object. When you open the model in PDS
and select the tag, the associated object appears highlighted.
301
Edit Tags
Tags > Edit
Displays the Edit Tags dialog box, which allows you to view or change the attributes of the
active tag.
If the message Tag display is currently off displays, click Tags > Display > All to view
tags in the view.
1. Click Tags > Edit or click Edit Tag
Edit Tags Dialog Box (on page 302)
2. Select the tag Number to edit.
3. Type the Text for the tag.
4. Select Show comments to display comments associated with the tag.
5. Select Active only, All or None for Display option.
6. On the Attributes tab, type or select the values for the properties.
7. On the Symbology tab, select color values for parts of the tag.
Edit Tags Dialog Box

Allows you to edit or review the active tag. You can also use this dialog box to quickly create a
new tag with or without a leader.
See Also
Edit Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box) (on page 303)
Attributes Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box) (on page 304)
Symbology Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box) (on page 305)
302
Edit Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box)

Allows you to edit or review the text associated with the active tag. You can also quickly create a
new tag with or without a leader.
Number - Allows you to display a specific tag by selecting its number.

"Find Tags" results - Fills the Number list with only those tags in the current Find Tags result
set.
Recall view - Changes the view settings to those associated with the tag number displayed in
the Number field. The view settings associated with a tag are the levels, the Eye and Center
point locations, and the clipping plane locations.
Delete - Removes the tag displaying in the Number field from the model.
If you click Delete, the selected tag is automatically removed from the model. If you
would prefer a confirmation message prior to the tag deletion, use the Tags > Delete command.
Text - Displays data associated with a tag.
Show comments - Allows you to toggle between the comment text and the tag text.
Leader - Allows you to create a new tag with or without a leader.
Place - Allows you to place a new tag.
Active only - Displays only the active tags.
All - Displays all tags in the view.
None - Prevents the display of tags in the view.
See Also
303
Attributes Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box)

Allows you to edit or review the attributes of the active tag.
Creator - Allows you to enter or pick from a list the creator of the tag.
Discipline - Allows you to enter or pick from a list the discipline associated with the tag.
Site ID - Allows you to enter or pick from a list the site identification associated with the tag.
Category - Allows you to enter or pick from a list the category associated with the tag.
Computer name - Allows you to enter or pick from a list the name of the computer that
generated the tag.
Status - Allows you to enter or pick from a list the status of the tag.
Save As Defaults - Saves the current set of values for each attribute so that you can use them
as a starting point for other tags.
Restore Defaults - Displays the last saved set of defaults.
Created - Displays the date the tag was placed.
Last Modified - Displays the date the tag was last modified.
See Also
304
Symbology Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box)

Allows you to edit or review the symbology of the active tag.
Text - Allows you to select the text color for the tag.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to define the text color that you want to use
for the tag.
Background - Allows you to select the background color for the tag.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to select the background color that you want
to use for the tag.
Leader - Allows you to select the color for the tag's leader line.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box allowing you to select the color that you want to use for the
tag's leader line.
Save As Defaults - Saves the current set of symbology values so that you can use them as a
starting point for other tags.
Restore Defaults - Displays the last saved set of symbology values.
See Also
305
Delete Tags
Tags > Delete
Deletes a single tag by specifying the tag number. When you delete a tag, the tag number is
removed from use and is not reassigned to a new tag.
1. Click Tags > Delete or select Delete Tag
2. On the Delete Tag dialog box, select the tag to delete. See Delete Tag Dialog Box (on page
306).
When you delete a tag, the tag number is removed from use and is not reassigned to a new
tag.
You can also delete tags from the Edit Tags Dialog Box (on page 302).
See Also
Communicating with Tags (on page 299)
Delete Tag Dialog Box

Allows you to delete a tag by specifying its tag number. When you delete a tag, the tag number
is removed from use and will not be reassigned to a new tag.
Number - Allows you to choose a specific tag number to delete.

Verify - When this toggle is enabled, you will receive a prompt asking you to confirm the
deletion of the tag. You can answer Yes to delete the tag number or No to cancel the command
and return to the Delete Tag dialog box.
See Also
Communicating with Tags (on page 299)
Find Tags
Tags > Find
Displays the Find Tags dialog box, which allows you to search for tags that match the criteria
you specify on the dialog box.
If the message Tag display is currently off displays, click Tags > Displays > All to view
tags in the model.
1. Click Tags > Find or select Find Tag
on the Tags toolbar.
2. Type the identifying information for the tag or tags that you want to locate.
306

The matching tag displays on the Edit Tags Dialog Box (on page 302).
You can use an asterisk (*) to match multiple characters and a question mark (?) to match
exactly one character. For example, the text search string *Huntsville* will find all tags
containing the text string Huntsville in their text attribute.
You can use wildcard search characters in Text or Comment attributes. All other query
attributes will search for exact matches.
When you select a tag to display, the view settings associated with that tag become active.
The view settings saved with a tag are the levels, the Eye and Center point locations, and
the clipping planes.
The list of tags generated by a query is emptied if you import a tag or place a new tag. If you
perform one of those actions, you must regenerate the query to rebuild the tag list.
See Also
Find Tags Dialog Box

Allows you to search for tags based on their attributes and symbology.
See Also
Attributes Tab (Find Tags Dialog Box) (on page 307)
Symbology Tab (Find Tags Dialog Box) (on page 309)
Attributes Tab (Find Tags Dialog Box)

Specifies attribute criteria for your find tags query. The Edit Tags dialog box displays the
resulting set of tags. None of the fields are case sensitive.
Text - Allows you to type a text string representing the text attribute as part of the find tags
query. You can use an asterisk to (*) to match multiple characters and a question mark (?) to
match exactly one character. For example, the text search string *Huntsville* will find all tags
containing the text string Huntsville in their text attribute.
Comment - Allows you to type a text string representing the comment attribute as part of a find
tags query. You can use an asterisk (*) to match multiple characters and a question mark (?) to
match exactly one character.
Creator - Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing the creator
attribute as part of a find tags query. This value must be an exact match. You cannot use special
characters in this field.
307

Discipline - Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing the
discipline attribute as part of a find tags query. This value must be an exact match. You cannot
use special characters in this field.
Computer name - Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing the
computer name attribute as part of a find tags query. This value must be an exact match. You
cannot use special characters in this field.
Site ID - Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing the site id
Category - Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing the
category attribute as part of a find tags query. This value must be an exact match. You cannot
use special characters in this field.
Status - Allows you to type a text string or select from a list the value representing the status
Number - This group of controls lets you query on tag numbers. Select an operator on the left
and a number on the right to search for some set of tags in relation to one particular tag.
SmartPlant Review provides two number- operator pairs, which helps you designate a range of
values to search for.
Created - Allows you to query on creation date. Select an operator on the left and a number on
the right to search for some set of tags in relation to one particular tag. SmartPlant Review
provides two number-operator pairs, which helps you designate a range of values to search for.
Last modified - This group of controls lets you query on last modified date. Select an operator
on the left and a number on the right to search for some set of tags in relation to one particular
tag. SmartPlant Review provides two number- operator pairs, which helps you designate a
range of values to search for.
See Also
308
Symbology Tab (Find Tags Dialog Box)

Allows you to search for tags based on the symbology.
Text - Allows you to select a text color on which to base your tag search.
Background - Allows you to select a background color on which to base your tag search.
Leader - Allows you to select a leader line color on which to base your tag search.
See Also
View Find Tags Results

Tags > Find Tags Results
Toggles the display of the Find Tags command. When on, the tag list on the Find Tag and Edit
Tag dialog boxes displays only those tags that meet the current search criteria.
See Also
View Next Tag

Tags > Next
Allows you to move to the tag number following the active tag. If the active tag number is the
highest-numbered tag in the tag list, the next tag number is the lowest-numbered tag in the tag
list.
If the message Tag display is currently off appears, the actual tags do not appear in the
design. To display the tags, click Tag > Display > All.
These view settings saved with a tag are the levels, the Eye and Center point locations, and
the clipping planes.
If the Find Tags Results toggle is on, the tag list will consist of only those tags that meet
the current search criteria.
309
You can also click Next Tag

on the Tools MiniBar or press F10.
Settings > Display tab), you can press F10 a second time to immediately jump to the next
tag instead of going through fly mode.
Press ESC to cancel the current move operation. You are then automatically taken to the
next consecutive tag.
See Also
View Previous Tag

Tags > Previous
Allows you to move to the tag number preceding the active tag. If the active tag number is the
lowest-numbered tag in the tag list, the previous tag number is the highest-numbered tag in the
tag list.
If the message Tag display is currently off appears, the actual tags do not appear in the
design. To display the tags, click Tags > Display > All.
These view settings include the levels, the Eye and Center point locations, and the clipping
planes.
If the Find Tags Results toggle is on, the tag list will consist only of those tags that meet
You can also click Previous Tag
on the Tools MiniBar or press Ctrl+F10.
Settings > Display tab), you can press Ctrl+F10 a second time to immediately jump to the
next tag instead of going through fly mode.
Press ESC to cancel the current move operation. You are then automatically taken to the
last preceding tag.
See Also
Go to Tag
Tags > Go To
Displays the Go to Tag dialog box, which allows you to display a specific tag by selecting its
number. The tag that you go to becomes the active tag.
If the message Tag display is currently off displays, click Tags > Display > Active Only to
display the tags in the model.
1. Click Tags > Go To. You can also select Go to Tag
Go to Tag Dialog Box (on page 311)
310
on the Tags toolbar.

2. Select the tag Number.
These view settings include the levels, the Eye and Center point locations, and the clipping
planes.
If the Find Tags Results toggle is on, the tag list will consist only of those tags that meet
See Also
Place a Tag With a Leader Line (on page 300)
Go to Tag Dialog Box

Allows you to locate a specific tag using the tag number. To display tags in the model, click
Tags > Display and choose a viewing option from the menu.
Number - Allows you to specify the number of the tag that you want to view.
See Also
Activate Tag Display

Tags > Display > Activate
Changes the view settings to those associated with the tag that was last active. The text for the
tag displays in the Text view.
This command changes the view settings to those associated with the tag that was last
active. The view settings associated with tags are the levels, the Eye and Center point
locations, and the clipping planes.
The text for the tag displays in the Text view.
This command does not change the current display setting of the tag itself (that is, Active
Only, All, or None).
See Also
Display All Tags (on page 312)
311
Display Only Active Tag

Tags > Display > Active Only
Changes the view settings to those associated with the tag that was last active. The text for the
tag displays in the Text view.
If you are in a shared environment, click Tools > Refresh Data to see the tags initiated by
other team members using the same session.
You can also display only the active tag by clicking View > Settings and then, in the
Options section on the Display tab, clicking both the All tags and Active tag only options.
See Also
Display All Tags

Tags > Display > All
Allows you to display all the tags in the view.
You must have tag display turned on to use the All command.
The Display All Tags command allows you to display all the tags in the view.
You can also display all tags by clicking View > Settings and then, in the Options section
on the Display tab, clicking the All tags option.
If you are in a shared environment, click Tools > Refresh Data to see the tags initiated by
other team members using the same session.
See Also
Turn Off Tag Display

Tags > Display > None
Allows you to turn off the display of tags in the model.
The Display Tags > None command allows you to turn off the display of tags in the model.
You can turn off the display of tags by clicking View > Settings and then, in the Options
section on the Display tab, unselecting the All tags option.
See Also
312
Display Tag Action Comments

Tags > Display > Action Comments
Allows you to display the action comments for the current tag. An action comment is information
associated with a tag and is created using a plant design product. You can incorporate action
comments into a SmartPlant Review project by importing TAG files.
See Also
Import Tags
File > Import > Tags
Allows you to import tags from an ASCII TAG file or a database file (MDB). The ASCII file allows
you to use other Intergraph products to review and comment on tags placed in SmartPlant
Review files. Any comments you make using these other products are written back to the same
ASCII file. You can then import the modified ASCII file into SmartPlant Review and display the
comments made using the other products.
The import operation will not succeed if the sending database does not have the
SmartPlant Review 5.0 or later format. The sending database must be upgraded to this format
prior to importing from it.
You can import tags from an ASCII TAG file or a database file (MDB). The ASCII file allows
you to use other Intergraph products to review and comment on tags placed in SmartPlant
Review files. Any comments you make using these other products are written back to the
same ASCII file. You can then import the modified ASCII file into SmartPlant Review and
display the comments made using the other products.
Importing tags from a database file (MDB) allows you to optionally overwrite like-numbered
tags or append tags to the current project data. Importing from a TAG file replaces all of the
tag data in the current project with data found in the TAG file.
data.
See Also
Import Tags with Attributes and Symbology (on page 314)
313
Import Tags with Attributes and Symbology

This workflow describes two simultaneous edit sessions of the same original project using
duplicate databases. The two edit sessions then combine the edit session data to provide a
single valid project.
1. Create a new project. For the rest of this example, this new project will be referred to as the
original project.
2. Place a tag with the following attributes:
Text = Example workflow tag Original 1
Creator = User
Discipline = Engineer
Background = orange
3. Save all the tag Attributes and Symbology values as defaults by clicking the Save as
Defaults button on their respective tabs.
4. Place another tag with the following attributes:
Text = Example workflow tag Original 2
5. Save and copy the project database to a different folder so that you can edit it later to
simulate parallel edit sessions.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
314
In a real world scenario, you might copy the project to two different locations for parallel
reviewing and editing. For the purposes of this example, leave the database as it is and
simulate a separate tag edit session using the attributes of the tags.
The current project database can now be thought of as project one.
Place another tag with the following attributes:
Text = Example workflow tag Project 1-1
Discipline = Scheduling
Background = blue
Save all the tag Attributes and Symbology values as defaults by clicking the Save as
Save and copy this project database to a folder different than the one used previously for
saving the original project database.
Exit the project.
Replace the current project database with the first database saved after original tags were
added.
The project can now be thought of as project two.
Open the project.
Text = Example workflow tag Project 2-1
Discipline = Inspector
Background = green
Save all the tag Attributes and Symbology values as defaults by clicking the Save as
Text = Example workflow tag Project 2-2.

15. Import the following tag:
Click File > Import > Tags.
Select the second saved database file that represented project two tags.
Select the tag with Project 1-1 in its text field.
Verify that the tag append and renumbering check box is set in the Import dialog box.
Click Import.
Click Close.
The imported tag will become the highest numbered tag during the renumbering import.
See Also
Export Tags
File > Export > Tags
Writes the tag information in the current database to another project database or TAG file.
When exporting tags to a database file (MDB), the tags from the current database maintain
their same numbering. In the instance where like-numbered tags exist in both databases, the
software allows you to optionally overwrite tags in the receiving database. Otherwise, the
tags from the current database are merged with the tags in the receiving database. There is
no option to append exported tags to the existing tags in the receiving database.
Exporting to a TAG file replaces all of the tag data in the TAG file with data found in the
current project.
The export operation will not succeed if the target database does not have the SmartPlant
Review 5.0 format. The target database must be upgraded to this format prior to exporting to
it.
The TAG file format has not changed. None of the new attribute data supported in a
SmartPlant Review 5.0 project is written during an export to a TAG file.
data.
See Also
315
316
SECTION 24
Placing Data Annotations

Data Annotation allows you to select virtually any data file using Windows Explorer, and drag it
onto your model. Double-click the data annotation icon to display the file contents. You can also
place a leader line and attach the file to an object. For example, you can drag and drop a
spreadsheet, a word processing file, or an HTML document into your model.
Create a Data Annotation (on page 317)

Edit a Data Annotation (on page 318)
Edit a Data Annotation Position (on page 321)
Delete One Data Annotation (on page 322)
Delete All Data Annotations (on page 322)
Create a Data Annotation

1. Open Windows Explorer.
2. Drag a file from Explorer to the Main view. When the cursor changes to a document icon
with a plus (+) sign, drop the file on the object that you want to annotate.
3. Click the object to select the anchor point for the leader line, and click again to accept.
4. Move the cursor to the position where you want the data annotation to appear.
5. Click to place the annotation.
To place a data annotation without a leader line, right-click when prompted to place a leader
line. Then left-click. The data annotation appears without a leader line.
Make sure View > Settings > Data is selected to display data annotations.
See Also
317
Edit a Data Annotation

Tools > Data Annotation > Edit
Allows you to edit the selected data annotation.
1. Click Tools > Data Annotation > Edit.
Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box (on page 318)
2. Click the data annotation in the Main view that you want to edit.
3. Click to accept the data annotation that you selected.
4. Edit the Target file.
5. Select an Optional Viewer.
6. Select an Optional start in folder.
7. Select Show Icon background.
See Also
Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box

Allows you to change the document properties of the active data annotation, such as the target,
and program that opens the annotation. You also can add and change the background color of
the data annotation icon to make its appearance more apparent.
The Position tab on the Data Annotation Properties dialog box allows you to change the
location of the data annotation by changing the North, East, and Elevation values. You also
can use the Pick Point feature to define a point in the model and change the position of the
data annotation.
This dialog box also enables you to change the leader line attributes, such as color, location,
and arrowheads at the end of leader lines. You can also toggle the display of the leader lines on
or off.
See Also
File Tab (Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box) (on page 319)
Position Tab (Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box) (on page 320)
318
File Tab (Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box)

Allows you to change the document properties of the active data annotation, such as the target
and program that opens it. You can also make the data annotation's appearance more apparent
by editing the background color.
Target - Allows you to type a path or Browse to the file that you want to place as a data
annotation in the drawing.
Optional viewer - Displays the name of the optional executable to associate with a data
annotation. You also can use the Browse button to navigate to the program that you want to
use.
Optional start in - Allows you to type a path or Browse for a folder in which to open the
annotation object. If this box has no information, the software uses the current folder.
Show - Displays a solid color, rectangular background behind the annotation icon.
Color - Displays the optional solid background color for the annotation icon.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to set the optional solid background color
for the data annotation icon.
See Also
Placing Data Annotations (on page 317)
Edit a Data Annotation (on page 318)
319
Position Tab (Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box)

Allows you to change the location of the data annotation by changing the North, East, and
Elevation values. You also can reposition the data annotation by manually defining a three
dimensional point.
In addition, the Position tab allows you to change the attributes of a leader line. These
attributes include color, location, and arrowheads at the end of leader lines. You also can toggle
the leader line display on and off.
Annotation
North - Sets the north coordinate of the annotation position.
East - Sets the east coordinate of the annotation position.
Elevation - Sets the elevation coordinate of the annotation position.
Leader line
Pick Point - Allows you to set the annotation position by placing a 3D point in the Main view.
Activate - Starts or stops the display of the leader line for a selected data annotation.
Arrowhead - Allows you to use arrowheads with leader lines for the selected data annotation.
Color - Displays the color for the annotation leader line.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to select a color for the leader line.
North - Sets the north coordinate of the leader line point.
East - Sets the east coordinate of the leader line point.
Elevation - Sets the elevation coordinate of the leader line point.
Pick Point - Allows you to set the leader line position by placing a 3D point in the Main view.
320

See Also
Edit a Data Annotation Position

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Tools > Data Annotation > Edit.

Identify the data annotation that you want to edit.
Click to accept the data annotation that you selected.
Click the Position tab.
Edit the annotation location using the North, East, and Elevation fields.
You also can click Pick Point, which allows you to select the 3D point for the
annotation directly in the model.
6. Edit the Leader Line options as needed.
Use the Position tab to edit the location of the data annotation icon in the model, and to
edit the leader line color and other properties.
See Also
Display Data Annotations

Tools > Data Annotation > Display
Turns on or turns off the display of data annotations.
1. Click Tools > Data Annotation > Display.
2. Do one of the following:
Click Off to turn off display of all data annotations
Click On to turn on display of the data annotations.
The View > Display > Annotations command controls the display of all annotations,
regardless of the program that created them. The Tools > Data Annotation > Display
command controls only annotations created by the Data Annotations command. For data
annotations to display, you must turn on both the View > Display > Annotations and the Tools
> Data Annotation > Display commands.
See Also
321
Delete One Data Annotation

Tools > Data Annotation > Delete One
Deletes one selected data annotation from the current project.
See Also
Delete All Data Annotations

Tools > Data Annotation > Delete All
Deletes all data annotations from the current project.
See Also
Delete One Data Annotation (on page 322)
322
SECTION 25
Placing Volume Annotations

To use this functionality, you must install the Construction module.
The Volume Annotation command allow you to place certain types of geometry in a model.
Volume annotations can be of three basic geometric types:
boxes
cylinders
spheres
SmartPlant Review also provides three additional special types of volume annotations:
scaffolds (boxes)
field welds (cylinders)
clipping volumes (boxes)
Volume annotations are saved in the SmartPlant Review project database. The original files are
not modified and the Volume Annotation data does not flow back to the PDS database or
software.
You can use volume annotations as a very powerful planning and tracking tool.
Scaffolds are frequently built, used, knocked down and rebuilt as needed incurring
considerable expense for a construction project. You can use SmartPlant Review to track
scaffolding and help the planners and workers visualize where the scaffolds are and how
and when they can be used. Work requiring scaffolds can be planned around the scaffold
being present to reduce the need and cost associated with building, knocking down and
rebuilding the same scaffold an excessive number of times. Using volume annotations to
plan scaffolding work could result in considerable cost savings for a project. Work areas may
be designated and planned using boxes to indicate the size and importance of the work
area.
Cylinders may be used as cylindrical scaffolding or may be used in other ways. Welds may
be used to track field welds. Spheres may be used to designate work areas or for any other
use where a spherical shape would be appropriate.
Clipping volumes let you isolate and view portions of a model. The clipping volume is a box
that you can place anywhere inside a model just like the other volume annotation box
shapes like scaffold and box. For more information, see Working with Clipping Volumes (on
page 339).
The following examples show cylinder, scaffold, and sphere volume annotations. Box and weld
are just different categories for scaffold (box) and cylinder (weld) types. The types allow you to
place, edit, delete and manage different kinds of volume annotations and use them in different
ways appropriate to their application.
323
You can use volume annotations to represent both temporary and permanent areas or objects in
the model. Temporary items like construction scaffolds and construction parking lots may be
placed in the model for construction work planning. Field welds may be identified and marked for
tracking and testing purposes. Special security areas, work areas or construction lay down yards
may also be identified using volume annotations.
324
Display Volume Annotations (on page 325)

Place a Volume Annotation (on page 325)
Create a New Volume Annotation Category (on page 327)
Find a Volume Annotation (on page 327)
Edit Volume Annotations (on page 328)
Inactivate a Volume Annotation Category (on page 327)
Adjust a Volume Annotation (on page 333)
Delete a Single Volume Annotation (on page 336)
Delete All Volume Annotations (on page 337)
Import Volume Annotations (on page 337)
Export Volume Annotations (on page 338)
Display Volume Annotations

Tools > Volume Annotation > Display
Starts or stops the display of volume annotations. The Annotations command on the View >
Display menu is a global toggle. It controls the display of all annotations, regardless of the
program that created them. The Tools > Volume Annotation > Display command controls only
annotations created by the Volume Annotation command.
To use this functionality, you must first install the Construction module.
Place a Volume Annotation

Tools > Volume Annotation > Place
Allows you to place a new volume annotation.
1. Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Place.
The specific Place command depends on the last volume annotation type that you
placed. For example, if the last volume annotation that you placed was a scaffold, the
command will be Place Scaffold.
You can use only the Main view for placing volume annotations, but using the Plan and
Elevation views can also provide more visual feedback and extra locate options.
You may also find it useful to manipulate the Main view throughout the volume
annotation placement. Different view orientations can be beneficial for different steps.
SmartPlant Review disables the interactive mouse drag motion and accelerator key
commands, but all menu commands, toolbar commands, and view manipulation
controls remain available. The Common Views toolbar can be particularly helpful, for
example.
2. Click the object with which you want to associate the annotation.
If you want to place the volume annotation in space, press ESC to not locate an object.
If you select an object, the position, dimensions, and orientation of that object can
determine the volume annotation's position, dimensions, and orientation.
If you do not select an object, the position of the annotation defaults to the center point
of the Main view.
If you do not select an object, the orientation defaults to none. The exception to this rule
is cylinders. For cylinders, the orientation defaults to the orientation of the Main view.
Because of this, you should set up the Main view to the appropriate orientation before
you place cylindrical volume annotations.
If you select a volume as the object with which you want to associate the annotation,
SmartPlant Review copies all of the attributes of the selected volume to the new
volume.
3. If you selected an object, click to accept the highlighted object.
4. Select the first point of the volume.
For box, scaffolding, and clipping volume types, select an object to position the first
corner point of the box volume on the surface point of the object.
325
For cylinder and weld volume types, select the point that you want to function as the
center of the cylinder.
For sphere volume types, select the point that you want to function as the center point of
the sphere. SmartPlant Review places this point at the current model view depth.
Double-click to locate a surface point on an object. If there are multiple objects under
your cursor, click to cycle through the available options. Click again to accept the object
and its surface point. SmartPlant Review positions the volume at the surface point of the
object that you selected.
Double right-click in one view (for example, Plan view) and then click on the bore-site
line in an orthogonal view (for example Elevation). SmartPlant Review positions the
volume at the intersection of the bore-sight line and the cursor position.
Press ESC to complete the placement process with the current default volume position,
dimensions, and orientation.
Right click to back up one step in the placement process.
5. Determine the size of the volume.
For box, scaffolding, and clipping volume types, select the position of the second corner
of the box volume to the current cursor location at the current model view depth. This
defines the height, width, and depth dimensions of the volume.
For cylinder, weld, and sphere volume types, select the position of the radius for the
cylinder or sphere. This radius is at the current model view depth.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
A white wireframe representation of the volume tracks the current size. The current
model view depth for the cursor is determined by the volume position.
The volume size for the current cursor location displays in the status bar. For box
volumes, these dimensions represent depth, width, and height. For cylinder or sphere
volumes, these dimensions represent the radius.
If you are placing cylinder or weld volume types, place a point to determine the orientation
and length of the volume.
If necessary, select any yellow highlighted part of the volume glyph to enter the adjustment
mode.
To create a new volume annotation after editing an existing volume annotation, click Clear
first.
If you are creating a new volume, the Volume Annotation dialog box will automatically
display if the Automatically edit new volume check box on the Volume Annotation
Dimensions and Options tab is turned on. If this option is turned off, you can use the
Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit command to the volume annotation.
If cylinder volume annotations display as triangles, increase the stroking tolerance for the
view.
See Also
Find a Volume Annotation (on page 327)
326
Create a New Volume Annotation Category

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit.

Click the Definition tab.
Click Edit.
Type a name for the new category.
Click Add.
See Also
Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box (on page 338)
Edit Categories Dialog Box (on page 330)
Find a Volume Annotation

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select the volume annotation that you want to find from the list.
Click Find.
SmartPlant Review fits the volume annotation in the Main view.
See Also
Delete a Single Volume Annotation (on page 336)
Inactivate a Volume Annotation Category

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Click Edit.
Select the category that you want to deactivate from the list.
Click Inactivate.
SmartPlant Review marks the category as inactive in the database but it is not deleted from
the database. Other records may still be using the inactivated category and require the
category record be maintained in the database.
See Also
327
Edit Volume Annotations

Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit
Displays the Edit Volume Annotations dialog box, which allows you to review, edit, and create
volume annotations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Edit Volume Annotations Dialog Box (on page 328)
Select the volume annotation that you want to change from the list.
Make the changes to meet your needs.
Click Apply.
See Also
Edit Volume Annotations Dialog Box

Allows you to review, edit, and create volume annotations. Volume annotations can be of three
basic geometric types: boxes, cylinders, or spheres. Three additional special types are also
provided: scaffolds (boxes), field welds (cylinders) and clipping volumes (boxes). The volume
annotations are saved in the SmartPlant Review project database. The original project files are
not modified. The Volume Annotation data does not go back to the PDS database or any other
software.
Volume annotations can be used to represent temporary and permanent areas or objects in the
model. Temporary items like construction scaffolds and construction parking lots can be placed
in the model for construction work planning. Field welds can be marked for tracking and testing
purposes. Special security areas, work areas or construction lay down yards also can be
identified using volume annotations.
See Also
Definition Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box) (on page 329)
Style Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box) (on page 330)
Dimensions and Options Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box) (on page 332)
328
Definition Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box)

Defines the volume annotation.
Type - Allows you to pick one of the volume annotation types.
Name - Displays the name of the volume annotation.

Description - Displays the description associated with the volume annotation.
Status - Displays the status associated with the volume annotation.
Category - Displays the category associated with the volume annotation.
Place - Places the volume annotation in the project.
Clear - Removes any text from the Name, Description, Status, and Category fields.
Edit - Displays the Edit Categories dialog box so that you can add to or delete from the list of
available categories.
Volumes - Displays all the volume annotations of the selected type currently defined in the
project. You can sort the list by one of the categories by clicking that category heading.
Find - Fits and displays the selected volume annotation in the Main window.
Delete - Removes the selected volume annotation from the project.
Delete All - Removes all volume annotations from the project.
Clip Volume - Loads a clipping volume for the selected volume annotation.
329

See Also
Edit Categories Dialog Box

Allows you to add or remove volume annotation categories.
New Name - Specifies the name for the new volume annotation category that you want to add.
Add - Includes the new category name in the list of available categories.
Categories Names - Provides a list of available category names.
Inactivate - Removes the selected category name from the list, and marks that category name
as inactive in the project database.
See Also
Placing Volume Annotations (on page 323)
Style Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box)

Defines the look of the volume annotation.
Volume name - Displays the name of the active volume annotation.
On - Displays the volume annotation in the project.

Shaded - Shades the volume annotation.
330

Transparent when shaded - Sets the shaded volume annotation to be transparent so that you
can see the objects within the volume.
Width - Specifies the width of the lines for the wireframe.

Solid - Specifies a solid line for the wireframe.
Dash - Specifies a dashed line for the wireframe.
Dot-dash - Specifies a dot-dash line for the wireframe.
Dot - Specifies a dotted line for the wireframe.
Color - Displays the color associated with the volume annotation.

Edit - Displays the Color dialog box from which you can select a color to associate with the
volume annotation.
File number - Displays the default volume annotation file number.
Level index from 1 to - Specifies the upper range of levels. The level index can be from 1 to
63.
Color index from 0 to - Specifies the upper range of colors. The color index can be from 0 to
255
If you change the color of a volume annotation on a given level and color, you will change
the color of all the volume annotations and optional lights that are assigned to that level and
color. When you change the color of a volume annotation, select the level and color for the
volume annotation first.
See Also
331
Dimensions and Options Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog

Box)
Defines the look of the size, location, and placement options for the volume annotation.
Volume name - Displays the name of the active volume annotation.
Origin point
North - Displays the distance from the project origin in the North (Y) direction.
East - Displays the distance from the project origin in the East (X) direction.
Elevation - Displays the distance from the project origin in the Elevation (Z) direction.
Size
Metric units - Specifies the unit type for the volume annotation. If this option is turned off, the
units are English.
Units - Displays the master unit associated with the volume annotation. The value in this field
depends on whether the Metric units option is turned off or on.
Width - Displays the width (dimension in the X direction) of the volume annotation.
Depth - Displays the depth (dimension in the Y direction) of the volume annotation.
332

Height - Displays the height (dimension in the Z direction) of the volume annotation.
Radius - Displays the radius of the volume annotation.
Length - Displays the length of the volume annotation.
Placement options
Place with dialog dimensions - Places new volume annotations using the dimensions on this
dialog box rather than calculating dimensions based on data points that you place in the project.
Automatically edit new volume - Automatically opens the Volume Annotation dialog box
when you place a new volume annotation.
See Also
Adjust a Volume Annotation

Tools > Volume Annotation > Adjust
Allows you to change the physical location, dimensions, or orientation of the selected volume
annotation. You can adjust the volume at the end of the placement operation, or you can select
a volume in the model and adjust it.
1. Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Adjust.
2. Select the volume annotation that you want to change.
3. Click to accept the highlighted volume.
4. Select any yellow highlighted part of the volume glyph to enter the adjustment mode.
Pres ESC to cancel any placements or adjustments done during the command.
You can right click to back up to the last placement step for the volume or to adjust a volume
using the following steps. If the Place with dialog dimensions options on the Dimensions
and Options tab of the Volume Annotation dialog box is turned on, then you can right click
to set the volume to the default dimensions.
Position
You can adjust the position of a volume using the following steps:
1. Select the starting point.
2. For scaffold, box and clipping volume types, select any yellow highlighted edge of the
volume glyph to position the anchor point of the box volume.
For cylinder and weld types, select any yellow highlighted straight edge of the volume
glyph to position the start center point of the cylinder volume.
For sphere types, select any yellow highlighted face of the volume glyph to position the
center point of the sphere volume.
Click to place the current volume point at the current model view depth.
Double-click to locate an object and its surface point. If there are multiple objects under
the cursor, click to cycle through the available options and right click when the one that
you want to use is highlighted. Click again to accept the selected object and its surface
333
point. The current volume point will be positioned at the surface point of the selected
object.
Double-right-click at the location in one view (for example, Plan). Then, select the
bore-sight line in an orthogonal view (for example, Elevation). The current volume point
will be positioned precisely at the intersection of the bore-sight line and the cursor
position.
Right click to back up to the last placement step.
Press ESC to either complete the placement process when placing a volume or to
cancel all adjustments so far when in the Tools > Volume Annotation > Adjust
command.
A white wire frame glyph representing the volume will show the current position.
The current model view depth for the left mouse click is determined by the volume position.
Thus, to locate to the same elevation, the Main view should be in a Top orientation.
The model coordinate for the current mouse position is displayed in the status bar N, E, and
El panes.
If the Motion > Mouse Drag Modes > Lock Elevation command option is on, then the
elevation of the volume cannot be changed using a single click.
Face
You can adjust a face of a scaffold, box, clipping volume, cylinder, and weld volume types using
the following steps:
1. Select any yellow highlighted face of the volume glyph to select that face for adjustment.
The selected face will be highlighted in red.
Select the new position for the current face. SmartPlant Review places this point at the
current model view depth.
point. The current volume face will be positioned relative to the surface point of the
selected object.
3. Double right-click at the location in one view (for example, Plan). Then, select the bore-sight
line in an orthogonal view (for example, Elevation). The current volume face will be
positioned relative to the intersection of the bore- sight line and the mouse position.
4. Right click to cancel the adjustment in progress while staying in the adjustment selection
mode.
5. Press ESC key to either complete the placement process when placing a volume or to
cancel all adjustments so far when in the Tools > Volume Annotation > Adjust command.
334
A white wire frame glyph representing the volume will show the current face adjustment.
If you cannot select the face that you want to adjust because it is behind another face,
simply orient the view so the correct face is in front.
The current model view depth for the left mouse click is determined by the center of the
current face position. Thus, to locate to the same elevation, the Main view should be in a
Top orientation.
The sizing for the current mouse position is displayed in the status bar N, E, and El
information panes. For box volumes, these panes represent the depth, width, and height
dimensions. For cylinder volumes, these panes represent the length dimension.
If the cylinder volume has been reoriented (rotated), then it may be temporary un- oriented
(un-rotated) during the face adjustment process.
The face adjustment is automatically prevented from allowing a dimension of zero by either
snapping back to the starting dimensions or adjusting the opposite face to compensate.
Radius
You can adjust the radius of the cylinder, weld and sphere volume types using the following
steps:
1. Select any yellow highlighted face cross brace of the volume glyph to select the radius value
for adjustment. The cross braces will be highlighted in red.
Click to position the radius of the cylinder or sphere volume relative to the current cursor
position at the current model view depth.
point. The volume will be sized to the surface point of the selected object.
Double right-click at the location in one view (for example, Plan). Then, select the
bore-sight line in an orthogonal view (for example, Elevation). The volume will be sized
precisely to the intersection of the bore-sight line and the mouse position.
Right click to cancel the adjustment in progress while staying in the adjustment selection
mode.
command
A white wire frame representational glyph of the volume will track the current sizing.
The current model view depth for the left mouse click is determined by the volume position.
Thus, to locate to the same elevation, the Main view should be in a Top orientation.
The radius for the current cursor position is displayed in the status bar N, E and El
information panes.
The radius adjustment is automatically prevented from allowing a radius of zero by snapping
back to the starting radius.
Orientation
You adjust the orientation (rotation) of the scaffold, box, clipping volume, cylinder and weld
volume types using the following steps:
1. Select any yellow highlighted axis of the volume glyph to select the corresponding model
axis about which to orientate the volume. The selected axis will be highlighted in yellow. The
red axis allows the volume to be rotated around the model's X (or East) axis. The green axis
allows the volume to be rotated around the model's Y (or North) axis. The blue axis allows
the volume to be rotated around the model's Z (or Elevation) axis. All rotation is about the
current center point of the volume.
335
Click to orient the current axis of orientation relative to the current cursor position at the
current model view depth.
you want to use highlights. Click again to accept the selected object and its surface
point. The current axis of orientation will orient relative to the surface point of the
selected object.
Double right-click at the location in one view (for example, Plan). Then, select the
bore-sight line in an orthogonal view (for example, Elevation). The current axis of
orientation will orient relative to the intersection of the bore-sight line and the mouse
position.
Right click to cancel the adjustment in progress while staying in the adjustment selection
mode.
command.
A white wire frame representational glyph of the volume will track the current volume
orientation.
Because orientation is around the model axes, a view orientation that is perpendicular to the
axis of rotation is best suited for visual feedback. For example, the Top view when rotating
about the Z axis, the Front view when rotating about the Y axis, and the Right view when
rotating about the X axis.
The current model view depth for the click is determined by the center of the volume.
The orientation angles for the current cursor position are displayed in the status bar P, F,
and S information panes (Plan, Front, and Side).
To reset the orientation to an un-oriented position, right click to the last placement step.
See Also
Delete a Single Volume Annotation

Tools > Volume Annotation > Delete
Deletes the selected volume annotation from the current project.
1. Click Tools > Volume Annotation > Edit.
2. Click the Definition tab.
3. Select the volume annotation that you want to delete from the list.
4. Click Delete.
See Also
Delete All Volume Annotations (on page 337)
336
Delete All Volume Annotations

Tools > Volume Annotation > Delete All
Deletes all volume annotations from the current project. To use this functionality, you must first
install the Construction module.
3. Select the category of annotation that you want to delete from the list.
4. Click Delete All.
See Also
Export Volume Annotations Dialog Box (on page 339)
Import Volume Annotations

File > Import > Volume Annotations
Imports volume annotations from other project databases. To use this functionality, you must
first install the Construction module.
1. Click File > Import > Volume Annotations.
2. Type a File name or click Browse to locate the project file containing the volume
annotations you want to import.
3. Select the names of the volume annotations you want to import.
4. Click Import.
5. Click Close.
You can use the Select All button to select all the volume annotation sets in the file for
importing.
data.
See Also
337
Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box

Allows you to import volume annotations from other project databases.
File name - Specifies the name of the project database from which you want to import volume
annotations.
Import - Imports the selected volume annotations without closing the dialog box.
Select All - Selects all of the names in the list.
Clear All - Selects none of the names in the list.
See Also
Export Volume Annotations

File > Export > Volume Annotations
Exports volume annotations to another project database.
1. Click File > Export > Volume Annotations.
2. Type a File name or click Browse to locate the file.
3. Click each Name to select.
338
You can use the Select All button to select all the volume annotation sets in the file for
exporting.
data.
Working with Clipping Volumes

See Also
Export Volume Annotations Dialog Box (on page 339)
Export Volume Annotations Dialog Box

Allows you to export volume annotations to other project databases.
File name - Specifies the name of the project database to which you want to export volume
annotations.
Export - Exports the selected volume annotations without closing the dialog box.
Clear All - Selects none of the names in the list.
See Also

Clipping volumes let you isolate and view portions of a model. The clipping volume is a box that
you can place anywhere inside a model just like the other volume annotation box shapes like
scaffold and box. You can draw the clipping volume itself as a visible piece of geometry for ease
in placement and editing. You can turn off the clipping volume's geometry while the view clipping
display is still active for a cleaner clipped display.
SmartPlant Review provides both the classic clipping volume functionality and an interactive 3D
clipping volume wireframe, which can be manipulated by simply using your mouse to adjust the
size of the clipping volume.
Classic vs. 3D Clipping Volume

The following summarizes the main differences between the classic method and the 3D method
for clipping volumes.
339

Classic - For experienced SmartPlant Review users, the workflow to set clipping volumes
defined by clipping volume annotations is basically unchanged. To be able to perform the
display, placement, and modification of clipping volumes using volume annotations, you must
have the Construction module.
3D - For users wanting to quickly create a clipping volume, the 3D method provides a wireframe
box you can manipulate to encompass objects you want to display. No additional modules are
required. The size and placement of the clipping volume is not as accurate as when you use
commands available in the classic method.
Activate/Deactivate Clipping Volume (on page 340)

Use Clipping Volume (3D Wireframe Box) (on page 342)
Use Classic Clipping Volume (on page 347)
Activate/Deactivate Clipping Volume

View > Display > Activate Clipping Volume
Toggles the display of a loaded clipping volume. This command is always enabled at the start of
a work session and works with both the quick 3D and the classic clipping volume methods. So
the clipping volume that is activated by this command depends on the method you used. When
toggled off, the entire model is visible.
The table below describes the action of the Activate Clipping Volume command when one or
both methods are used to create a clipping volume.
340
Clip Volume
Annotation(s)
Defined
3D
Clipping
Volume
Activate Clipping Volume Command
Wireframe does....
Yes
No
Toggle on/off the currently-defined clipping

volume as defined by the selected clipping
volume annotation. See Edit Volume
Annotations (on page 328).
No
Yes
Toggle on/off the clipping volume defined

using the 3D wireframe box.
Yes
Yes
Toggle on/off the currently-defined clipping

volume as defined by the selected clipping
volume annotation.

No
No
Toggle on/off a default clipping volume

defined in the following ways:
1. The range of the selected display sets in
the Project Manager.
2. Otherwise, the clipping volume is defined
by the visible range of the
currently-highlighted object.
3. Finally, the clipping volume is defined using
half the currently- visible range of the model in
the main window.
The first column, Clip Volume Annotation(s) Defined, means that the classic method was
used to create clipping volume annotations. The column, 3D Clipping Volume Wireframe,
means a clipping volume has been set using the 3D wireframe box. The last column describes
the resulting action performed by the Activate Clipping Volume command. For example, the
last row of the table describes the case where no clipping has been set using either method.
SmartPlant Review generates a clipping volume based on three sequential options.
The following snapshots illustrate how this command affects the model display.
Clipping volume off:
Clipping volume off, but shown:
Clipping volume activated:
341
Use Clipping Volume (3D Wireframe Box)

A clipping volume in SmartPlant Review is a 3D wireframe box that can be manipulated to limit
the objects that can be seen in a view. The Clip Volume command displays the clip volume box
in the model along with the Clip Volume dialog box that lets you select which clipping plane
face(s) are being adjusted. The size or range of the clipping volume depends on the number of
objects that you have selected in the model. If there are no selected objects, the clipping volume
defaults to half of the total size of the loaded model. When clipping is turned on in the Clip
Volume dialog box, SmartPlant Review displays only the objects within the wireframe clip
volume box.
Clip Volume Wireframe

The clip volume wireframe is a 3D wireframe box that overlays the model and is used to set the
clipping volume. You can edit the size of the clip volume wireframe to limit the objects that can
be seen in a view. The Clip Volume dialog box provides the controls for manipulating the size of
the clipping volume as well as turning clipping on and off. When clipping is on, SmartPlant
Review displays only the objects within the clip volume wireframe.
Clipping Off:
Clipping On:
Things to Know
342
The clip volume wireframe cannot be extended beyond the current model range. In addition,
the clipping volume cannot be reduced to the point where there is no width, height, or depth.
The clip volume wireframe only displays when the Clip Volume command is enabled. When
the Clip Volume dialog box is closed, the clip volume box is dismissed.
If the Clipping Control is enabled when the Clip Volume dialog box is closed, clipping
volume remains on.
For more precise control when resizing the clip volume wireframe, click the slider in the Clip
Volume dialog box and then use the mouse wheel, the Up/Down arrow keys, or the
PgUp/PgDn keys to adjust the clipping volume. The Up/Down arrow keys move the clip
volume wireframe in small increments while the PgUp/PgDn keys move the box in larger
increments.
Click the slider and then press the Home key to move the slider bar to the top, and expand
the clip volume wireframe. Click the slider and then press the End key to move the slider bar
to the bottom and reduce the clip volume wireframe.
If the slider is at its limits (top or bottom position), click again on the desired face or faces
being adjusted to reset the slider position to the middle. The slider can only expand the
selected clipping volume face(s) to double the initial amount from its starting middle position.
The solid red line on the clip volume wireframe indicates the plane face(s) being adjusted. A
solid yellow line indicates the face(s) that are not moving.
The number of objects selected in the model when you click Clip Volume determines the
size of the clip volume box. If one object is selected, the clip volume wireframe displays
surrounding that object. If multiple objects are selected, the clip volume wireframe covers the
area to surround all the selected objects. If no objects are selected, the clip volume
wireframe is placed in the center of the model.
You can use Clip Volume in conjunction with Common Views to synchronize the
orientation of the model and the clip volume box. When you use the Common Views dialog
box to select a view orientation, you can then open the Clip Volume dialog box, which will
have the same view orientation selected.
To expand plane face(s) to more than twice the distance, select the same plane face(s) in
the Clip Volume dialog box again.
Clip Volume Dialog Box

Provides a graphical display and controls to set and modify the clip volume box size, and turn
clipping on and off. For ease of use, the three-dimensional box in the Clip Volume dialog box is
similar to the one used in the SmartPlant Review Common Views dialog box. The Clip Volume
dialog box can be moved anywhere in or out of the display window.
Clip Volume Wireframe - Supports the following operations:
343
Click one of the eight corner circles to set the volume plane faces that you want to use in
resizing the clipping volume.
Click one of the six faces of the volume box you want to use in resizing the clipping volume.
In addition, you can click one of the arrows to select the Bottom, Back, or Right face of
the clip volume box.
If you click in the gray area of the dialog box outside the volume box, all faces of the clip
volume box are adjusted simultaneously.
In the example below, the Top Front Left corner is selected. This selection causes the
corresponding clip volume box to highlight (solid red lines) the faces that will move when
you use the slider.
The clipping plane face(s) not being adjusted display as solid yellow lines.
The clipping plane face(s) that are being adjusted display as solid red lines.
Make sure your background color is not set to red or yellow so that you can see the clip
volume lines.
Clip Volume Adjustment Slider - Dynamically changes the extent of the clipping volume. Move
the slider up to expand the side up to twice its original size. Move the slider down to shorten the
side to half its original size.
Clipping Control
- Turns clipping on or off. When the icon is pressed, clipping has been
enabled and all objects outside of the clipping volume clip are not displayed in the view.
Closing the Clip Volume dialog box does not turn off volume clipping if the Clipping
Control is enabled.
Clip Volume Wireframe Face Selection - Provides an alternate way of selecting plane faces in
the volume box. Use the drop-down menu to select the plane face(s) that you want.
344
Set a Clipping Volume

Before you begin, review the setup tips below to make the clipping operations easier.
Select the graphic objects or display sets that you want to work with. The clip volume
wireframe defaults to the volume that covers all the selected items. If there are no selected
items, the clip volume wireframe defaults to half the volume of the currently-visible model.
Use the Common Views dialog box to select a view orientation. The Clip Volume dialog
box opens to have the same view orientation. This helps orient you when adjusting the clip
volume wireframe.
When a clip volume is active, the model Fit commands and functionality are always fit to the
clip volume range.
1. From your 3D model view, click Clip Volume
A clip volume wireframe displays surrounding any selected objects.

If no objects are selected, the clip volume wireframe is placed around the center of
the entire dataset range.
2. From the Clip Volume dialog box, select the face or corner (faces) that you want to size.
The example below shows the Top Front Right plane faces have been selected.
3. Click and drag the slider up to increase the clip volume wireframe size, or down to reduce
the size as needed. The example below shows the Top Front Right plane faces being
expanded.
For more precise control when resizing the clip volume box, click the slider in the Clip
Volume dialog box and then use the mouse wheel, the Up/Down arrow keys, or the
PgUp/PgDn keys to adjust the clipping volume. The Up/Down arrow keys move the clip
volume box in small increments while the PgUp/PgDn keys move the box in larger
increments.
Click the slider, and then press the Home key to expand the clip volume wireframe to
the current maximum for the current selected face(s) being adjusted. Click the slider
and then press the End key to minimize the clip volume wireframe for the current
selected face(s) being adjusted.
If the slider is at its limits (top or bottom position), click again on the desired face or
faces being adjusted to reset the slider position to the middle. The slider can only
expand the selected clipping volume face(s) to double the amount from the initial middle
position.
The selected face(s) being adjusted display in red in the clip volume wireframe. The
unselected face(s) not being adjusted display in yellow.
345

4. When the clipping volume is at the required size and location, click Clipping Control
the Clip Volume dialog box. All objects that are not in the clip volume wireframe are
removed from the display, as shown in the example below.
Clipping Off:
Clipping On:
in
You can perform a zoom or fit to get closer to the displayed objects and continue your work.
Selecting the Fit command automatically takes you to a fitted view of the selected objects in
the view, if any. If no objects are selected, Fit takes you to a fitted view of the active clip
volume. If there is no active clip volume, Fit takes you to a fitted view of the entire model.
Turn Off Volume Clipping

To turn off 3D volume clipping functionality, click Clip Volume
Closing the Clip Volume dialog box does not turn off volume clipping.
346
Use Classic Clipping Volume

The classic method to set clipping volume involves creating clipping volume annotations and
then using the Activate Clipping Volume command to turn the display of the clipping volume
on and off. The steps below show you how to create, place and then turn clipping on and off.
3. Set the Type to clipping volume.
4. Type in a name for the clipping volume and click Apply.
5. Click Place in the Edit Volume Annotation dialog box.
The Edit Volume Annotation dialog box no longer displays.

6. Click the object in the main view with which you want to associate the clipping volume. If you
do not select an object, the position of the annotation defaults to the center point of the main
view.
Right click to back up one step in the placement process.
7. Click again to accept the object and its surface point. SmartPlant Review positions the
volume at the surface point of the object that you selected.
A clipping volume wireframe box displays.

8. Press ESC to accept the default location and size of the clipping volume box.
The system displays the Edit Volume Annotation dialog box.

9. In the Volumes section, select the clipping volume you just created and click the
Dimensions and Options tab. See Dimensions and Options Tab (Edit Volume Annotation
Dialog Box) (on page 332).
10. Use options in this tab to accurately set the location and size of the clipping volume box.
11. Click Apply when you have finished.
12. With the clipping volume still selected in the Volumes section, click Clip Volume. Only the
objects contained in the clipping volume box display.
13. Repeat steps 3-12 to create other clipping volumes.
To turn the clipping volume on and off, you can also click the Activate Clipping Volume
button or click View > Display > Activate Clipping Volume.
To use the quick 3D volume clipping method, see Use Clipping Volume (3D Wireframe Box)
(on page 342).
See Also
Definition Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box) (on page 329)
Style Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog Box) (on page 330)
347
348
SECTION 26
Attaching External Data

SmartPlant Review can display virtually any data attached to an object, including documents,
spreadsheets, text files, MicroStation files, sounds, and animation. SmartPlant Review uses the
Microsoft Jet database engine to store and manage the associations between SmartPlant
Review data and the external data.
The Get External Data commands allow you to create an attachment by associating objects in
a project to external information based on PDS label data. The Get External Data feature is
similar to Tools > Data Annotation. However, unlike data annotations that display icons in the
Main view, associated Get External Data applications result in entries on the Get External
Data menu. You can add, edit, or delete these menu entries. Any changes that you make are
written to the database file for your project.
Attaching a file to an attribute value of one element will automatically attach the file to every
element with the same attribute value.
Deleting a file that is attached to the attribute value of one element will automatically delete
that attachment from every element with the same attribute value.
About the External Database

The Get External Data functionality queries tables in a Microsoft Access database (.mdb file
extension) to manage the files and their associated applications that display as menu entries in
the Get External Data menu. See the Microsoft Access User's Guide for details on using the
database software.
If the database cannot be found, Get External Data functionality allows you to browse for an
existing file or it can create a new one for you. You can also tell Get External Data to look for
the database in another location by creating a text file named GetData.txt in the project folder
and setting the second line to the path and filename of the database. The path can be a UNC
path.
Your Get External Data database must contain the following three tables: CriteriaList,
MenuList, and DataTable.
You must name these tables exactly as shown.
For each of these tables, the column names can be changed, but must remain in the order
specified below.
349

CriteriaList
Use the Edit Attachments dialog box to add or edit

entries in this table. The table must contain the
following two columns:
ID - Contains a unique number that links the attribute
names in the Criteria column of this table to the
attribute values in the DataKey column of the
DataTable.
Criteria - Contains the attributes names. These
names populate the Match Criteria column on the
Edit Attachments dialog box. Attribute names must
be no longer than 50 characters.
MenuList
Use the Edit Types dialog box to add or edit entries in

this table. The table must contain the following four
columns:
DataType - Contains a unique number that links the
FileName column of this table with the FileName
column of the DataTable.
FileName - Specifies the type of data that is externally
attached to an attribute value. The ExecuteStr
column in this table uniquely associates these types
with the program. These types populate the Type
column in the Edit Attachment dialog box and appear
as entries in the Get External Data popup menu.
There is a 50 character maximum limit for this field.
ExecuteStr - Specifies the name and, optionally, the
location of the executables for each type of data in the
FileName column of this table. ExecuteStr can
contain any executable file type (for example, .EXE,
.COM, or .BAT). These program names populate the
Executable column on the Edit Type dialog box. If
the path to the program is not specified, the software
searches using the following sequence:
1. Project folder
2. Current folder
3. Windows folder
4. Windows System folder
5. All of the paths set in the Path environment variable
DefaultDir - (optional) Specifies the folder in which to
search for the external data file if there is no folder
specified in the Directory column in the Data Table.
350

DataTable
Use the Edit Attachments dialog box to add or edit

entries in this table. The table must contain the
following six columns:
ID - Contains a unique number used to index the
entries in this table.
Criteria - Contains a unique number that links the
attribute values in the DataKey column in this table
with the attribute names in the Criteria column of the
CriteriaList table.
DataKey - Contains the attribute values that have
external data attached to them. These values populate
the Match Criteria column on the Edit Attachments
dialog box. This field has a 255 character limit.
DataType - Contains a unique number that links the
FileName column in this table with the FileName
column (containing the data type) of the MenuList
table.
FileName - Specifies the name of the external data
file and serves as the argument to the program
specified in the ExecuteStr column in the MenuList
table. These external data files names populate the
Filename column on the Edit Attachments dialog
box and display on the Get External Data popup
menu.
If ExecuteStr specifies an executable (such as .EXE,
.COM, or .BAT), that executable is launched with
FileName as its argument. If ExecuteStr is set to
Default (which is an empty string) or does not point to
a valid executable, SmartPlant Review calls
ShellExecute, which finds the association for the
extension of FileName in the registry and launches
the Open command for that file association. For
example: if ExecuteStr contained Default and
FileName contained a .TXT file, the text file would be
opened using Notepad because the registry entry
".txt" is associated with the registry entry "txtfile" that
has a shell open command specifying notepad.exe as
the executable.
Directory - Specifies the location that Get External
Data first searches for the external data file specified
in FileName. If Directory is empty, then Get External
Data searches the specified folder for that external
file's data type in the DefaultDir column in the
MenuList table. If that text box is also empty, the
current working folder is used for the search. If the file
is still not found, a message will appear.
351

upgrade_version This table cannot be edited through the SmartPlant
Review user interface and should not be edited by the
user. It must contain the following columns:
schema_upgrade_version - Tracks the version of
the database schema.
schema_upgrade_date - Tracks the date of the
database schema.
Open an External Database (on page 352)

Edit Attachments (on page 352)
Edit Types (on page 356)
Open an External Database

Tools > Get External Data > Open Database
Allows you to open or create an external database, which allows you to attach data to objects in
the model. If your project is already pointing to an external database, this command shows any
database or .MDB file that exists in that directory. If there are no databases present, use this
command to actually create a new database by simply typing in a name in the Name field.
See Also
Attaching External Data (on page 349)
Edit Attachments
Tools > Get External Data > Edit Attachments
Displays the Edit Attachments dialog box, which allows you to add, edit, or remove files
associated with the selected object in the open project. Changes made using this command also
alter the entries on the Get External Data menu. The file associations are saved to the
Microsoft Access Get External Data database file for the project.
You can attach virtually any file type to an object in the project, such as Microsoft Word, Excel,
and PowerPoint files; ASCII text files from Notepad or from the SmartPlant Review text window;
MicroStation files, sound, animation, and Video Engine files. Executable files and their
associated files must exist before you attach them.
If you select an object in the project that contains no label data and no attached data, the Edit
Attachments button is disabled.
Attach External Data to a Project

1. Select a graphic object in the model.
2. Click Tools > Get External Data > Edit.
Edit Attachments Dialog Box (on page 354)
352

3. Click Insert on the Edit Attachments dialog box.
4. From the Match Criteria list, select the label data attribute to which the external data will be
attached.
5. From the Type list, select the file type for the attached data file.
6. On the Edit Filename / Argument dialog box, browse to the data file that you want to
attach. Be sure the file that you select is of the same type you specified in the preceding
step.
7. Specify any arguments for the data file in the Arguments box, and then click OK. The Edit
Attachments dialog box should now list the new attachment.
8. Click OK on the Edit Attachments dialog box. The Tools > Get External Data menu
should now show the new attachment type:
353
9. All objects in your drawing that contain the label data attribute that you selected (for
example, Sequence) set to the same value (in this example, Pumps) will have the same file
attached (in this example, Richfield.jpg).
See Also
Edit Attachments Dialog Box

Allows you to view a list of the files that are attached to the selected object in the project. You
can add or delete attachments using the commands on this dialog box. You can also associate
file types with executable programs.
Insert - Allows you to add additional files to the selected object. After selecting the appropriate
label data and entering a new or existing type, the Edit Filename / Argument dialog box
354

displays, allowing you to select a file name or argument for the new attachment. Double-click a
name in the Filename column to change the file name or arguments associated with an existing
attachment type.
Press Escape to exit the Insert command at any time.
Delete - Removes the link from the attribute value to the external data file, but does not delete
the external data file.
Edit Types - Displays the Edit Types dialog box, which allows you to define the application that
the Get External Data command uses to open files of the selected type.
See Also
Edit Filename / Argument Dialog Box

Allows you to select the data file that you want to attach to the selected object in the project.
Filename - Displays the name of the file attached to the selected object. If the type selection on
the Edit Attachments dialog box is Default, the file attached must be an executable (.EXE,
.BAT, or .COM).
Browse - Allows you to navigate to the file (or attachment) that you want to associate with the
object.
Argument(s) - Allows you to add text to the file name to act as an argument.
See Also
Edit Attachments Dialog Box (on page 354)
355
Edit Types
Tools > Get External Data > Edit Types
Displays the Edit Types dialog box, which allows you to define the application used to open files
of a selected type when using the Get External Data command. You can also use the Edit
Types dialog box to delete associations.
Add External Data Types

1. Click Tools > Get External Data > Edit Types.
2. Click the Insert button.
356

3. Select an executable from the Select Executable dialog box.
4. Select a folder from the Default Directory dialog box.
5. Select an existing type or select (Edit) and create a new type.

The name of the new type cannot be the same as one of the existing types.
Edit External Data Types

1. Click Tools > Get External Data > Edit Types.
2. Double-click an entry in the Type column to open the entry for editing.
357

3. Type a new Type name. In this example the Type name Spreadsheet is changed to Tank.
4. Click OK to accept the changes.

5. The Tools > Get External Data menu should now show the new attachment Type name.
To change the executable associated with a type in the Edit Types dialog box, double-click
an entry in the Executable column and select a new executable from the Select
Executable dialog box.
To change the default folder associated with a particular type, double-click an entry in the
Default Directory column on the Edit Types dialog box and select a new folder from the
Default Directory dialog box.
Edit Types Dialog Box

Allows you to associate file types with executable programs. You can also use this dialog box to
delete associations.
358

Insert - Allows you to create a new type. After selecting the executable from the Select
Executable dialog box, select the default folder and then enter the new type. You can exit the
Insert command prior to completion by pressing Escape. You must click OK for the addition to
be saved to the database.
Delete - Removes the selected type from use in the model. Any links that were established
between an object and its external data via this type will also be broken. You must click OK for
the deletion to be reflected in the database.
See Also
359
360
SECTION 27
Working with Materials

By assigning material properties to model elements, you can create photo-realistic renderings
with color and surface characteristics that match the real-world materials of the finished product.
SmartPlant Review provides an extensive set of material palette files, or you can create your
own materials interactively. You can preview the effect of several material properties including
diffuse and specular colors, normal and ambient reflectivity, transmittance, and refraction. In
addition, you can preview the effect of pattern maps without having to render an actual image.
You can choose a pattern, apply it to a material, and assign it to an element in the model.
As you make material assignments, SmartPlant Review creates a material table file for your
three-dimensional model. The material table contains all the information about the colors,
surface characteristics, and patterns assigned to model elements. The material table file is given
the model filename with a .MAT extension. For example, the model file xyz.dgn will have a
material table file named xyz.mat.
Default Material Palette

Delivered in the SmartPlant Review folder when you install the Photo-Realism module, the
SPRDefault.pal file contains a material definition named default. The default material in this file
can be used to specify the default material properties of elements without assigned materials.
The delivered default material has the look of non-reflective shiny plastic. This palette file is a
standard palette file and can be used as such. It also can be edited using a text editor outside
SmartPlant Review or by using the Edit Materials functionality.
You can now have a common SPRDefault.pal file to set the default material properties for all of
your projects. You also can place a different SPRDefault.pal file in different project folders and
each of those projects could have different default materials.
Because the SmartPlant Review folder is not included in your default palette search path, you
must copy or move the SPRDefault.pal file to your project folder or to a folder in your palette
search path before you can use the SPRDefault.pal file. If you do not want to use this file,
rename it (or its default material) or remove it from the palette search path. For more
information, see Search Path Dialog Box (on page 376).
If you do not have the Photo-Realism module, if the SPRDefault.pal file is not found in the
current palette search path, or if this file does not contain a material named default, then the
internally hard-coded default material is used for elements without assigned materials. This
hard-coded material has the look of non-reflective shiny plastic.
The default material for graphic elements without assigned materials is set only when the project
is opened or when you remove a material for that element. Thus, if you edit the SPRDefault.pal
file and its default material during a SmartPlant Review session, you should not expect to see
all the graphic elements without assigned materials to immediately update. You must either
reopen the project or manually remove materials for each graphic element.
If you have the SPRDefault.pal file in the current palette search path and it contains a material
named default, then those settings, except for color, are used for the default material.
The graphic element's default color is always retained, regardless of the color specified in the
default material in the SPRDefault.pal file. However, if you assign this default material to graphic
elements, then its color will override the graphic element's default color, just like when any other
material is assigned.
361

The Photo-Realism Raytracer uses the same default material properties as the shaded view.
This means that raytraces of elements with default materials assigned to them will look like a
"smoother" version of a fully shaded view.
You cannot change the material assignments in an existing .VUE file. If you open a .VUE file
and change any material settings during that session, you must create a new .VUE file in
order to retain the new settings. If you change the default material definition, then you must
manually remove the default material assignment from the graphic elements that you want to
use the modified default material so that those elements' material assignments will be
updated before the new .VUE file is created.
The default material is not an assigned material. For example, you will receive a message
stating No material assignment exists for this element if you pick a graphic element without
an assigned material and then try to view that element's material assignment in the Assign
Materials to Elements dialog box.
You will not be prompted to modify your palette search path if the SPRDefault.pal file is not
found while setting the default material.
Using this SPRDefault.pal file mechanism may add a very slight overhead to the total project
load time.

Unassign Materials (on page 365)
Edit Materials (on page 367)
Create Materials (on page 373)
Define Search Path for Material Files (on page 375)
Edit a Search Path (on page 375)
Assign Materials
Tools > Materials > Assign Materials
Displays the Assign Material to Elements dialog box allowing you to assign materials in a
palette file to elements in a model file. You can select materials from multiple palette files and
preview their display characteristics in the Material Sphere. You also can select model elements
by choosing the model filename and identifying the level and color of the element. In the
SmartPlant Review environment, you also can select elements by choosing them interactively
from the Main view window.
The following conditions must be met to assign materials to a model:
The material definitions in palette files that you want to assign to the model must already be
created and be in a folder in the search path for your project. For more information, see
Create Materials (on page 373) and Search Path Dialog Box (on page 376).
When you have built the three dimensional model, you must have used different levels and
colors to distinguish between the different surfaces in the model. As you assign materials to
the model, identify the model elements by specifying the color and level numbers used in the
model file. When you assign a material to a model surface, that material is applied to every
model element that is on the same level and color as that element. If every part of the model
362
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
is on one level and uses only one color, you can assign only one material definition to the
entire model.
If a material assignment is not made to a surface, SmartPlant Review uses the default
material value for that surface. For more information, see Working with Materials (on page
361).
Material assignments are not stored in the project database, but are kept in a MAT file. The
project database contains references to the material assignments stored in the MAT file. To
quickly delete these material assignments, delete the MAT file of the project.
Click Tools > Materials > Assign Materials.
Click Palette File.
Select the name of the palette file from the list of available palettes.
Select the material definition that you want to assign.
Identify the surface to which you want to assign the material definition by selecting the
model file (from the Files list), level (from the Levels list), and color (from the Color list) of
that surface. Select one of each to identify the surface.
You can identify more than one surface at a time by selecting more than one model
file, level, and color combination. You can click the Select All button to select all the files,
levels, or colors; or, use Clear All to clear all the file, level, or color entries.
6. Select the Pick command as you need it.
7. Click Apply to save an assignment without exiting the form. Repeat steps 1-5 to make
additional assignments, if necessary.
A material table (MAT file) is created for each model file that you select.
Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box

Allows you to select materials from multiple palette files and preview their display
characteristics. You can also select model elements by choosing the model filename and by
identifying the level and color of the element. Also, in the SmartPlant Review environment, you
can select elements by choosing them interactively from the Main view window.

363
quickly delete these material assignments, delete the project's MAT file.
Palette File - Displays the name of the active palette file. Select this field and type the name of
an existing palette file or select the list button at the end of the field.
Browse - Determines the pathname to the folder containing the palette files. Select the folder
that contains the palette files that you want to use.
Name - Displays the names of the material definitions in the selected palette file. Select a
material to make it the active material.
spherical surface.
Levels - Identifies an element by the level number (1-63) on which it was drawn. You must
select both a level and color number to identify an element.
Colors - Identifies an element by the color number (0-255) at which it was drawn. You must
select both a level and color number to identify an element.
364

Files - Displays a list of model files. Identify the model file to which the material definition will be
assigned.
Select All - Selects all levels, colors, or files depending on which list is active.
Clear All - Unselects all levels, colors, or files depending on which list is active.
Show - Displays the material definition assigned to the file, level, and color selected. The
Palette, Material Name, and Preview update to display the assigned material definition. If an
assignment does not exist for the selected file, level, and color, a message displays stating that
there is no assignment.
Pick - Hides the Assign Materials to Elements dialog box so that you can identify a model
element in the Main view. After you select an element, the Levels, Colors, and Files
information for the selected element displays in the dialog box. You can then assign a material
definition to that element.
See Also
Working with Materials (on page 361)
Unassign Materials
Tools > Materials > Unassign
Displays the Unassign Materials dialog box, allowing you to remove materials in a palette file
from elements in a model file. You can select materials from multiple palette files and preview
their display characteristics in the Material Sphere. You can also select model elements by
choosing the model filename and identifying the level and color of the element. In the
SmartPlant Review environment, you also can select elements by choosing them interactively
from the Main view window.

quickly delete these material assignments, delete the MAT file of the project.
1. Click Tools > Materials > Unassign.
Unassign Materials Dialog Box (on page 366)
2. Select the name of the palette file from the list of available palettes.
You can identify more than one surface at a time by selecting more than one model
file, level, and color combination.
3. Click Apply to unassign a material without exiting the form. Repeat these steps to unassign
additional materials, if necessary.
365
Unassign Materials Dialog Box

Allows you to unassign materials currently assigned to elements by file, level, and color indices.

quickly delete these material assignments, delete the project's MAT file.
Select assignments - Displays the palettes, materials, levels, colors, and files of the assigned
materials. Select a material to make it the active material.
spherical surface.
Pick object - Hides the Unassign Materials dialog box so that you can identify a model
element in the Main view. After you select an element, the information for the selected element
displays in the dialog box. You can then unassign a material definition for that element.
See Also
Unassign Materials (on page 365)
366
Edit Materials
Tools > Materials > Edit
Creates and edits material definitions. If you want to assign an existing material to your model,
use the Tools > Materials > Assign Materials command instead. A material definition consists
of all the material's display properties: colors and patterns, diffuse and specular reflectance,
finish, ambient reflectance, transmittance, refraction, and bump maps. Using the Edit Material
dialog box, you can mix colors, define surface characteristics, and select patterns and bump
maps to create materials. You can then save the materials in palette files.
When you create new materials, the software stores them in palette files. Palette files contain
groupings of materials and are assigned a .PAL extension. By saving material definitions in
palette files, you can use them again, as needed, on many different models. Several palette files
are supplied with SmartPlant Review and can be found in the ..\review\sample\projects\example
folder.
If you delete or move materials that are used in a model, SmartPlant Review prompts you to
provide folders to search in for the missing files when it opens the model.
See Also
Edit Materials Dialog Box (on page 368)
Adjust Pattern Dialog Box (on page 371)
Adjust Bump Map Dialog Box (on page 372)
367
Edit Materials Dialog Box

Allows you to create and edit material definitions. If you want to assign an existing material to
your model, see the Assign Materials (on page 362). To use this functionality, you must install
the Photo-Realism module.
Palette - Displays the name of the active palette file. Type the name of the file to create a new
palette file. You also can select Browse to find and open an existing palette file.
Material name - Specifies the name of the active material definition. Type the name of the
material to create a new material definition, or select one of the materials in the active palette.
Copy - Copies the material from an object that you select in the model. After you select an
object, the selected object's material surface characteristics are loaded and the material displays
in the Preview.
Replace/Add - Replaces the active material definition with the new values that you have
defined. If you rename the material name, this button changes to an Add button, allowing you to
add the new material definition to the current palette. You can also create a new palette by
typing a new palette name and then creating new material definitions in that palette.
Delete - Deletes the active material from the active palette file.
368

Base color
Default - Sets the base color back to the default color.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to select a new base color.
Specular color
Default - Sets the specular color back to the default color.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, which allows you to select a new specular color. The
specular color is the color of the glare. A shiny green surface is rendered more realistically, for
example, when the specular color is tinted toward the diffuse green color. Specular color is
extremely important for the accurate rendering of metallic surfaces. Gold, for example, has a
deep tan/orange diffuse color and a pale yellow specular highlight. Specular color can only be a
solid color.
Diffuse - Controls the intensity of the diffuse color of a material. Diffuse values range from 0-1,
where 0 is black and 1 is 100% color saturation. The diffuse color may be either a solid color or
a bitmap file (RGB, pattern, and scan). The intensity value is the degree to which the diffuse
color or pattern contributes to the final look of the geometry. A highly diffuse intensity results in a
high saturation of the diffuse color or pattern.
Specular - Controls the intensity of the specular features of the material. The specular property
is the degree to which light reflects from the surface of the geometry of the model. The specular
property creates a hot spot or glare, which is proportional to the surface finish. Specular values
can range from 0-1, where 0 is a low specular surface, such as a tennis ball, and 1 is a high
specular surface, such as a cue ball.
Finish - Controls the degree of polish or smoothness on an object's surface. When light is
reflected off of a surface, the finish determines whether it is scattered (a rough surface) or
concentrated (a smooth surface). Finish values range from 0- 1, where 0 is a low polish, such as
felt, and 1 is a high polish, such as glass. The finish of a material interacts directly with its
specular characteristics. A high specular value and a high finish value results in a bright
concentrated hot spot on the surface. A high specular value and a low finish value results in a
large glaring hot spot that is scattered all over the surface.
Reflectivity - Controls the amount of reflectivity that a material exhibits. This property
determines how other surfaces in the model will be reflected in the material. For example, a
pond of water, a mirror, and highly polished metals are all highly reflective. Reflectivity values
range from 0-1, where 0 is no reflectivity and 1 is a high reflectivity. As the reflectivity value of a
material gets higher, environment clouds begin to appear in the Preview to display the
reflectivity.
Use the following guidelines to use reflection mapping:
Create a pattern file for the reflection in a raster image editor. Use a spherize filter (or
equivalent) to distort the image slightly.
Turn off the old patterns before applying reflection to objects on which patterns are already
applied.
Use a high Reflection slider value to display more reflection on the object than the object's
Base Color. Use a low Reflection value to display more object Base Color than reflection.
Ambient - Controls the ambient reflectivity of a material. The ambient reflectivity of a material is
the degree to which the ambient lighting in the overall model will be reflected by the surface of
the material. The total ambient light value of a surface is calculated by multiplying the ambient
reflectivity value by the model ambient light setting. The ambient reflectivity value can range
from 0-1, where 0 is no ambient light reflected and 1 is full ambient reflectivity.
For example, if the overall ambient light setting for the model is set to 1.0, and a material has an
ambient reflectivity value of 0.10, model elements using that material will have an effective
369

ambient lighting value of 10%. A lower ambient light value causes the shadows that fall on the
material to be dark, with a high contrast between the directly and indirectly lit areas. A higher
ambient light value results in a more uniformly lit surface with fainter shadows and less overall
contrast in lighting. This would be desirable, for example, if you wanted to create a bright,
uniformly lit ceiling in a room.
Transmittance - Controls the transmittance of a material. Transmittance is the degree of
transparency that a surface exhibits. You can select values from 0 (0% transparent, or opaque)
to 100 (100% transparent, or invisible). As you change the transmittance value of a material, the
background image behind the preview becomes visible to illustrate the degree of transparency.
Remember that the diffuse color should be evaluated when you are using transparent
and reflective surfaces. A high diffuse value can saturate the material with diffuse color and thus
override most of the reflectivity or transparency. By setting the diffuse color intensity (saturation)
lower, the object becomes more transparent and less opaque when transmittance is used. For
example, a clear drinking glass should have a white diffuse color, a very low diffuse intensity
value (0.01), and a high transmit intensity value (100).
Refraction - Controls the angle of refraction on a material. Refraction is the bending of light as it
passes through transparent surfaces. The lens of a pair of eyeglasses, for example, would
exhibit refraction. A straw in a clear glass of water also appears to bend, when viewed from
certain angles, due to refraction.
Refraction values range from 1.0-2.0, where 1.0 is no refraction and 2.0 is high refraction. For
example, water has some refraction (1.20) because it causes objects to appear distorted when
they are immersed. Refractive surfaces must also be transparent (have a high transmittance
setting). When a material is transparent and refraction is high, the image behind the Preview
appears distorted to illustrate the degree of refraction.
You can define Refraction as less than 1.0. The default value of 1.0 still equals no refraction. For
example, a Refraction value of 1.2 is good for light passing from air into water or glass. Use a
value less than 1.0 when the eye point is inside water or glass looking into air.
Set Refraction = 1.0 (not 0.0) when defining a completely clear material.
Pattern Weight - Mixes the percentage of pattern and base color for a material. Values range
from 0 (all color) to 1 (all pattern); midrange values are a mix of both attributes.
Preview - Displays the material definition as it is mapped onto a spherical surface. The sphere
updates as you modify the material's display properties.
Pattern - Specifies the diffuse color between a solid and a pattern. The diffuse color may be
either a solid color or a bitmap image file (RGB, pattern, and scan). You can edit a solid color or
choose an image file for the diffuse color. For more information, see Adjust Pattern Dialog Box
(on page 371).
Bump Map - Specifies the bump map pattern file. When you select the bump map, it appears in
the Preview. For more information, see Adjust Bump Map Dialog Box (on page 372).
Fresnel - Activates fresnel characteristics. When on, fresnel makes transparent objects more
opaque on curved and angular surfaces, such as a soap bubble: the steeper the angle at which
you view the surface, the greater the reflection and opaqueness of the surface. The effects of
this command appear in the Preview.
Shadows - Activates shadows. Activate if you want materials to cast shadows in a
Phong-shaded mode. The effects of this option appear in the Preview.
See Also
370
Adjust Pattern Dialog Box

Defines the pattern you want to associate with an object. You can base pattern size on the
model working units so that patterns are not stretched or distorted to fit surfaces. Surface mode
stretches the pattern to the extent of the element.
SmartPlant Review also supports texture mapping. You can choose a pattern, apply it to a
material, and assign it to an element in the model.
File name - Defines the pattern that you want to associate with an object.
Units - Allows you to choose Surface, Sub Units, or Master Units for the pattern.
X offset - Specifies offset from the X-axis. The pattern is placed at the specified offset. This
offset is a percentage of the RGB raster file size. For example, a value of 0.5 equals a 50%
offset. (You can also have a negative (-) value.)
Y offset - Specifies offset from the Y-axis. The pattern is placed at the specified offset. This
offset. (You also can have a negative (-) value.)
X scale - Specifies a horizontal scale factor to apply to the pattern. The software then applies
the pattern to the surface at the specified scale. For example, a scale factor of two scales the
image pattern to twice its size. A scale factor of 0.25 scales the pattern to 1/4 its size, allowing
four patterns to fit on the surface.
Y Scale - Specifies a vertical scale factor to apply to the pattern. The software then applies the
pattern to the surface at the specified scale.
Angle - Specifies the angle to rotate the pattern. A positive value rotates the pattern
counterclockwise, whereas a negative value rotates the pattern clockwise.
Gamma - Specifies the gamma correction for a pattern. This prevents double gamma correction
on the pattern so that it does not appear washed out when applied. This value is necessary in
files saved in formats other than .RGB (for example, .BMP or .TIF) because these types of files
were saved with gamma correction.
Transparent background - Specifies whether the background is visible or transparent. A
transparent background is useful for applying decals to surfaces. A common usage is for adding
foliage. The effect of a transparent background is displayed in the Preview.
371

Mirror Y - Specifies whether or not to mirror the pattern about the Y-axis.
See Also
Adjust Bump Map Dialog Box

Defines the bump map that you want to associate with an object.
File name - Defines the bump map that you want to associate with an object.
Units - Allow you to choose Surface, Sub Units, or Master Units for the bump map.
X offset - Specifies offset from the X-axis. The bump map is placed at the specified offset. This
Y offset - Specifies offset from the Y-axis. The bump map is placed at the specified offset. This
X scale - Specifies a horizontal scale factor to apply to the bump map. The software then
applies the bump map to the surface at the specified scale.
Y scale - Specifies a vertical scale factor to apply to the bump map. The software then applies
the bump map at the specified scale.
Angle - Specifies the angle to rotate the bump map. A positive value rotates the bump map
counterclockwise, whereas a negative value rotates the bump map clockwise.
Height - Specifies the height at which the bump map should be applied.
Inverted - Inverts the bump map display.
Mirror Y - Specifies whether or not to mirror the bump map about the Y-axis.
See Also
372
Create Materials
Tools > Materials > Create
Creates a palette (PAL) and material table (MAT) file from an existing Intergraph Graphics
Design System (IGDS) or MicroStation color table (TBL). A palette file is created with material
definitions for each color in the IGDS or MicroStation color table. The colors in the TBL table are
used in the material definition, and default values are given to the remaining display properties
and rendering parameters. The resulting RayTrace/QuickTrace image looks like plastic with the
TBL colors. You can also edit the resulting palette through the Edit Materials command.
The Create Materials command is most useful if you have a standard TBL file to start with. It
offers a quick start to create a palette and material table. Identify the surfaces in the model to
which you want to assign the IGDS or MicroStation color table. The surfaces are specified by
the color and level numbers in the model file. A material table (MAT) file is created for each
model file that you select, with material assignments based on the surfaces that you identified.
1. Select the IGDS or MicroStation color table that you want to use.
2. Identify the surface to which you want to assign the color table by selecting the model file,
level, and color of the surface. You must select one of each to identify that surface.
Identify multiple surfaces at once by selecting more than one model file, level, and
color. Use Select All to select all the files, levels, or colors; or, Clear All to clear all the file,
level, or color entries.
A palette file is created with material definitions for each color in the IGDS or MicroStation
color table.
A material table (MAT file) is created for each model file that you select, with material
assignments based on the colors and levels that you select.
This command overwrites any existing material table.
To display similar colors in SmartPlant Review and MicroStation, you can attach a new color
table to a .DGN file using the MicroStation Color Table dialog box or the CT= key-in
command. However, once colors are assigned or a database is created, the VLT color table
saved in the database, along with the material assignments (if any), will override the .DGN
color table.
See Also
373
Create Materials Dialog Box

Allows you to create a palette (PAL) and material table (MAT) file from an existing IGDS or
MicroStation color table (TBL). A palette file is created with material definitions for each color in
the IGDS or MicroStation color table. The colors in the TBL table are used in the material
definition, and default values are given to the remaining display properties and rendering
parameters. The resulting RayTrace/QuickTrace image looks like plastic with the TBL colors.
IGDS color table - Specifies the IGDS or MicroStation color table to convert. Most color table
files have a .TBL extension.
Levels - Identifies a surface by the level number (1-63) on which it was drawn. Select Select All
to select all the levels.
Color - Identifies a surface by the color number (0-255) at which it was drawn. Select Select All
to select all the colors.
Files - Displays a list of model files and folders. Select the model file for which to create the
material table (MAT) file.
Select All - Selects all the files, levels, or colors.
Clear All - Clears all the current selections.

This command overwrites any existing material table.
You can edit the resulting palette by using the Edit Materials command.
See Also
374
Define Search Path for Material Files

1. Click Browse to select the folder that you want to add to the Search Path.
2. Click Add.
3. Click Move Up or Move Down to reorder the Folders list.
SmartPlant Review searches last for folders listed closer to the bottom. You can find
patterns and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list.
You must add each folder individually, even if you have already added the parent folder to
the Search Path Directories list.
See Also
Edit a Search Path

Tools > Materials > Edit Search Path
Displays the Edit Search Path dialog box, allowing you to change or specify the location in
which SmartPlant Review looks for bump map, palette, and pattern files.
See Also
375
Search Path Dialog Box

Allows you to specify the paths to the palette, pattern, or bump map files associated with your
project. The Search Path dialog box appears while SmartPlant Review is opening your project
file for the first time if it cannot find, in the Search Path, the patterns or bump maps assigned to
the model.
Directory - Allows you to specify a folder containing the pattern or bump map file that you are
assigning to the current object.
Browse - Allows you to specify a different folder.
Search Path - Displays the folders currently in the search path and allows you to add and
remove folders, and to re-order the list of folders.
Add - Adds the current folder to the bottom of the search path list of folders to use for searching
for pattern or bump map files.
Delete - Removes the selected folder from the search path list of folders to use for searching for
pattern or bump map files.
Move Up - Moves the selected folder up one level in the search path list of folders. SmartPlant
Review searches first for folders listed closer to the top. You can find patterns and bump maps
faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list.
Move Down - Moves the selected folder down one level in the search path list of folders.
SmartPlant Review searches last for folders listed closer to the bottom. You can find patterns
and bump maps faster if you place the most likely locations higher in the search list.
376
SECTION 28
Making Animations
All animations begin with creating an animation path by using the View > Save and Recall
Views command to save a series of views displayed in the Main view window. Each saved view
(or frame) contains the current view parameters, such as the position of the eye, lighting, and
the direction the eye is looking.
Save each frame with a name and assign it a number. This frame number determines the order
of the saved views and also the number of transitional (tween) frames that SmartPlant Review
creates between each saved view. The number of tween frames determines the transition rate
from one saved view to the next: the greater the span, the more transitional frames that are
needed, and therefore, the longer the transition.
This list of saved views is only the definition of the path (or key frames) for the movie. To
generate raster images for a movie, you must create output images of each saved view (key
frame) using the View > Snapshot or the Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot (available with the
Simulation and Visual Effects module) commands. After generating these raster images, you
can use a tool such as Adobe Premiere to create an AVI from the saved images.
Use the Motion > Key Frame > Display command to preview the animation path as it would
appear in the movie. This command displays those saved views with a frame number greater
than zero and the SPR-created transitional frames. The view cone updates as the frames
advance.
Sample Animation Workflow

1. Determine the general path that the animation should take, noting key points of interest, and
approximately how many frames you will need.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The more frames (saved views) you have, the smoother, more accurate the animation
path. A good rule of thumb is 30 frames are equal to 1 second of video.
Use the Two-sided lighting option on the View Settings > Lighting tab when setting
up the lighting in your saved views. This can help reduce flickering in the resulting
animation. For more information, see Lighting Tab (View Settings Dialog Box) (on page
215).
Create a view group for your animation.
Create a View Group (on page 397)
Save a view at each key point of interest along the animation path. Each of these saved
views becomes a key frame in your animation. Be sure to assign a frame number and to
save these views in the view group you created.
Save the Current View (on page 392)
Play the animation and make adjustments to the key frames (such as saving more views)
and to the key frame numbers (increasing or decreasing the numbers to alter the number of
tween frames generated).
Use the Snapshot Key Frames command to capture raster images of the animation.
Use a tool such as Adobe Photoshop to add overlays or touch up the images.
377
Making Animations
7. Use a tool such as Adobe Premiere to create an AVI from these saved snapshots.
Frame numbers are critical in determining how many tween frames SmartPlant Review
generates between each key frame and in determining how fast or slow the animation
moves between key frames.
Position settings such as eye point and center point are "tweened" between key frames.
You can use ViZfx Web Pro to apply sophisticated special effects to your animations,
special web projects, or video. You can download ViZfx Web Pro from the Intergraph
website with your SmartPlant Review serial number.
Save and Recall Views (on page 391)

Import Saved Views (on page 398)
Export Saved Views (on page 401)
Save and Recall Views Dialog Box

To create and modify save and recall views, you must install the Simulation and Visual
Effects module.
378
Making Animations
Allows you to save the current view displayed in the Main, Plan, or Elevation view windows.
The views are organized in view groups that you create. You can also use this dialog box to
define the animation path for a movie.
Dialog Box Options

View group - Allows you to select a group of views.
Description - Displays the description of the active view group.
Main, Plan, or Elevation views - Indicates the view type associated with the active view group
and displays the saved views in the frame list. Double-click a view in this list to recall the view.
The Description field displays the description associated with the selected saved view.
Close on recall view - Check this option to close the Save and Recall Views dialog box each
time you recall a saved view. When this option is not checked, the dialog box remains open,
allowing you to cycle through several saved views without having to reopen the dialog box each
time.
Set Up Partial - Displays the Set Up Partial View Recall dialog box, allowing you to specify the
settings to retain when recalling a partial view. For more information, see Set Up Partial View
Recall Dialog Box (on page 384) .
Partial Recall View - Recalls the selected view based on the configuration specified in the Set
Up Partial View Recall dialog box, and then closes the Save and Recall Views dialog box.
Delete - Removes the selected saved views. A confirmation box appears, giving you the
opportunity to confirm or cancel the deletion.
Add - Displays the Add Current View dialog box, allowing you to add the current view to the
active group. For more information, see Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box (on page 385).
379
Making Animations
Dialog Box Options Available with the Simulation and Visual Effects Module
These options become enabled when you have the Simulation and Visual Effects module
installed.
Rename - Displays the Rename Group dialog box, allowing you to rename the active group.
Delete - Removes the active group and all of its views. The Delete Group dialog box appears
giving you the opportunity to confirm the deletion.
Create - Displays the Create Group dialog box, allowing you to add a new group of views. For
more information, see Create Group Dialog Box (on page 382).
Select All - Selects all of the saved views in the active group.
Clear All - De-selects all of the saved views in the active group.
Edit - Displays the Edit Views dialog box, allowing you to make changes to each of the selected
saved views. For more information, see Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box (on page 385).
Move - Displays the Move Selected View dialog box allowing you to move the selected views
from the active view group to another view group within the same project. For more information,
see Move Selected Views Dialog Box (on page 383).
Copy - Displays the Copy Selected View dialog box, allowing you to copy the selected views
from the active view group to another view group within the same project. For more information,
see Copy Selected View Dialog Box (on page 380).
Frames - Displays the Modify Frame Numbers dialog box, allowing you to change the frame
number of one or more views at a time. For more information, see Modify Frame Numbers
Dialog Box (on page 382).
Recall View - Recalls the selected view and then closes the Save and Recall Views dialog
box. This button becomes the default when you select a view in the views list.
See Also
Delete a View Group (on page 398)
Edit a Saved View (on page 396)
Recall a Partial View (on page 393)
Recall a Saved View (on page 393)
Copy Selected View Dialog Box

To use this functionality, you must install the Simulation and Visual Effects module.
380
Making Animations
Allows you to copy one or more of the saved views to another group.
View Group
From - Displays the active view group name. This field is not editable.
To - Allows you to specify which view group to copy the selected views. Only view groups
with the same type as the active view group display in the list.
View Name
These settings are available only if you have selected a single view to copy.
From - Displays the selected view name. This field is not editable.
To - Allows you to specify a new name for the copy of the view.
See Also
Copy a Saved View (on page 396)
381
Making Animations
Create Group Dialog Box

Allows you to create a group of views. After creating the group, you can add views to it.
Name - Allows you to enter the name of the new view group.
Type - Allows you to choose the type of the new view group.
Description - Allows you to enter an optional description for the new view group.
See Also
Rename a View Group (on page 397)
Modify Frame Numbers Dialog Box

Allows you to change the frame number of the selected views.
Operator - Determines the type of operation to perform on the frame number for the specified
views. The choices are addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*), or division (/).
Amount - Determines the amount to apply to the frame number of specified views using the
current operator.
382
Making Animations
Use range instead of the <number of> selected frames - Determines if the selected
operation applies to the specified range or to the selected views on the Save and Recall Views
dialog box.
Start - Indicates the starting frame number of a range using the specified operation and amount.
Stop - Indicates the stopping frame number of a range using the specified operation and
amount.
You can click Apply to save your changes without closing the dialog box. After you have
applied your changes, the Cancel button changes to a Close button.
See Also
Modify Frame Numbers (on page 398)
Move Selected Views Dialog Box

Allows you to move saved views to another group within the project database.
From - Displays the active view group name. This field is not editable.
To - Select the view group to which you want to move the selected view. Only view groups with
the same type as the active view group display in the list.
See Also
383
Making Animations
Rename Group Dialog Box

Allows you to rename the active view group.
From - Displays the name of the active view group.

To - Allows you to enter the new name for the active view group.
Description - Allows you to add descriptive text to the active view group.
See Also
Set Up Partial View Recall Dialog Box

Allows you to turn on and off certain view settings when recalling a partial view.
384
Making Animations
Settings to apply - Lists available view settings that you can turn on or off when recalling a
saved view. When checked, the view setting in the saved view overrides the current view setting
when you recall the view. Uncheck the settings that you do not want the saved view to override
when the view is recalled. For example, if the saved view contains specific eye point and center
point values, but you want to keep the current eye point and center point settings, uncheck
those options to prevent the current values from being overwritten when the saved view is
recalled. For more information about the individual view settings listed here, see View Settings
Dialog Box (on page 211).
See Also
Set Up Partial View Recall (on page 395)
Description Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) (on page 385)
Display Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) (on page 386)
Outline Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) (on page 387)
View Cone Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) (on page 387)
Lighting Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) (on page 389)
Advanced Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) (on page 390)
Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box

Provides options for creating or editing saved views. These options apply to view groups of all
types (Main, Plan, and Elevation) unless otherwise noted.
See Also
Description Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) (on page 385)
Display Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) (on page 386)
Outline Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) (on page 387)
View Cone Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) (on page 387)
Lighting Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) (on page 389)
Advanced Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box) (on page 390)
Description Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box)

Provides options for editing the frame number, name, and description of the new or saved view.
Frame number - Allows you to edit the frame number of the selected saved views. This setting
is not available for views in view groups of type Elevation view or Plan view.
Name - Edits the name of the selected saved view.
This setting is not available if you have selected more than one view.
385
Making Animations
Description - Edits the description of the selected saved views.
See Also
Display Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box)

Allows you to modify the saved view display options. For view groups of type Plan view or
Elevation view, only the Levels button is enabled.
Render
Shaded - Specifies whether or not the view displays as shaded or wireframe. When
checked, the view displays in shaded mode.
Object textures - Determines whether textures appear while you are manipulating the
model. Displaying textures while manipulating models may slow down the display.
Dot box - Draws distant elements less precisely for improved update speed. At a distance,
these items will be represented by a small box of pixels instead of a full rendering.
Shaded Background Color - Displays the shaded background color.
Wireframe Background Color - Specifies the color used to display wireframe rendering. Click
Edit to display the Color dialog box, which allows you to change the Shaded color.
Activate
All tags - Specifies whether or not the tags appear.
Active tag only - Specifies whether or not only the active tag appears.
All annotations - Specifies whether or not to display annotations in the view.
Data annotations - Specifies whether or not to display data annotations in the view.
Text annotations - Specifies whether or not to display text annotations in the view.
Volume annotations - Specifies whether or not to display volume annotations in the view.
Measurements - Specifies whether or not to display measurements in the view. Only
measurement collections that are turned on can be displayed.
Axis - Specifies whether or not to display a small coordinate triad in the bottom left corner of
the view showing which direction is East, North, and Elevation.
Levels - Displays the Level Settings dialog box.
See also
Select Level Settings (on page 219)
386
Making Animations
Resolve Current Level Settings Dialog Box (on page 223)
Outline Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box)

This tab appears only if you have installed the On-Site Drawing Generation module.
Allows you to modify the outline rendering mode options for the saved view.
Width - Specifies the width of the outline drawn around display objects. Select 3 for the thickest
outline. Select 1 for a subtle rimming effect.
Use a single default outline color - Displays outlines using the default outline color, which is
white on dark backgrounds and black on light backgrounds. The outline commands
automatically switch between white and black based on the current combined RGB color
intensity of the background color.
Use a single specified outline color - Displays outlines in the color you select.
Edit - Displays the standard Colors dialog box, allowing you to select or create a color.
Use the colors of the objects - Outlines each object using their own colors. This option makes
the outline less obvious, but enhances the edges of objects.
See Also
Resolve Current Level Settings Dialog Box (on page 223)
View Cone Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box)

Defines the boundaries of the view displayed in the Main window. The view cone changes as
you change the viewing angle, viewing direction, eye point, and as you define motion using the
motion/orientation controls.
387
Making Animations
Settings on this tab display the current value only if all of the selected saved views have an
identical value for that setting.
Eye Point North - Specifies the eye point position of the view cone in relation to the north
direction (Y coordinate). You can use this box to change the eye point by typing a new north
coordinate.
Eye Point East - Specifies the eye point position of the view cone in relation to the east
direction (X coordinate). You can use this box to change the eye point by typing a new east
coordinate.
Eye Point Elevation - Specifies the height of the eye point of the view cone in relation to the
model (Z coordinate). You can use this box to change the eye point by typing a new elevation.
Center Point North - Specifies the center point position of the view cone in relation to the north
direction (Y coordinate). You can use this box to change the center point by typing a new north
coordinate.
Center Point East - Specifies the center point position of the view cone in relation to the east
direction (X coordinate). You can use this box to change the center point by typing a new east
coordinate.
Center Point Elevation - Specifies the height of the center point of the view cone in relation to
the model (Z coordinate). You can use this box to change the center point by typing a new
elevation.
Clipping plane distances
Clipping Plane Near - Specifies the absolute distance from the eye point to the center of
the near clipping plane (when Reference is set to Eye) or the location of the center point of
the near clipping plane along the Reference axis (when Reference is set to North, East, or
Elevation).
Clipping Plane Far - Specifies the absolute distance from the eye point to the center of the
far clipping plane (when Reference is set to Eye) or the location of the center point of the far
clipping plane along the Reference axis (when Reference is set to North, East, or Elevation).
Clipping Plane Reference - Displays the reference point (if set to Eye) or the reference
axis (if set to North, East, or Elevation) for the values displayed in the Far and Near boxes.
When you select Eye from the Reference list, the Near and Far boxes display the absolute
distance from the eye point to the center point of the respective clipping plane. When you
select North, East, or Elevation from the Reference list, the clipping plane fields display the
location on that Reference coordinate of the center point of the respective clipping plane.
For example, the eye point is at 100 feet North, -500 feet East, 200 feet Elevation and is
looking straight down. You do not want to see anything above 15 feet high in the model. To
accomplish this, you would select Elevation for the Reference and set Near to 15.
388
Making Animations
SmartPlant Review automatically calculates the correct clipping distance from the eye to the
near clipping plane as 185 feet.
A value of none or 0 (zero) for the near and/or far clipping planes enables the
automatic calculation of near and far clipping planes. This automatic calculation is a fast,
approximate best-fit approach and it prevents clipping objects in the view while attempting to
maximize rendering quality. The automatically-calculated clipping planes are displayed as
the yellow lines of the view cone in the Plan and Elevation views. You can then adjust the
near and/or far clipping plane values in some cases to further improve rendering quality
beyond the automatic calculation.
Perspective angle - Allows you to increase or decrease the viewing area of the view cone
without changing the locations of the clipping planes or the eye and center points. Move the
slider anywhere from 2 degrees (to decrease area) to 160 degrees (to increase area). You can
also type in the degree value. Click the TAB key when you have entered the value and the slider
bar will also show the degree setting.
Box) (on page 109)). It will also adjust the eye point to keep the model in the view. The view
cones in the Plan and Elevation views update during the transition.
Dashed - Displays the view cone in the Plan and Elevation views using dashed lines instead of
solid lines. The dashed view cone allows faster updates on slow graphic cards and some
notebook computers.
See Also
Set Motion Control to Eye Point (on page 132)
Lighting Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box)

view group.
Allows you to set the light intensity and sun bearing angles to control lighting for the shaded
model. Lighting settings allow you to determine the exposure of light on the model, which
changes the intensity of the image's colors.
389
Making Animations
Ambient from 0 to 100 - Specifies the light that surrounds everything in your display. A
common value of ambient light is 25.
Brightness from 0 to 10 - Specifies the exposure of light on the model that changes the
intensity of the colors in the image. This is similar to setting the aperture and shutter speed of a
camera. The value for this field is between 0 and 10.
Horizontal from -180 to 180 - Defines the horizontal angle of the sunlight coming into the
model. The values for this field are between -180.0 and +180.0. Positive values are
counterclockwise along a horizontal plane.
Vertical from -180 to 180 - Defines the vertical angle of light coming into the model. The values
for this field are between - 180.0 and +180.0.
Relative to plant north - Specifies whether the horizontal and vertical angles of light are
relative to Plant North or relative to the direction of the Main view.
Two-sided lighting - Produces a major reduction in thin-volume coincident surface flashing
during animations (especially on thin I-beams). Using this option requires more processing
resources and may result in decreased performance, which will vary by video driver and
graphics card.
See Also
Advanced Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box)

view group.
Provides options for more sophisticated scenarios of SmartPlant Review, such as fine tuning
stereo glasses.
Options
Perspective - Specifies whether to display the view using perspective rendering or
orthographic rendering. Perspective rendering is characterized by:
Objects being drawn smaller as their distance from the observer increases.
The size of object dimensions along the line of sight are smaller relative to to the
dimensions across the line of sight.
390
When unchecked, the option is set to orthographic mode. If you were in perspective
mode and the Allow fly-to behaviors option is set (see Display Tab (Motion Settings
Dialog Box) (on page 109), SmartPlant Review performs a fly-to transition to
orthographic mode. The view cones in the Plan and Elevation views update during the
transition.
Review performs a fly-to transition to the previously-saved perspective angle. If you do
not have a perspective angle defined, SmartPlant Review switches back to the default
56 degree angle. The view cones in the Plan and Elevation views update during the
transition.
Time display - Toggle on to display the time that it takes to update the Main view. The
update time appears in the Text view.
Stroking tolerance - Defines the stroking tolerance for the round surfaces of pipes,
reducers, valves, and elbows. The larger the tolerance, the better the display quality.
However, large tolerance values increase the view update time. The tolerance must be an
Making Animations
integer between 4 and 100. For faster updates, the recommended tolerance is 16. For the
highest quality update, the recommended tolerance is 100.
Stereo
Activate - Enables stereo viewing. See the SmartPlant Review Installation Guide for system
requirement and supported hardware for using this option.
Stereo viewing is available in the full product and the Photo-Realism module.
Set your video driver to Stereo interlaced mode before you run SmartPlant Review.
If the Stereo option on the Advanced tab is not available, make sure your video driver
is set to stereo. In some driver versions/configurations, the menu selection may be
available, even when the stereo is not enabled on the driver.
You do not have to remove stereo glasses when switching between stereo mode and
regular mode. SmartPlant Review automatically switches to regular mode when you
select a menu command or dialog box.
Eye separation - Specifies the actual distance between your eyes in model units. Typically,
this value is about 2.2 inches or 5.6 centimeters. A larger value exaggerates the effect, while
a smaller value reduces the effect. An accurate value produces realistic depth perception.
This option only effects stereo viewing.
Focal length - Specifies the distance to the selected object. The f distance is the point at
which objects are level with the screen. For example, closer objects appear to be coming out
of the screen and objects that are further away appear to be behind the screen. This option
only effects stereo viewing.
Aspect - Displays the value for the ratio of the Main view window width to height (X to Y value)
at the time that the view was saved. However, when the view is recalled, the aspect ratio is that
of the current view. The aspect ratio is not saved or restored.
See Also
Save and Recall Views

View > Save and Recall
Allows you to save the current view displayed in the Main, Plan, or Elevation view windows,
depending on the group. Organizing these saved views into view groups helps you easily find
specific saved views to recall. Additionally, saved views in the Main view groups can then be
used as the basis for creating animations (Plan and Elevation saved views cannot be used in
animations). However, if the view is saved without a frame number (Frame Number = 0), it
cannot be included in an animation; it is just a still image. You can later incorporate the saved
view in an animation by changing the frame number. For more information about creating
animations, see Making Animations (on page 377).
A Partial Recall View is a display of a saved view with user-defined overwrite settings. You
can select or de-select display overwrite settings for a view using the Set Up Partial View
Recall option in the Save and Recall Views dialog box. For example, if there are
annotations in a saved view, you can de-select the All annotations setting, which causes
the saved view to be displayed without annotations.
391
Making Animations
Saving a Plan or Elevation view saves only the model position within that view. Thus, you
can save a Plan or Elevation view, then Zoom in/out or Pan left/right/up/down the model
just within that view, and then recall the saved view. The model position is restored as if the
Zoom and Pan had not occurred within that view. Saving the view does not ever change the
Main view's eye or center point.
Recalling a Plan or Elevation view does not change the current location of the eye or center
points.
Saved views can be transferred from one database to another using the Import Saved
Views and Export Saved Views commands.

Move a Saved View (on page 397)
Modify Frame Numbers (on page 398)
Save the Current View

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Set the view to be saved.

Click View > Save and Recall.
Click Add Current View.
Type a view name.
Type a description for the view.
Type a frame number. This setting is not available if you are saving a Plan or Elevation
view.
7. Verify the view properties.
You can modify any of the view properties. If the view is a still image, the frame number
should remain at zero (0), which is the default value. If the view is part of an animation,
assign the frame number accordingly.
points.
See Also
392
Making Animations
Recall a Saved View

1. Click View > Save and Recall.
2. Open the View group containing the view that you want to recall in the Save and Recall
Views Dialog Box (on page 378).
3. Select a view from the list of views.
4. Click Recall View.
You can also double-click a view in the views list to recall a view.
Settings > Display tab), you can double-click the mouse a second time, or as you are
moving in fly mode, to immediately jump to the selected view.
Press ESC to cancel the recall view move operation.
Check the Close on recall view option to close the Save and Recall Views dialog box
each time you recall a saved view. When this option is not checked, the dialog box remains
open, allowing you to cycle through several saved views without having to reopen the dialog
box each time.
points.
All prior changes are saved at the time you recall a view.
See Also
Recall a Partial View

A Partial Recall View is a display of a saved view with user-defined overwrite settings. You can
select or de-select display overwrite settings for a view using the Set Up Partial View Recall
option in the Save and Recall Views dialog box. For example, if there are annotations in a
saved view, you can de-select the All annotations setting, which causes the saved view to be
displayed without annotations.
This option is also available from the Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot command.
However, for snapshot key frames, the partial view settings that are defined work only for Main
view key frames.
The steps below show how to set up a partial view from the Save and Recall Views dialog box.
From the Snapshot Key Frames dialog box, click Set Up Partial and then start on step 4.
2. Select a Frame number in the Main views display list.
3. Click Set Up Partial.
393
Making Animations
4. Check all display settings you want to see. Uncheck any settings you do not want to be
displayed in a view.

6. Click Recall Partial View on the Save and Recall Views dialog box.
-orFrom the Snapshot Key Frames dialog box, click OK to save your key frame snapshots.
You can also double-click a view in the views list to recall a partial view.
Settings > Display tab), you can double-click the mouse a second time, or as you are
moving in fly mode, to immediately jump to the recalled view.
Press ESC to cancel the recall view move operation.
See Also
Save and Recall Views Dialog Box (on page 378)
394
Making Animations
Set Up Partial View Recall

2. Click Set Up Partial.
3. Check all display settings you want to see. Uncheck any settings you do not want to be
displayed in a view.

5. You can then click Partial Recall View to see view with your display settings.
The Set Up Partial button configures settings for recalling a partial view.
You should complete these steps before selecting Recall Partial View for the first time.
See Also
395
Making Animations
Copy a Saved View

2. Select a View Group Name.
3. Select the frames that you want to copy.
Hold the Shift key and click on views to select multiple frames.
4. Click Copy.
5. Select a group or view to copy the frame To.
6. Select the new Group Name to receive the copy.
The Copy button allows you to copy one or more saved views to another group.
See Also
Edit a Saved View

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Select the view to edit.
Click Edit.
Type a frame number.
Type a name.
Type a description.
Verify the eye point settings.
Verify the center point settings.
Verify the clipping planes settings.
Verify the stereo distances settings.
Verify the perspective settings.
Verify the background settings.
Verify the levels settings.
These steps only apply when editing a saved Main view. Not all of these options are
available for saved Plan and Elevation views.
See Also
396
Making Animations
Move a Saved View

2. Select a View Group Name.
3. Select the frames that you want to move.
Hold the Shift or Ctrl keys and click on views to select multiple frames.
4. Click Move.
5. Select a group to move the frame view To.
See Also
Create a View Group

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Click Create Group.
Type a new group name.
Type the description for the new group name.
Select which view that you want to save in the new view group by selecting the view name
from the Type field.
Use groups to categorize saved views for future reference.

See Also
Rename a View Group

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select a view group name.
Click Rename.
Type a new group name in the To box.
Modify the description for the new group name.
See Also
397
Making Animations
Delete a View Group

1.
2.
3.
4.
Select a view group name.
Click Delete.
Click Yes to delete the view group.
If you delete a group, all of its saved views are deleted as well.
You are prompted to verify deletion of the group.
See Also
Modify Frame Numbers

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Select the frames that you want to modify.
Click Modify Frame Numbers.
Select the Operator (+, -, *, /) to modify the frame number.
Type the Amount to modify the frame number.
If you want to modify a range of frame numbers rather than just the selected frames, check
the Use range instead of the selected frames box and specify a range of frame numbers
using the Start and Stop boxes.
You can click Apply to save your changes without closing the dialog box. After you have
applied your changes, the Cancel button changes to a Close button.
See Also
Import Saved Views

File > Import > Saved Views
Imports saved views from other project databases into the current database.
1. Click File > Import > Saved Views.
Import Saved Views Dialog Box (on page 400)
2. Type a file name, or click Browse to locate the file.
3. Optionally, click the Select view group option, and select a group name from the list to
display the individual views in that group.
If you turn on the Select view group option, then you only can select view names. If
you turn off the Select view group option, then you only can select view group names.
4. Click each view group or saved view name to import.
398
Making Animations
5. Click Import.
Import Saved Views from DesignReview 3.7

1. Click File > Save.
2. Start SmartPlant Review and open the project with no database (temporarily). Then, export
the Saved Views read in from the DesignReview .DVF file.
3. In SmartPlant Review, click File > Import > Saved Views.
4. Click Browse to locate the file that you saved in step 2.
5. Optionally, click Select view group and select a group name from the list to display the
individual views in that group.
6. Click each saved view Name to select.
You can reduce the number of saved views in the list by selecting a view group name.
You can use the Select All button to select all the saved view sets in the file for importing.
data.
The import database must be in the SmartPlant Review 5.0 or later project database table
format before it can be imported.
If the database receiving the new views contains a view group with the same name as the
one being imported, the saved views of the two view groups will be merged. Any identically
named view in the receiving view group is overwritten by the incoming view.
When importing or exporting a view group with the same name as one already in the
receiving database, make sure that both view groups are of the same type, such as Main,
Plan, or Elevation. If the view groups are of a different type, the resulting view group may
contain saved views of both types, possibly causing unintended consequences for the user.
SmartPlant Review allows you to rename an existing view group on the Save and Recall
Views dialog box. Before you import or export saved views, you can use the Save and
Recall Views dialog box to rename view groups. This will avoid collisions with existing view
group names in the target database.
399
Making Animations
Import Saved Views Dialog Box

Allows you to import saved views from other project databases into the active project database.
Database file name - Specifies the name of the project database from which you want to import
saved views.
Browse - Allows you to navigate to a folder to select a database file containing the saved views
that you want to import.
From a single selected view group - Displays the individual views in the view group. When
this option is turned on, the View group name list contains the view groups in the project
database.
View group name - Allows you to select a single view group name. This option is available only
when the From a single selected view group check box is turned on.
Name - Displays a list of the view groups in the project database if Select view group is turned
off. Displays the saved views in the selected group if Select view group is turned on.
Import - Imports the selected saved views without closing the dialog box.
Clear All - Unselects all of the names in the list.
See Also
Import Saved Views (on page 398)
400
Making Animations
Export Saved Views

File > Export > Saved Views
Exports saved views to another project database.
1. Click File > Export > Saved Views.
2. Type a database file name, or click Browse to locate the project database file to which you
want to export the saved views. If SmartPlant Review does not find the file name, it creates
a new database with that name.
3. Optionally, click Select view group and select a group name from the list to display the
individual views in that group.
4. Under the Name column, click each view group (if the Select view group option is not
selected) or saved group (if the Select view group option is selected) that you want to
export.
You can use the Select All button to select all the saved view sets in the file for exporting.
The database receiving the saved views must be in SmartPlant Review 5.0 or later project
database table format.
At your request, the Import > Saved Views and Export > Saved Views commands
overwrite existing records in the database. However, if you import or export less data than
what currently exists in the target database, SmartPlant Review does not delete the
additional target database records.
SmartPlant Review allows you to rename an existing view group on the Save and Recall
Views dialog box. Before you import or export saved views, you can use the Save and
Recall Views dialog box to rename view groups. This will avoid collisions with existing view
group names in the target database.
You can import or export a view group with the same name but a different view type, such
as Main, Plan, or Elevation. We do not recommend this action unless you are replacing all
views in the target database. The views you created as one type may not behave as
expected when you transfer them to a different view type.
data.
See Also
401
Making Animations
Export Saved Views Dialog Box

Allows you to export saved views from the active project database to another database.
Database file name - Specifies the name of the database to which you want to export saved
views. The name can be an existing database, or a new one.
Browse - Allows you to navigate to a folder to select an existing database or to create a new
database file.
From a single selected view group - Displays the individual views in the view group. When
this option is turned on, the View group name list contains the view groups in the project
database.
View group name - Allows you to select a single view group name. This option is available only
when the From a single selected view group check box is turned on.
Name - Displays a list of the view groups in the project database if Select view group is turned
off. Displays the saved views in the selected group if Select view group is turned on.
Export - Exports the selected saved views without closing the dialog box.
Clear All - Unselects all of the names in the list.
See Also
Export Saved Views (on page 401)
402
Making Animations
Take a Snapshot
View > Snapshot
To use this functionality, you must install one of the following modules: Construction, API,
Collaboration, Visual Effects, Photo-Realism, or On-site Drawing Generation.
Displays the Snapshot View dialog box, which is used to create an image file (or snapshot file)
of any size by taking a snapshot of the current Main view or screen.
The View > Snapshot command allows you to capture scaled and/or partial views in the Main
view and save the snapshot directly to a file. Snapshots can be saved in .RGB (red, green,
blue), BMP, TIF, JPG and PNG formats. If you do not specify a format, then the image is saved
as an RGB image. The minimum snapshot size is 10 x 10 pixels.
When you take a snapshot in Stereo mode, the system creates an image that has the left eye on
the left side of the image and the right eye on right side of the image. The overall width of the
image is doubled and the height is unchanged.
Additionally, you can use the standard Windows Clipboard functionality to capture the following
views:
Full-Screen (taken by pressing Print Screen) - Data is captured directly from the screen
without an update, and is copied to the Clipboard.
Application Window Only (taken by pressing Alt+Print Screen) - Data is captured directly
from the application window without an update, and is copied to the Clipboard.
Graphic View Only (taken by using the Edit > Copy command or by pressing Ctrl+C in the
Main, Plan, or Elevation views) - Data is captured directed from the graphic view without an
update, and is copied to the Clipboard.
Be sure that you have sufficient hard disk space for using high-resolution printing. The general
rule of thumb for calculating print file size is:
Bytes = Image Pixel Height * Anti-Alias Setting * Image Pixel Width * Anti-Alias Setting * 4
Bytes Per Pixel (RGBA)
If using background image, multiple again by 2.
Generating a high resolution snapshot with an anti-alias setting of 4 and background images
enabled requires a large amount of contiguous memory. SmartPlant Review needs enough
main memory (even after utilizing virtual memory or swap space) for this operation to
succeed.
Taking snapshots of collision detection results using Wireframe highlight and an Anti-alias
set greater than 1 is not supported. For more information, see Report Collision Detection
Results Dialog Box (on page 506).
IfSmartPlant Review cannot acquire enough contiguous memory, it will display a message
box providing you with an option to use a less memory-intensive technique. If you click
Yes,SmartPlant Review will acquire the biggest contiguous memory that the system has
available, render the image and do the anti-aliasing using this technique, and generate the
output. The drawbacks to the less memory-intensive method are that it is calculation
intensive, provides less anti-alias effect, and you can experience a loss of details for small
images.
Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch (on page 406)

Calculate a High Resolution Snapshot (on page 406)
403
Making Animations
Snapshot View Dialog Box

Allows you to create an image file (or snapshot file) of any size by taking a snapshot of the
current Main view. Image files can be saved in RGB (red, green, blue), BMP, TIF, JPG and
PNG formats. If you do not specify a format, then the image is saved as an .RGB image. The
minimum snapshot size is 10 x 10 pixels.
When you use the Snapshot command for a view, do not switch tasks or bring up any
dialog boxes or menus as they will be captured instead of the image. For the same reason, any
screen saver operations are automatically disabled when the Snapshot command is running.
Capturing the image on-screen, rather than off-screen, takes full advantage of any hardware
acceleration and enables SmartPlant Review to capture the image quickly.
Extent - Allows you to select the area to include in the snapshot. Example selections include
Main View, Application Window, and Entire Screen.
404
Making Animations
Anti-alias - Sets the anti-alias value for the snapshot. The Anti-alias value determines how
much data is captured and averaged to produce the snapshot size. If Anti-alias is set to 2, then
SmartPlant Review captures and averages twice as much data for the width and height. If you
multiply the Anti- alias value by the Scale value and square the result, the end answer is the
number of "Main views" of data that SmartPlant Review processes. The Anti-alias field defaults
to 1, which means that no anti-aliasing occurs.
If you are trying to get a higher resolution output, but you have less than the recommended
screen resolution, click Single View Layout
on the Common toolbar. You will then be
able to use Snapshot with a higher Anti-alias setting.
Be sure that you have sufficient hard disk space for using high-resolution printing. The
general rule of thumb for calculating print file size is:
succeed.
Some features are not recommended in high-resolution printing, especially when Anti-alias
settings are greater than 1. These features include measurements, data annotations, and
text annotations.
images.
Taking snapshots of collision detection results using Wireframe highlight and an Anti-alias
set greater than 1 is not supported. For more information, see Report Collision Detection
Results Dialog Box (on page 506).
Rotate 90 degrees - Allows the rotation of output by 90 degrees. If the Rotate 90 degrees
toggle is on, the output image rotates 90 degrees (clockwise) for plotting purposes. If you
capture the image without the capture form, SmartPlant Review scans the screen image from
left-to-right, instead of top-to-bottom.
Raytrace image - Allows you to raytrace the snapshot and save the raytraced image to a file.
To use this option, you must install the Photo-Realism module.
Ignore aspect - Specifies whether to ignore the aspect ratio of the selected extent or to stretch
the image to fix the specified height and width.
Scale - Specifies the aspect ratio between the height and width of the snapshot image.
Width - Specifies the width in pixels of the snapshot image.
Height - Specifies the height of the snapshot image in pixels. If the Ignore aspect option is off,
the Width, Height, and Scale in the Dimensions box are limited by the aspect ratio of the Main
view. So if you change one field, the other fields change accordingly. If you turn the toggle on,
the Scale field is disabled and set to its default value. You can then change Width and Height
fields.
File name - Indicates the path and file name where you want to save the snapshot. If you do not
want to use the default information in the File name box, type the appropriate path and name of
the file. A Browse button is available for navigating to the correct location.
405
Making Animations
Use SmartSketch - Allows you to open the snapshot in SmartSketch as well as save the
snapshot to a file. To use this functionality, you must install the On-Site Drawing Generation
module.
Template file name - Specifies the template which SmartSketch will use to open the snapshot.
If you do not want to use the default information in the Template file name box, type the
appropriate path and name of the template file for the snapshot. A Browse button is available.
Reset All - Resets all snapshot properties to preset defaults.
See Also
Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch

1. Click View > Snapshot.
2. On the Snapshot View dialog box, select the type of display view that you want from the
Extent list.
3. Set the value for Anti-alias. Move the slider to the right to increase the value or to the left to
decrease the value.
4. If you want to rotate the view in the snapshot, select the Rotate 90 Degrees check box.
5. In the Dimensions box, select the Ignore Aspect check box if you do not want the software
to consider the aspect ratio of the view extent. If you do not select Ignore Aspect, the
software stretches the image to the specified height and width. Then, type any changes to
the pixel values in Scale, Width, and Height.
If you select Ignore Aspect, the Scale box is not available.
6. In the Output box, specify a name for the snapshot file.
7. If you have installed the On-Site Drawing module, you can select the Use SmartSketch
check box to open the snapshot in SmartSketch. Then, in the Template file name box,
specify the template SmartSketch should use to open the snapshot.
If installed, SmartSketch opens and places the snapshot inside the drawing border
specified by the selected template. If you have not installed SmartSketch, a message instructs
you to load SmartSketch before using the snapshot functionality. The snapshot process stops.
You can continue to create ordinary snapshots using the Snapshot View dialog box.
See Also
Calculate a High Resolution Snapshot

1. Calculate the number of horizontal and vertical tiles required based on scaled width and
scaled height.
T(x) = Scaled width / 128
T(y) = Scaled height / 128
2. Calculate tile size = 128 * anti-alias factor.
Tile size is equal to the minimum Main window size in x, y, pixels.
3. Calculate the total number of horizontal and vertical tiles which can be blocked per window
update.
B(x) = Main window width / tile size
B(y) = Main window height / tile size
406
Making Animations
4. Calculate the total number of updates required per snapshot.
U(x) = Number of horizontal blocks = Maximum (1, Greatest Integer (T(x) / B(x))
U(y) = Number of vertical blocks = Maximum (1, Greatest Integer (T(y) / B(y))
U = Total updates = U(x) * U(y)
Do not switch tasks or bring up any dialog boxes or menus during high-resolution printing.
SmartPlant Review will capture those images instead of the intended image. SmartPlant
Review automatically disables your screen saver for this reason.
Be sure that you have sufficient hard disk space for using high-resolution printing. The
general rule of thumb for calculating print file size is:
succeed.
images.
See Also
Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch (on page 406)
On-Site Drawing Generation Module (on page 28)
Set Key Frame Motion

The Display Key Frame Motion command displays the movie definition that you created with
the View > Save and Recall command. This command displays only those key frames with a
frame number greater than zero.
After you click OK, the Display Key Frame Motion dialog box disappears and the animation
sequence begins to play, updating all view properties. You can press Esc to stop the movie.

Play Key Frame Motion (on page 410)
Pause Key Frame Motion (on page 410)
Stop Key Frame Motion (on page 411)
Snapshot Key Frame (on page 411)
Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall (on page 413)
407
Making Animations
408
Making Animations
Display Key Frame

Motion > Key Frame > Display
Displays the Display Key Frame Motion dialog box, which allows you to set movie definition
items you created with the Save and Recall Views command. This command only displays
those key frames with a frame number greater than zero.
1. Click Motion > Key Frame > Display.
2. Select a Group.
3. Type the number of Frames per second to view.
The Display Key Frame command allows you to display the movie definition that you
created with the View > Save and Recall command.
This command only displays those key frames with a frame number greater than zero.
You also can click Display Key Frame
on the Motion toolbar.
See Also
Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box

Allows you to set movie definition items.
View group - Enables you to select the frames of a named group. This grouping is created
using the View > Save and Recall Views command.
Frames per second - Allows you to place a limit on the animation speed by specifying how
many frames you want to allow per second during playback. This value is the same value used
for the Maximum moves per second option on the Motion Settings Rate tab. If you change
one value, the software automatically changes the other. For more information, see Rates Tab
(Motion Settings Dialog Box) (on page 108).
Skip frames as needed - Allows animation to skip frames during playback to keep up with the
Frames per second value that you specify. This option provides a smoother display, which is
particularly useful for large models or limited hardware resources.
Skip frames to interval - Skips frames at a specific interval. Enter the number of frames to be
skipped during an animation.
409
Making Animations
Frames Start - Defines the starting frame of the animation sequence in the specified group. You
can type another frame number to start the animation at that frame.
Frames Stop - Defines the ending frame of the animation sequence in the specified group. You
can type another frame number at which to stop the animation.
Loop - Restarts the animation at the Start frame after reaching the End frame.
Use partial - Allows the use of partial view settings. Click Set Up Partial to define the partial
view parameters.
Set Up Partial - Displays the Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall dialog box, which allows you to
set parameters controlling the part of the views that you want to see. This dialog box is the same
as the Set Up Partial View dialog box available from the Save and Recall Views dialog box.
However, the partial view settings defined here work only for Main view key frames. For more
information about setting up partial views, see Set Up Partial View Recall Dialog Box (on page
384).
See Also
Play Key Frame Motion

Motion > Key Frame > Play
Plays the selected key frame animation from its current starting frame or from its current paused
frame.
Click Motion > Key Frame > Play Key Frames.
If the current key frame motion group does not have valid key frames, or if a key frame
motion group has not been selected on the Display Key Frame Motion dialog box, a
message is displayed, and the key frame motion exits.
You can also click Play Key Frame

on the Motion toolbar or press Ctrl+R on the
keyboard.
This command only plays the current key frame animation from its current starting frame or
from its current paused frame.
See Also
Pause Key Frame Motion

Motion > Key Frame > Pause
Pauses the current PLAYING key frame motion and/or resumes the currently PAUSED key
frame motion.
Click Motion > Key Frame > Pause Key Frames.
410
Making Animations
You can also click Pause Key Frame

on the Motion toolbar or press Ctrl+Space on the
keyboard.
This command will pause the current PLAYING key frame motion and/or resume the
currently PAUSED key frame motion.
See Also
Play Key Frame Motion (on page 410)
Stop Key Frame Motion

Motion > Key Frame > Stop
Stops the current PLAYING or PAUSED key frame animation.
Click Motion > Key Frame > Stop Key Frames.
Clicking Play resumes the key frame animation at the starting frame, not the frame at which
you stopped.
You can also click Stop Key Frame
on the Motion toolbar or press Esc.
This command will stop the current PLAYING or PAUSED key frame animation.
See Also
Pause Key Frame Motion (on page 410)
Snapshot Key Frame

Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot
Displays the Snapshot Key Frames dialog box, which provides options for saving your key
frame snapshots.
1. Click Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot.
Snapshot Key Frames Dialog Box (on page 412)
2. Select a View group.
You must define a view group using the Save and Recall View command before you
can snapshot the key frames in that group. For more information, see Save and Recall
Views (on page 391).
3. Type the frame number to Start.
4. Type the frame number to Stop.
5. Select Anti-alias amount.
Press ESC to stop the Snapshot process once it is started. You will be given the option
to save the partial snapshot that was being taken at the moment the process stopped.
For large bitmaps, increase the size of the Main view before using the higher anti-alias
settings. Best performance is achieved when the Main view is as large as possible
before running the snapshot functionality.
411
Making Animations
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
If you do not have sufficient hard disk space, you cannot generate a high resolution
snapshot with a background image using an anti-alias setting of 4.
Type a number for Width.
Type a number for Height.
Select an Output Directory.
Type a Files prefix.
Select a File type.
See Also
Snapshot Key Frames Dialog Box

Allows you to create selected snapshots of key frames.
View group - Selects a named group of frames. This grouping is created using the View > Save
and Recall Views command.
Start - Sets the start frame of an animation sequence in the specified group. You can type
another frame number to start the animation at that frame.
Stop - Sets the stop frame of an animation. You can type another frame number to stop the
animation at that frame.
Use partial - Allows the use of partial view settings. Click Set Up Partial to define the partial
view parameters.
Set Up Partial - Displays the Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall dialog box, which allows you to
set parameters controlling the part of the views that you want to see. This works in the same
manner as the Set Up Partial View dialog box available from the Save and Recall Views
dialog box. However, the partial view settings defined here work only for Main view key frames.
For more information about setting up partial views, see Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall Dialog
Box (on page 414).
Raytrace image - Allows you to raytrace a snapshot and save the raytraced image to a file. If
the Raytrace image toggle is on, the current snapshot GUI is used for creating raytrace images
and animations. To use this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.
Print only - Specifies that all snapshots go directly to the current default printer instead of to
files on the computer disk.
412
Making Animations
Rotate 90 - Allows the rotation of output by 90 degrees. If the Rotate 90 toggle is on, the
output image rotates 90 degrees clockwise for plotting purposes. If you capture the image
without the capture form, SmartPlant Review scans the screen image from left-to-right, instead
of top-to-bottom.
Extent - Specifies the view that the software uses when writing frame output. Example
selections include Main View, Application Window, and Entire Screen.
Anti-alias - Sets the anti-alias value for the snapshot. You can choose from 1 through 4. If you
select 1, the frames are the lowest quality but process quickly. If you select 2 or 3, the quality is
slightly higher but process more slowly. If you select 4, the frames are high quality but process
very slowly. Also, some anti-alias settings require that the Main view have a sufficient aspect
ratio. In some scenarios, Snapshot may fail indicating that , "The Main view is too small to do a
snapshot with an anti-alias level of 4. Please resize the view."
Ignore aspect - Allows width and height to change independently. If the Ignore aspect option is
off, Width, Height, and Scale in the Dimensions box are limited by the aspect ratio of the Main
view. If you change one field, the other fields change accordingly. If you turn the toggle on, the
Scale field is disabled and set to its default value. You can then change the Width and Height
fields independently.
Scale - Sets the scale factor of the output frame.
Width - Sets the width of the output frame.
Height - Sets the height of the output frame.
Directory - Sets the folder in which the software writes the output frames.
Browse - Allows you to select a file or folder.
Files prefix - Sets the unique portion of the output frame file name.
File type - Specifies the type of file format that the software uses when writing frame output.
You can click .RGB for Intergraph Red Green Blue file format, or click .BMP for Windows
bitmap.
See Also
Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall

1. Click Motion > Key Frame > Snapshot.
2. Click Set Up Partial on the Snapshot Key Frames dialog box.
Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall Dialog Box (on page 414)
3. Select the settings that you want to apply.
413
Making Animations
See Also
Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall Dialog Box

Allows you to turn on and off certain view settings when recalling a partial key frame.
Settings to apply - Lists available view settings that you can turn on or off when recalling a
saved key frame. When checked, the view setting in the saved key frame overrides the current
view setting when you recall the key frame. Uncheck the settings that you do not want the saved
key frame to override when the key frame is recalled. For example, if the saved key frame
contains specific eye point and center point values, but you want to keep the current eye point
and center point settings, uncheck those options to prevent the current values from being
overwritten when the saved key frame is recalled. For more information about the individual view
settings listed here, see View Settings Dialog Box (on page 211).
See Also
414
Making Animations
415
SECTION 29
Using SmartPlant Review in Streaming

Mode
Project Settings Database - The SmartPlant Review project settings database (MDB) is stored
in the temporary folder on the client machine by default. You can change this location by
browsing to another folder when creating the database for the first time. A redirection file
(filename.dbn) that points to the database location is also stored in the temporary folder. For
more information, see Understanding Projects and Project Databases (on page 71).
If you change the temporary folder location on your system, you must copy the location file
(filename.dbn) to the new temporary folder.
The project settings database is not created on the SmartPlant Foundation server and is not
pushed to the SmartPlant Foundation server when SmartPlant Review exits. However, the
project settings database can be reused on the client whenever the model data is streamed
from SmartPlant Foundation again.
Labels Database - SmartPlant Foundation streaming VUE file (SVF) data does not include any
PDS label or SmartPlant 3D attribute information, which means there is not a SmartPlant
Review labels database (MDB2) associated with SmartPlant Foundation SVF data projects. All
attribute information comes from a live connection to the SmartPlant Foundation server at
runtime. No attribute information resides on the client machine, making any SmartPlant Review
functionality based on PDS label data unusable.
Stream Button - Appears on the right side of the SmartPlant Review status bar until 100% of
the model data has been streamed into SmartPlant Review. When depressed (default), it allows
streaming to occur. To pause streaming, click the Stream button (the button pops up). Click the
button again to resume streaming. When all of the data has been streamed, this button
disappears.
Whenever you start any motion either by using the classic navigation commands or
the new 3D navigation, streaming (if in progress) of remote SVF file data stops. Streaming
automatically resumes once you stop the motion.
Streaming Data Order - When you change the view point through motion navigation,
SmartPlant Review requests streaming data ordered by proximity to the current view eye point
after motion stops (closest range first). However, when fitting or recalling a saved view,
SmartPlant Review requests streaming data ordered by the range of each packet (largest range
to the eye first). For example, fitting to the whole model requests all the model data. If the user
then fits to an object or navigates to a sub-set of the model, then the whole model may no longer
stream in. Only the current view data and any requests already in progress will be streamed.
Later streaming data requests may result in overriding earlier data requests.
Streaming Data Percent Complete Status - The status bar displays the percent complete
message as each data packet arrives until all model data has been received. It includes:
Model Streamed - the percentage of the model streamed from the server to the client so far
Files Loaded - The number of files (packets) currently loaded
Model Loaded - The percentage of the model currently loaded into memory (if memory
management is active).
417
Using SmartPlant Review in Streaming Mode

Fit All to Model and Fit View to Model Commands - When the Main view has the focus, the
View > Fit > All to Model and View > Fit > View to Model commands fit only to the range of
graphics current streamed (and visible) in the view. However, both commands will request ALL
of the data for the model to be streamed, which is compromise behavior between existing
SmartPlant Review Fit behavior for non-.SVF data and SmartPlant Foundation Viewer Fit
behavior. This way you are able to force all data to be streamed by running one of these
commands, while the actual Fit applies only to currently visible data. For more information about
these Fit commands, see Fit All to Model (on page 200) and Fit View to Model (on page 201)..
View > Fit > View to Object Command - Honors the Auto-Highlight mouse drag modes so
that you can fit to an element, to a complex element (cell or symbol), or to a component (normal
or special SmartPlant 3D component).
View > Settings Command - When streaming .SVF data without a pre-existing SmartPlant
Review project settings database, the published .SVF data provides some of the view settings,
while other view settings are initialized to various defaults. If there is an pre-existing SmartPlant
Review project settings database, then the view settings are not changed by the .SVF data. For
example, if you want to see the data with blackfaces turned on but the data was not published
with this setting on, then you need to turn on this setting after creating the SmartPlant Review
project settings database. For more information about view settings, see Configure View
Settings (on page 207).
View > Save and Recall Command - When recalling a saved view before all model data has
been streamed, the view is recalled and the data for that view range is requested from the
server (using the largest range first request order). For more information about saving and
recalling views, see Save and Recall Views (on page 391).
Project Manager - The Project Manager displays the SVF data file name as the main project
node name and displays the SVF data file name as published under the Project Files node for
PDS/SmartPlant 3D SVF data. For more information about Project Manager, see Introducing the
Project Manager (on page 141).
This file name may be an arbitrarily generated name without meaning due to current design
limitations.
For SmartPlant 3D generated VUE file data (not SVF data), this single arbitrarily generated
name may be replaced with multiple SmartPlant 3D discipline names instead, with named
level categories corresponding to various SmartPlant 3D components below them.
Item Type Display Set Criteria - When connected to SmartPlant Foundation with SVF data,
SmartPlant Review provides a new display set criteria keyword, Item Type. When you select
this keyword, a list of item types for the SmartPlant Foundation data displays. These item types
correspond to view definitions currently set up in SmartPlant Foundation. You can use the
default view definitions delivered with SmartPlant Foundation or you can create your own.
418
An important distinction from standard SmartPlant Review functionality is that the item types
(view definitions) may or may not correspond to graphic object property categories. View
definitions set up a view into ALL of the available SmartPlant Foundation data, which may or
may not include some or all of the available object properties.
When data is published from SmartPlant 3D, you may not be able view all the properties
that were published in the SmartPlant Foundation client. You can customize view definitions
to allow you to see additional properties. For more information about defining view
definitions in the SmartPlant schema, see Working with View Definitions and Create a View
Definition in the Schema Editor User's Guide. For further assistance with visualizing data in
SmartPlant Foundation, contact Intergraph Support Services.
Display set queries are based on live, runtime data inside SmartPlant Foundation. Thus,
when resolved anew during each session, the display sets may resolve to different graphic
objects than they did before if the SmartPlant Foundation data has changed.
Another important difference is that display set criteria selections may become invalid if the
SmartPlant Foundation data changes view definitions or attribute data. With PDS data, the
SmartPlant Review label database is local and (usually) static after it is created.
Operators - To facilitate SmartPlant Foundation-style queries, SmartPlant Review now supports
the Not Equals (<>) operator, which limits the search to objects containing the specified attribute
(instead of all attributes). This is a subtle difference from using the ALL BUT criteria key word.
For example:
FIND Item Type Equipment List,

Number <> 100
Returns only graphic objects in the

model within the Equipment List item
type (view definition) that have the
"Number" property with a value not
equal to 100.
FIND ALL BUT Item Type

Equipment List, Number = 100
Returns ALL graphic objects in the

model except for the few specific ones
within Equipment List item type (view
definition) that have the "Number"
property with a value equal to 100.
Display Set Manipulations - Note that display set manipulations (such as show, hide, move,
materials, and so forth) apply only to the objects currently resolved to the corresponding display
set. If data has streamed since the display set was created or loaded from the database, you
must use the Tools > Refresh Data command to resolve the display set using the new data in
memory. For performance reasons, display sets do not automatically re-resolve as new data
streams in. For more information, see Refresh Data Command (on page 33).
Because the order of the streaming VUE files varies with point of view and user actions
and/or launching SmartPlant Foundation, object numbers are valid only per SmartPlant Review
session. That is, any display sets created with Picked Objects may not be correctly resolved in
the next SmartPlant Review session or after running the Refresh Data command, because the
data may arrive in a different order. To avoid this situation, create display sets by DMRS
Linkage instead.
Auto-Highlight Locate Filter Options for SmartPlant Foundation SVF Data - When viewing
SmartPlant 3D-published SVF data from SmartPlant Foundation, SmartPlant Review provides
three additional Motion > Mouse Drag Mode > Auto-Highlight command options.
Auto-Highlight All - Queries SmartPlant Foundation for the element itself when an element is
selected. If returned, then a single element component is created. If the element was previously
grouped as a run or a feature, then that run or feature is ungrouped first. This option also affects
what properties are returned. In this mode, for example, if you click on a pipe element, you may
get Details, Item Tag: Pipe.
Auto-Highlight Features - Queries SmartPlant Foundation for all the members of SmartPlant
3D feature to which the selected element belongs. If any members are returned, then all
members currently in memory are grouped into a SmartPlant Review component, resulting in
the entire feature in memory to highlight and be selectable as a single component. If the element
was previously grouped as a run, then that run is ungrouped first. This option also affects what
properties are returned. In this mode, for example, if you click the same pipe element, you may
get Details, Item Tag: P3DPipeStraightPathFeature.
Auto-Highlight Runs - Queries SmartPlant Foundation for all the members of the SmartPlant
3D run that the selected element belongs to. If any run members are returned, then all members
currently in memory are grouped into a SmartPlant Review component, resulting in the entire
419

run in memory to highlight and be selectable as a single component. If the element was
previously grouped as a feature, then that feature is ungrouped first. This option also affects
what properties are returned. In this mode, for example, if you click the same pipe element, you
may get Details, Item Tag: P-14403-10"-1C0031.
The SmartPlant Foundation Locate Filter mode determines which properties are returned
and what elements are grouped together when selected using the SmartPlant Review
Foundation.
Because the SmartPlant Foundation Locate Filter default mode is separate from the
Mouse Drag modes and Auto-Highlight options persisted between SmartPlant Review
sessions, the Auto-Highlight All, Features, and Runs settings are not persisted between
SmartPlant Review sessions. These Mouse Drag and Auto-Highlight SmartPlant Review
commands change the Locate Filter value inside SmartPlant Foundation during the
launched SmartPlant Review session, but do not change the default Locate Filter mode.
The selection behavior of the additional auto-highlight commands is inclusive. That is, if
Auto-Highlight Runs is the current mouse drag mode, even objects that are not runs or in
a run can be selected. This behavior is consistent with previous SmartPlant Review
auto-highlight behavior for element, complex, or component options. However, the
SmartPlant Foundation Viewer selection behavior is exclusive. If the current locate filter is
runs, then only runs can be selected.
These commands are disabled with PDS SVF data, hidden with non-SVF data, and are
considered as special sub-categories of the Auto-Highlight Component mouse drag mode.
After a feature or run component has been grouped into a component, you can switch the
Auto-Highlight mouse drag mode to Auto-Highlight Components if you wish to
auto-highlight or fit to existing grouped components in memory without querying SmartPlant
Foundation again.
Component Properties - To view component properties, right-click in the Main view and select
the Properties command, which displays the Properties window. If the Properties window is
not already visible, component properties display in the Text view or Auto-Highlight pop-up text
window when you select a component. For more information, see Display Streaming Data in the
Properties Window (on page 424).
The component properties are retrieved from the live connection to the SmartPlant
Foundation data. These properties may change based on the last selected auto-highlight mouse
drag mode. Auto-Highlight All is the default at the start of each SmartPlant Review session.
Limitations When Using SVF Files (Remote Streaming Mode)

Data Sizes - Streaming VUE file (SVF) data requires a larger memory footprint than a single
SmartPlant Review VUE file containing the same model data. Therefore, system limits will be
reached quicker with SVF data than with a corresponding VUE file. Your virtual memory page
file must also be large enough to support the SVF data being streamed. For more information,
see Performance Tips (on page 551).
When the data being streamed exceeds the currently available memory, SmartPlant
Review automatically unloads data from memory in reverse of the current Streaming Data
Order. This allows higher priority data to be loaded instead. You can navigate to sub-sets of the
streaming dataset even if all of it cannot be fully loaded at the time.
Save As Command - Disabled when using SVF data. You cannot create a single VUE file
locally from SVF data.
420

Most Recent Files List - Does not maintain SmartPlant Foundation SVF data project names.
SmartPlant Review can be launched with SVF data from SmartPlant Foundation or with local
SVF data. Therefore, you cannot use the most recent file list to select a previously streamed
project from SmartPlant Foundation, but you can select one previously streamed from a local
SVF project.
Plant and Elevation View Updates - Not automatically updated, for performance reasons. You
must manually update these views in order to see any newly-streamed data in them. However,
the Main view is updated with each new streaming data packet upon arrival.
Generating Static Images during Streaming - Not advisable while streaming data because
the data arrives in an asynchronous manner and automatically updates the Main view. If you
want to print, raytrace, raytrace range, or generate a snapshot of the current view or of an
animation before all data has streamed, click the Stream button on the Status Bar to pause
streaming before trying the action. We recommend waiting until all data has streamed for the
model (100% complete) before trying these actions.
File Names - Original filenames of the published PDS data are not maintained in SVF data.
However, graphic objects will exist on their original levels. The single filename displayed in the
Project Manager, Level Settings, and in display set file selection criteria is set to the name
assigned to the SVF data when published. Streaming VUE file projects from SmartPlant
Foundation also have only a single file name. However, local streaming VUE file projects will
have file names based on predefined SmartPlant 3D disciplines.
This name may be an arbitrarily generated name without any intrinsic meaning. SmartPlant
3D data will always be on the level 1 because SmartPlant 3D does not have the concept of
levels.
For SmartPlant 3D generated VUE file data (not SmartPlant Foundation SVF data), this
single arbitrarily generated name may be replaced with multiple SmartPlant 3D discipline
names instead, with named level categories corresponding to various SmartPlant 3D
components below them.
Tools > Display Sets > Auto-Define Command - Valid only with PDS or SmartPlant 3D label
data in a SmartPlant Review label database. Since there is no label database with SmartPlant
Foundation SVF data, there is no data for use in auto-defining display sets by value.
Resolving Display Sets to Graphic Objects - Uses streamed data currently in memory (on the
client) only. Because display sets never trigger streaming for data, you must use Tools >
Refresh Data to trigger display set resolution for newly streamed data. In other words, if you
create several display sets in one session and exit SmartPlant Review, then restart SmartPlant
Review with the same SVF model data, those existing display sets are not resolved to the data
currently in memory until you click Tools > Refresh Data command.
Display Set Criteria Keywords
Data - Use the new keyword Item Type to access data information in SmartPlant
Foundation SVF data. The Data keyword does not function with SmartPlant Foundation SVF
data, but applies only to PDS or SmartPlant 3D label data that exists in the SmartPlant
Review label database. The SmartPlant Foundation .SVF data does not have a label
database and all non-graphic attribute information is on the SmartPlant Foundation server.
Picked Objects - Use the Linkages keyword to create display sets of specific objects with
SVF data. The Picked Objects keyword is valid only for the current SmartPlant Review
session with the SVF data as based on the object index of the picked object within the file.
Because SVF data can arrive in any order from session to session, the object index may
change from session to session, resulting in the display set resolving to different objects.
Item Type - Queries containing code list values are limited to the Equals (=) or Not Equals
(<>) operators because SmartPlant Foundation supports inequality operators only on
421

attributes that do not have code list values. Also, SmartPlant Foundation inequality
comparisons are string data comparisons, where the alphabetical order of the values are
used instead of numerical order, even if the values are numeric.
Tools > Materials > Assign Materials Command - Use Tools > Display Sets > Material to
assign materials to SVF data. Materials indexed by file, level, and color cannot be assigned to
SVF data. The SVF data reflects the materials that were assigned when published in SmartPlant
Foundation from SmartPlant 3D or by the SmartPlant 3D Save As SmartPlant Review
command.
SmartPlant Foundation Connection - Closing SmartPlant Foundation after launching
SmartPlant Review causes SmartPlant Review to lose its connection to the SmartPlant
Foundation data, resulting in any functionality dependent on querying SmartPlant Foundation to
not function. Therefore, we recommend leaving the SmartPlant Foundation application open
while using SmartPlant Review to view data streamed from SmartPlant Foundation.
Single SmartPlant Review Session per SmartPlant Foundation Session - SmartPlant
Foundation supports only a single SmartPlant Review session running per SmartPlant
Foundation session. If a SmartPlant Review session is running when you start a new SmartPlant
Review session from SmartPlant Foundation (with different data), the current SmartPlant
Review session automatically terminates.
DMRS Linkage Components - Use display sets and the Linkages keyword to group elements
by DMRS linkage with SVF data. Because DMRS linkage grouping cannot be maintained across
the separate data packets of the published SVF data and because performance is adversely
affected when automatically resolving the components as the data is streamed, SmartPlant
Review does not group components of the same DMRS linkage in PDS SVF data.
Limitations When Using SVF Files (Local Streaming Mode)

Resolving Display Sets to Graphic Objects - Uses streamed data currently in memory (on the
client) only. Because display sets never trigger streaming for data, you must use Tools >
Refresh Data to trigger display set resolution for newly streamed data. In other words, if you
create several display sets in one session and exit SmartPlant Review, then restart SmartPlant
Review with the same SVF model data, those existing display sets are not resolved to the data
currently in memory until you click Tools > Refresh Data command.
422

Display Streaming Data in the Properties Window (on page 424)
View Multiple VUE Files in a Single Session

If you run into memory limitations when publishing 3D model data sets using the SmartPlant 3D
Drawing Task, you can publish subsets of your SmartPlant 3D model data into multiple VUE and
.XML files that can then be opened by SmartPlant Review and combined into a single coherent
viewable session.
For best results, publish all of your subsets in a single session. Otherwise, various
synchronization issues can arise (for example, deleted objects, changed objects, attribute data
changes, and so forth).
Recommended Workflow in SmartPlant 3D

1. Create multiple 3D model documents using the Drawing Task, or use previously created
model documents. These documents may contain objects in a particular area of the plant or
objects divided between discipline filters.
2. Run Update Now on all the 3D model documents you want to review in a single SmartPlant
Review session.
3. Run Save As SmartPlant Review on all the updated 3D model documents you want to
review in a single SmartPlant Review session.
The output .XML file name must match the output .VUE file name up to the different
extension.
You are responsible for organizing this published data in a synchronized coherent
fashion for viewing in a single SmartPlant Review session. For example, you might add
a date or version number to all of the 3D model document names created in the
Drawings Task and to all of the output VUE file names.
Recommended Workflow in SmartPlant Review

1. Delete any previously created .SVF project database (MDB) file.
2. Click File > Open and select the multiple VUE files. You can multi-select only those VUE
files created by SmartPlant 3D. If you select any other file types or VUE files not produced
by SmartPlant 3D, you will receive an error message.
All VUE and XML files produced by SmartPlant 3D must reside in the same local
folder and must have the same connection ID information (database name).
3. Type a name for the new .SVF project that will combine all of the selected SmartPlant 3D
VUE files and their corresponding .XML files. SmartPlant Review then creates the SVF file
using this project name, a new project database (MDB), and a new label database (MDB2)
that contains all of the XML data associated with the VUE files, then opens the SVF project.
The XML files are read in latest modification date first order. Any duplicated data in
subsequent files is ignored.
4. After opening the SVF project, SmartPlant Review reads the VUE files from the folder
containing the SVF file.
5. SmartPlant Review Project Manager displays all of the SmartPlant 3D disciplines in the Files
node. During read-in, the discipline and component data in each VUE file is remapped to
this master project list of disciplines and components.
The VUE files are read in latest modification date first order. Any duplicated graphic
objects (with the same moniker) in subsequent files is discarded.
423
To support turning on/off individual VUE file data in local SVF projects, SmartPlant
Review Project Manager displays each VUE file name and its published disciplines as
separate project files using a combined file name syntax (for example, VueFile1\Piping,
VueFile1\Equipment, and so forth). Graphic objects published without a discipline are
grouped under just the VUE file name (for example, VueFile1).
SmartPlant Review prompts you to recreate the label database (MDB2) if any XML file
corresponding to any project VUE file (single or listed in a SVF project file) has a later
modification date than the project label database. You can choose to allow SmartPlant
Review to delete and recreate the database from the XML files, to continue without
recreating the database, or to cancel opening the project.
SmartPlant Review cannot detect if the VUE and XML files list has changed from a
previous session. If any VUE or XML files in your SVF project were removed from the
project directory, you must recreate your SVF file. You must also recreate the project
database and the label database, and then allow SmartPlant Review to recreate it.
For more information about the label database, see Understanding Projects and Project
Databases (on page 71).
See Also
Large Plant Monument Command (on page 36)
Create Project Dialog Box (on page 83)
Opening a Model (on page 81)
Open Model from Command Line (on page 88)
Display Streaming Data in the Properties Window

The Properties window displays component properties of the object selected in the Main view.
If the Properties window is not visible, right-click an object and select the Properties command.
The data displayed in the Properties window is read-only. To edit the data, you must use
SmartPlant Foundation or SmartPlant 3D.
424
Component properties are retrieved from the live connection to the SmartPlant Foundation
data. These properties may change based on the last selected auto-highlight mouse drag
mode.
If the Properties window is not visible, component properties display in the Text view or
Auto-Highlight pop-up text window when you select a component.
_ Categorize - (Default) Sorts the SmartPlant Foundation properties by categories.

_ Alphabetical - Sorts the SmartPlant Foundation properties in alphabetical order.
See Also
425
426
SECTION 30
Working in an Integrated Environment

Integration standardizes and improves the communication among the various authoring tools
you use in the course of designing, constructing, and operating a plant. SmartPlant Review
participates in an integrated environment by streaming data from SmartPlant Foundation and
SmartPlant 3D. You must install the Schema Component and the SmartPlant Client, delivered
with SmartPlant Foundation, on your SmartPlant Review workstation before you can view
streaming data. For more information, see The SmartPlant Installation and Configuration Guide
and the SmartPlant Foundation Administration User's Guide.
427
Configuring SmartPlant Review for Integration

To configure SmartPlant Review to work in an integrated environment, you must install the
Schema Component and the SmartPlant Client, which are delivered with SmartPlant
Foundation, on your SmartPlant Review workstation. For more information, see the Integration
Setup Guide.
If you are using the SmartPlant 3D Save As SmartPlant Review command, you do not
need these components because SmartPlant Review delivers the P3Dcomponent.xml file during
installation. However, if you modify the SmartPlant schema using Schema Editor, the updated
P3Dcomponent file must be copied to the SmartPlant Review delivery folder ([drive]:\Program
Groups\SmartPlant\Review) or to where you can access it using the SmartPlant Review Create
Project > SmartPlant 3D dialog box before SmartPlant Review can take advantage of these
changes.
Using SmartPlant Review in an Integrated

Environment
You can launch SmartPlant Review and view data from SmartPlant Foundation using the
following three modes.
By Project
Select a project in SmartPlant Foundation and click the View in SmartPlant Review command
to stream the entire project to SmartPlant Review.
428
If SmartPlant Review cannot find a pre-existing project settings database for the incoming
model data, the Create Project dialog box displays, asking you where to create the
database files. SmartPlant Review then fits the entire model in the Main view.
If there is a pre-existing project settings database for the incoming model data, then
SmartPlant Review recalls the last saved view and requests data only for that view.

By Object
Select an object in a project in SmartPlant Foundation, and then click the View in SmartPlant
Review command. SmartPlant Foundation streams only the selected object to SmartPlant
Review, which fits that object to the Main view.
429

From within SmartPlant Foundation Viewer
Arrange a view of selected project data in SmartPlant Foundation Viewer, and then click the
SmartPlant Review button. SmartPlant Foundation streams only the selected data to
SmartPlant Review, which then fits it to the Main view.
430
To maximize system performance when streaming data to SmartPlant Review, especially for
larger models, use one of the first two modes above. Using the third mode taxes the system
because two separate viewers are running and possibly even two streams of data are being
requested from the server at the same time (if the SmartPlant Foundation Viewer has not
finished streaming).
For details about using SmartPlant Review in the streaming modes discussed above, see
Using SmartPlant Review in Streaming Mode (on page 417).
SECTION 31
Exporting Data in PDF Format

The 3D PDF Utility enables you to export the following data from your SmartPlant Review main
view to a PDF file. Only the visible objects in the main view can be exported.
3D Graphics
Attribute Data
Tags and their attributes
Measurements
SPR Lights and Textures
Saved Views
Once you download and install this utility, you can access it using the File > Export > Main
View to 3DPDF command in SmartPlant Review. This command displays the Export PDF
dialog box for you to set the target PDF file as well as the image quality of graphics to be
included in the export.
Export PDF Dialog Box

File > Export > Main View to 3DPDF
Browse to the PDF file you want to use, or type in a pathname of the resulting PDF file.
Graphics Quality/PDF File Size - sets the graphics quality in the generated PDF file. There are
five preset options on the slider that enable you to select the best balance of a generated file
size and image quality. The higher quality setting generates a bigger file size as well as a longer
export time.
1. Range Reject On - Turns on range rejection and does not export the graphics below the
range rejection pixel tolerance.
2. Range Reject On with Half Pixel Range - Turns on range rejection with half of the pixel
tolerance as the original. This rejects a slightly fewer number of graphics.
431

3. Range Reject Completely Off - Turns range rejection off so that all the graphics (even if
they are very small in the view) get exported to PDF.
4. Range Reject Off, Better Graphics - Turns range rejection off and uses a better stroking
tolerance for the graphics. The stroking tolerance is set to 7.
5. Range Reject Off, Best Graphics - Turns range rejection off and uses the best stroking
tolerance (set to 13) for the graphics so that the graphics look smoother.
Export Attributes - Enables attributes shown in the main view to be exported to the PDF file.
Place a checkmark by this option for it to be exported.
Export Tags - Enables any tags shown in the main view to be exported to the PDF file. Place a
checkmark by this option for it to be exported.
Export Measurements - Enables all measurements shown in the main view to be exported to
the PDF file. Place a checkmark by this option for it to be exported.
Install the 3D PDF Utility (on page 432)

Export to PDF (on page 433)
View Generated PDF File (on page 433)
Install the 3D PDF Utility

Software Prerequisites
You need Adobe Acrobat Reader 9.0 or greater installed on your computer to view the exported
data.
Installation
To install this utility, you must download it from the Intergraph eCustomer website.
1. Go to http://crmweb.intergraph.com (http://crmweb.intergraph.com).
2. Enter your login information, or if you do not have a login, select I'm a new user and follow
the instructions.
3. Once you have entered eCustomer, go to Product > SmartPlant Review > Freeware
Tools and Utilities > Unsupported Freeware Utilities.
4. Click the 3DPDF Utility download and follow the instructions to install it on your computer.
The setup program automatically installs the utility at [drive]:\Program

Files\3DPDFUtility.
432
Export to PDF
Follow the steps below to use the 3D PDF Utility to export all objects in the main view of your
SmartPlant Review project to a PDF file. Make sure you have the 3D PDF Utility installed on
your computer.
1. Open the project in SmartPlant Review.
2. Select File > Export > Main View to 3DPDF.
3. Type in the pathname of the PDF file or click browse to select a PDF file.
4. In the Graphics Quality/PDF File Size section, use the slider to define the image quality of
the exported graphics. Keep in mind that the higher the quality setting, the bigger the
resulting file size.
5. Place a checkmark beside the type of objects (Attributes, Tags and Measurements) you
want to export.
6. Click OK to start the export and close the Export PDF dialog box.
The Export to PDF message displays in the SmartPlant Review status during the export
process. When the process is finished, the PDF Export Completed message displays. If
the export process encountered problems, the PDF Export Failed message displays.
View Generated PDF File

You can use Adobe Acrobat 9.0 or greater to view the resulting PDF file. You can use Adobe
navigation and view commands to see all exported data.
433
434
SECTION 32
Printing
SmartPlant Review provides high-resolution printing and other capabilities that give you
flexibility and control over printed results. To perform printing operations, use the Page Setup,
Print Preview, and Print commands on the File menu.
Some page setup and printing options may be unavailable, according to which printer and
printer driver that you select. Some dialog boxes, such as the Advanced Document Properties
dialog box, change according to the printer that you have selected.
Change Page Setup (on page 435)

Generate Print Preview (on page 437)
Print Views (on page 439)
Change Page Setup

File > Page Setup
Allows you to change media sizes, orientation from portrait to landscape, and document
properties. You can control dimensions for the printable area and image size. If you want to print
to a different printer, an associated dialog box allows you to select another printer.
The Page Setup dialog box appears with the active printer, as selected in the Printer
box after you click Start > Settings > Printers. The orientation option is unavailable for most
printers.
1. Click File > Page Setup.
Page Setup Dialog Box (on page 436)
The Page Setup dialog box automatically displays the default printer specified in
Control Panel > Printers options. The Orientation option is unavailable for some printers.
2. Select a different printer from the Printer option.
If the printer that you want is not in the printer list, click Network. Use the resulting
Connect to Printer dialog box to select the printer.
3. Select a paper size from the Page Setup > Paper Size list.
4. Click Portrait or Landscape to select an orientation.
5. Click Printer > Properties to select advanced options.
435
Printing
Page Setup Dialog Box

Allows you to tailor a page to your specific requirements. Some options may be unavailable,
based on the printer and printer driver that you select.
Size - Specifies the size of the paper or envelope that you want to use.
Source - Specifies where the paper you want to use is located in the printer. Different printer
models support different paper sources, such as the upper tray, envelope feed, and manual
feed.
Portrait - Positions the document so that the short edge of the paper is the top of the page.
Landscape - Positions the document so that the long edge of the paper is the top of the page.
Printable Area - Width specifies the width of the printable area on the page. Height specifies
the height of the printable area on the page.
One page - Width specifies the width of the page. Height specifies the height of the page.
Horizontal - Specifies the horizontal size of the image.
Vertical - Specifies the vertical size of the image.
Left - Specifies the left position of the origin point in the image.
Top - Specifies the top position of the origin point in the image.
Fit to printable area - Reduces or enlarges the image to fit in the maximum printable area.
Center Horizontally - Centers the print horizontally in the dimensions specified for print. The
image will be centered across the x-axis in the maximum printable area.
Center Vertically - Centers the print vertically in the dimensions specified for print. The image
will be centered across the y-axis in the maximum printable area.
436
Printing
Gamma - Enter a value from 0.1 to 10.0 to adjust the Gamma to more closely match the screen
display or other images. Typical effective values range from 1 to 2.
High resolution image only

Keep Aspect Ratio - Select to retain the proportion (x and y relationship) of the image. If you
change either the horizontal or vertical image size, the opposite value changes to retain the
proportion of the image. You cannot edit the values if Fit to Printable Area is selected. The
value in parentheses displays the size of the image in pixels.
Anti-alias - Specifies the level to improve images by smoothing the transitions between model
edges. You can select one of four levels. Level 1 (default) applies no anti- aliasing; level 4
applies the maximum. Print processing times increase as you increase the anti-alias level.
If you are trying to get a higher resolution output, but you have less than the recommended
screen resolution, click Single View Layout
on the Common toolbar. You will then be able
to use snapshot with a higher Anti-alias setting.
Resolutions in pixels/inch - Specifies the resolution for the print job in pixels per inch. The
printer reduces the image for values greater than its maximum resolution.
Wide - Specifies the number of pages horizontally that the image is tiled on multiple pages.
Tall - Specifies the number of pages vertically that the image is tiled on multiple pages.
Printer - Allows you to change printer options.
The high-resolution printing options are visible in the Page Setup dialog box in all modules.
However, the options are only supported in the full product and the Photo-Realism module.
Some features are not supported in high-resolution printing, especially when Anti-alias
text annotations.
See Also
Change Page Setup (on page 435)
Generate Print Preview

File > Print Preview
Allows you to see a representation of the material before you transmit the print request.
Print Preview Dialog Box (on page 438)
After you see the preview, you can proceed to print from the Print Preview dialog box by
clicking the Print button, or you can return to the standard view of the data by clicking the Close
button.
437
Printing
Print Preview Dialog Box

Allows you to preview a page as it will look when printed.
Print - Displays the Print dialog box, which allows you to select options for printing the Main
view.
Next Page - Displays the next page.
Prev Page - Displays the previous page.
Two Page -Switches the preview from one page to two pages. When Two Page is selected, the
icon changes to One Page, allowing you to switch back to a one page preview.
Zoom In - Allows you to enlarge the preview page.
Zoom Out - Allows you to decrease the preview page.
Close - Closes the Print Preview dialog box and returns you to the active window.
See Also
Generate Print Preview (on page 437)
438
Printing
Print Views
File > Print
Allows you to print the active drawing if the printer is configured for your computer.
Quick Print the Main View

1. Click File > Print.
Printing an image on- screen, rather than off-screen, takes full advantage of any
hardware acceleration and enables SmartPlant Review to capture and process the
image quickly.
Quick print main captures the Main view image at the current screen resolution and
prints the view on the selected printer.
2. Select the options for your print job.
Print Dialog Box (on page 440)
3. Click Quick print main.
Quick Print the Full View

2. Select the options for your print job.
Print Dialog Box (on page 440)
3. Click Quick Print Full.
Quick Print Full captures an image of the entire SmartPlant Review application window
at the current screen resolution and sends it to the selected printer.
Print the Main View at a High Resolution

2. Select your print job options.
3. Click High Resolution.
The high-resolution printing options are visible in the Page Setup dialog box in all modules.
However, these options are supported only in the full product and the Photo-Realism
module.
text annotations.
439
Printing
High resolution printing with the texture backing store option disabled for some graphics
cards may give bad printing results if any other window overlaps SmartPlant Review. When
this occurs, the system displays the warning message below. You can click Cancel and
remove any overlapping windows before printing.
images.
Print Dialog Box

The following features are available on the Print dialog box. Some options may be unavailable,
according to which printer and printer driver that you select.
Name - Lists the printers that are set up on your computer.

Properties - Displays the Document Properties dialog box, which allows you to choose
options for the selected printer. The available options depend on the features of the printer.
Quick print main - Captures the Main view image at screen resolution and sends it to the
selected printer.
440
Printing
Quick print full - Captures an image of all SmartPlant Review windows at screen resolution and
sends the image to the selected printer.
High resolution - Captures an image at high resolution and sends it to the selected printer.
The high-resolution printing option is visible in the Page Setup dialog box in all modules.
However, this option is supported only in the full product and the Photo-Realism module.
text annotations.
If you are trying to get a higher resolution output, but have less than the recommended
screen resolution; click Single View Layout
on the Common toolbar. You will then be
able to use Snapshot with a higher Anti-alias setting.
Number of copies - Provides a space for you to type the number of copies that you want to
print.
Collate - Allows you to specify collation for multiple copies.
See Also
Print Views (on page 439)
441
Printing
442
SECTION 33
Using Accessories
You can add commands and programs to the Accessories menu to extend the functionality of
the software. For example, you can add commands to start other programs, such as a CAD
application, a raster image editor, or a word processor. To specify which add-ins appear on the
Accessories menu, you edit the ACCESSRY.TXT file, which is located in the SmartPlant Review
application folder. For more information, see Modify the Accessories Menu (on page 444).
Add-in example programs delivered with the software demonstrate a number of custom
functions.
Text Annotations (TXTANNO.EXE) - Places, edits, turns on and off, and deletes text
annotations. You also can specify the position and color of the annotations.
Set Window Size (WINSIZE.EXE) - Specifies custom sizes for the Main, Plan, and Elevation
view windows.
Move Display Set (MOVEDSET.EXE) - Selects a display set and a distance and moves or
rotates the display set accordingly.
You can customize the add-in examples by using development tools and resources. See the API
folder for programming resources and tools. See the SmartPlant Review Programmer's Guide
(DRAPI_API.chm and DRAPIX_API.chm) for in-depth documentation on developing custom
add-in functions.
Load Accessories (on page 444)

Modify the Accessories Menu (on page 444)
Start Programs Automatically (on page 446)
Edit Images (on page 447)
Create Display Set Movement (on page 454)
Set Window Size (on page 457)
443
Using Accessories
Load Accessories
Accessories > Load Accessories
Allows you to access external programs and or API applications by adding them to the
Accessories menu. To place an application on the Accessories menu, add a call to the
application to the ACCESSRY.TXT file, save the file, then use the Load Accessories command
to read the updated file. For more information about using the Accessories menu and the
Accessry.txt file, see Modify the Accessories Menu (on page 444).
If you move or delete the Accessry.txt file, the only command available on the
Accessories menu is the Load Accessories command.
See Also
Using Accessories (on page 443)
Start Programs Automatically (on page 446)
Modify the Accessories Menu

The Accessry.txt file (delivered to the C:\Program Files\SmartPlant\Review folder) defines
entries on the Accessories menu. You can edit Accessry.txt with any ASCII text editor such as
Notepad. However, if you edit the file in a word processor, such as Microsoft Word, you must
save the file as text-only.
444
Using Accessories
File conventions
The following graphic shows the contents of the default Accessry.txt file delivered with
SmartPlant Review. The string before the equals (=) sign is the text that displays as an entry on
the Accessories menu. The ampersand (&) inserted in front of a given letter creates a
mnemonic, an underline on that letter, to aid in menu navigation. An optional working folder,
enclosed within an open bracket ([) and a close bracket (]), follows the equals (=) sign. The
working folder might be the location of other files needed by the program or may be an output
location for any files generated by the program. If not specified, the working folder is the project
folder (where the DRI file is located). The program name, including any path and any
parameters, follows the close bracket (]) if a working folder is specified. If the working folder is
not listed, the program name string follows the equals (=) sign.
Other Accessry.txt file conventions include the following:

Comment lines begin with a semicolon (;) and are ignored.
Leading or trailing white space characters are ignored.
A blank line between menu entries signifies a separator (horizontal line) on the menu. Blank
lines before first menu entry and after the last are ignored.
445
Using Accessories
To create a submenu, use greater than signs (>) to enclose menu text strings. The keyword
ENDMENU is used after the last item in the submenu.
Additional file information

The software looks for the Accessry.txt file in the following order and reads the first Accessry.txt
file found (ignores any other Accessry.txt files in any other locations).
1. In the project folder where the DRI file is located.
2. In the home folder.
3. In the product folder where SPR.exe is located.
If the first Accessry.txt file that the software finds contains entries, the software places those
entries on the Accessories menu in the order that they appear in the Accessry.txt file. The
software reads this file at program startup and when you click the Load Accessories menu
command. If you move or delete the Accessry.txt file, only the Load Accessories command is
available on the Accessories menu. Edits to the Accessry.txt file appear on the menu when you
save it and click the Load Accessories command.
See Also
Start Programs Automatically

You can automatically start an external accessories program when you start the SmartPlant
Review by designating them by an asterisk (*) in the Accessry.txt file. For example, the following
syntax in the Accessry.txt file will automatically start the Accessories > Text Annotations >
Place > One command every time that you open the software:
*Text Annotations = c:\Program
Files\Intergraph\SmartPlant\Review\Api\txtanno.exe place.
The menu entries marked by asterisks will not appear in the Accessories menu.
See Also
Edit Images (on page 447)
View Point Cloud Data

1. Install the SmartPlant Review Point Cloud Integrator module.
2. Install the point cloud software product of your choice from a point cloud software vendor.
3. Edit the C:\Program Files\SmartPlant\Review\Accessry.txt file to add the point cloud
software command calls.
4. Open the model in SmartPlant Review.
5. Click Accessories > Load Accessories to load the updated Accessry.txt file.
6. Follow the directions in the point cloud vendor documentation for using their point cloud
functionality.
446
Using Accessories
See Also
Point Cloud Integrator Module (on page 29)
Edit Images
Accessories > Paint
Launches the Microsoft Paint program, which can be used for editing images.
See Also
Manipulate Text Annotations

The Text Annotations (TXTANNO.EXE) add-in allows you to place, edit, turn on and off, and
delete text annotations. You can also specify the position and color of the annotations as well as
the leader lines.
When exiting the software, your text annotations are deleted unless the Persist option is
enabled. Set the Persist option before placement or when editing the text annotation.
You can further customize this add-in by using development tools and resources. See the
API folder for programming resources and tools.
Placing One or More Text Annotations

SmartPlant Review allows you to attach textual annotations to your model.
You can use the text annotation feature to place, edit, and move textual information, such as
equipment numbers, descriptions, and other alphanumeric strings. You can also specify the
position and color of the annotations, as well as a leader line.
After you click Text Annotations > Place on the Accessories menu, two commands are
available: One or Many. After you select one of these commands, select the element you want
to annotate. Once you confirm your selection, the software displays the Place Annotation
dialog box that allows you to approve the settings for the text.
Moving or Editing Text Annotations

After adding text annotations in the model, SmartPlant Review allows you to relocate those
annotations or change their contents and display options.
After you click Text Annotations > Move on the Accessories menu, two commands are
available: One or Many. Select One if you want to exit the Move command after moving one
text annotation. Select Many if you want the Move command to remain active so that you can
select and move additional text annotations. A message on the status bar prompts you to select
the annotation that you want to move and then confirm your selection.
After confirmation, the Move Annotation dialog box appears. You can change the location of
the leader line or the center of the label by typing in values in the North, East, and Elevation
boxes. You can use the Apply button to text the appearance of the annotation in the Main view.
The Select button allows you to define the new location with a data point, a standard 3D
placement point, or by snapping to an element in the model.
Like the Move command, the Edit command also has the One and Many options. These
commands are available by clicking Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit. A message on
447
Using Accessories
the status bar prompts you to select the annotation that you want to change and then confirm
your selection.
After confirmation, the Edit Annotation dialog box appears. You can select a different item from
Data attribute list. The Display Options group box allows you to select or clear check boxes
for Leader, Arrow, Background, Positional units, and Persist. The Colors group box allows
you to change settings in the Text, Background, and Line boxes. You can use the Apply
button to test the appearance of the annotation in the Main view.
Deleting One or More Text Annotations

SmartPlant Review allows you to delete textual annotations that you have placed in your model.
You can use the text annotation feature to place, edit, and move textual information, such as
equipment numbers, descriptions, and other alphanumeric strings. You can also specify the
position and color of the annotations, as well as a leader line.
After you click Delete on the Accessories menu, three commands are available: One, Many, or
All.
If you click One, the status bar prompts you to select the item to delete. Then, a message
prompts you to confirm the deletion and states the positional attributes for the item that you are
deleting. If you click Many, the command works the same except that you will not exit the
command after you have deleted one text annotation.
If you click All, you also receive a message that prompts you to confirm deletion of all the text
annotations in the model.
Displaying Text Annotations

SmartPlant Review allows you to show textual annotations in your model, or you can turn off the
display of the annotations.
After you click Accessories and point to Text Annotations, two commands are available: On
or Off. If the annotations currently are shown, click Off to turn off the display. If the annotations
currently are not displaying, click On to view the information.
448
Place One Text Annotation (on page 450)

Place Many Text Annotations (on page 450)
Move One Text Annotation (on page 451)
Move Many Text Annotations (on page 451)
Edit One Text Annotation (on page 452)
Edit Many Text Annotations (on page 452)
Delete One Text Annotation (on page 452)
Delete Many Text Annotations (on page 453)
Delete All Text Annotations (on page 453)
Display Text Annotations (on page 453)
Turn Off Text Annotation Display (on page 454)
Using Accessories
Place Annotation Dialog Box

Allows you to specify the contents and color of the annotation labels, as well as the appearance
of annotation leader lines.
Use these settings for annotations to follow - Sets the current settings as the default for
subsequent text annotations. This option is available on when using the Accessories > Text
Annotations > Place > Many command.
Data attribute - Lists the object's available attributes to display in the annotation. You can also
type the text to be displayed in the annotation.
Display options
Leader - Determines whether a leader line should display with the annotation.
Arrow - Determines whether an arrow should display with the annotation. This option is not
available if you have turned off the Leader option.
Background - Determines whether the background should display on the annotation label.
Positional units - Determines whether the positional units should display for the Display
Leader Point attribute. If not checked, only master unit and sub-unit will display for the
location of the leader.
Persist - Stores the created text annotation in the project database. If you turn off this
option, SmartPlant Review does not save the text annotation when you exit.
Colors
Text - Allows you to select a color for the annotation text.
Background - Allows you to select a color for the annotation background.
Line - Allows you to select a color for the annotation line.
Preview - Shows how the annotation will look based on the selected display options and the
chosen attribute.
See Also
Place One Text Annotation (on page 450)
Place Many Text Annotations (on page 450)
449
Using Accessories
Place One Text Annotation

Accessories > Text Annotations > Place > One
available: One or Many.
Allows you to place one textual annotation in your model. The command automatically exits after
you place the annotation, as opposed to the Place > Many command, which remains active so
that you can place another annotation.
1. To place a single annotation, click Accessories > Text Annotations. Then click Place >
One.
2. Click locations for a leader point and a center point. The Place Annotation dialog box
appears.
Place Annotation Dialog Box (on page 449)
3. In the Data attribute list, select an attribute to display as the annotation, or type the text that
you want to display.
4. Under Display options, select the items that you want to display.
If the Text Annotations command does not appear on the Accessories menu, edit the
ACCESSRY.TXT file delivered with the software. For more information, see Modify the
Accessories Menu (on page 444).
You can change the color of text, background, and lines for annotations. Under Colors, click
the button corresponding to the color attributes that you want to change. Use the standard
Windows Color dialog box to choose a color. The area under Preview is updated to reflect
the changes that you made.
Place Many Text Annotations

Accessories > Text Annotations > Place > Many
available: One or Many.
Allows you to place textual annotation in your model. This command does not automatically exit
after the placement of an annotation, like the Place > One command, but remains active so that
you can place additional annotations.
1. To place several consecutive annotations, click Accessories > Text Annotations. Then
click Place > Many.
2. Click locations for a leader point and a center point. The Place Annotation dialog box
appears.
3. In the Data attribute list, select an attribute to display as the annotation, or type the text that
you want to display.
4. Under Display options, select the items that you want to display.
5. You can place another annotation after clicking OK on the Place Annotation dialog box.
450
You can change the color of text, background, and lines for annotations. Under Colors, click
the button corresponding to the color attributes that you want to change. Use the standard
Using Accessories
Windows Color dialog box to choose a color. The area under Preview is updated to reflect
the changes that you made.
Move One Text Annotation

Accessories > Text Annotations > Move > One
Allows you to relocate annotation labels or leaders. The command automatically exits after
moving one annotation, unlike the Move > Many command, which remains active so that you
can move one or more annotations. After clicking the Move > One command, a message on the
status bar prompts you to select the annotation that you want to move and then confirm your
selection.
1. Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Move and select One.
2. Click the annotation that you want to move; click again to accept. The Move Annotation
dialog box appears.
3. Edit the North, East, and Elevation values to define a new coordinate for the center of the
annotation or the endpoint of the leader line.
You can also graphically identify a new coordinate for the annotation by clicking Select on
the Move Annotation dialog box and identifying the new location. The new coordinates
appear in the dialog box.
Move Many Text Annotations

Accessories > Text Annotations > Move > Many
Allows you to relocate annotation labels or leaders. This command works the same as the Move
> One command except that the command does not automatically exit after moving a single
annotation. After clicking the Move > Many command, a message on the status bar prompts
you to select the annotations that you want to move and then confirm your selection.
1. Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Move and select Many.
2. Click the annotation that you want to move; click again to accept. The Move Annotation
dialog box appears.
3. Edit the North, East, and Elevation values to define a new coordinate for the center of the
annotation or the endpoint of the leader line.
You can also graphically identify a new coordinate for the annotation by clicking Select on
the Move Annotation dialog box and identifying the new location. The new coordinates
appear in the dialog box.
451
Using Accessories
Edit One Text Annotation

Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit > One
Allows you to change the contents and display options of an annotation.
1. Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit and then select One.
2. Click the annotation that you want to edit; click again to accept. The Edit Annotation dialog
box appears.
3. Change the settings as needed.
Edit Many Text Annotations

Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit > Many
Allows you to change the details that are recorded when you create an annotation. This
command works like the Edit > One command except that the command does not automatically
exit after editing a single annotation.
1. Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Edit and then select Many.
The command remains active so that you can select and edit additional annotations.
2. Click the annotation that you want to edit; click again to accept. The Edit Annotation dialog
box appears.
3. Change the settings as needed.
Delete One Text Annotation

Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete > One
Allows you to delete a text annotation. The command automatically exits after the annotation is
deleted, unlike the Delete > Many command, which remains active so that you can delete
another annotation.
Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > On to turn the annotation display on.
1. Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete.
2. Click One to delete one text annotation. Locate and accept the annotation that you want to
delete. A Delete alert box appears. Click Yes to delete the annotation.
See Also
452
Using Accessories
Delete Many Text Annotations

Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete > Many
Allows you to delete multiple text annotations. This command does not automatically exit after
deleting an annotation, like the Delete > One command, but remains active so that you can
delete another annotation.
Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > On to turn the annotation display
on.
2. Click Many to continue in the command after deleting one text annotation. Locate and
accept the annotation that you want to delete. A Delete alert box appears. Click Yes to
delete the annotation.
See Also
Edit Many Text Annotations (on page 452)
Delete All Text Annotations

Accessories > Text Annotations > Delete > All
Allows you to delete all text annotations in the model.
Click Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > On to turn the annotation display
on.
2. Click All to delete all annotations. A Delete alert box appears. Click Yes to delete the
annotation.
See Also
Display Text Annotations

Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > On
Allows you to show textual annotations in your model.
You can also toggle the display of text annotations on or off from the Display tab on the
View Settings dialog box.
453
Using Accessories
Turn Off Text Annotation Display

Accessories > Text Annotations > Display > Off
Allows you to turn off the display of textual annotations in your model.
You can also toggle the display of text annotations on or off from the Display tab on the
Create Display Set Movement

The Move Display Set (MOVEDSET.EXE) add-in allows you to create scripts of movements
and rotations that can then be played on any selected display set. This script is not associated
with any display set. This program is useful when you need to see how an object fits into a
space in the design. For example, you can use this program to help plan equipment removal.
This add-in allows you to analyze the removal process and allows you to predict possible
problems prior to actual removal.
Using the Move Display Set API add-in, you create a sequence of movements to apply to a
display set. This sequence of movements is similar to a script, which can be saved, opened, and
revised. You can start, stop, forward- step, and reverse-step through this script of movements.
You can play the script or take a snapshot to save a view.
The interactive display set motion and edit display set position functionality in the software allow
you to directly position display sets. The final display set position is saved to the database, but
the sequence of motions is not saved.
Enable Collision Detection Using the Move Display Set API (on page 454)
Move and Rotate Display Sets (on page 455)
Enable Collision Detection Using the Move Display Set API

To enable collision detection while using the Move Display Set API, do the following:
1. Use the Tools > Collision Detection command to create the collision set.
2. Use the Motion > Settings command's Display Set tab to select the display set to move,
activate collision detection, and to select the collision set to use.
3. Switch to display set motion using the Motion > Display Set Motion command.
Thereafter, any movement using the Move Display Set API with the same display set name will
use collision detection. The results can be reviewed at any time using the Tools > Collision
Detection command. The API will only honor the current collision detection settings of the
Display Set tab of the Motion Settings dialog box if the selected display set name on the Move
Display Set API dialog box matches the currently selected display set.
454
Using Accessories
You can further customize this add-in by using development tools and resources. See the
API folder for programming resources and tools.
Move Display Sets

Accessories > Move Display Set
Displays the Move Display Set dialog box, which allows you to create scripts of movements
and rotations that can be executed on any selected display set. This program is useful when you
need to see how an object fits into a space in the design. For example, you can use this
program to help plan equipment removal. This add-in allows you to analyze the removal process
and allows you to predict possible problems prior to actual removal.
Move and Rotate Display Sets

1. Click Accessories > Move Display Set.
Move Display Set Dialog Box (on page 456)
2. Under Display set, select the display set that you want to move.
3. Under Mode, select either Screen or Movie snapshot.
To display the movements on your computer screen, select Screen.
To take a picture of the movements, select Movie snapshot.
4. Under Motion and move list, click Insert.
5. On the Edit Step dialog box, select either Move or Rotate.
6.
7.
8.
9.
If you select Move, type distance values for the North, East, and Elevation directions.
If you select Rotate, type degree values for the Front, Side, and Plan directions.
Type the number of steps for this movement. For example, you can break the process of
moving a display set into 10 distinct steps to make the process easier to analyze.
Continue to define your script of display set movement by clicking Insert or Edit.
When you are ready to begin the script, click Start.
Click File to specify a file in which to save the display script.
To define the number of seconds between each step, type a value in the Update time box.
To keep repeating the display set movement, click Loop. To step forward through the
movement and then backward, click Pong.
You can control the display set movement by clicking Continue, Forward, Reverse, and
Stop.
Only the display set that is in motion is affected. All other elements are updated according to
the active view settings. User settings are maintained and honored for all other updates.
455
Using Accessories
Move Display Set Dialog Box

Displayed by clicking Accessories > Move Display Set, this add-in accessory allows you to
create a sequence of movements to apply to a display set. This sequence of movements is
similar to a script, which can be saved, opened, and revised. You can start, stop, forward-step,
and reverse-step through this script of movements. You can play the script or take a snapshot to
save a view.
For more information about using accessories with SmartPlant Review, see Using Accessories
(on page 443). You can further customize this add-in by using API development tools and
resources. See the API folder for programming resources and tools if you have installed the API
module.
File name - Displays the file in which to save the display set script.
File - Allows you to select a file.
Display set - Provides information about the selected display set.
Name - Displays the name of the display set selected from the display set project tree.
Restore - Returns the selected display set to its original (unmoved) position.
Move display set - Sets properties for the display set movement.
Mode - Sets the mode for capturing the display set movement.
Screen - Displays the movements on your computer screen.
Movie snapshot - Takes a picture of the movements.
Update time - Specifies the number of seconds between each step.
Loop - Repeats the display set movement script until you click Stop.
Pong - Steps forward through the movement script and then backward.
Start - Begins the display set movement script.
Stop - Halts the display set movement script.
456
Using Accessories
Continue - Resumes the display set movement script.
Forward - Steps forward through the display set movement script.
Reverse - Steps backward through the display set movement script.
Motion and move list - Lists the steps defined for the display set movement script.
Insert- Creates a new step in the script. You can specify the step as moving or rotating.
Edit - Allows you to change a step.
Delete - Moves the selected step.
Number of steps - Displays the number of steps in the script. M indicates moving and R
indicates rotation.
Delta distance/degree - Displays the distances for moving and degrees for rotation.
SmartPlant Review version - Displays the current version of the software.
See Also
Create Display Set Movement (on page 454)
Set Window Size

Accessories > Set Window Size
Allows you to change the size of the software windows. You can use this add-in to set a window
to 640 X 480 pixels to obtain the correct aspect ratio for animations. This add-in ensures the
aspect ratio of the Main view is correct before you save the animation view, providing a What
You See Is What You Get (WYSIWYG) animation sequence.
1. Click Accessories > Set Window Size.
Set Window Size Dialog Box (on page 458)
2. Under View, select the view window that you want to modify (Main, Plan, or Elevation
views).
3. Type new width and height coordinates for the window, and then click Set. The window
displays in its new size.
Under Application window, you can view the width and height of the entire application
window.
457
Using Accessories
If the Set Window Size command does not appear on the Accessories menu, edit the
Set Window Size Dialog Box

Allows you to change the size of the software windows. You can use this dialog box to set a
window to 640 X 480 pixels to obtain the correct aspect ratio for animation.
Name - Allows you to select the type of window.

Set - Sizes the new window to the new size.
Old width - Displays the width of the window in pixels.
Old height - Displays the height of the window in pixels.
New width - Type a new width in pixels.
New height - Type a new height in pixels.
Width - Displays the width of application window in pixels.
Height - Displays the height of application window in pixels.
SmartPlant Review - Displays the current version of the software.
See Also
Set Window Size (on page 457)
458
SECTION 34
Rendering Photo-Realistic Images

SmartPlant Review's Photo-Realism module provides basic features for assigning materials to
objects, placing lighting, and raytracing your model to create realistic, high-quality images. Such
images are important to communicate and promote a clear understanding of a project. For
example, EPCs might use in-depth visualizations to sell a final design to an owner-operator, or
an owner-operator might use visualization to study light placement in maintenance areas of a
plant.
SmartPlant Review uses a raytracing algorithm to build these images. After you assign materials
to objects and place lights in the model, advanced rendering techniques can transform the
model into photograph quality art. The memory-efficient raytracer is multi-threaded to take
advantage of all the available processors on the user's computer, so even very large models can
be rendered quickly.
About OpenGL Lighting

While not as accurate as the raytracer, OpenGL lights are well-suited for providing a quick and
approximate preview of what the lighting looks like in the raytracer. Note the distinct differences
in how each lights a drawing. OpenGL relies on a geometric vertex-by-vertex basis, whereas the
raytracer lights a drawing on a pixel-by-pixel basis. Consequently, the resulting output of the two
methods is not identical.
Usage of OpenGL lighting is controlled using the Activate source lights option on the
Photo-Realism Settings dialog box. OpenGL lights are used once the following conditions
have been met:
Photo-Realism module is installed.
The Shaded view check box in the Activate source lights option is selected.
Lights have been placed in the model.
The lights in the model are turned on.
There are limitations to using OpenGL lights, as illustrated in the following diagrams. In each
diagram, the circles represent spotlights. The red circles are spotlights that are visible, and
the black circles are spotlights that are not visible.
OpenGL lights a triangle only if light hits a vertex on that triangle - any lighting shining in
between vertices will not show up on a triangle.
Although OpenGL does shine light through solid objects, unlike the raytracer, it does not
know when to stop.
459

The triangle on the left will light because the spotlight is shining on at least one vertex. The
triangle on the right will not light because the spotlight shines between the vertices.
The rectangular plane (shape) is drawn as two large triangles. The spotlight circle (shown in red)
on the upper-left corner will be visible in the plane because it is shining on a vertex. The
spotlight circle (shown in black) in the middle of the plane will not be visible because it does not
hit a vertex.
Placing Lights
Three different types of lights can be placed in your model: Spot, Point, and Distant. Each of
the New Light Settings commands prompt you to specify a position (using either standard
three dimensional placement or a data point in any graphic view) and size of a new light, and
then displays the corresponding light dialog box.
The physical location for the lights is as follows:
For point lights, the center of the spherical glyph.
For distance lights, the neck of the arrow glyph.
For spot lights, the neck of the flash light glyph
You cannot change the type of light after placement. To change a spot light to a point
light, for example, you must delete the spot light and then place a new point light.
460

Raytracing
SmartPlant Review's raytracer process produces quality images that include true light reflection,
transparency, refraction, and shadowing. These images enable you to see the true
characteristics of the materials that you selected for your model by accurately mimicking the way
actual light reflects off your model surfaces.
The Raytrace process allows you to set the anti-alias level, to select a specific region of the view
to be processed, to scale the final image size, elect to raytrace directly to a file, and set up batch
raytrace processes.
Configure Photo-Realism Settings (on page 461)

Set Global Lighting (on page 470)
Place a New Point Light (on page 478)
Place a New Distant Light (on page 479)
Place a New Spot Light (on page 480)
Edit Source Light (on page 486)
Lighten Shadows (on page 488)
Delete a Source Light (on page 488)
Raytrace a View (on page 489)
Set a Raytrace Range (on page 490)
Edit Raytracing Options (on page 490)
Configure Photo-Realism Settings

View > Photo-Realism > Settings
Displays the Photo-Realism Settings dialog box, which allows you to:
Specify options for background and environment box images.
Control the quality and speed of the raytrace program on a per model/material basis.
Define settings for Reflective or Transmittance Threshold and Bounce, Gamma, and
Anti-alias level.
Enable raytrace generation without shadows.
Specify whether SmartPlant Review renders the entire model, or only the part of the model
within the view cone.
See Also
Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box (on page 462)
461
Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box

Provides features that allow you to load a background image and environment box into the Main
view. You can also use this dialog box to control the quality and speed of the raytracing
program, as well as choose options for improving system performance during raytracing
operations.
See Also
Environment Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box) (on page 462)
Raytrace Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box) (on page 463)
Advanced Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box) (on page 469)
Environment Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box)

Provides options for loading a background image and environment box into the Main view.
Although these image settings are available only with the Photo-Realism module, the
background and environment box can appear in any render mode, not just shaded or raytrace.
These images can be in any of the image type formats supported by SmartPlant Review,
including BMP, TIF, RGB, JPG, GIF and PNG.
None - Specifies that you do not want any environment displays in the scene.
Background - Specifies that you want to display a background image in the Main view. Like
wallpaper on the Windows desktop, the background image is sized to the view and always
appears the same; regardless of what eye location or view angle that you specify.
Environment box - Specifies that you want to surround the three dimensional model space with
several images. You can specify up to six different images, one for each side of the environment
box. The images are not sized to the screen. Instead, a correct, infinite environment map is
created before a shade or wireframe update. The environment map is created dynamically
during a raytrace. As with background images, different sides of the box are visible with different
view angles and eye locations.
462

MicroStation - Specifies that any MicroStation source lights (that are on) be displayed in the
rendered image. If this option is not selected, no MicroStation source lights are used when
rendering the image.
Shaded view - Specifies that you want to display point, distance, spot, and area lights in the
shaded view of the model, as well as the rendered image.
Image files - Lists all of the possible file types and their locations for the background image and
environment box.
Clear - Removes a file name and path from the Location list.
Modify - Displays the Modify Location dialog box, in which you can add or modify an image file
location.
To add or modify the location of an image file, you must click a row in the Image files list
box, and then click Modify.
See Also
Raytrace Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box)

Provides options for controlling the quality and speed of the raytracing program.
During the raytracing process, the software sends rays across the monitor like a scanner.
There are two types of raytracing: forward and backward. SmartPlant review uses backward
raytracing. In backward raytracing, the software starts from the eye and sends a ray that goes
into the scene and looks for light. Forward raytracing looks for light and then sends a ray back to
the eye.
463

Because raytracing gives the effects of shadows, reflections, and transparency, it is significantly
better than the smooth texture shading offered by OpenGL. However, raytracing is not truly
photo realistic; the options on this tab are designed to compensate for the imperfections in the
raytracing technology.
For detailed information about each option on the Raytrace tab, see the following topics.
Reflective Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab) (on page 465)
Reflective Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab) (on page 465)
Transmittance Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab) (on page 466)
Transmittance Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab) (on page 467)
Gamma Option (Raytrace Tab) (on page 467)
Anti-alias Option (Raytrace Tab) (on page 467)
Generate Shadows Option (Raytrace Tab) (on page 469)
Raytrace Option (Raytrace Tab) (on page 469)
Neutral Gray Background Option (Raytrace Tab) (on page 469)
During raytracing, 95% of the algorithm's time is spent looking in the model to see whether
the ray hit anything, and then attempting to identify what it hit.
Raytraced reflective surfaces are true reflections of the environment and do not depend
upon applied reflective textures.
Although forward raytracing is far superior in quality, the performance cost is extremely high.
See Also
464

Reflective Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab)
The Reflective threshold from 0 to 1 option specifies a global threshold that determines
whether or not the raytracer should spawn additional rays off of shiny surfaces in the model,
such as mirrors.
For example, if the model contains a large shiny surface that is close to the eye point, such as a
building with large surfaces of mirrored glass, you should set this option to a low value to
produce multiple reflective rays in the output image. However, if a model contains a reflective
object that is very far from the eye point, this option should be set to a high value. This prevents
the raytracer from computing reflection rays that will have little influence on the overall quality of
the image.
Decreasing the number of reflection rays by setting the value closer to 1 can significantly
increase performance.
Because the effect of these settings is different for each model and material in the model,
you are encouraged to modify these settings and re-run the raytracing command several
times to get the effects that you want.
We recommend that you set this control to 0.6, which means only objects greater than 60%
reflective will not have additional reflection rays spawned.
In the Material Editor dialog box, the Reflectivity setting of the object's material determines
whether or not the object is reflective. If the object is not reflective, additional rays are not
fired.
If the Reflectivity setting (found in the Material Editor dialog box) for a texture is greater
than or equal to 0.15 (15%), the texture will be environment mapped in shaded OpenGL
mode. Environment mapping gives a curved or mirrored appearance to the texture.
The Finish setting of the material (found in the Material Editor dialog box) determines the
smoothness of the object surface and controls whether and by what amount the second ray
is skewed.
Reflective Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab)

If the raytracer needs to spawn additional reflection rays to determine the color of a reflective
object, such as a mirror, the Reflective bounce from 1 to 16 option allows you to specify the
number of additional rays.
We recommend setting this control to 2 because, in most cases, only two reflections are
required to correctly determine the pixel color of a reflective surface. Because most objects
in nature aren't very reflective, a high setting like 16 would be necessary only if you were
conducting a study in a house of mirrors.
Reflective bounces are expensive in terms of performance.
Color intensity decreases with each bounce.
465

Transmittance Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab)
The Transmittance threshold from 0 to 1 option specifies a global stop threshold that
determines whether or not the raytracer should spawn additional rays off of transparent surfaces
in the model, such as glass.
For example, if the model contains many transparent surfaces that are close to the eye point,
such as a glass milk bottle factory, you should set this option to a low value in order to produce
multiple reflective rays in the output image. However, if the model contains a transparent object
that is very far from the eye point, you should set this option to a high value to limit the number
of reflection rays the raytracer computes.
In the Material Editor dialog box, the Transmittance setting of the material of the object
determines whether or not the object is transparent. At a minimum, transparent objects always
create at least two additional rays. If the object is not transparent, additional rays are not fired.
466
Decreasing the number of transmittance rays by setting the value closer to 1 can
significantly increase performance.
The Refraction setting of the material (defined in the Material Editor dialog box)
determines the thickness of the object surface and how much the third ray should bend.
We recommend setting this control to 0.4, which means objects greater than 40%
transparent will have additional transmittance rays created.

Transmittance Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab)
If the raytracer needs to create additional rays to determine the color of a transparent object,
such as glass or clear plastic, the Transmittance bounce from 1 to 16 option allows you to
specify the number of additional rays necessary.
We recommend setting this control is 5. Although the raytracer supports up to 16

transparent bounces for those models that contain many transparent surfaces, such as a
milk bottle factory, a single object can only be hit with 5 transparent bounces.
Transmittance bounces are expensive in terms of performance. This safeguard prevents
recursion overflow such as the inside of a Christmas tree ornament or other perfectly,
spherical, shiny transparent objects.
Color intensity decreases with each bounce.
Gamma Option (Raytrace Tab)

The Gamma from 0 to 4 option specifies a value for correcting red, green, and blue (RGB)
values when the raytracing output goes to video frame buffers that do not have gamma
adjustments or to Intergraph RGB file formats. This value is applied to each pixel as an RGB
triplet prior to final output.
We recommend setting this control to one (1), but only if gamma correction is needed.
Otherwise, the setting should be zero (0). Because the effect of these settings is different for
each model and material in the model, you are encouraged to modify these settings and re-run
the raytracing command several times to get the effects that you want.
Only users who are using a hardware frame buffer should modify the default value for this
option.
This option does not control image brightness when there are too few or too many lights in
the scene.
Anti-alias Option (Raytrace Tab)

The Anti-alias from 1 to 13 option specifies the number of rays per pixel that the raytracer
should fire to determine the final color. Use this option to reduce the jagged edges of surfaces
that should appear smooth.
To simulate the ModelView settings of low and high anti-aliasing, use 3 rays for low and 9
rays for high.
We recommend setting this control to 1. At a setting of 1, only a single ray is fired into each
pixel, and that ray goes directly into the center of the pixel. As a result, objects that are only
partially displayed in the pixel may be missed.
467
Increasing this option slows the performance speed of the raytracer. However, increasing
anti-aliasing from 1 to 2 does not necessarily double raytracing time. It depends on whether
or not the second ray hits an object and has to spawn additional rays. The following
illustration shows where all the rays are fired as you increase the number of rays through
anti-aliasing.
Although the raytracer supports an anti-alias setting of up to 13 rays per pixel, additional
rays are fired only if the primary ray determines that potential additional intersections in the
ray cone exist. This method prevents unwanted and time-consuming rays against flat
surfaces
468

Generate Shadows Option (Raytrace Tab)
The Generate shadows option overrides all other lighting shadow options (global and source)
to generate raytraced images without shadows. With this setting you can avoid manually turning
off shadows for every individual light in the model. By default, this option is selected.
When this option is disabled, no shadows are generated in the raytraced image, even if all
lights have shadows turned on.
Raytrace Option (Raytrace Tab)

The Raytrace option enables you to raytrace the preview globe on the Material Editor and
other material dialog boxes.
Raytracing the globe provides a better representation of materials, especially materials
with ambient properties.
Neutral Gray Background Option (Raytrace Tab)

The Neutral gray background option allows you to use a neutral gray background instead of
the pipes behind the preview globe on the Material Editor and other material dialog boxes. This
option shows the material color a little more clearly.
Advanced Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box)

Provides options for improving system performance during raytracing operations.
469

Illumination threshold from 0 to 1 - Specifies the minimum threshold for firing rays into dark
areas. The default value is 0.11, which is almost black.
Spawned rays from 1 to 100 - Specifies the total number of rays the raytracer spawns to
calculate the illumination of a pixel. The default value is 8.
Higher values increase the amount of time necessary to raytrace the image.
Everywhere - Specifies that rays will extend throughout the entire model, not just within the
view. When this option is selected, all the lights, textures, and other information in the model
must be loaded into memory for the raytrace. For this reason, of the two options available, this
option causes the most performance degradation.
Only within the View Cone - Specifies that rays will only extend within the volume of the view
cone. However, all light sources, whether in the view or not, are considered when rendering the
view. Setting this option means that objects located outside the view cone have no affect on
rays generated in their direction. Objects outside of the view cone will also not cast shadows into
the view.
Use only a single processor for raytraces - Specifies that only one of multiple available
processors be used by the raytracer. Select this option if you want to continue working in other
programs while the raytracer generates the image.
As rays bounce around a scene, the contribution of light diminishes. For areas that are
below the value defined in the Illumination threshold, the raytracer does not fire any rays.
See Also
Set Global Lighting

View > Photo-Realism > Global Lighting Settings
Displays the Global Lighting dialog box, allowing you to edit options for controlling the light that
envelops objects, the light from a camera flash bulb, the light from the sun, and light dispersion
through fog.
1. Click View > Photo-Realism > Global Lighting Settings.
Global Lighting Dialog Box (on page 471)
2. Select the Ambient tab to control the light that envelops objects.
3. Select the Flashbulb tab to control the light from a camera flashbulb.
4. Select the Solar tab to control the light from the sun.
5. Select the Fog tab to control the computation of fog.
See Also
World Map Dialog Box (on page 475)
Cities Dialog Box (on page 476)
Solar Vector Dialog Box (on page 477)
Time Zones Dialog Box (on page 474)
470
Global Lighting Dialog Box

Provides features that allow you to control lighting properties globally within the model. To use
this functionality, you must install the Photo-Realism module.
See Also
Ambient Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box) (on page 471)
Flashbulb Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box) (on page 472)
Solar Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box) (on page 473)
Fog Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box) (on page 478)
Ambient Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box)

Provides options for controlling the light that envelops objects. Ambient light simulates light
scatter in nature, and it is used to soften shadows and simulated natural light shining through a
window. When used properly, ambient light can closely simulate a radiosity solution. Ambient
light can also be designed for use with scene lighting.
Activate - Allows you to use ambient lighting in the raytraced image. Ambient light affects only
those objects that have a value for material ambient reflectivity. Objects that have no ambient
reflectivity will not reflect light and could appear black if no additional lights are defined in the
scene. Because ambient light is not cumulative, objects in front of a mirror are not brighter than
the mirror itself.
Intensity from 0 to 1 - Controls the intensity of the ambient light. We recommend setting this
option to 0.15.
Color - Controls the color of the ambient light. A recommended setting for this control is white
(RGB 255, 255, 255).
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to choose an alternative color for the ambient
light.
See Also
471
Flashbulb Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box)

Provides options for controlling the light from a camera flashbulb. This type of lighting is
particularly useful for people who want to create "pretty pictures" but do not know how to set the
lights properly in their models. A warning appears in the Text window if no lights have been
defined in the current scene, and to prevent an un-viewable render, a default flashbulb light is
used automatically.
Activate - Allows you to use flashbulb lighting in the raytraced image. Flashbulb lighting does
not generate shadows because the flashbulb location is the same as the eye point. As a result,
flash lighting is also useful during material setup to determine the overall color balance of the
image. Flashbulb lighting acts as a point light at the camera lens. As with point lights, there is
light falloff from the camera, which is controlled by Intensity.
Intensity from 0 to 1 - Controls the intensity of the flashlight bulb. We recommend setting this
option to 0.70.
Color - Controls the color of the flashbulb light. We recommend setting this option to white
(RGB 255, 255, 255).
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to choose an alternative color for the
flashbulb light.
Flashbulb lighting should be used rather than ambient lighting when no lights are present
in the model because flashbulb lighting is not affected by material ambient reflectivity.
See Also
472
Solar Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box)

Provides options for controlling the light from the sun.
Activate - Allows you to use sunlight in the current scene.

Intensity from 0 to 1 - Controls the intensity of the solar light. We recommend setting this
option to 0.70.
Color - Displays the current color of the solar light. We recommend setting this control to white
(RGB 255, 255, 255).
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to choose an alternative color for the solar
light.
Cast shadows - Allows you to generate shadows from the solar light.
Latitude - Specifies the North/South position of the model's location in degrees. This position
includes both a numerical value and a qualifier, either North or South. You can type values in
these fields or use the Zone, Map, or Cities buttons to pick the model's latitude.
Longitude - Specifies the East/West position of the model's location in degrees. This position
includes both a numerical value and a qualifier, either East or West. You can type values in
these fields or use the Zone, Map, or Cities buttons to pick the model's longitude.
GMT offset - Specifies the difference between Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the time at the
model's location. You can type in a value or use the Zone or Cities buttons to pick the correct
offset.
Zone - Displays the Time Zones dialog box, which allows you to choose the GMT offset by
picking a zone's region or description from a list. By default, the first instance of the current zone
is selected. For more information, see Time Zones Dialog Box (on page 474).
Map - Displays the World Map dialog box, from which you can choose the latitude, longitude by
picking a location from a world map. For more information, see World Map Dialog Box (on page
475).
Cities - Displays the Cities dialog box, from which you can choose the latitude, longitude, and
GMT offset by picking a city name from a list. The nearest city to the current latitude and
473

longitude, based on a rough distance estimate, is selected by default. For more information, see
Cities Dialog Box (on page 476).
Date - Specifies the date for calculating how the sun should appear in the model. The default
date is your computer's time when you first created the project database, for example, the date
when you first opened the project in SmartPlant Review. You can change this date by clicking
the down arrow and picking a new date from the calendar.
Time - Specifies the time of day for calculating how the sun should appear in the model. The
default time is your computer's time when you first created the project. For example, when you
first opened the project in SmartPlant Review. You can modify this time by clicking the up and
down arrows.
Daylight savings - Specifies whether or not the specified time is daylight savings time.
Use vector - Allows you to lock the sun's position to a specific vector, rather than calculate the
vector from the latitude and longitude values. When this box is checked, the options under
location are not available. When this box is not checked, the values in the longitude and latitude
boxes feed the X, Y, and Z coordinates and angles on the Solar Vector dialog box. However,
changes made to these coordinates on the Solar Vector dialog box are not reflected in updates
to the Latitude and Longitude fields. For more information, see Solar Vector Dialog Box (on
page 477).
Vector - Displays the Solar Vector dialog box, which allows you to lock the sun to a certain
vector. This option effectively mimics the IGDS/MicroStation default sunlight.
Time Zones Dialog Box

Allows you to choose the GMT offset by picking a zone's region or description from the list of
regions.
Select time zone - Allows you to set the GMT offset by selecting a zone's region or description
from a list. By default, the first instance of the current zone is selected. You can sort the Select
time zone list by clicking any of the columns in the grid. By default the list is sorted
alphabetically by Description. When you click OK, the GMT offset field on the Solar tab
displays the appropriate value for the selected time zone.
474

See Also
World Map Dialog Box

Allows you to choose the latitude, longitude, and GMT offset by interactively picking a location
from a world map.
A ToolTip displays the latitude and longitude as the bull's eye indicator
is dragged across
the map. When the bull's eye is released, the latitude and longitude fields automatically update
with that location's corresponding north/south and east/west position (in degrees).
Latitude - Specifies the North/South position of the model's location in degrees. This position
includes both a numerical value and a qualifier, either North or South. You can type values in
these fields or use the bull's eye indicator on the map to specify the latitude. The current latitude
and longitude are displayed in a ToolTip when the bull's eye indicator is dragged to a new
location. Releasing the bull's eye indicator at that position will populate the Latitude and
Longitude fields.
Longitude - Specifies the East/West position of the model's location in degrees. This position
includes both a numerical value and a qualifier, either East or West. You can type values in
these fields or use the bull's eye indicator on the map to specify the longitude. The current
latitude and longitude are displayed in a ToolTip when the bull's eye indicator is dragged to a
new location. Releasing the bull's eye indicator at that position will populate the Latitude and
Longitude fields.
475

GMT offset - Specifies the difference between Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and the time at the
model's location. You can type in a value or use the Zone or Cities buttons on the Solar tab to
pick the correct offset.
City - Displays the name of the city selected in the Cities dialog box or with the bull's eye
indicator. If the bull's eye indicator passes over a city listed in the Cities dialog box, then the city
name displays in the ToolTip beside the latitude and longitude coordinates. Releasing the bull's
eye indicator at that position will populate the city field in addition to the Latitude and Longitude
fields on the World Map dialog box.
The OK button on this dialog box populates the Latitude, Longitude, and GMT offset
fields on the Solar tab with the values from their respective fields on the dialog box.
See Also
Cities Dialog Box (on page 476)
Cities Dialog Box

Allows you to choose the latitude, longitude, and GMT offset by interactively picking a city name
from the list. By default, the list is sorted alphabetically by city name.
Select city - Allows you to select a city from the list to set the latitude, longitude, and GMT offset
for the solar lighting. By default, the list is sorted alphabetically by city name. However, you can
sort this list by clicking any of the columns in the grid.
By default, the nearest city to the current latitude and longitude (based on a rough distance
estimate) is selected.
The OK button on this dialog box populates the Latitude, Longitude, and GMT offset fields
on the Solar tab with the appropriate values for the selected location on the map.
See Also
476

Solar Vector Dialog Box
Allows you to lock the sun to a certain vector. This effectively mimics the IGDS/MicroStation
default sunlight.
X - Defines the X coordinate of the solar lighting directional vector.

Y - Defines the Y coordinate of the solar lighting directional vector.
Z - Defines the Z coordinate of the solar lighting directional vector.
Azimuth from 0 to 360 - Controls the bearing of the solar light in degrees ranging from 0 to
360, 0 degrees being North. Clicking OK sets the sun to the specified vector but does not
populate the Latitude, Longitude, and GMT offset fields on the Solar tab with the values for
the selected vector and angle.
Altitude from -90 to 90 - Controls the angle of the sun above (positive values) and below
(negative values) the horizon in degrees ranging from -90 to 90. Clicking OK sets the sun to the
specified vector but does not populate the Latitude, Longitude, and GMT offset fields on the
Solar tab with the values for the selected vector and angle.
The solar directional vector defines the exact direction of the solar lighting.
When the X, Y, Z coordinates are adjusted, the Azimuth and Altitude angles are updated
to reflect the current values.
When the Azimuth and Altitude angles are adjusted, the X, Y, and Z coordinates are
updated to reflect the current values.
When the Use Vector option is not selected, the values in the longitude and latitude boxes
feed the X, Y, and Z coordinates and angles on the Solar Vector dialog box. However,
changes made to these coordinates on the Solar Vector dialog box are not reflected in
updates to the Latitude and Longitude fields.
See Also
477
Fog Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box)

Provides options for controlling the computation of fog.
Activate - Select to use fog in the current scene.

Intensity from 0 to 1 - Controls the density of the fog effect. A value of 1 is extremely foggy.
The current distance between the eye point and center point of the view also affects the density
of the fog in the current scene.
Color - Displays the current fog color.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to choose an alternative fog color.
See Also
Place a New Point Light

View > Photo-Realism > New Point Light
Allows you to place a new point light. After specifying a position and size for the new point light,
the New Point Light dialog box displays, allowing you to adjust the light options.
1. Click View > Photo-Realism > New Point Light. You also can select Point Light
the Photo-Realism toolbar.
2. Enter the point where the light should be placed.
3. Enter a second point to indicate the interest point of the light.
on
This second point is used to determine both the lighting direction and also the light's
falloff distance (used for the MicroStation, Fast, and Slow attenuation effects).
478

4. In the New Point Light dialog box, enter a name for the new source light.
New Light Dialog Box (on page 480)
5. Modify any other properties as needed.
To see the effect of the new light, click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range and
identify a small range around the light.
The glyph color of a source light matches the color of the light being cast (as specified on
the New Source Light > Effects tab).
You cannot change the type of light after placement. To change a spot light to a point light,
for example, you must delete the spot light, and then place a new point light.
See Also
Place a New Distant Light

View > Photo-Realism > New Distant Light
Allows you to place a new distant light.
1. Click View > Photo-Realism > New Distant Light. You also can select Distant Light
on the Photo-Realism toolbar.
3. Enter a second point to indicate the light's interest point.
4. In the New Light dialog box, enter a name for the new source light.
479
Place a New Spot Light

View > Photo-Realism > New Spot Light
Allows you to place a new spot light.
1. Click View > Photo-Realism > New Spot Light. You also can select Spot Light
Photo-Realism toolbar.
3. Enter a second point to indicate the light's interest point.
on the
4. In the New Light dialog box, enter a name for the new source light.
New Light Dialog Box

Provides options for controlling the source light position, effects, and attenuation. The dialog box
for each type of source light (point, spot, and distant) have identical fields. Therefore, the
following descriptions, except where indicated, apply to all three light source dialog boxes.
You cannot change the type of light after placement. To change a point light to a spot
light, for example, you must delete the point light, and then place a new spot light.
See Also
Information Tab (New Light Dialog Box) (on page 481)
Position Tab (New Light Dialog Box) (on page 482)
Effects Tab (New Light Dialog Box) (on page 483)
Attenuation Tab (New Light Dialog Box) (on page 485)
480
Information Tab (New Light Dialog Box)

Provides options for controlling the light display, position, and effects.
Light name - Specify the light name. By default, this string is "New Light" with numerical
increments. Light names do not have to be unique. However, unique names allow you to identify
lights more easily. The light name is limited to 32 characters for .VUE support
MicroStation lights cannot be named.
Type - Displays the type of light, such as Spot, Point, or Distance. This box is not editable.
Level index - Assigns the selected light to a specific Level (1-63). This allows you more
flexibility in using existing level, material assignments, and display set functionality in
combination with source lights.
Color index - Assigns a specific color level (0-255) to the selected light. This allows you more
flexibility in using existing level, material assignments, and display set functionality in
combination with source lights.
File - Displays the name of the master file to which the SmartPlant Review source lights are
associated.
Size: - Provides a place for you to type the size of the light geometry.
Show - Specifies whether the light geometry should display in each view of the model. By
default, this option is selected.
The display set containing the specified light must be active; otherwise, the light
geometry will not display.
Shade - Specifies whether or not the light geometry should appear in shaded or wireframe
mode in the model.
Show in Main View only - Works in tandem with the Show option to restrict the display of the
light to the Main view only.
See Also
481
Position Tab (New Light Dialog Box)

Provides options for you to key in precise positions for the light. By default, the fields on this tab
are populated with coordinates that the user selected during light placement.
Location
North - Specifies the north coordinate of the new light.

East - Specifies the east coordinate of the new light.
Elevation - Specifies the elevation coordinate for the new light.
Pick Point - Allows selection of the3D North/East/Elevation point from within the model.
For more information, see Placing 3D Points (on page 277).
Interest - In source lighting, interest is the second point in a two-point placement that
determines where the light is cast and/or its falloff rate. For distant and spot lights, the interest
point represents a point on a line from the light location in the direction that the light is cast. For
point and spot lights, the interest point is also the falloff point (where the attenuated intensity of
the light is one-half of its original intensity).
Absolute - Switches the interest coordinate fields to accept the absolute directional values
for the new light. This option allows you to define the direction of the light by specifying
distances from the origin of the model.
Delta value - Switches the interest coordinate fields to accept delta offset values for the light
direction. This option allows you to define the direction of the light by specifying distances
from the location of the light.
Delta direction - Switches the interest coordinate fields to accept delta directional offset
values for the light. Selecting this option changes the offset fields to Distance, Bearing
Angle, and Elevation Angle. This option allows you to define the direction of the light by
specifying a distance and two angles from the location of the light.
North - Specifies the absolute or delta value for the north coordinate of the direction of the
new light.
482
East - Specifies the absolute or delta value for the east coordinate of the direction of the
new light.
Elevation - Specifies the absolute or delta value for the elevation coordinate of the direction
of the new light.
Distance - Specifies the delta direction distance for the direction of the new light.
Bearing Angle - Specifies the delta direction bearing angle for the direction of the new light.
Elevation Angle - Specifies the delta direction elevation angle for the direction of the new
light.
Pick Point - Allows you to select the 3D point. For more information, see Placing 3D Points
(on page 277).
When placing point fall-off using a data point, the mouse move provides only two
coordinates. The missing coordinate for the view selected is defaulted to the center point of
the Main view.
Points picked in the model are used by the software to get the vector; the points themselves
are not stored.
See Also
Effects Tab (New Light Dialog Box)

Allows you to simulate effects, such as the twinkling of stars, light scatter, and shadows.
Activate - Specifies whether the light should be used for illumination. This option is checked by
default whenever a light is placed. This option can be used in display set animation to simulate
effects such as twinkling of stars. However, to display an actual light in a scene, you must model
the light as geometry and then add lights in the same location to simulate the effect of light.
483

Affect ambient only - Specifies that the light should only affect objects with materials that have
ambient light properties.
If the Affect ambient only option is turned off, the light affects all objects equally.
Ambient light is useful to simulate "scatter", such as under a desk or in dark closet. Ambient
light is used to model the normal light scatter that is not solved by the raytracer. Only
radiosity solves for ambient contribution to the scene.
Cast shadows - Specifies whether the light should cast shadows. This option is selected by
default.
When lighting a scene with a single light that casts shadows, the shadows will be dark.
With SmartPlant Review, you can lighten shadows without adding unwanted amounts of light to
the scene. For more information, see Lighten Shadows (on page 488).
Color - Displays the current color of the new light.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box from which you can alter the color of the new light.
Intensity from 0 to 1 - Specifies the intensity of the light. We recommend setting this option to
1.
Spot cone angles - These options are available only for spot lights. There is one level of
attenuation for light in the inner cone, and a different attenuation for light in the outer cone angle.
Inner (must be less than outer) - Specifies the degrees of the inner angle (hot spot) of the
spot cone, ranging from 0 to 180. Refer to the following illustration.
Outer (must be greater than inner) - Specifies the degrees of the outer angle of the spot
cone, ranging from 0 to 180. Refer to the following illustration.
See Also
484
Attenuation Tab (New Light Dialog Box)

Provides options for defining various attenuation settings for point and spot lights. For
MicroStation lights, this tab is disabled, and the MicroStation option is selected if the light is
attenuated.
None - Specifies that there is no reduction in the intensity of the light based on the distance from
the source of the light. This option is selected by default.
MicroStation - Specifies that the light attenuation effects be styled after those found in
MicroStation. This option is the default and read-only for MicroStation lights that are attenuated.
If the MicroStation light is not attenuated, the None option is selected.
Fast - Specifies that the light attenuation effects be styled after ModelView's fast attenuation.
When this option is selected, the light becomes dimmer more quickly.
Slow - Specifies that the light attenuation effects be styled after ModelView's slow attenuation.
When this option is selected, the light becomes dimmer more slowly.
Custom - Specifies an exact attenuation effect based on the three constants in the following
fall-off (F) equation: F = 1.0 / (c1 + (c2*distance-to-light) + (c3*distance-to-light- squared).
Constant component from 0 to 10 - Allows you to specify a value for the constant attenuation
component. The default value is 1.0
Linear component from 0 to 1 - Allows you to specify a value for the linear attenuation
component. The default value is 1.0.
Quadratic component from 0 to 1 - Allows you to specify a value for the quadratic attenuation
component. The default is value is 1.0
Attenuation simulates the fall off of light from a positional light source. Constant fall off is the
slowest and quadratic fall of is the fastest with linear in between constant and quadratic.
OpenGL attenuates positional lights (points and spots) by an attenuation factor composed of
the constants listed previously using the following equation: Attenuation factor = 1 /
(C+L*d+Q*d*d)
485
Ambient, diffuse, and specular are all attenuated; global ambient and emission are not
attenuated.
For MicroStation lights, this tab is disabled, and the MicroStation option is selected if the
light is attenuated.
When the Custom option is selected, the light can be specified to exact catalog standards.
For example, this option would be used to specify a GE 30 watt frosted bulb.
Using non-default attenuation does require extra calculations and may slow performance.
See Also
Place a New Spot Light (on page 480)
Edit Source Light

View > Photo-Realism > Edit Source Light
Allows you to select a light in the model and adjust its properties.
Lights placed using MicroStation cannot be edited.
1. Click View > Photo-Realism > Edit Source Light. You also can select Edit Light
on
the Photo-Realism toolbar.
2. If there is more than one light in the model, the Edit Source Light dialog box displays,
allowing you to select the light that you want to edit.
Edit Source Lights Dialog Box (on page 487)
3. Modify any properties as needed.
4. If you have selected multiple lights on the Edit Source Light dialog box, the software cycles
through all the selections until there are no more lights to edit.
Source lights are listed in the order that they were placed.
The geometry for lights that cannot be edited (that is, MicroStation lights) appears "dim" in
the model.
Like any other piece of geometry, you can place any light, including non- editable
MicroStation lights, into a display set. The raytracer does not use lights that are in a hidden
display set in the rendered image. This feature allows you to manipulate the use of
non-editable lights for raytracing without modifying the original geometry file.
See Also
Place a New Point Light (on page 478)
486
Edit Source Lights Dialog Box

Allows you to select a light in the model and then edit all properties of the light. Lights placed
using MicroStation cannot be edited.
Match - Displays the Match Items dialog box to allow you to select lights matching the given
Lights - Displays all the lights currently in the model using the format (State, Type, Usage). If
you select more than one light, the dialog box cycles through each light individually until all the
specified lights have been edited.
Light State - If the source light is used by the raytracer, the light state is on. Otherwise, it is off.
For a light to be used by the raytracer, the following conditions must be met. If no light meets all
of the conditions, SmartPlant Review will display a message in the Text view stating that a
flashbulb will be used to illuminate the scene.
The source light is activated within its own individual settings.
The source light is on a visible level.
The source light is in a visible display set or if Ungrouped Elements is visible.
If the source light is a MicroStation light, the Photo-Realism setting to activate all
MicroStation lights must be on.
Light Type - If the source light is a MicroStation type light, it will display as such; otherwise, the
light type displays as Editable. SmartPlant Review does not allow you to edit or delete
MicroStation lights.
Light Usage - If source lighting is activated for the shaded view, then the indicator displays
OpenGL + a slot number indicating which OpenGL hardware slot number is being used for the
source light (if any). If source lighting is not activated for the shaded view, this indicator displays
Raytrace. This light usage indicator is helpful in determining which source lights (if any) are
actually being used in the shaded view.
OpenGL supports only a limited number of source lights, depending on the video
card and driver implementation, whereas the raytracer can use a virtually unlimited number of
lights. The OpenGL standard guarantees that a minimum of eight lights is supported. For more
information, see Rendering Photo-Realistic Images (on page 459).
487

See Also
Environment Tab (Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box) (on page 462)
Lighten Shadows
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click View > Photo-Realism > Edit Source Light.

Select the light that you want to edit.
Click the Effects tab on the Edit Source Light dialog box.
Click the Edit button and change the color to be a lower percentage of its maximum value.
For example, instead of pure white (RGB=255, 255, 255), use a 25% white (RGB=64,
64, 64).
5. Ensure the Cast shadows option is selected.
6. Place a source light of the same type as the one edited in the exact same location with the
exact same interest point.
7. On the Effects tab, edit the color of the second light to make up the difference in the
percentage of the maximum light when combined with the first light.
For the previous example, you would use a 75% white (RGB=128, 128, 128).
8. Disable the Cast shadows option.
When you raytrace, the results appear to be the same as if you used a single pure white
light. However, the shadows are the same percentage lighter as the second light's
contribution.
Following this procedure can help you simulate some of the effects of atmospheric
scattering observed in the real world without the cost of extra computational time during the
raytrace.
See Also
Effects Tab (New Light Dialog Box) (on page 483)
Delete a Source Light

View > Photo-Realism > Delete Source Light
The Delete Source Light command allows you to select a light from the model and delete it.
1. Click View > Photo-Realism > Delete Source Light. You can also select Delete Light
from the Photo-Realism toolbar.
Delete Source Lights Dialog Box (on page 489)
2. Select a source light from the Lights list.
3. Clicking Yes in the confirmation box permanently removes the light from the project
database.
488
Source lights are listed in the order that they were placed.
Deleted lights are permanently removed from the database.
Lights placed in the file by MicroStation cannot be deleted.

See Also
Delete Source Lights Dialog Box

Allows you to select a source light in the model and then delete it. Deleted lights are
permanently removed from the project database. Therefore, you will be prompted to answer Yes
or No to delete the specified light. Lights placed in the file by MicroStation cannot be deleted.
Lights - Displays all the lights currently in the model.
See Also
Raytrace a View
View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace
The Raytrace command raytraces the Main view. The output of the raytrace is displayed in the
Main view. Once a vew is raytraced, you can select objects in the view. The view displays the
raytraced image until you select Windows > Refresh or another command that causes
SmartPlant Review to update the view.
1. Use SmartPlant Review commands to define the scene in the Main view.
2. Click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace. You can also select Raytrace
Photo-Realism toolbar.
on the
To stop a raytrace, press Esc.

3. The rendered image appears in the Main view.
To modify rendering parameters, click View > Photo-Realism > Settings.

To modify global light settings, click View > Photo-Realism > Global Light Settings.
If rendering parameters or global light settings are modified, you must click View >
Photo-Realism > Raytrace to render the image again.
489
Set a Raytrace Range

View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range
The Raytrace Range command allows you to confine a raytrace to within a set area of the Main
view.
1. Use SmartPlant Review commands to define the scene in the Main view.
2. Click View > Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range. You also can select Raytrace Range
on the Photo-Realism toolbar.
3. Click the starting point for the range.
4. Click the ending point for the range. The output appears in the Main view.
To stop a raytrace in progress, press Esc.

To modify rendering parameters, click View > Photo-Realism > Settings.
To modify global light settings, click View > Photo-Realism > Global Light Settings.
If you modify any rendering parameters or global light settings, you must click View >
Photo-Realism > Raytrace Range to render the image again.
Edit Raytracing Options

1. Click View > Photo-Realism > Settings.
2. Select the Environment tab to load a background image and environment box into the Main
view.
3. Select the Raytrace tab to control the quality and speed of the raytracing program.
4. Select the Advanced tab to control system performance during raytracing operations.
See Also
490
SECTION 35
Using Collision Detection

Tools > Collision Detection
To use the collision detection functionality, you must install the Construction module.
SmartPlant Review supports two modes of collision detection: static and dynamic. Static
collision detection (similar to PDS Clash) is performed by comparing each object in a specified
model range to all other objects in the specified range to determine if a touch or overlap
condition occurs. Static collision detection could help find problems such as pipes that are too
close together or intersecting.
Dynamic collision detection is performed when you define an object or group of objects to set in
motion through the plant. Dynamic collision detection is useful when moving equipment such as
a construction crane through a plant to find a safe pathway for the move.
The Collision Detection command displays the Collision Detection dialog box, which allows
you to select options for running the collision detection program.
Collision Detection Dialog Box (on page 492)
SmartPlant Review needs approximately 40MB of free space on the hard drive where your
TEMP folder is located to run collision detection.
Only the display set that is in motion is affected. All other elements are updated according to
the active view settings. User settings are maintained and honored for all other updates.
Collision Detection Capabilities

Log File - A record of each collision run is always stored in the database. A log file contains a
collision ID number, data type of colliding elements, type of collision with file location of colliding
elements, and coordinates of the collision. Optionally, each record stored in the project database
can be written to a text file.
Retain or Eliminate Colliding Movements - You can move through the model freely using
display set motion while automatically generating collision reports for later review.
Highlight - The colliding objects are highlighted in an optional user-defined color.
Sound - You can assign .WAV sound files to collision types.
Review Collision Data - Collisions are reviewed in sequential order, as they are stored in the
database. A snapshot option is available to save an image file of colliding objects while the
colliding objects are highlighted. A save option is available to save a text file of the collision data
on the collision report. You can zoom to individual collisions or display all collisions in the current
Main view.
Collision Data Management - The collision information is saved in a Microsoft
Access-compatible table. For collision detection, the display set is used for movement through
the model. You can select a single object for single step collision detection. There are three
types of collision detection:
Single step collision - Moves a single graphic element one discrete movement. Collision
detection is run at the end of the single step movement, not continuously during the
movement. You can run a single step collision detection from the Run tab on the Collision
Detection dialog box.
491
Stationary collision - Runs static collision detection on the current model without any
additional movements. You can run stationary collision detection from the Run tab on the
Collision Detection dialog box.
Display set collision - Run as an option through the display set motion settings. If you
select the collision detection option, collision detection is run at the end of each motion step,
not continuously during the movement.
Point Cloud Intersections - Detects collisions between point cloud elements and a graphic
element. You must have the Point Cloud Integrator module and a point cloud software package
loaded before you can perform collision detection against point cloud data.
The collision detection process requires temporary disk space. If you receive a message during
collision detection notifying you that there is not enough temporary disk space, free more space
in one of the following ways.
Delete temporary files in the system temporary folder stated on the message box.
Delete or move other files on the specified disk.
Request assistance from your system administrator to change the location of the system
TEMP environment variable to point to a local disk with more available space.
Select Filters for Collision Types (on page 500)

Select Graphic Element Types (on page 501)
Select Objects and Range (on page 501)
Select Collision Display Colors (on page 502)
Select Collision Sounds (on page 502)
Run Collision Detection (on page 503)
Run Collision Detection Against Point Cloud Data (on page 504)
View Collision Reports (on page 505)
Collision Detection Dialog Box

Allows you to select options for running the collision detection program. All tab settings must be
assigned for each individual collision set. For example, the default color assigned to an existing
collision set will not automatically be applied when creating a new collision set. The default tab
settings are applied only to the collision set in which they are created.
All tab settings in an existing collision set are unique to that particular collision set.
Therefore, when creating a new collision set, you must assign settings for the new set.
See Also
Type Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) (on page 493)
Selection Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) (on page 495)
Geometry Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) (on page 496)
Color Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) (on page 497)
Sound Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) (on page 498)
Run Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box) (on page 499)
492
Type Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)

Allows you to create or select a collision set name. You must create or select a collision set
name before you can define the collision detection process.
After you select a name, you can choose whether you want collision detection to return all types
of collisions, or only certain types of collisions. For example, if you select the Between
component elements filter, the collision detection process looks for collisions between
elements that are part of a larger component.
Collision set name - Allows you to select or type the name of a collision set. You must specify
a name before you can define additional collision detection properties. Single tick marks ( ' ) are
not allowed in the name. Click Apply after you type in the name.
SmartPlant Review remembers the last collision set that you selected during the current
SmartPlant Review session. You must select a collision set name the first time you display this
dialog box during each session.
Delete - Removes the selected collision set from memory and the database.
All types - Allows you to search for all types of collisions.

Selected types - Enables you to choose one or more of the following filters for the collision
detection process.
Intersecting - Allows you to search for intersecting collisions.
Tangent - Allows you to search for tangent collisions.
Contains another - Allows you to search for collisions with closed graphic elements that
contain other graphic elements.
Embedded within - Allows you to search for collisions with graphic elements that are
contained within other closed graphic elements.
Between component elements - Returns collisions between graphic elements with the
same DMRS linkage, or label key. Elements with the same DMRS linkage are all part of a
larger component.
493

Point cloud intersections (external data) - Allows you to track collisions between the specified
part of the model and the point cloud data. You must have the Point Cloud Integrator module
and a point cloud software package loaded before you can use this option.
Use Hidden elements - Honors hidden levels and display sets that you have turned off during
collision detection.
See Also
494
Selection Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)

Allows you to select one or more elements to move through a volume during the collision
detection process and to define the range cube volume within which the collision detection
occurs. To use this functionality, you must install the Construction module.
Collision set name - Displays the current collision set name. You can create a new collision set
on the Type Filter tab.
Single graphic element - Indicates that you want to select a single graphic element as the
member of a collision set.
Display sets - Allows you to select a display set as the type of object to move for collision
detection.
Stationary collisions in selected range cube - Allows you to select a stationary collision
detection to find existing collisions in the model.
Select - Allows you to further define which elements to move through a volume. You can select
either a single graphic element or a display set, depending on the collision set type that you
selected.
Entire model - Indicates that the selected range for collision detection is the entire model range
cube.
Range cube - Allows you to specify the range cube unit values for collision detection.
495

Minimum range
North - Defines the y-axis coordinates.
East - Defines the x-axis coordinates.
Elevation - Defines the z-axis coordinates.
Maximum range
North - States the maximum range for the north (y-axis).
East - States the maximum range for the east (x-axis).
Elevation - States the maximum range for elevation (z-axis).
See Also
Geometry Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)

Allows you to select geometry filters for the collision detection process. You can select all types
of filters, or you can select certain types of filters based on different geometrical definitions. To
use this functionality, you must install the Construction module.
496

All types - Includes all types of geometry filters in collision detection.
Selected types - Includes the selected geometry filters in collision detection. You must select at
least one of the listed geometry filters if you check this option.
See Also
Color Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)

Allows you to select colors for the collision types. These colors appear in the graphic view when
collisions occur. To use this functionality, you must install the Construction module.
Default - Specifies a default color for all collision types. This default color is used for any
collision type that does not have one of the override colors selected below.
Intersecting - Specifies a color for collisions with intersecting elements.
Tangent - Specifies a color for collisions with tangent elements.
Contains another - Specifies a color for collisions with elements that are contained within other
elements.
Embedded within - Specifies a color for collisions with elements that are embedded within
other elements.
Between component elements - Specifies a color for graphic elements with the same DMRS
linkage, or label key. Elements with the same DMRS linkage are all part of a larger component.
Edit - Displays the Colors dialog box, which allows you to choose a different color for each
Collision color type.
497

See Also
Collision Detection Dialog Box (on page 492)
Sound Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)

Allows you to specify sounds that play as collisions occur. You can select one or more types of
collisions to match with sounds. To use this functionality, you must install the Construction
module.
Default - Assigns a default sound to all collision types. The default sound is used for any
collision type that does not have one of the override sounds selected below.
Intersecting - Assigns a sound to collisions with intersecting elements.
Tangent - Assigns a sound to collisions with tangent elements.
Contains another - Assigns a sound to collisions with elements that contain other elements.
Embedded within - Assigns a sound to collisions with elements embedded in other elements.
Between component elements - Assigns a sound to collisions with elements that have the
same DMRS linkage. Elements with the same DMRS linkage are all part of a larger component.
Browse - Allows you to locate a specific .WAV file for each collision type.
See Also
498

Run Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)

Allows you to set the delta at which the collision detection process runs for a single step
collision. You enter north, east, or elevation delta values, and then you can begin a single step
collision detection run. While the collision detection runs, the Collision Detection dialog box
hides from view and the status bar updates periodically to show the number of collisions and
objects compared. Sounds play or colors appear if they are defined for the collision set.
After you run at least one collision detection session, you can generate a report. Each collision
detection run is known as a frame. You can select a frame and zoom to individual collisions in
that frame, or you can display all collisions at one time. You can also change the viewing angle
of the display, take a snapshot of collisions, and save a copy of the collision report as a text file.
North - Indicates a single step delta movement during collision detection in the north (y-axis)
direction.
East - Indicates a single step delta movement during collision detection in the east (x-axis)
direction.
499

Elevation - Indicates a single step delta movement during collision detection in the elevation
(z-axis) direction.
Activate collision detection - Turns on the active collision detection mode.
Use collision limit - Halts the collision detection run after the specified number of collisions in
the Collision limit box on the Run tab have occurred.
Collision limit - Halts the collision detection after the specified number of collisions occurs.
Single Step - Starts the collision detection process for single step, display sets, or static
collisions.
Report - Displays the collision detection results in the Report Collision Detection Results
dialog box.

Single step move delta allows you to enter delta values for the North, East, or Elevation
directions in which you want to move the object. Single step allows you to temporarily move
an object one step. This movement should not be confused with moving a display set.
Single step move allows you to temporarily move an object a certain amount to determine if
it collides with anything. You can then adjust the move delta values to move the object a
different amount and try it again. To move multiple times, you can make a display set out of
the element and use the Move Display Set command.
See Also
Report Collision Detection Results Dialog Box (on page 506)
Select Filters for Collision Types

1. Click Tools > Collision Detection.
2. Click the Type Filter tab.
3. In the Collision set name box, select a name.
To define a new collision set, type a name in the Collision set name box. Single tick
marks ( ' ) are not allowed in the name.
4. Under Collision types, select All types or Selected types.
If you choose Selected types, you can select specific filters for the collision detection
process. The software only reports the types of collisions that you specify.
500
Always start on the Type tab to either create or select an existing collision set name. You
cannot select any other tab until you select a name.
To delete a collision set, select a collision set name in the Collision set name box, and then
click Delete.

See Also
Select Graphic Element Types

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Tools > Collision Detection.

Click the Type Filter tab.
In the Collision set name box, select a name.
Click the Geometry Filter tab.
Under Non-linear graphic elements, select All types or Selected types.
If you choose Selected types, you can choose the individual types of geometry to filter.
See Also
Select Objects and Range

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Click the Selection tab.
Under Object, select the type of object that you would like to include in the collision
detection process.
To locate collisions with a static single graphic element, select Single graphic element.
Click Select to further refine the object definition.
To move a single element through three dimensional space during the collision
detection process, select Single graphic element. Click Select to further refine the
object definition.
To move a set of objects through space, select Display sets. Click Select to further
refine the object definition.
To locate collisions in a static volume, select Stationary collisions in selected range
cube.
6. Under Range cube, select either Entire model or Range cube.
To define a specific volume for collision detection, select Range cube.
501

7. If you selected Range cube, type coordinates under Minimum range and Maximum
range. Each range is bounded by East (x- axis), North (y-axis), and Elevation (z-axis)
coordinates.
See Also
Select Collision Display Colors

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Click the Color tab.
Under Collision colors, select one or more color filters.
Select one or more of the color options to assign colors to collision types.
You can click Edit for each selected option to choose a different color.
If you assign a color to Default and a color to Intersecting, the Intersecting color takes
precedence and displays for intersecting collisions.
See Also
Select Collision Sounds
502
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Click the Sound tab.
Select one or more of the options to assign sounds to collision types.
For each selected option, click Browse to locate a .WAV sound file.
If you assign a sound to Default and a sound to Intersecting, the Intersecting sound takes
precedence and plays for intersecting collisions.
If the sound does not seem to be working, make sure the file is present on the system in an
appropriate folder and adjust the speaker volume. If there is still no sound, make sure the
audio drivers are installed on the computer.
During a collision detection run, the software searches for sound files in the following
standard locations: the current folder, the Windows folder, the Windows system folder,
folders listed in the PATH environment variable, and the list of folders mapped in a network.
See Also
Run Collision Detection

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Click the Run tab.
Under Single step move delta, type the deltas in the North (y-axis), East (x-axis), and
Elevation (z-axis) fields.
Under Execution control, select Activate collision detection.
Select Use collision limit. This is optional.
Type a number in the Collision limit box.
Click Single Step to step through the collisions.
The Collision Detection dialog box hides until the collision detection process is
complete.
The status bar shows the number of objects compared and number of collisions found.
Sounds and colors display for collisions based on the selections on the Sound and
Color tabs. For a given collision type assigned to a sound file, the sound plays only on
the first collision of that type.
10. After you run at least one collision detection session or frame, click Report to review
previously-executed frames and create a report of the collisions.
To get static collisions with a selected single graphic element, set the Single step move
delta fields to zero and click Single Step.
You can stop the current, in motion collision detection process by pressing the Escape key.
For a more precise means of motion control, use keypad motion to move display sets when
checking for collisions. For more information, see Use the Keyboard (on page 126).
A record of each collision run is always stored in the project database. Optionally, you can
save a text log file of any single collision run that exists in the database.
503

See Also
Run Collision Detection Against Point Cloud Data

1.
2.
3.
4.

Under Collision types, select Point cloud intersections.
5.
6.
Selecting this option runs the elements included in the collision set against the entire
point cloud data set rather than running the collision detection set against other model
elements. In other words, selecting a single element compares it against the point cloud
data, selecting a display set compares the display set elements against the point cloud data,
and selecting a static element run compares elements in the chosen range against the point
cloud data.
Click the Run tab.
Under Single step move delta, type the deltas in the North (y-axis), East (x-axis), and
Elevation (z-axis) fields.
Under Execution control, select Activate collision detection.
Select Use collision limit. This is optional.
Type a number in the Collision limit box.
Click Single Step to step through the collisions.
7.
8.
9.
10.
The Collision Detection dialog box hides until the collision detection process is
complete.
The status bar shows the number of objects compared and number of collisions found.
Sounds and colors are not available.
11. After you run at least one collision detection session or frame, click Report to review
previously-executed frames and create a report of the collisions.
504
You can stop the current, in motion collision detection process by pressing the Escape key.
For a more precise means of motion control, use keypad motion to move display sets when
checking for collisions. For more information, see Use the Keyboard (on page 126).
A record of each collision run is handled by the point cloud software, rather than being
stored in the project database like during regular model collision detection.
You must have the Point Cloud Integrator module and a point cloud software package
loaded before you can use point cloud collision detection.

See Also
View Collision Reports

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Click the Run tab.
Under Execution control, click Report.
In the Frame number box, select a frame.
View the collisions.
Click Save to store your data in a text file.
Click Display All to list all collisions with the current view angle. If the collisions are not
clearly visible, try adjusting the view cone to get a better viewing angle.
To zoom in on a collision, click the list view. Then, click the collision that you want to view.
You also can use the arrow keys to move through and view the collisions in the List view.
Click Snapshot to take a picture of the view with the current collision colors and view
angles.
You can click Report on the Collision Detection dialog box at any time to review a report
from any previously-executed collision detection run in the database.
After running a collision detection and generating a report, move the Report Collision
Detection Results dialog box off the Main view window to view the collision results.
Collision detection reports show any moved display sets in their current locations. The
current location of a display set may or may not be the same location of the display set at
the time collision detection was run.
A new frame number will not be added to the collision report data when collisions do not
occur during a collision detection run.
See Also
505
Report Collision Detection Results Dialog Box

Displays a report of the detected collisions after performing a collision detection run. You can
make a snapshot of any collision, and you can save the collision report as a text file. To use this
functionality, you must install the Construction module.
Collision set name - Allows you to select a collision set name. Collisions for the selected
collision set display in the list view.
Frame number - Allows you to select a specific frame in the collision set to view.
Wireframe highlight - Specifies that the requested report include wireframe highlights around
colliding objects.
Collision results output - Displays information about the collisions, such as type, objects, and
range points. To zoom in on a collision, click the list view, and then click a collision number in
the left column. You can also use the arrow keys to move through and view the collisions in the
List view.
Save - Allows you to save the collision detection results to a text file.
Snapshot - Allows you to take a snapshot of the collision detection results. Taking snapshots of
collision detection results using Wireframe highlight and an Anti-alias set greater than 1 is not
supported.
Display All - Allows you to display all of the collision detection results for the current collision
set and frame number. If the collisions are not clearly visible, try adjusting the view cone to get a
better viewing angle.
See Also
506
SECTION 36
Collaborating with Others

Collaboration allows you and other users in different locations to view and examine the model
simultaneously. All members of the collaboration can see the up-to-date design version.
Collaboration accommodates a joint effort for a design review in a single conference.
Each computer that participates in collaboration networking requires installation of Microsoft
NetMeeting 3.01 and SmartPlant Review. Processing occurs at each computer so that
performance depends on each computer, and not on the network. Collaboration is only
supported between the same versions of Smart Plant Review. For example, collaboration with
SmartPlant Review version 6.2 will not work with collaboration in SmartPlant Review version
7.0.
You can change the options for the conference by clicking Tools > Collaboration > Edit. The
Collaboration Settings dialog box allows you to update details for the data sets and
participants in the collaboration.
You can identify the data set that is currently open in the Data set name box. The Conference
members list box displays the current participants in a tree format. NetMeeting supplies the
name of the conference member, based on the NetMeeting profile of the user.
The Driver options box allows you to establish settings for the driver of the conference.
Because memory and performance limitations of some operating systems may cause difficulties
for high speed collaboration sessions, you should assign the Driver to the slowest computer.
You also can have the driver work offline while positioning the view for the passenger
computers. This will reduce the number of updates that are sent to passengers during a short
time interval. Slowing the speed of animation replay and motion updates may also improve
operating system performance during a collaboration session.
After you confirm the options on the Collaboration Settings dialog box, you can start the
conference by clicking Tools > Collaboration > Run.
The collaboration driver is the person currently in command of the collaboration conference.
A collaboration passenger is the person that is watching the session. A session can have
only one driver at a time. Multiple passengers can participate in the session, and any one
passenger can change to driver.
During a collaboration, online mode occurs when the driver is transmitting commands to
passengers. Offline mode occurs when the driver is not transmitting. The driver can use
offline mode to configure the computer and temporarily pause the session. A passenger
always works online.
Only the driver, who is working online, should make changes which impact the project
database such as adding or deleting measurements or tags and adding display sets.
Collaboration sessions may run on the same shared copy of the project database or on
multiple copies of the project database. One problem encountered in a collaboration session
occurs when collaboration users have multiple databases that get out of synchronization on
measurement, tags or display sets. This problem can occur when users make offline
changes to add measurement, tags and display sets or delete measurements and tags. Only
changes made by a driver working online will be broadcast to keep all active users
synchronized. Passengers receive information but do not send database changes to other
users. Drivers working off line do not do not send database changes to other users. As
SmartPlant Review adds a new record to the database, the internal table indices are
507

updated for the new record. For example, if passenger A adds tag 5, that tag will not be
transmitted to the other users. If the driver then adds tag 5, passenger A's database will not
accept the change because their database already has a tag 5. In this situation, the driver's
tag 5 will not appear on passenger A's display or in passenger A's database. If running on
the same shared copy of the project database, it is recommended that the same rule for
changes be followed. When sharing a common database, it is possible for an individual user
to start the Refresh Data command to update their local computer. However, depending on
the contents of the database, the Refresh Data command can take some time to execute.
When you click Send Driver's State, the views transmit from the driver computer to all
passenger computers. This action is useful when you change drivers or when a new participant
joins the conference.
When you click Work Offline, transmission stops from the driver. When you click Track Mouse
Cursor, the software synchronizes the cursor track of each computer. All participants can see
the same cursor as it moves over the view and during a zoom.
The Refresh button provides an up-to-date list of conference members, as shown in the
Conference members box. The Drive button assigns your computer as the driver, and no
longer passenger.
Passenger Settings
During a collaboration conference, the collaboration driver is the person currently in command of
the controlling computer. A collaboration passenger is the person watching the session.
The passenger can view several different activities originating at the driver computer, including:
Movements of the pointer
Standard single pane, three pane and four pane view layouts and toolbars
Updates to the view
Display modes
Auto-Highlight and display of object data in the text window
Tags (for creating, editing, and deleting)
Add measurement and delete last measurement
Create display set
Display set manipulations
Change to the driver control
Changes in NetMeeting (for example, whiteboard, sound, security, Internet Directory)
Regular view updates in all views
ScheduleReview Animation
Collision Detection with display set movement only
Passengers running with a different display resolution than the driver will experience the
following behavior:
The collaboration software automatically compensates for different display resolutions
between the driver and passenger computers.
The software attempts to make the SmartPlant Review application the same size on all
computers. If the passenger is running a smaller display than the driver, the collaboration
software will adjust the SmartPlant Review application to fit the passenger's display while
keeping the window size proportionally the same as the driver's SmartPlant Review window
size.
508
If the passenger is running at a lower resolution than the driver, it may be necessary for the
passenger to Auto-hide the task bar on their desktop to see the full SmartPlant Review
window.
If the driver changes either the active measurement collection or the settings of a
measurement collection, those changes will not display on the passenger computer.
The driver can turn on or off the passenger's toolbars. However, the passenger's preferred
toolbar arrangement and button size will not be modified. If necessary, the passenger can
dock or arrange the toolbars as needed on their computer.
Closing or resizing individual windows on the driver's computer will not display on the
passenger's computer.
Use NetMeeting (on page 509)

Start a Collaboration Session (on page 509)
Rejoin a Collaboration Session (on page 510)
Edit a Collaboration Session (on page 511)
Use NetMeeting
SmartPlant Review works with Microsoft NetMeeting software using one of two modes below.
You cannot use NetMeeting in both modes at the same time.
Application Sharing Mode - This is the default behavior for NetMeeting. The computer that
displays the application only needs one copy of SmartPlant Review. NetMeeting receives all
graphics calls and transmits the changes to the display to other users.
Collaboration Mode - Available from SmartPlant Review.
See Also
Collaborating with Others (on page 507)
Start a Collaboration Session

Tools > Collaboration > Run
You must install the Collaboration module before you can use this functionality.
Starts the Collaboration module and NetMeeting. Collaboration allows you and other users in
different locations to view and examine the model simultaneously.
All members of the collaboration can see the up-to-date version. A collaboration session
accommodates a joint effort for a design review in a single conference.
1. From the computer assigned as the driver, host a NetMeeting call.
The collaboration driver is the person currently in command of the collaboration
conference. A collaboration passenger is the person that is watching the session. The driver
can work online to transmit commands to the passenger computers or work offline to
temporarily stop transmitting. A passenger always works online. A session can have only
509
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
one driver at a time. Multiple passengers can participate in the session, and any one
passenger can become the driver.
Type the password.
Set the security level that you want.
On each passenger computer, call the driver computer and log in using the conference
name and password (if applicable).
Start SmartPlant Review on each computer. On all computers use the same dataset or
share a common data set, and use the same database.
On each computer, click Tools > Collaboration > Run. The default driver is the meeting
host.
NetMeeting 3.01 and SmartPlant Review.
To change the driver during a collaboration session, the passenger who wants to control the
session clicks the Drive button. Performance depends on each computer, not on the
network. To avoid difficulties with memory and performance limitations of the individual
operating systems, assign the Driver to the slowest computer.
The driver can click Work Offline to stop transmission to the passenger computers. This
action allows the driver to work without anyone viewing the display on the computer. For
example, the driver can work offline to configure the computer. Also, have the driver work
offline while positioning the view for the passenger computer. This will reduce the number of
updates sent to passengers during a short time interval.
To reduce the burden on slower passenger computers, slow the speed of animation replay
and motion updates.
The driver can manually send views and the text window information by clicking the Send
State button.
Instead of hosting a meeting, two computers can call each other with a password (optional).
In this case the caller is the driver.
Collaboration is only supported between the same versions of Smart Plant Review. For
Rejoin a Collaboration Session

Sometimes, something goes wrong with NetMeeting and you get dropped out of a conference
due to network or other outside problems. To cleanly rejoin the conference, do the following:
1. Exit NetMeeting.
2. Exit Collaboration by toggling off Tools > Collaboration > Run.
3. If you were not the conference Host, re-start NetMeeting and rejoin the conference.
4. If you were the conference Host, everyone in the conference needs to do steps 1 and 2.
510
If the above steps do not work, or a "Bad Data Channel" message appears, exit both
NetMeeting and SmartPlant Review, then re-start both products. If you were not the
conference Host, simply rejoin the existing conference. If you were the conference Host,
everyone needs to exit and re-start both NetMeeting and SmartPlant Review.
If you still have trouble rejoining the conference, exit both NetMeeting and SmartPlant
Review, then use Process tab in the Windows Task Manager to determine if the conf.exe
program is still running. The conf.exe program is part of NetMeeting and sometimes does

not stop when NetMeeting is closed. If conf.exe is still running, click End Task in Task
Manager to stop the program, and then re-start both NetMeeting and SmartPlant Review. If
you were not the conference Host, simply rejoin the existing conference. If you were the
conference Host, everyone needs to exit and re-start both NetMeeting and SmartPlant
Review.
See Also
Edit a Collaboration Session

Tools > Collaboration > Edit
Displays the Collaboration Settings dialog box, which allows you to update details for the data
sets and participants in the collaboration.
Collaboration Settings Dialog Box (on page 511)
You can identify the data set that is currently open in the Data set name box. The Conference
members list box displays the current participants in a tree format. NetMeeting supplies the
name of the conference member, based on the NetMeeting profile of the user.
The Driver options box lets you establish settings for the driver of the conference.

NetMeeting 3.01 and SmartPlant Review.
Performance depends on each computer, not on the network. To avoid difficulties with
memory and performance limitations of the individual operating systems, assign the Driver
to the slowest computer.
Have the driver work offline while positioning the view for the passenger computers. This
reduces the number of updates sent to passengers during a short time interval.
and motion updates.
See Also
Collaboration Settings Dialog Box

You must have the Collaboration module loaded for this dialog box to be available.
511

Allows you to specify settings for your Collaboration session.
Data set name - Identifies the data set that is currently open.
Conference members - Displays the current collaboration participants in a tree format.
NetMeeting supplies the name of the conference member based on the NetMeeting profile of
the user.
Send Driver's State - Transmits the views from the driver computer to all passenger computers.
This action is useful when you change drivers or when a new participant joins the conference.
Work Offline - Stops transmission from the driver computer. This action is useful when you
need to perform set-up prior to a collaboration session.
Track Mouse Cursor - Synchronizes the cursor track on each computer in the conference. All
participants can see the same cursor as it moves over the view and during a zoom.
Refresh - Updates the list of conference members.
Drive - Allows you to become the driver in the collaboration session. Any passenger can
become a driver at any time.
512

NetMeeting, SmartPlant Review and the SmartPlant Review Collaboration module.
Performance depends on each computer, and not on the network. To avoid difficulties with
memory and performance limitations of the individual operating systems, assign the Driver
to the slowest computer.
Have the driver work off-line while positioning the view for the passenger computers. This
will reduce the number of updates sent to passengers during a short time interval.
and motion updates.

See Also
Rejoin a Collaboration Session (on page 510)
513
514
SECTION 37
Using ScheduleReview
ScheduleReview allows you to use abstract data from your project planning software to display
the sequence of construction. You can also reverse the action, so that you can display the
deconstruction sequence.
ScheduleReview allows you to visualize the construction cycle in single steps (by day, week, or
month) or continuously. You can also move along a predefined path in the model as you
continuously step through time. For example, you can use ScheduleReview to help analyze the
construction process to avoid problems, show the construction of specific units in the context of
the overall project schedule, display the project as it should appear on a certain day, or fly
through the model while displaying the construction sequence. ScheduleReview is ideal for
presenting a fly through to project staff, senior management, and clients.
See the SmartPlant Review Installation Guide for a list of supported planning software
versions. For a list of changes between the supported Primavera versions, see
Troubleshooting: Primavera Version Changes (on page 561).
You can import an existing SRI file into the current project database. You can also import a
selected ScheduleReview project from a different SmartPlant Review project database into
the current project database. This imported and manipulated ScheduleReview information
can then be exported to a SmartPlant Review project database file.
Create a New ScheduleReview Project

Tools > ScheduleReview > New Project
Allows you to enter a unique name for a new ScheduleReview session.
1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > New Project.
2. On the New ScheduleReview Project dialog, type a Name for the new project, then click
OK.
515
3. On the Project Settings > Project tab, select a Project Type. The Browse button activates
after you select a Project type.
Select Primavera for Primavera version 3 projects.

Select Primavera P4, P5 and P6 for Primavera projects in versions P4, P5, or P6.
4. Click the Browse button to select the Project file.
5. If you selected Primavera in the Project type box, the Primavera Project Planner dialog
box appears:
6. If you selected Primavera P4, P5 and P6 in the Project type box, the Logon to Primavera
Data Provider dialog box appears:
Microsoft Project does not require you to log in.
516
7. If one of the logon dialog boxes appeared, type your User name and Password associated
with the selected Project type, then click OK.
8. If you selected Microsoft Project as the Project type, the standard Browse dialog box
appears, allowing you to browse to and select the Microsoft Project MPP project file you
want to review.
9. If you selected Primavera, the Open a Project dialog box appears, allowing you to browse
to and select the project file to open:
10. If you selected Primavera P4, P5 and P6, the Open Primavera P4 Project dialog box
appears, allowing you to select the project to which you wish to connect:
11. Continue to specify the settings for items on each tab on the ScheduleReview Settings
dialog box.
Set Task Symbology (on page 529)
Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings (on page 527)
Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings (on page 528)
Set Review Control Settings (on page 528)
12. Click OK on the Schedule Review Settings dialog box to create the project.
517
New ScheduleReview Project Dialog Box

Creates a new ScheduleReview project. After you specify a name for your new project, the
ScheduleReview Settings dialog box displays.
Name - Allows you to enter a unique name for the new ScheduleReview project. When you click
OK, the ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box (on page 520) displays, allowing you to configure
your project.
See Also
Create a New ScheduleReview Project (on page 515)
Edit a ScheduleReview Project in Project Manager (on page 519)
Set the Active Project

Tools > ScheduleReview > Set Active Project
Identifies which ScheduleReview project is used in the current review session.
Select ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box (on page 518)
Select ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box

Allows you to select the active ScheduleReview project.
Projects - Displays the available ScheduleReview projects.
See Also
Set the Active Project (on page 518)
Refresh Active Project

Tools > ScheduleReview > Refresh Active Project
Updates the active project with current data. Using this command ensures that the most recent
data is available for the ScheduleReview session.
You must have project planning software such as MS Project or Primavera loaded to
use this command.
See Also
Using ScheduleReview (on page 515)
518
Use Project Manager to Add a ScheduleReview

Project to a Model
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open a document.
In Project Manager, expand the ScheduleReview node.
Right-click in the window.
On the shortcut menu, click New Project.
On the New ScheduleReview dialog box, enter the name of the project.
On the ScheduleReview Settings dialog box, enter the settings that you want.

Project Manager displays as an undocked window by default. If Project Manager is not
displayed, click View > Project Manager.
If you right-click in Project Manager, you can access commands on the shortcut menu to run
or edit ScheduleReview projects. If a document is not open, the shortcut menu does not
appear.
See Also
Edit a ScheduleReview Project in Project Manager

1. Open a document in SmartPlant Review.
3. In Project Manager, expand the ScheduleReview node. The checkmark by a
ScheduleReview project indicates that it is the active ScheduleReview project.
4. Right-click in the window and then click Edit > ScheduleReview > Settings from the
shortcut menu.
5. On the ScheduleReview Settings dialog box, edit the settings that you want.

If a model document is not open, Project Manager does not display any items.
519
Define ScheduleReview Settings

Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings
Displays the ScheduleReview Settings dialog box, which allows you to use abstract data from
your project planning software to display the sequence of construction. You can also reverse the
action, so that you can display the deconstruction sequence.
Set ScheduleReview Project Settings (on page 527)

Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings (on page 527)
Set Review Control Settings (on page 528)
ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box

Provides features that allow you to:
Specify the SmartPlant Review model and the project planning software.
Group model elements manually or automatically for logical manipulation.
Associate element groups manually or automatically with specific construction tasks.
Display the start and stop of construction tasks in shaded, wireframe, or transparent modes.
Execute queries on model elements and display results graphically.
Save animation frames to disk for post-processing with digital video editing software.
See Also
Project Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) (on page 520)
Symbology Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) (on page 523)
Animation Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) (on page 524)
Snapshot Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) (on page 525)
Review Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box) (on page 526)
Project Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box)

Defines the brand of scheduling software that you are using and the name of the project file.
520
Prior to using ScheduleReview, at least one of the supported project planning programs
must be installed on your computer. The supported project planning programs are listed in
the SmartPlant Review Installation Guide. See the user documentation for the planning
program you are using for information on installing and using that software.
ScheduleReview project - Displays the name of the currently active ScheduleReview project
file.
Project file - Specifies the name and path of the planner file associated with the
ScheduleReview project. Click the Browse button to navigate to the project file.
Browse - Allows you to navigate to a new project file according to the planning software you are
using. Based on the Project type you select, an Open dialog box displays options for opening
the project file.
Project type - Allows you to select the type of planner project to associate with the active
ScheduleReview project.
Reset Fields - Resets the Project file field so that you can browse to another project file.
If you are setting up your own model to view with ScheduleReview, you must first create
a new ScheduleReview project. For more information, see Create a New ScheduleReview
Project (on page 515).
See Also
Define ScheduleReview Settings (on page 520)
521
Open Primavera P3 Project Dialog Box
Allows you to browse to and select the Primavera P3 project you want to open.
See Also
Create a New ScheduleReview Project (on page 515)
Delete ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box (on page 538)
New ScheduleReview Project Dialog Box (on page 518)
Set ScheduleReview Project Settings (on page 527)
Import ScheduleReview Projects (on page 534)
Export ScheduleReview Projects (on page 535)

Displays a list of available Primavera P4 projects. Select a project and click OK.
This dialog box also appears when you open Primavera P5 or P6 projects.
Project ID - Displays a short name that uniquely identifies the project.

Unique ID - Display the internal unique ID for the project.
Project Name - Displays the long descriptive name of the project.
522
See Also
Export ScheduleReview Projects (on page 535)
Select ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box (on page 518)
Symbology Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box)

Provides options for defining the appearance of SmartPlant Review elements when you execute
the ScheduleReview command. For example, you can specify that items display in blue
wireframe when tasks start and green shaded when tasks end. This helps you identify the status
of various elements in your project throughout the review process.
Type - Specifies the type of object for which you are defining symbology. You can define the
appearance of each task individually.
Visible - Allows you to define the visibility for the symbology that is currently selected.
Style - Allows you to define the style for the symbology that is currently selected. You can select
Wireframe, Transparent, Shaded, or Normal.
The Transparent option specifies how much you can see through an object. You can
vary the percentage of transparency from 10% (least transparent) to 90%.
Use the Normal style if you want to prevent the symbology from changing from its
normal (as-is) state.
523
Animation Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box)

Links a key frame animation group to ScheduleReview playback, using an animation path that
you created in SmartPlant Review with the View > Save and Recall command.
View group - Specifies the name of the key frame view group that you want to link to this
ScheduleReview playback.
Start date - Specifies the date on which you want the view group animation to start playing.
Until this date is reached during playback, the first frame of the view group is displayed.
Rate - Selects the rate for updating key frame animations, subject to the unit selection. You can
specify the rate in Days per frame or Frames per day.
Days per frame - Updates key frame animations by one frame per number of days entered in
the Rate box.
Frames per day - Updates frame animations by the number of frames entered in the Rate box
for each day of the ScheduleReview playback.
Frames Start - Selects the first frame of the selected animation that displays.
Frames End - Selects the highest frame number to display from the selected key frame
animation.
Loop - Specifies that key frame animations start over from the beginning automatically if the last
frame is reached before the ScheduleReview playback ends.
If a ScheduleReview session with its own animation is started, any key frame animation is
stopped, the current animation state resets, and all key frame motion animation commands
are disabled during the ScheduleReview session.
If a ScheduleReview session is started without its own animation (No Animation is selected
in the View Group list), all of the current key frame motion animation commands (Display,
Play, Pause, and Stop) can be used during the ScheduleReview session. Likewise, the
ScheduleReview Play, Pause, and Stop commands do not affect the key frame motion
commands.
See Also
524
Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box (on page 409)
Snapshot Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box)

Defines the settings for the images that are created when you record a ScheduleReview
playback. Options specify the prefix name for each frame, anti-aliasing level, frame size, as well
as the folder and drive locations for the frames.
The Snapshot Frame window captures the image of the cursor and any dialog box
that is positioned over it. Wait until all frames are written to disk before performing other tasks.
Width - Specifies the width of the image in pixels.

Height - Specifies the height of the image in pixels.
Anti-alias - Specifies the type of anti-aliasing that you want to apply to the frames. You can
choose from None, Low, Medium, and High. If you select None, the frames are of the lowest
quality but process quickly. If you select Low or Medium, the quality is slightly higher but process
more slowly. If you select High, the frames are high quality but process very slowly.
Directory - Displays the destination folder path for the saved animation frames. You can specify
the folder by using Browse.
Browse - Allows you to navigate to a folder or file.
Files prefix - Sets the prefix to use as the first part of the name of every ScheduleReview
snapshot.
Start number - Specifies the frame number to start at when naming image files. This value is
appended to the Files prefix to create the image file names. The sample File name (directly
below the Files prefix text box) updates to reflect changes.
File type - Specifies the graphic file type for the images saved to disk. Click .RGB for Intergraph
Red Green Blue file format, or click .BMP for Windows bitmap.
File name - Display a preview of what the first image will be called.
See Also
525
Review Tab (ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box)

Displays the date settings for the ScheduleReview playback. With these command options, you
can step through the construction process by day, week, or month. This process allows you to
closely analyze each step through the construction process and anticipate problems that may
arise. For example, you can determine if adding a large piece of equipment at a certain point in
the construction process will interfere with the construction of additional items in the model. In
addition, this command provides several different options such as viewing the model as it
appears on a specific day or at a certain percentage of work complete. You can also review the
model based on query criteria.
You can also step through the deconstruction process, if necessary. You can use this option to
analyze refurbishment plans for the model and analyze procedures for removing or replacing
existing pieces of equipment.
Start - Selects the first date to display in the ScheduleReview animation. The earliest possible
value (and the default value) is the starting date of the first task of the project. Select a date from
the calendar.
Current - Selects the current date of the ScheduleReview playback. Select a date from the
calendar.
End - Selects the last date to display in the ScheduleReview animation. The latest possible
value (and the default value) is the finishing date of the last task of the project. Select a date
from the calendar.
Percent complete - Displays the schedule status in terms of date and percentage of
completion.
Step in days - Selects the number of days to advance the current date during each update of
the ScheduleReview playback.
Per seconds - Sets the number of seconds in between dynamic updates of the
ScheduleReview playback. Decimal values, such as 1.5, are accepted.
Loop - Instructs ScheduleReview that if the animation finishes before the review cycle is
complete, the animation starts over from the beginning and runs until the review process is
complete.
526
Snapshot - Allows you to specify that the frames ScheduleReview playback generates
automatically write to disk, according to the settings on the Snapshot tab.
Highlight query during review - Displays query items during a schedule review. This option is
not selected by default.
Select Query - Displays a modified Query dialog box. You can either select an existing query,
or use the Query dialog box to define a new query. This dialog box has a reduced set of
options, and allows you to change only the Color (Highlight Method) and Always Display
(Additional Settings) options. If Always Display is not selected, query results display only when
you reach the query's start date. Otherwise, this modified dialog box functions the same as the
regular Query dialog box.
Before using this command, define groups and associate tasks with the groups.
To interrupt the review process, click Stop on the ScheduleReview toolbar.
See Also
Set ScheduleReview Project Settings

1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings.
2. On the Project tab, choose a Project type.
3. Click Browse to select a new Project file.
Avoid opening a Microsoft Project planner file using automation through
ScheduleReview (specifically, with the Refresh Active Project command) and concurrently
opening the same file with an instance of the Microsoft Project application.
4. Click Apply.
You can also select Schedule Review Settings

on the ScheduleReview toolbar.
Reset Fields resets the Project file field so that you can browse to another project file.
Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings.

Click the Animation tab.
Select a View group.
Select a Start date.
Select a Rate.
Select Days per frame or Frames per day.
Select a Start frame.
Select an End frame.
Select Loop to loop animation.
You can also select Schedule Review Settings

You can use ViZfx Web Pro to apply sophisticated special effects to your animations, special
web projects, or video. You can download ViZfx Web Pro with your SmartPlant Review serial
527
number from
http://www.intergraph.com/products/ppm/smartplant/review/download_ViZfx_Web_Pro.asp.
Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Click the Snapshot tab.
Type a number for the Dimensions Width.
Type a number for the Dimensions Height.
Select an Anti-alias.
Browse to the output folder for the ScheduleReview file.
Type a Prefix for the files.
Type a Start Number for the Frame.
Select a File type.
You also can select ScheduleReview Settings

Set Review Control Settings
528
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Click the Review tab.
Select a Start date.
Select a Current date.
Select an End date.
Select a Step (in days) for Dynamic updating.
Type a number of Seconds for Dynamic updating.
Select Loop to repeat ScheduleReview play in a loop.
Select Snapshot to display as a snapshot.
Select Highlight query during review to display query items during a schedule review.
Click Select Query to select or define a query.
You can also select ScheduleReview Settings

Set Task Symbology

Tools > ScheduleReview > Task Symbology
Allows you to define the symbology of specific tasks at the start and finish of the task.
1. Click Tools > Schedule Review > Task Symbology.
Task Symbology Dialog Box (on page 529)
2. Select a Type of task.
3. Select Visibility for Default or Visible.
4. Select Default for Style or select Wireframe, Transparent, or Shaded.
5. Select Default for Color or select a specific color.
If you do not use this command to assign symbology, the Review command uses the
default symbology.
This command is available only when you have selected a ScheduleReview task after you
import a file.
Task Symbology Dialog Box

Enables you to edit symbology settings for the task that is currently active in the
ScheduleReview project tree.
Task ID -Displays the unique ID of the task to which this symbology applies.
Type - Allows you to select a symbology to edit.
Visibility Default - Allows you to select the default visibility for the symbology.
Visible - Displays and sets the visibility for the symbology.
Style Default -Allows you to select the default style for the symbology.
Style - Allows you to define the style for the symbology. You can select Wireframe,
Transparent (90% - 10%), Shaded, or Normal.
529
Create a New ScheduleReview Query

Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > New
Searches your SmartPlant Review model for elements that match criteria specified in your
project planning file. SmartPlant Review then updates the Main view and displays the elements
according to selected options. For example, you can search for elements that fall within the
Critical Path category and display them as red, shaded graphics.
1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > New.
New ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box (on page 531)
2. Enter a phrase to identify the query in the Name box.
3. In the Definition section, click the Edit button to specify the limits of the query in the
Criteria box.
4. Select an option in the Fit section.
Fit None does not fit the query results into the Main view.
Fit All displays all graphics, not just the query results, in the Main view.
Fit Query displays only the query result objects in the Main view.
5. Select an option in the Display section for viewing the query results.
Display All specifies that all SmartPlant Review graphics display when you execute a
query.
Display Query results specifies that only the graphics associated with the query results
display when you execute a query.
Display All but query results specifies that only the graphics not associated with the
query results display when you execute a query.
6. In the Highlight method section, select the display format in Style and then specify the
color for displaying objects found in the query in Color. Click the Edit button to display the
Color dialog box if you need to change the color.
7. Click Execute Query.
530
The New ScheduleReview Query command searches your SmartPlant Review model for
elements that match criteria specified in your project planning file. SmartPlant Review then
updates the Main view and displays the elements according to selected options. For
example, you can search for elements that fall within the Critical Path category and display
them as red, shaded graphics.
The project planning file that you want to use with this query must already exist.
The search criteria reside in your project planning file. For example, if you have tasks in your
project file such as Actual Cost, % Complete, and Remaining Work, these items are
available as search criteria.
The groups and tasks associated with the groups must already be defined to use them in
the query.
New ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box

according to selected options. For example, you can search for elements that fall within the
Name - Allows you to select an existing query name or to enter a new one.
Delete - Deletes the currently selected query.
Definition
Criteria - Displays the defined criteria for the query that is currently selected.
Edit - Edits the criteria for the currently selected query.
Execute Query - Evaluates the query that is currently selected and updates the materials or
objects in the Main view accordingly.
Restore Display - Clears the query results and restores the display to normal material
colors.
Fit
Display
selected query.
531
query.
selected query.
Highlight method
Style - Defines the style for highlighting objects that your query finds.
Color - Displays the current highlight color for the objects that your query finds.
Edit - Displays the Color dialog box, allowing you to change the highlight color for the
objects that your query finds.

The search criteria resides in your project planning file. For example, if you have tasks in
your project file such as Actual Cost, % Complete, and Remaining Work, these items are
See Also
Create a New ScheduleReview Query (on page 530)
Edit a ScheduleReview Query

Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > Edit
according to the options selected. For example, you can search for elements that fall within the
1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > Edit.
2. Select a query Name.
To delete a query, select the query and click Delete.
3. Click Edit to update the query using your project planning program.
4. Select an option to Fit query results.
Fit None does not fit the query results into the Main view.
Fit All displays all graphics, not just the query results, in the Main view.
Fit Query displays only the query result objects in the Main view.
5. Select an option to Display query results.
Display All specifies that all SmartPlant Review graphics display when you execute a
query.
Display Query results specifies that only the graphics associated with the query results
display when you execute a query.
Display All but query results specifies that only the graphics not associated with the
query results display when you execute a query.
6. Select a Highlight method Style.
532
7. Select a Highlight method Color.
The search criteria reside in your project planning file. For example, if you have tasks in your
project file such as Actual Cost, % Complete, and Remaining Work, these items are
The groups and tasks associated with the groups must already be defined to use them in
the query.
Edit/New ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box

Allows you to create a new ScheduleReview query (Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > New)
or edit an existing one (Tools > ScheduleReview > Query > Edit).
Name - Allows you to select an existing query name or to enter a new one.
Delete - Deletes the currently selected query.
Definition
Criteria - Displays the defined criteria for the query that is currently selected.
Edit - Edits the criteria for the currently selected query.
Execute Query - Evaluates the query that is currently selected and updates the materials or
objects in the Main view accordingly.
Restore Display - Clears the query results and restores the display to normal material
colors.
Fit
533
Display
selected query.
query.
selected query.
Highlight method
Style - Defines the style for highlighting objects that your query finds. You can select
Wireframe, Transparent (90% - 10%), Shaded, or Normal.
Import ScheduleReview Projects

File > Import > ScheduleReview Projects
Allows you to import an existing .SRI file into the current project database. You can also import a
selected ScheduleReview project from a different SmartPlant Review project database into the
current project database. This imported and manipulated ScheduleReview information can then
be exported to a SmartPlant Review project database file.
1. Click File > Import > ScheduleReview Projects.
2. On the Open dialog box, select a file or browse to the file that you want, and click Open.
data.
The project that you import must have a unique name.
When you import an existing .SRI file from a previous ScheduleReview session, ensure that
all ScheduleReview settings have a valid option selected.
To avoid error messages that may occur when you open an existing .SRI file created with
MS Project Planner, open the MS Project Planner file in MS Project 98.
You can see a list of projects by expanding the ScheduleReview node in Project Manager.
See Also
534
Export ScheduleReview Projects

File > Export > ScheduleReview Projects
Displays the Save As dialog box. From this dialog box, you can select the .MDB file to which
you want to export the active ScheduleReview project.
1. Click File > Export > ScheduleReview Projects.
2. On the Save As dialog box, select a file or browse to the file that you want, and click Save.
You must set the active ScheduleReview project in Project Manager. For more information,
see Set the Active Project (on page 518).
data.
See Also
Auto-Association Tasks
Tools > ScheduleReview > Auto-Association
Associates tasks with a group automatically. It works by comparing the names of existing groups
to the names of existing tasks. For example, you may have a group called steel pipe associated
with all the steel pipes in your model. You may also have several tasks in your project file
named install steel pipe, paint steel pipe, and inspect steel pipe. When you use this command,
ScheduleReview looks for group names that match task names. The task names listed above
have a text string (steel pipe) that match the group name steel pipe. As a result,
ScheduleReview can associate all the tasks that contain the text string steel pipe with the group
steel pipe.
1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Auto Association.
Auto-Association Dialog Box (on page 536)
2. Select a method.
The program automatically associates the tasks that match the specified criteria with
the appropriate group.
The Auto Association command automatically associates tasks with a group. It works by
comparing the names of existing groups to the names of existing tasks.
Check the Match activity ID instead of task name option to associate tasks with display
sets (groups) using the task activity name rather than the task name.
Before using this command, define all of the groups and tasks that you will use to review the
model.
535
Auto-Association Dialog Box

Compares the names of existing groups to the names of existing tasks and automatically
associates the tasks with a group.
Match whole string - Looks for task names that exactly match the group name. For example, if
you have a task named steel pipe, the task is only associated with a group called steel pipe.
Match substring of task name - Looks for task names with a substring that matches a group
name. For example, if you have a task named paint steel pipe, the task can be associated with a
group called steel pipe.
Match substring of group name - Looks for tasks that match a substring of a group name. For
example, if you have a task called steel pipe, the task can be associated with a group called
steel pipe iso15.
Match case - Matches tasks with groups using case- sensitivity. For example, Steel Pipe
matches Steel Pipe, but not steel pipe. You can use this option in association with any of the
three association methods.
Cumulative - Adds the result of the current operation to the existing set of associations. If not
selected, ScheduleReview deletes associations before creating new ones. The Cumulative
option also looks for task names with a substring that matches a group name. For example, if
you have a task named paint steel pipe, the task can be associated with a group called steel
pipe. You can use this option in association with any of the three association methods.
Match activity ID instead of task name - Associates tasks with display sets (groups) using the
task activity name rather than the task name. For example, in the sample SPRDemo project and
the ScheduleReview EXAM planner project (using Primavera), if you create a new display set
named A00003 using the definition FIND Data Sequence = Major Equipment Foundation, then
click Tools > ScheduleReview > Auto-Association and check the Cumulative option (so as
not to delete any current associations) and the Match activity ID instead of task name option,
the Accumulator Foundation task will be associated with the A00003 display set because it's
Task Activity ID is A00003.
See Also
Add a ScheduleReview Association (on page 537)
536
Add a ScheduleReview Association

Tools > ScheduleReview > Add Association
Allows you to manually create an association between a task and one or more display sets.
1. In Project Manager, select the ScheduleReview task to add.
2. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Add Association.
Add Association Dialog Box (on page 537)
Use this command when you want to create an association between a task and one or more
display sets.
import a file.
Add Association Dialog Box

Allows you to add an association between a task and one or more display sets.
Name - Specifies the display sets to select for completing the type of criteria definition. Selected
display sets are highlighted.
ID - Displays the unique ID for the display set.
See Also
Add a ScheduleReview Association (on page 537)
Remove a ScheduleReview Association (on page 537)
Remove a ScheduleReview Association

Tools > ScheduleReview > Remove Association
Disassociates a task from one or more display sets.
1. Select the ScheduleReview task to remove from Project Manager.
2. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Remove Association.
import a file.
You can restore the associations that you just removed by dragging the display set name
and dropping it on the recently unassociated display set.
537
Delete a Project
Tools > ScheduleReview > Delete Project
Allows you to remove a previously defined ScheduleReview project from the session.
1. In Project Manager, select the ScheduleReview project that you want to delete.
2. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Delete Project.
Delete ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box (on page 538)
When you delete a project, this action cannot be reversed.
Delete ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box

Deletes one or more ScheduleReview projects.
Projects - Displays the available ScheduleReview projects.
See Also
Delete a Project (on page 538)
Use Review Controls

The ScheduleReview controls allow you to view your construction sequences quickly and
efficiently. You can play, pause, or stop the ScheduleReview process at your convenience. You
can also use more advanced commands, such as specifying a particular date for viewing.
538
Play a ScheduleReview Project (on page 539)

View a ScheduleReview Project at a Specific Percent Complete (on page 539)
Pause a ScheduleReview Session (on page 539)
Stop a ScheduleReview Session (on page 540)
Step Forward Through a ScheduleReview Session (on page 540)
Step Back Through a ScheduleReview Session (on page 540)
Restart a ScheduleReview Session (on page 540)
Go to the End of a ScheduleReview Session (on page 541)
Go to a Specific Date in a ScheduleReview Session (on page 541)
Record a ScheduleReview Session (on page 541)
Play a ScheduleReview Project

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Play
Starts the review process using the parameters defined on the Review tab of the Settings
dialog box. you click Play, the review process starts on the Start Date that you defined and
stops on the End Date.
1. Click File > Import > ScheduleReview Projects.
2. Select a ScheduleReview project to open.
3. Click Play
on the ScheduleReview toolbar to start ScheduleReview.
The Play command starts the review process using the parameters defined on the Review
tab of the Settings dialog box. When you click Play, the review process starts on the start
date that you defined and stops on the end date.
You can also play the review process by pressing Ctrl+Alt+R on the keyboard.
See Also
View a ScheduleReview Project at a Specific Percent

Complete
Move the slider bar for Percent Complete on the ScheduleReview toolbar to display the review
at that percentage of completion.
Percent Complete displays the status of the review whenever a review is played.
See Also
Pause a ScheduleReview Session

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Pause
Interrupts the current ScheduleReview session.
You can also use the Go to Start, Back, Forward, Go to End or Stop command when
Pause is activated.
You can also pause by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Space on the keyboard.
See Also
539
Stop a ScheduleReview Session

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Stop
Stops the current ScheduleReview session.
You can also stop the review process by pressing Ctrl+Alt+S on the keyboard.
See Also
Step Forward Through a ScheduleReview Session

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Forward
Allows you to step forward through the current ScheduleReview session.
Forward is available only when ScheduleReview is paused.
See Also
Step Back Through a ScheduleReview Session

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Back
Allows you to step back through the ScheduleReview session in one-day increments.
Back is available only when ScheduleReview is paused.
See Also
Restart a ScheduleReview Session

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Go to Start
Takes you back to the initial start date defined for the ScheduleReview session.
Go to Start is available only when ScheduleReview is paused.
See Also
540
Go to the End of a ScheduleReview Session

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Go to End
Allows you to go directly to the last date defined in the current session.
Go to End is available only when ScheduleReview is paused.
See Also
Go to a Specific Date in a ScheduleReview Session (on page 541)
Go to a Specific Date in a ScheduleReview Session

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Go to Date
Allows you to jump to a specific date within the current ScheduleReview session.
See Also
Record a ScheduleReview Session

Tools > ScheduleReview > Review > Record
Allows you to take snapshots of the ScheduleReview animation during playback.
1. Click Tools > ScheduleReview > Settings.
2. Click the Animation tab.
3. Select a View group to play.
If the Record button is not active, you do not have a valid View group selected.
4. Select the Snapshot tab.
5. Select a folder to write your review.
6. Click Record
7. Click Play
See Also
541
542
SECTION 38
SmartPlant Review Utilities

SmartPlant Review delivers the following utilities to help you manage your data. Each utility is
delivered separate folders under the \SmartPlant\Review\Utilities folder.
DBCompact (DBCompact.exe) - Compacts and defragments your Microsoft Jet 4.0 databases.
For more information, see the ReadMe.txt file in the \SmartPlant\Review\Utilities\DBCompact
folder.
ImageView (ImgView.exe) - Provides image viewing and printing support for Intergraph RGB file
formats and other image file formats. Slide show capability is provided for viewing multiple
images.
Tag Merge (TagMerge.exe) - Allows you to merge multiple tag files into a single tag file, which
enables you to identify duplicate tags and handle the resolution of these duplicates in a variety
of ways. For more information, see the ReadMe.txt file in the
\SmartPlant\Review\Utilities\TagMerge folder.
SP3DLabelSelector (SP3dLabelSelector.exe) - Generates a new SPRSP3DLabels.bin
template file to match the SmartPlant schema with the labels to be generated into the .MDB2
label file from published SmartPlant 3D XML label data. For more information, see Use the
SmartPlant 3D Label Selector Utility (on page 161).
Select Modules (SelectModules.exe) - Allows you to select which modules you want to pull
licenses for when starting a SmartPlant Review session. For more information, see Using the
Select Modules Utility.
SmartPlant License Checkout (License Checkout Utility.exe) - Allows you to obtain licenses
for SmartPlant products and its modules for use on a non-networked computer (laptop). Using
this utility allows you to run SmartPlant products without a network connection to the license
server. For more information, see Using the SmartPlant License Checkout Utility.
Using the Select Modules Utility

The SmartPlant Review Select Modules utility (SelectModules.exe) allows you to select which
modules you want to pull licenses for when starting a SmartPlant Review session. Installed by
default to C:\Program Files\SmartPlant\Review\Utilities\SelectModules, this utility is available on
the Start menu under Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant Review > Select Modules.
By default, SmartPlant Review attempts to obtain licenses for each module installed when you
start the product. However, if there are not enough module licenses available to cover the
number of modules installed, the SmartPlant Review session closes. In this case, we
recommend that you use the Select Modules utility to unselect the modules for which you cannot
obtain licenses. Doing so allows you to run SmartPlant Review with only those modules for
which you can obtain licenses. You can also ask a co-worker to exit SmartPlant Review, which
returns in-use licenses to the server, or you can purchase more licenses.
Example
If your site has four licenses of SmartPlant Review but only three module licenses for the
Construction module and three of the SmartPlant Review sessions are currently using all three
Construction module licenses, the fourth SmartPlant Review session will not run unless you use
543

the Select Modules utility to de-select the Construction module before starting SmartPlant
Review.
Select Licenses for Modules

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant Review > Select Modules.
Check the modules for which you want to pull licenses.
Click OK.
Click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant Review > SmartPlant Review.
Click Help > About SmartPlant Review to view a list of the modules for which SmartPlant
Review was able to obtain licenses.
By default, the first time you start SmartPlant Review, it attempts to pull licenses for itself
and for each module you have installed, unless you first use the Select Modules utility to
select the modules for which you want to pull licenses.
If you are running SmartPlant Review in remote license mode (that is, you used the
SmartPlant License Checkout utility to obtain licenses) and open the Select Modules utility,
all modules appear disabled, with checks beside the modules with currently checked out
licenses. These selections cannot be changed until the checkout duration expires, nor can
licenses be obtained interactively while licenses are checked out. Checked out licenses
cannot be checked in.
Pulled licenses are returned to the license server when you close SmartPlant Review.
SmartPlant Review displays a message if it cannot return a license for any reason (for
example, the network connection to the license server is down). Licenses that cannot be
returned must be scavenged on the SmartPlant License Manager server. For more
information about scavenging licenses, see the SmartPlant License Manager Installation and
User's Guide (SPLMInstall_UserGuide.pdf).
If SmartPlant Review cannot obtain enough licenses at start up, the software displays a "not
enough licenses available" message and SmartPlant Review shuts down. Before SmartPlant
Review will run, you must either free enough currently in-use licenses to cover the modules
you want to run, or use the Select Modules utility to unselect the modules for which you
cannot currently obtain a license. To see who is currently using licenses, use SmartPlant
License Manager on the license server.
544
Select Modules Utility Dialog Box

The SmartPlant Review Select Modules Utility, installed by default during SmartPlant Review
setup, allows you to specify which modules you want to pull licenses for when starting a
SmartPlant Review session.
Modules - Displays the modules available with SmartPlant Review. A grayed-out entry means
that module is not installed on your workstation. Check the box beside the module you want
SmartPlant Review to pull a license for during startup. Licenses are not pulled for modules that
are not checked. By default, all installed modules are checked.
If you are running SmartPlant Review in remote license mode (that is, you used the
SmartPlant License Checkout utility to obtain licenses) and open the Select Modules utility,
all modules appear disabled, with checks beside the modules with currently checked out
licenses. These selections cannot be changed until the checkout duration expires, nor can
licenses be obtained interactively while licenses are checked out. Checked out licenses
cannot be checked in.
If SmartPlant Review cannot obtain enough licenses at start up, a "not enough licenses
available" message is displayed and SmartPlant Review shuts down. Before SmartPlant
Review will run, you must free enough currently in-use licenses to cover the modules you
want to run or you must use the Select Modules utility to unselect the modules for which you
cannot currently obtain a license.
After SmartPlant Review obtains the necessary licenses and is ready for use, the Help >
About SmartPlant Review dialog box displays the modules for which licenses were
obtained.
545
Using the SmartPlant License Checkout Utility

The SmartPlant License Checkout utility (License Checkout Utility.exe) allows you to obtain
licenses for SmartPlant products for use on a non-networked computer (for example, a remote
laptop). Using this utility allows you to run SmartPlant products without a network connection to
the license machine. Each user on a server can check out a license on that machine.
When you check out a license, the license and expiration information are stored on your local
machine, separate from other license and expiration information. Each time you start the product
during the checkout period, a message displays the expiration date for the checked out license.
When the checkout period for the license expires, the SmartPlant product attempts to request a
license using SmartPlant License Manager the next time you start the product. For example,
after the license expires at 11:59 PM on the expiration date, the next time you start the product,
it attempts to access the SmartPlant License Manager license machine for base and module
licenses prior to running.
You must install and configure SmartPlant License Manager before checking out a license.
You must have administrator privileges to check out a license or to run the product using a
checked out license.
Install SmartPlant License Checkout Utility

Do not uninstall the version of the SmartPlant License Checkout Utility that is
currently on your system if you (a) are installing a new product that includes SmartPlant License
Checkout Utility v11, or (b) have other applications such as SmartPlant Review or SmartSketch
loaded on your machine.
The older version of the SmartPlant License Checkout Utility is needed to work with your
currently-loaded application(s). See the Compatibility chart for information on application
versions and their required version of the SmartPlant License Checkout Utility.
Compatibility
The table below lists the applications that require the SmartPlant License Checkout Utility as
well as their corresponding required versions.
546
Application Version
SmartPlant License Checkout

Utility Version
SmartSketch
2009.1_06.01.00.31
SPLMCU v04.02.01.1200
SmartSketch
2009SP1_06.00.01.0008
SPLMCU v04.02.00.1100
SmartPlant Review
2008.2_07.00.00.30
SPLMCU v04.02.00.1073
SmartPlant Review
2008.1_07.00.00.23
SPLMCU v04.02.00.1053

SmartPlant Review
2008_07.00.00.22
SmartPlant Review
2007.4_06.02.00.40
SPLMCU v04.01.03.1124
SmartPlant Review
2007.3_06.02.00.34
SmartPlant Review
2007.2_06.02.00.27
SmartPlant Review
2007.1_06.02.00.23
SPLMCU v04.01.03.1035
SmartPlant Review
06.02.00.11
SmartPlant Review
06.01.00.18
SPLMCU v04.01.02.9000
SmartPlant Review
06.01.00.15
SmartPlant Review
06.01.00.07
Install the Utility

1. Insert the product CD into the CD-ROM drive. If the installation does not start automatically,
double-click setup.exe in the main folder.
2. Click SmartPlant License Checkout Utility.
3. Type your name and company name.
4. Verify your name and company name, and then click Next.
5. Click Display to read and accept the license agreement, and then click Yes.
6.
7.
8.
9.
You must have a PDF reader to view the license agreement.

Specify the destination folder.
Review your settings, and then click Next.
Click Install to start the installation process.
Click Finish.
You can uninstall the License Checkout utility at any time, even if you are currently running
a product in remote license mode.
If you installed the latest version of the SmartPlant License Checkout Utility (v11), it is
installed along with the older version you have:
547
Check Out a License for SmartPlant Review

1. Be sure that the SmartPlant License Manager (SPLM) is installed and configured on your
computer.
2. Click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant License Checkout Utility > License
Checkout Utility.
License Checkout Utility Dialog Box (on page 549)
3. In the Application Group list, select SmartPlant Review.
4. In the Available Modules list, click the checkbox for each module you want to use.
5. If necessary, select an expiration from the License Expiration list, and then click Check
Out.
If you want to check out only the base SmartPlant Review product, do not check any of
the modules.
Checked out licenses cannot be checked in. If you check out three modules (four total
licenses: one base and three modules), then attempt to run the License Checkout utility
again and select two other modules, the software displays a dialog box telling you that a
license is already checked out for SmartPlant Review and displaying the expiration date for
that license.
When running in remote license mode, you cannot use setup to modify the product
installation until the following conditions are met:
The checkout duration expires.
The system is working with SmartPlant License Manager in connected license mode
once again.
In other words, you cannot install or remove modules while running in remote license mode.
If SmartPlant Review is running in remote license mode but is unable to confirm for any
reason that it is running in that mode, SmartPlant Review automatically returns to connected
license mode and attempts to obtain the licenses from SmartPlant License Manager.
SmartPlant Review notifies you if it is unable to obtain licenses from SmartPlant License
Manager.
Each time you start SmartPlant Review while using remote license mode, the software displays
a message informing you when the checked out licenses will expire. The first time that you run
SmartPlant Review after the checked out licenses expire, the software displays a message
informing you that the checked out licenses have expired and that the software is reverting to
the standard connected license mode and attempting to get licenses from SmartPlant License
Manager.
548
License Checkout Utility Dialog Box

Allows you to select the product for which you want to check out a license.
Options
Application Group - Displays the installed products available for license checkout. Select the
product for which you want to check out licenses.
If the Application Group list is empty, your application may require an older version of
the checkout utility. Please check your original product installation media for the compatible
version of the utility.
Available Modules - Displays any modules or add-ins available with your product. If no
modules appear in the list, either your product contains no supported modules, or no modules
have been installed. Check the box beside the module for which you want to check out a
license, and then click Check Out. If you want to check out only the base product, do not check
any of the modules.
License Expiration - Specify the date that you want the checkout to expire. When the checkout
period for the license expires, the product returns to normal and connected license operation
using the SmartPlant License Manager the next time you start the product.
549
550
SECTION 39
Troubleshooting
The following tables lists solutions to common problems that you may have when using
SmartPlant Review. More information may be available in the readme.htm file.
In This Section
Performance Tips .......................................................................... 551
Troubleshooting: General Viewing Issues ..................................... 556
Troubleshooting: Animation and Lighting ...................................... 558
Troubleshooting: Annotations ........................................................ 560
Troubleshooting: Motion ................................................................ 560
Troubleshooting: Primavera Version Changes .............................. 561
Troubleshooting: Printing Limitations ............................................ 562
Troubleshooting: Tips for Streaming Data ..................................... 562
Troubleshooting: Viewing SmartPlant 3D Data ............................. 564
Set Number of Processors for Rendering ...................................... 565
Troubleshoot 3D Navigation .......................................................... 565
Performance Tips
Video Cards
The results of a survey of graphics cards used with SmartPlant Review are available on the
Intergraph Process, Power & Marine eCustomer Web site. To view these results:
1. Browse to http://crmweb.intergraph.com/ (http://crmweb.intergraph.com/).
2. Type your eCustomer user name and password.
3. Click Service > Download Software Updates > Products > SmartPlant Review >
Technical Notes & Documentation.
When considering a video card, select a video card designed for OpenGL-based, 3D-intensive
scientific or engineering applications. Many 3D-intensive game cards are not suitable for
engineering purposes.
As good as a video card can be, the device driver is also crucial to performance. We advise
trying various card and driver combinations prior to committing to a particular card vender.
After configuring your computer, be very careful about installing operating system updates or
gaming software, because doing so can dramatically affect performance. Also, make sure you
can return your machine configuration to a previous state.
For laptop computers with built-in graphics, sometimes the graphics chip manufacturer has a
better driver available than was installed by the laptop manufacturer. However, because the use
of a non-laptop manufacturer driver may void your warranty, be sure to check with both the
graphics chip supplier and the laptop manufacturer before using a non- laptop manufacturer
driver.
SmartPlant Review defaults to software rendering if your system does not support
OpenGL acceleration.
551
Troubleshooting
Memory Usage (Estimating Required RAM)
Use the following procedure to estimate the amount of RAM (or system memory) your
SmartPlant Review project may need. Actual memory usage will vary based on the project data
and features being used. Runtime memory usage may increase significantly when using various
SmartPlant Review features, such as Animation, Display Sets, Collision Detection, Materials,
Raytracing, Snapshot, and so forth.
1. Estimate the total SmartPlant Review data size by summing the size of all files required by
your project that SmartPlant Review reads into memory.
For DRI projects, add the size of the DRI file and all listed model files (DGN, PRP, and
so forth). If the project database must be created (or recreated), add the size of any
legacy project text files that will be imported into the project database (MDB), such as
DST, SET, TAG, and so forth.
For single file projects (DGN, PRP, VUE), add the size of the single file. If the
MicroStation file references other MicroStation files, then the sizes of the referenced
MicroStation files should also be added.
For .SVF (multiple VUE file) projects, add the size of the SVF file and all listed VUE
files.
Be sure to add the size of any material files used by the project (MAT, PAL). Remember
that all texture files will consume system memory when raytracing or if graphics card
memory is not available.
The label database (MDB2) is not read into memory. However, if the label database
must be created (or recreated), then add the size of the single largest DRV and/or .XML file
being used to create the label database to approximate the extra memory needed to
process each DRV and/or .XML file data when creating the label database.
2. Multiply this approximation by 1.2 to add a rough estimate for the overhead of the
SmartPlant Review executable code in memory and extra memory needed to process
and/or manage the data in the other files during load and/or during the SmartPlant Review
session.
Virtual Memory (Swap Space)

Because the operating system and other applications will take a portion of available memory,
leaving less memory available for SmartPlant Review, make sure you have enough virtual
memory.
Calculate the minimum virtual memory by taking the larger of these two calculations:
(1.5 * RAM) * the number of processors on the machine
(1.5 * the largest dataset used in the application) * the number of
processors
Set the minimum and maximum virtual memory settings to the same value for best performance.
If the page file has to grow, it can become very fragmented. Although the operating system can
address only 2 GB of virtual memory at one time for each application, the swap space can be
larger because multiple applications can be in virtual memory at the same time.
For FAT and FAT32 file systems, virtual memory is limited to approximately 4 GB.
For NTFS file systems, virtual memory is limited to one approximately 4GB page file per
partition. NTFS file systems may have more than one page file by using a page file on more
than one partition.
For large VUE files, set the virtual memory to a value much larger than the VUE file size. For
extremely large VUE files, you may need to set the virtual memory to the maximum allowed
for your file system, defragment the drive, and close any non- essential programs to provide
552
Troubleshooting
the VUE file with the maximum amount of space possible. To handle extremely large VUE
files, in excess of 1 or 2 GB, you may need at least two 4GB defragmented page files.
Display Performance
Many SmartPlant Review settings affect display time. While there is no single combination of
options that works best for all data sets or user workflows, the following features can improve
display time, especially when working with large data sets. Use the View > Settings >
Advanced > Time Display option to evaluate the effects of using these options.
View Settings Update Interrupt - The Esc key cancels the current screen
update. Only elements rendered so far will be displayed. This
can be very useful if the full update of the model is not
needed for the current task.
Range Rejection - Increase the settings as desired and
activate to significantly improve display time for wireframe
and/or shaded rendering by eliminating elements that are too
small to be of current interest.
Dot Box - Draws distant elements less precisely for improved
update speed. At a distance, these items will be represented
by a small box of pixels instead of a full rendering.
Two-sided lighting - Turn off this option to improve display
time for all models.
Stroking Tolerance - Reduce this setting to the lowest
acceptable level (minimally 4) to improve display time for
models with PDS elements such as pipes, reducers, valves,
and elbows.
Perspective - Turn off this mode to improve display time for
all models.
Views
Plan and Elevation Views - Turn off (not just cover or

collapse) these views whenever possible to improve
performance.
Overlapping Windows - Prevent the main view from being
overlapped by any other window (including toolbars and the
plan or elevation views) to improve responsiveness.
Partial Recall - When recalling a saved view, either
singularly or during keyframe animation, use the partial recall
feature with the "Level settings" option turned off. This
significantly improves performance for datasets with large
numbers of files.
Motion
Settings
Rates - Increase as desired to improve motion speed through

the model.
Display - Turn off the Allow all texturing, Update view
cone, and Update position status options, to improve
performance.
553
Troubleshooting
Data
Reduction
Ideally, each SmartPlant Review project should contain only

the data of interest for the review session. The less data to
review, the faster performance will be. The following features
can improve display performance for any project by hiding
any graphic elements not currently of interest for the task at
hand:
Motion Clipping Plane - Motion display times can be
improved by setting and activating the motion far clipping
plane to the desired extent. Elements will only be clipped
during motion through the model.
Clipping Planes - Display times can be improved by setting
and activating the near and far clipping view cone plane
settings to the desired extent.
Clipping Volumes - Display times can be improved by
creating a clipping volume to clip all data outside a particular
volume.
Level Settings - Display times can be improved by turning
off the levels of objects not currently of interest.
Display Sets - Display times can be improved by creating
display sets of elements not currently of interest, and turning
them off. Display sets can be created in a wide variety of
ways, using element file, level, color, volume, and attribute
data information.
Non-Model Data - Turn off the display and/or use of all
annotations, materials, measurements, lights, tags and/or
textures whenever possible to improve display times.
File System
Make sure the system is using the fastest file system. For Windows 2000 and Windows XP,
studies have shown that the NTFS file system with a 4K cluster size provides better
performance than a FAT or FAT32 file system.
Data Fragmentation
554
Hard Drives - Defragment your hard drives regularly. File fragmentation on the hard drive
slows down the system and SmartPlant Review.
System Page Files - Keep the system page files defragmented as well as the disk drives.
The page file is a system file and cannot be defragmented while the system is running. A
fragmented page file may be scattered all over a disk drive and will not perform efficiently. If
a page file becomes too fragmented, the system may not be able to open an extremely large
.VUE file.
Defragmenting the page file is typically a boot time operation separate from the real- time
disk drive defragmentation operation. Tools are available, such as Diskeeper, that will
defragment the page files.
Project and Label Databases - Use the DBCompact utility to compact and defragment your
Microsoft Jet databases. If the label or project files are updated for an existing project, the
software attempts to replace the label database records on a file by file basis. Deleting and
replacing large numbers of records in the label database may lead to significant database
fragmentation, which can lead to poor performance. Compressing the database on exit will
Troubleshooting
remove this fragmentation. For more information, see SmartPlant Review Utilities (on page
543).
However, if several design or label files have been changed since the current label database
was created, we recommend simply deleting the existing label database (MDB2) and
allowing the software to rebuild it from the current project data. If display sets exist in the
main project database (MDB), then rebuilding the label database also kicks off display set
resolution, which rebuilds the display sets based on the current label and project file
contents. Only the label database (MDB2 file) needs to be deleted. For example, one label
database took 7 hours to update by replacing records. This same data set was up in minutes
when the old database was deleted and SmartPlant Review was allowed to re-build a clean
database.
Database Format
SmartPlant Review creates Microsoft Access databases to store and manage your project data.
Because Access 2000 databases are much faster than Access 97 databases, use the Access
2000 format instead of the Access 97 format when creating your project databases. However,
Access 2000 is in Unicode, which makes the database file size larger than Access 97 because
the Unicode format doubles the size of text fields. The actual Access 2000 database size will
depend on the amount of text data in the database. Therefore, if you have the space and need
the speed, use the Access 2000 format. For more information about Microsoft Access and
project databases, see Understanding Projects and Project Databases (on page 71).
Do not use Access 97 format if you are using multi-byte character data on a nonEnglish operating system and locale.
Page Timeout Registry Settings

Check the Microsoft Jet database Page Timeout registry settings, which can affect database
performance over the network. The Page Timeout value for the Microsoft Jet database 3.5 and
4.0 versions is set to 5000 milliseconds by default. Set this value to 5 milliseconds for best
performance, especially over a Novell network. Make sure that you find and set all values of the
Page Timeout setting in each Jet version registry entry.
Any changes to the registry are at your own risk.
\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Jet\Engine\Jet\3.5\Engines\Jet
2.x\Page Timeout
3.5\Page Timeout
2.x\Page Timeout
3.x\Page Timeout
4.0\Page Timeout
Photo-Realism Module
To get the most out of the Photo- Realism module, we recommend the following system
resources:
System memory - Additional memory is recommended to improve the performance of the
raytracer. Additional memory is particularly important on multi-processor systems and/or with
relatively large models. Some models may be too large to raytrace in their entirety due to the
memory limitations of 32-bit operating systems (Windows 2000 and XP limit applications to 2GB
555
Troubleshooting
of addressable memory; Windows 2003 Server allows access to 3GB of memory). Creating
smaller subsets of the larger model should allow portions of the larger model to be raytraced.
Processors - The raytracer has an efficient multi-threaded implementation that can improve
raytrace performance when using multiple processors. When using multiple processors, the
amount of system memory should be considered on a per processor basis. The amount of
system memory, virtual memory and number of processors are likely the most influential factor
in raytrace performance.
Virtual memory - Additional virtual memory may be needed to supplement the system memory
for large models.
Lights - The typical number of lights supported by an OpenGL graphics card can vary from 8 to
24 or more and are dependent on the driver used. This will affect the display of lights using
OpenGL type rendering. Raytracing does not rely on the graphics card for lighting calculation
and will not be affected by the number of lights supported by it.
Textures - The amount of texture memory on the graphics card can affect OpenGL display
performance. A greater amount of texture memory can improve performance. The amount of
texture memory on the graphics card does not affect the performance of the raytracer.
The operating system shares resources (CPU, memory, disk, and so forth) equally among
all processes running on the system. For maximum performance, reduce the number of
processes and services while using Smart Plant Review. Processes and services that are
notorious for consuming vast amounts of resources are (but not limited to) virus scanners,
media players, disk organizers, and mail programs. You might consider dedicating a
machine for exclusive SmartPlant Review use with minimal auxiliary programs.
SmartPlant Review defaults to software rendering if your system does not support OpenGL
acceleration.
Set Number of Processors

Use the View > Advanced > Processors command to set the number of processors used for
normal rendering. Setting this value to a lower number (i.e. "1") limits the number of software
threads that will be created for normal rendering. Setting the number of processors to 1 before
or after opening a project may improve software stability on some systems, but can reduce
rendering performance.
Troubleshooting: General Viewing Issues

Problem
Solution
See...
You are lost in the

view.
Click View > Fit > View to

Model. The current active
view will be updated.
Working with Views (on

page 197)
Part of the model

appears cut off.
Adjust the front and back

clipping planes.
Set Clipping Planes (on

page 233)
Main view is blank

but Plan and
Elevation views
Move the eye point and

adjust the view cone.
Set Eye Point (on page

230)
556
Fit View to Model (on

page 201)
Set Clipping Planes (on
Troubleshooting
display the model.
page 233)
Fit View to Model (on
page 201)
Views are blank or

objects seem to be
missing or hidden.
Check the view settings

(increase tolerance).
View Settings Dialog Box

(on page 211)
Make sure that the eye point Level Settings Dialog Box
and the center point are not (on page 221)
set to the same, or nearly
Working with Display
the same, values.
Sets (on page 239)
Check the settings for levels
Set Eye Point (on page
and display sets.
230)
Set Center Point (on
page 232)
Cannot open an
existing .VUE file.
Generate new SmartPlant

Review 6.x VUE files from
the original model data set.
Save As VUE File (on

page 149)
SmartPlant Review supports

reading any .VUE file
produced by SmartPlant
Review 05.00.01.02 or later.
Versions of SmartPlant
Review before 06.02.00.17
will not be able to read .VUE
files produced by SmartPlant
Review 06.02.00.17 or later.
Changes do not
appear in the view.
Refresh the view or refresh

the data.
Refresh Command (on

page 49)
Refresh Data Command
(on page 33)
Saved image
contains
overlapping image
that you do not
want.
Refresh All Views (on

Make sure windows, dialog
boxes, toolbars, and so forth page 49)
are not overlapping the view,
then refresh all views.
Objects in my new
display set do not
appear.
Possible overlapping display Working with Display

Sets (on page 239)
sets. The last action
performed on the object by
corresponding display set
manipulations wins.
Stereo viewing
depth perceptions
appear mostly flat
or turning the
glasses upside
down corrects the
View in Stereo (on page

Change the stereo polarity
by clicking View >
224)
Advanced > Stereo, and
then selecting either polarity
direction. Right is the normal
and default polarity direction
557
Troubleshooting
view.
setting. However, left may be

necessary on some setups,
particularly projection
system.
Jagged edges on
objects
Turn on hardware
anti-aliasing if your video
card supports it. Click the
Advanced button on the
Start > Settings > Control
Panel > Display > Settings
tab to access your video
card settings. You may need
to download the current
display driver from your
video card manufacturer
rather than using the generic
display driver delivered with
your operating system.
See the documentation

provided by your video
card manufacturer for
more information about
turning on hardware antialiasing.
Troubleshooting: Animation and Lighting

Problem
Solution
See...
Flicker on thin
volumes
Turn on two-sided lighting. Lighting Tab (View Settings

Dialog Box) (on page 215)
Thin volumes such as Ibeams may have a special
type of coincident surface
bleed through caused by
the back side of the
I-beam behaving as a
coincident surface with the
front side of the I-beam at
some view angles.
Coincident surface
shading issues
Coincident surface bleed

through occurs when two
surfaces are defined at the
same coordinates. This
problem is especially
obvious when two planes
are coincident on the
ground, floors or walls of a
plant.
Level Settings Dialog Box

(on page 221)
Assign Materials (on page
362)
To work around the

coincident surface flicker
problem:
1. Turn off the level of all
but one of the coincident
planes in the offending
files.
558
Troubleshooting
2. Assign the same
material and /or color to all
elements coincident at one
place. This will help
disguise the bleed through
problem.
Options Tab (Create Project
Flicker caused by
During motion the lines
element center lines may show up at some view Dialog Box) (on page 85)
and line strings
angles, causing some
flickering to occur. We
recommend not keeping
the lines and line strings
when creating the project
database.
Stroking Tolerance
Improve curvature of Increase the stroking
Command (on page 40)
many circular
tolerance from the
graphic elements
minimum setting of 16 to
give a smoother curve on
pipes, elbows, valves, and
reducers. Increasing the
stroking tolerance to
between 30 and 50 is
usually adequate to give
smoothly stroked curves
on basic circular elements.
Increasing this setting may
reduce performance but
will improve visual quality.
Lighten or darken
the display
OpenGL lights too

bright in shaded
mode
Adjust the ambient and

brightness settings. If you
have the Photo-Realism
module, add lights to the
model.
Lighting Tab (View Settings

Rendering Photo-Realistic
Images (on page 459)
Lighting Tab (View Settings

Reduce the brightness
setting on the View >
Settings > Lighting dialog
box. Reducing the
brightness may help most
with directional and
positional lights.
559
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting: Annotations
Problem
Solution
See...
Text annotations
Place the text annotations
disappear after you using the Persist option.
exit the program.
Place Annotation Dialog

Box (on page 449)
Annotations do not
display.
Display Tab (View Settings

Turn on all annotations on

the Display tab on the
Display Data Annotations

(on page 321)
Display Text Annotations
(on page 453)
Troubleshooting: Motion
Problem
Solution
Navigation
Increase or decrease dynamic
speed is too fast motion speed.
or too slow.
See...
Rates Tab (Motion Settings
Joystick Tab (Motion
Settings Dialog Box) (on
page 112)
When using
keypad motion,
movement does
not occur.
Make sure Num Lock is turned on

and that the focus is on the Main,
Plan, or Elevation view (the title
bar displays which view has
focus). Check motion settings.
Use the Keyboard (on page

126)
When using
mouse motion,
movement
continues after
releasing left
mouse button.
Click the left mouse button in the

Main view to stop the motion.
Use Mouse Drag Modes

(on page 116)
Configure Motion Settings

(on page 106)
When using
Turn off continuous motion.
keypad motion,
movement still
continues after
releasing keypad
keys.
Set Continuous Motion (on

page 115)
Rotate does not Mouse drag mode behaviors vary

work when using depending on the current state of
the Alt key.
several motion settings.
Combinations of the motion
settings can produce many
Rotate (on page 122)
560
Troubleshooting
different control behaviors. For
example, when using the Alt key
to enter the temporary rotate
mouse drag mode, rotate might
not work in the following situations:
When the Motion > Positional
Modes > Lateral is active, then
Alt + Mouse Drag attempts to
rotate the center point about the
eye point. If the Motion > Mouse
Drag Modes > Lock Center Point
option is checked, then no rotation
occurs because the center point
cannot be moved when locked.
When the Motion > Settings >
Rates > Rotate in degrees value
has been set to 0. Change this
value to be greater than or equal
to .1 degrees.
When the Alt key is being
captured by the operating system
for other purposes (Alt is a menu
accelerator key in Windows). Use
the Motion > Mouse Drag Modes
> Rotate command instead of the
Alt key.
Troubleshooting: Primavera Version Changes

Primavera Engineering and Construction 4.1, Primavera 5.0, or Primavera 6.0 (P4 Plug-In)
ScheduleReview projects should function just like Primavera 3.0 (P3 Plug-In) projects with the
following minor differences.
1. Before using the SmartPlant Review ScheduleReview Project Planner P4 Plug-In, you must
first install the Primavera SDK on your client machine and configure an SQL Server
Connection to the ODBC Name PrimaveraSDK or Primavera SDK. For more information,
see the Primavera Administrator's Guide for your version. Note that only a single user at
a time can access this Primavera SDK database.
To access the SDK, you must be added as a user with Administrator access rights,
OR be assigned the global privilege, View All Global/Project Data via SDK.
2. The Primavera 4.1/5.0/6.0 (P4 Plug-in) Open Project dialog box presents all projects in a
single level selection list without any EPS organization. Primavera 3.0 (P3 Plug-in) had only
project and sub-project organization, but Primavera 4.1, 5.0, and 6.0 allow many levels of
organization.
3. The following Primavera 3.0 (P3 Plug-in) Schedule Data query selections are not available
with Primavera 4.1/5.0/6.0 (P4 Plug-in):
Early Finish Constraint
Early Start Constraint
Late Finish Constraint
561
Troubleshooting
Late Start Constraint
Resume Date
Suspend Date
WBS Code with Separators
4. The following Primavera 4.1/5.0/6.0 (P4 Plug-in) Schedule Data query selections are new
from Primavera 3.0 (P3 Plug-in):
Finish On Constraint
Finish On or After Constraint
Finish On or Before Constraint
Start On Constraint
Start On or After Constraint
Start On or Before Constraint
WBS Name (WBS Code in P4 replaces WBS Code with Separators in P3; WBS Name
in P4 replaces WBS Code in P3.)
Schedule Data duration values are queried as hours.
Troubleshooting: Printing Limitations

SmartPlant Review has the following limitations for high resolution printing:
High resolution printing for some Hewlett-Packard (HP) plotters with more than 600 dpi may
not produce acceptable results.
High resolution printing with the texture backing store option disabled on some graphic
cards may give bad printing results if any other window overlaps SmartPlant Review. When
this occurs, the system displays the warning message below.
Troubleshooting: Tips for Streaming Data

Determine Packet Sizes for Publishing
Streaming data is sent in packets of data. The number of packets of data sent increases with
smaller packet sizes and decreases with larger packet sizes. When streaming the whole model,
larger packet sizes are desirable because fewer packets are sent, which reduces the total
streaming time. When streaming just a subset of the model, smaller packet sizes are desirable
because less of the model is sent in each packet and you may see your requested data faster, if
it fits within the smaller packets.
Before publishing PDS models using the PDS Loader, set the following registry settings,
changing the maximum and minimum values to suit the capabilities of your network. The PDS
Loader streaming .VUE file default values are shown in the table below. This is the smallest
range recommended for 56K connections.
562
Troubleshooting
Value
Type
Initial Data Description
ZVFPacketSizeMaxi REG_DWORD
mum
128000
Specifies the maximum size

in bytes for the packet of view
files SPF generates for PDS
3D models.
ZVFPacketSizeMini
mum
Specifies the minimum size in

bytes for the packet of view
files SPF generates for PDS
3D models.
REG_DWORD
127000
For PDS publishing of streaming .VUE file data over a slower connection, this packet size range
can be reduced, if desired. To improve total throughput on faster LAN connections, then the
recommended packet sizes are 510000 and 512000. You can experiment with different packet
sizes on your network to determine the best results for your purposes.
When publishing using the PDS Loader, use SmartPlant Review to set up your project view
settings before publishing the project.
Undo any SmartPlant Review project display set moves before publishing the PDS data to
prevent locate problems with the published data.
Cache Streaming Data

To improve performance, use caching so that the View in SmartPlant Review and View Item
in SmartPlant Review commands retain the model on the SmartPlant Foundation client and
use the local cached model when the same model is displayed again.
1. Specify the cache location for the SmartPlant Foundation Desktop Client by setting the
Streamed3DModelCache value in the Settings.xml file (stored by default on the client
machine in C:\Documents and Settings\<USERNAME>\Application
Data\SmartPlant\Foundation\8.x). The following example sets the cache to the folder
D:\cache.
<configuration>
<ProductDirectory>c:\Program
Files\SmartPlant\Foundation\3.7\SPFDesktopClient\CurrentVersion</Pro
ductDirectory>
<datasheets dir="C:\" />
<servers selected="spfserver">
<server name="spfserver" host="spfserver" dir="spfasp" />
</servers>
<Streamed3DModelCache>D:\cache</Streamed3DModelCache>
</configuration>
2. Specify the cache location by setting the Streamed3DModelCache variable in the
Settings.js file (stored by default on the SmartPlant Foundation server in C:\Program
Files\SmartPlant\Foundation\8.x\SPFAsp\WebClient\Navigation and Reporting). The
following example sets the cache to the folder D:\cache.
var Streamed3DModelCache = "D:\\cache";
Acceptable Values for the Streamed3DModelCache

Setting
563
Troubleshooting
"" (null string)
Specifies that SmartPlant Review should use the

Temporary Internet Files folder on the client computer for
the cache. The user is responsible for cleaning this cache
using Internet Explorer.
"none"
Indicates that no caching is to take place. Models are

always retrieved over the network to the client computer.
<client folder>
Assumed to be a client folder that is used to cache the 3D

models if the setting is anything other than "none" or null.
You are responsible for cleaning the cache at your own
discretion.
No value
provided
Uses the Temporary Internet Files folder is used for the

cache. If a location is specified, that folder and path must
exist on each client machine, and you must use double
slashes (\\) in the definition. If the defined directory does
not exist on a client machine, the Temporary Internet Files
folder is used.
Using the Temporary Internet Files folder (default) results in a server request per
packet during streaming, even when the data is already cached. If this server request is
undesired (due to slow server connections), then you should use a client folder for the cache
instead.
Troubleshooting: Viewing SmartPlant 3D Data

Problem
Solution
See...
Cannot view mixed

PDS (DRI or VUE)
and SmartPlant 3D
(VUE) files.
Attach the PDS project as a reference in

SmartPlant 3D, define the appropriate
filters, and then use the Save as
SmartPlant Review command. You will
not get any PDS attributes, only the
graphics.
SmartPlant 3D Orthographic
Drawings User's Guide
Alternatively, save the data as a DGN

from SmartPlant 3D, attach the DGN files
to a PDS project to produce a PDS DRI
set, and open the DRI in SmartPlant
Review. In this case, you will not get
SmartPlant 3D attributes.
You can create a VUE file from the PDS
DRI project. Combine it with the PDS
DRV files, the SP3D VUE file and the
SP3D attribute XML file in a SVF project
in the same directory. In this case, you
can see both PDS and SP3D attributes.
564
Troubleshooting
Set Number of Processors for Rendering

View > Advanced > Processors
Displays the Set Number of Processors dialog box, which specifies the number of processors
to use for rendering.
Enables you to set the number of processors to use for rendering. The number of processors
defaults to and is limited by the actual number of available physical hardware central processor
units (CPUs). Setting this value to a lower number (for example, "1") limits the number of
software threads that will be created for normal (not ray traced) rendering. The minimum value is
1.
Enter the number of processors to be used and click OK. Your setting is saved and
available the next time the work session is opened.
Setting the number of processors to 1 before or after opening a project may improve
software stability on some systems, but can reduce rendering performance.
Troubleshoot 3D Navigation
Graphics Card Troubleshooting
You do not see graphics in the window display of a dual-monitor setup when using an
ATI V3600 FireGL (driver ver. 8.62 released on 7/21/2009) card.
Follow the steps below to configure graphics card.
1. From the Start menu, select Catalyst Control Center.
2. Select Workstations > Settings.
3. Click Shared Front/Back/Z Dual Screen Mode.
4. Click OK and then exit the application.
5. Reboot your system.
The 3D Navigator is flickering.
Check your card properties and make sure you have Hardware Acceleration enabled.
Checking Hardware Acceleration Settings - Microsoft Vista/Windows 7 Instructions (on page
568)
565
Troubleshooting
Checking Hardware Acceleration Settings - Microsoft Windows XP Instructions (on page

571)
For NVIDIA Quadro cards (Windows XP), you can turn off the Overlay setting in the NVIDIA
control panel.
1. Open the NVIDIA Control Panel application.
2. Go to 3D Settings > Manage 3D Settings.
3. Select Off for the Enable Overlay setting.
4. Save your change and close the application.
General Display Issues

The 3D Navigator tooltips are flickering.
Set the transition effect for menus and tooltips to the Scroll Effect:
1. From your desktop, right-click and select Properties to open the Display Properties dialog
box.
2. Click the Appearance tab.
566
Troubleshooting
3. Click Effects and select Scroll Effect under the Use the following transition effect for
menus and tooltips setting.
4. Click OK to save your change.

5. Click OK to close the Display Properties dialog box.
General Messages
The color scheme has been changed to [Windows Vista Basic/Windows 7]. A running
program isn't compatible with certain visual elements of windows. Click here for more
information.
Meaning: This message may display when you open a 3D model. To correctly display the
cross hair (in fly mode) as well as support all capabilities of this operating system, the
application automatically unchecks the Enable desktop composition setting. This setting is
in Control Panel > System > Advanced system settings > Advanced tab > Performance
Settings > Visual Effects.
Recovery: If you click to see more information on the message, the Windows information
dialog box displays. Check the Don't show me this again option if you do not want the
above message to display each time a 3D model is opened.
567
Troubleshooting
Checking Hardware Acceleration Settings - Microsoft

Vista/Windows 7 Instructions
The images used in the steps below show NVIDIA card settings, which represent just one
type of card that can be used. These images are intended to be used only as examples. The
settings for your graphics card may differ from those shown in the steps below.
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Display.
2. Select Start > Control Panel.
3. Select Appearance and Personalization > Display Settings.
568
Troubleshooting
4. Click Advanced Settings.
569
Troubleshooting
5. Click the Troubleshoot tab.
If your driver does not allow changes (as shown in the above image), you may have
to contact your video card manufacturer for instructions on turning on/off hardware
acceleration.
570
Troubleshooting
6. If available, click Change settings.
7. Move the Hardware acceleration slider bar to Full.

8. Click OK to save edits and exit the dialog box. Click OK again to exit the Display Settings
dialog box.
Checking Hardware Acceleration Settings - Microsoft

Windows XP Instructions
The images used in the steps below show NVIDIA card settings, which represent just one
type of card that can be used. These images are intended to be used only as examples. The
settings for your graphics card may differ from those shown in the steps below.
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Display.
571
Troubleshooting
2. Click the Settings tab in the Display Properties dialog box.
3. Click Advanced.
572
Troubleshooting
4. Click the Troubleshoot tab.
5. Move the Hardware acceleration slider bar to Full.

6. Click OK to save edits and exit the dialog box. Click OK again to exit the Display
Properties dialog box.
573
Troubleshooting
574
Glossary
A
ambient
A light source that distributes light uniformly in all directions from no specified location. All
objects are illuminated equally regardless of their location and orientation. The ambient light and
the brightness setting interact directly in a given view of the model.
anti-aliasing
A technique for smoothing the jagged edges of pixelized graphics by blending the edges with
colors. This technique fills the pixels along the jagged edges with varying amounts of transition
colors which soften the edge and blend the edge smoothly into the background.
attenuation
The reduction of the intensity of light based on the distance from the source of the light.
Attenuation can be illustrated as the difference between a 100 Watt and a 60 Watt light bulb.
B
bore line
A line displayed during 3-D input to assist in depth selection.
bump mapping
An image used to control local changes in the surface light reflectivity when shading a surface.
This can provide bumpiness effects on an otherwise flat surface.
C
cell
A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a group, and then
manipulated as individual elements.
575
Glossary
color table
A file which contains the standard color settings to be used for a design file or set of design files.
command button
The name of a mouse button. The command button is used to select commands from a menu.
D
data button
The name of a mouse button. The data button is used to place data points and tentative points,
to accept previously-selected elements, and to select commands from menus and forms.
data point
A point placed by pressing left mouse button. Data points allow you to select commands from
menus and forms, place elements, identify and accept elements, activate windows, and perform
window manipulations.
delta
A specified offset or distance between two points in space.
design file
A file containing graphic and text data. Also called a drawing file.
diffuse reflection
The reflection that is caused when incident light is broken up and distributed equally by reflective
surfaces in all directions.
distance light
A vector light or a wall of perpendicular lights that are far away and traveling in the same
direction, such as the sun. Distant lights do not have attenuation. The actual location of the light
source and its nearness to objects in the scene is irrelevant.
576
Glossary
dithering
A technique for achieving greater color resolution at the expense of spatial resolution. More
colors are produced with the loss of some detail.
E
element
The basic building block of a geometric figure, also completed geometric figures such as lines,
shapes, circles, and so forth.
environment box
A six-sided cube or volume surrounding the entire model that displays the visual surroundings of
the model and the reflections on the surfaces of the model. A common use of the environment
box is to simulate the effect of the sky as a background in an outdoor scene. For this reason, the
environment box is often called the sky box.
F
fresnel
The simulated reduction of the intensity of light passing through transparent materials and the
increase in reflectivity of reflective materials as the angle of incidence deviates from
perpendicular.
function keys
The strip of keys located across the top of the keyboard. These keys select certain common
commands.
G
global light
Those items that add light contributions to the scene about to be rendered, but that are not part
of the scene itself. Ambient light and sky light are examples of global lights.
577
Glossary
hidden lines
See visible edge.
I
interest
In lighting, the second point in a two-point placement that determines where the light is cast. For
point lights, interest represents the falloff point located on a sphere centered on the light location
that is tangent to the interest point. For distance and spot lights, interest represents an idealized
point on a line from the light location in the direction that the light is cast. Note that once the light
is placed, this point is normalized.
interlaced
A term that describes a situation when only every other line of pixels on a computer terminal
screen or TV monitor is refreshed on each pass. For example, in American television, every
second line is refreshed 60 times per second. Interlacing saves half of the signal information that
non-interlaced screens use.
L
label
The database information associated with an element.
levels
The MicroStation design plane consists of a multilevel design structure. Elements can be
organized in any fashion on 63 levels, although no element can span two levels. Only one level
can be active at a time, but any combination can be displayed or blanked from the screen. The
active level must be displayed.
O
offset
The distance perpendicular to an alignment, denoted as minus left and positive right.
578
Glossary
opaque
A characteristic of an element through which light cannot pass.
orthogonal mode
The mode of the RVHL (Remove Vector Hidden Lines) product in which orthogonal views are
produced.
orthogonal view
A view that is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which are orthogonal to the
plane.
P
palettes
A file for the storage of materials, colors, and patterns to be assigned to objects in a model.
perspective mode
The mode of the RVHL (Remove Vector Hidden Lines) product in which perspective views are
produced.
perspective view
A view that is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which pass through a point. The
eye of the viewer is assumed to be at that point.
point
A graphic element representing a position in space.
point light
A light source that radiates in equal intensity and in all directions. The radius of the point light is
the halfway point between full intensity and no intensity. A bare light bulb or a candle are
examples of point lights.
579
Glossary
raster data file
A file containing the data for the original raster drawing.
raster graphics
Images that display vector elements (lines, circles, etc.) using pixels. The elements on a raster
canvas cannot be manipulated geometrically.
raytracing
A rendering algorithm that casts an imaginary ray from the viewpoint back into the screen until it
hits an object, and then recursively casts rays toward light sources and other objects in order to
compute the color of a pixel. This technique creates more realistic 3-D effects by adding
reflections and shadows to images.
refraction
The change of direction that light makes as it passes through a transparent surface.
rendering
A method for generating synthetic images in a scene from a precise description of the geometry
and other characteristics of the scene.
Reset/Reject button
The right button on the mouse. This button is used to continue on, reset values, or reject
elements.
RGB file format

An Intergraph color file format made up of red, green, and blue data values.
rotate
To turn, to change the angular orientation, to transform by revolution about a specific axis.
580
Glossary
scale
To enlarge or reduce the size of a defined element, modifying only the dimensions, not the ratio
among the pieces.
snaplock points
Points generated by SmartPlant Review at fixed locations on a given piece of geometry for use
during snaplock measurement. A snaplock point is displayed as either a small square or round
tag point on a surface. The location of a given snaplock point is always in the same place for a
specific type of geometry, making snaplock measurement more precise because it is repeatable.
spot light
A point light with a cone that defines a direction and clipping. The cone angle and delta angle
focuses the width and edge fall-off of the beam. Because spots lights are not lasers, they do not
focus to a single point. Spot lights are used to model theatrical lights, car headlamps, and
hand-held flashlights.
surface
The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element.
surface of revolution
A surface formed by the revolution of a curve about an axis in its plane.
surface points
Any point on any piece of geometry in shaded mode, not including background points. While
they work well for quick measurements between two or more objects, surface point
measurements are difficult to repeat precisely since they can be at any point on a given surface.
T
translucent
Permitting the passage of light.
transmittance
The degree of transparency that a surface exhibits. Values range from 0-1, where 0 is 0 percent
transparent, or opaque, and 1 is 100 percent transparent, or invisible. A ray goes through a
translucent surface.
581
Glossary
transparency
A surface property that allows light to pass through the surface. Glass bottles are examples of
transparent objects.
V
vector
A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction, generally represented as a line. Vectors
can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple (x,y,z).
vector graphics
Graphic representation of vector or linear geometry.
visible edge
In 3-D graphics, the line(s) that would not be hidden by the opacity of a represented element.
W
wireframe
A representation of a 3-D element as line segments outlining its surface, and which includes
hidden lines.
582
Index
3
3D Navigation Controls 93
3D Navigation Tips 103
A
Activate a Joystick in SmartPlant Review
125
Activate Command 34
Activate Range Rejection 235
Activate Stereo 225
Activate Tag Display 311
Activate/Deactivate Clipping Volume 340
Add a ScheduleReview Association 537
Add Association Dialog Box 537
Add Current/Edit View Dialog Box 385
Add Custom Aspects 184
Add VUE Files 146
Adjust a Volume Annotation 333
Adjust Bump Map Dialog Box 372
Adjust Index Allocation for Large Datasets
91
Adjust Pattern Dialog Box 371
Advanced Tab (Add Current/Edit View
Dialog Box) 390
Advanced Tab (Photo-Realism Settings
Dialog Box) 469
Advanced Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)
216
ambient 575
Ambient Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box)
471
Animation Tab (ScheduleReview Settings
Dialog Box) 524
Annotation Toolbar 51
Annotations Command 34
Anti-alias Option (Raytrace Tab) 467
anti-aliasing 575
API Module 25
Applying Range Rejection 235
Arrange All Command 47
Arrange Icons Command 48
Aspects Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)
218
Assign Material to Display Set Dialog Box
267
Assign Material to Display Sets 266
Assign Materials 362
Assign Materials to Elements Dialog Box

363
Attaching External Data 349
attenuation 575
Attenuation Tab (New Light Dialog Box)
485
Attributes Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box) 304
Attributes Tab (Find Tags Dialog Box) 307
Auto-Association Dialog Box 536
Auto-Association Tasks 535
Auto-Define Display Sets 245
Auto-Define Display Sets Dialog Box 246
Auto-Highlight All 120
Auto-Highlight Complex Elements 119
Auto-Highlight Components 119
Auto-Highlight Elements 119
Auto-Highlight Features 120
Auto-Highlight Label Data 118
Auto-Highlight Runs 121
B
Bearing Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)
110
bore line 575
bump mapping 575
C
Calculate a High Resolution Snapshot 406
Cascade Command 48
cell 575
Change Label Database Format 74
Change Page Setup 435
Check Out a License for SmartPlant Review
548
Checking Hardware Acceleration Settings Microsoft Vista/Windows 7 Instructions
568
Checking Hardware Acceleration Settings Microsoft Windows XP Instructions 571
Cities Dialog Box 476
105
Clip to Encircle Sphere 136
Close Command 31
Collaborating with Others 507
Collaboration Module 26
Collaboration Settings Dialog Box 511
Collision Detection Dialog Box 492
583
Index
Color Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)
497
color table 576
Colors Dialog Box 219
command button 576
Commands for Arranging the View 47
Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
69
Common Toolbar 52
Common View Tools Toolbar 53
Common Views Commands 43
Common Views Control 43
Commonly-Used Commands 31
Communicating with Tags 299
Configure Motion Settings 106
Configure Photo-Realism Settings 461
Configure View Settings 207
Configuring SmartPlant Review for
Integration 428
Construction Module 27
Control Movement with Directional Modes
138
Control Movement with Positioning Modes
134
Copy a Saved View 396
Copy Command 32
Copy Selected View Dialog Box 380
Create a Custom Home View 100
Create a Data Annotation 317
Create a Display Set Definition from a
SmartPlant 3D System Hierarchy 243
Create a New Display Set Folder 244
Create a New ScheduleReview Project
515
Create a New ScheduleReview Query 530
Create a New Volume Annotation Category
327
Create a Nozzle Display Set Definition 243
Create a Toolbar 66
Create a View Group 397
Create Display Set Movement 454
Create Group Dialog Box 382
Create Materials 373
Create Materials Dialog Box 374
Create New Display Set Definitions 242
Create New Measurement Collection 286
Create Project Dialog Box 83
Create the Units of Measure Conversion
File for SmartPlant 3D Projects 189
Creating Measurement Collections 285
Customize Dialog Box 67
Customize Toolbars 65
Cut Command 32
584
D
Dashed View Cone Command 35
Data Annotation Properties Dialog Box
318
data button 576
data point 576
Database Tab (Create Project Dialog Box)
84
Define a Bore Sight 277
Define Display Order 207
Define ScheduleReview Settings 520
Define Search Path for Material Files 375
Definition Tab (Edit Volume Annotation
Dialog Box) 329
Delete a Project 538
Delete a Single Volume Annotation 336
Delete a Source Light 488
Delete a View Group 398
Delete Active Collection Measurements
297
Delete All Data Annotations 322
Delete All Measurement Collections 296
Delete All Measurements 284
Delete All Text Annotations 453
Delete All Volume Annotations 337
Delete Display Sets 272
Delete Last Measurement 284
Delete Many Text Annotations 453
Delete One Data Annotation 322
Delete One Text Annotation 452
Delete ScheduleReview Projects Dialog
Box 538
Delete Source Lights Dialog Box 489
Delete Tag Dialog Box 306
Delete Tags 306
delta 576
Description Tab (Add Current/Edit View
Dialog Box) 385
design file 576
diffuse reflection 576
Dim Display Sets 270
Dimensions and Options Tab (Edit Volume
Annotation Dialog Box) 332
Display All Tags 312
Display Commands 34
Display Data Annotations 321
Display Key Frame 409
Display Key Frame Motion Dialog Box 409
Display Left Stereo View 226
Display Materials 268
Display Only Active Tag 312
Display or Hide Parts of a Model with
Project Manager 143
Index
Display or Hide Project Manager 142
Display Order Command 35
Display Right Stereo View 226
Display Set Tab (Motion Settings Dialog
Box) 111
Display Streaming Data in the Properties
Window 424
Display Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog
Box) 386
Display Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)
109
Display Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)
212
Display Tag Action Comments 313
Display Text Annotations 453
Display Volume Annotations 325
distance light 576
dithering 577
Dot Box Command 35
E
Edit a Collaboration Session 511
Edit a Data Annotation 318
Edit a Data Annotation Position 321
Edit a Display Set Definition 247
Edit a Display Set Position 259
Edit a Saved View 396
Edit a ScheduleReview Project in Project
Manager 519
Edit a ScheduleReview Query 532
Edit a Search Path 375
Edit Attachments 352
Edit Attachments Dialog Box 354
Edit Categories Dialog Box 330
Edit Definition Dialog Box 248
Edit Display Set Dialog Box 247
Edit Display Set Position Dialog Box 259
Edit Display Sets 246
Edit Filename / Argument Dialog Box 355
Edit Images 447
Edit Levels 220
Edit Many Text Annotations 452
Edit Materials 367
Edit Materials Dialog Box 368
Edit Measurement Collections 286
Edit One Text Annotation 452
Edit Raytracing Options 490
Edit Source Light 486
Edit Source Lights Dialog Box 487
Edit Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box) 303
Edit Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog
Box) 287
Edit Tags 302
Edit Tags Dialog Box 302

Edit Types 356
Edit Types Dialog Box 358
Edit Volume Annotations 328
Edit Volume Annotations Dialog Box 328
Edit/New ScheduleReview Query Dialog
Box 533
Effects Tab (New Light Dialog Box) 483
element 577
Elevation Command 48
Enable Collision Detection Using the Move
Display Set API 454
Enable or Disable Immediate Update Mode
144
Encircle Radius Toolbar 55
Enter Fly Mode 101
environment box 577
Environment Tab (Photo-Realism Settings
Dialog Box) 462
Exit Command 34
Export Display Sets 274
Export Display Sets Dialog Box 275
Export Saved Views 401
Export Saved Views Dialog Box 402
Export ScheduleReview Projects 535
Export Tags 315
Export to PDF 433
Export Volume Annotations 338
Export Volume Annotations Dialog Box
339
Exporting Data in PDF Format 431
F
File Tab (Data Annotation Properties Dialog
Box) 319
Find a Volume Annotation 327
Find Object Dialog Box 194
Find Objects in the Model 193
Find Tags 306
Find Tags Dialog Box 307
Find Volume Inside/Overlap Dialog Box
258
Fit All to Model 200
Fit to Object(s) 102
Fit View to Display Set 202
Fit View to Model 201
Fit View to Object 201
Fit View to Volume 202
Fit Views 200
Flashbulb Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box)
472
Fog Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box) 478
Format Readouts Command 33
585
Index
Format Tab (Measurement Collections
Dialog Box) 293
Four View Layout Command 48
fresnel 577
Full Screen Command 48
function keys 577
G
Gamma Option (Raytrace Tab) 467
Generate Print Preview 437
Generate Shadows Option (Raytrace Tab)
469
Geometry Filter Tab (Collision Detection
Dialog Box) 496
global light 577
Global Lighting Dialog Box 471
Go to a Specific Date in a ScheduleReview
Session 541
Go to Tag 310
Go to Tag Dialog Box 311
Go to the End of a ScheduleReview
Session 541
H
hidden lines 578
Hide Level Dialog Box 224
Hide Levels 223
Hide Only Selected Display Sets 271
I
Import Display Sets 272
Import Display Sets Dialog Box 273
Import Saved Views 398
Import Saved Views Dialog Box 400
Import ScheduleReview Projects 534
Import Tags 313
Import Tags with Attributes and Symbology
314
Import Volume Annotations 337
Import Volume Annotations Dialog Box
338
Inactivate a Volume Annotation Category
327
Information Tab (Edit Display Set Position
Dialog Box) 260
Information Tab (New Light Dialog Box)
481
Install SmartPlant License Checkout Utility
546
Install the 3D PDF Utility 432
interest 578
586
interlaced 578
Introducing the Project Manager 141
Introducing the SmartPlant Review
Interface 31
Isometric (Bottom Back Left) Command 46
Isometric (Bottom Back Right) Command
46
Isometric (Bottom Front Left) Command
46
Isometric (Bottom Front Right) Command
46
Isometric (Top Back Left) Command 46
Isometric (Top Back Right) Command 46
Isometric (Top Front Left) Command 46
Isometric (Top Front Right) Command 45
J
Joystick Button Mapping Dialog Box 113
Joystick Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)
112
K
Keypad Keys (Classic Navigation) 130
L
label 578
Large Plant Monument Command 36
Level Settings Dialog Box 221
levels 578
License Checkout Utility Dialog Box 549
Light Views 204
Lighten Shadows 488
Lighting Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog
Box) 389
Lighting Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)
215
Line Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog
Box) 291
Load Accessories 444
Load the SmartPlant 3D Units of Measure
Conversion File 190
Load VUE Files 147
Lock Center Point 124
Lock Elevation 124
Look Around 101
Looking East (Left) Command 45
Looking North (Front) Command 45
Looking Plan (Top) Command 45
Looking South (Back) Command 45
Looking Up (Bottom) Command 45
Looking West (Right) Command 45
Index
M
Main Command 49
Maintain Display Options 208
Maintain Render Settings 208
Making Animations 377
Manipulate Text Annotations 447
Manipulate the View Cube 123
Map a Label Using the
RelationshipMapping.txt File 169
Map Joystick Commands 125
Match Files 220
Match Items Dialog Box 222
Measure Shortest Distance between
Objects 282
Measure Toolbar 55
Measurement Collections Dialog Box 287
Measurements Command 36
Menu Bar Command 33
Modify Frame Numbers 398
Modify Frame Numbers Dialog Box 382
Modify the Accessories Menu 444
Motion Settings Dialog Box 108
Motion Toolbar 56
Move 101
Move a Display Set 265
Move a Saved View 397
Move and Rotate Display Sets 455
Move Continuously 132
Move Display Set Dialog Box 456
Move Display Sets 271, 455
Move Lateral 134
Move Many Text Annotations 451
Move Measurement 283
Move One Text Annotation 451
Move Selected Views Dialog Box 383
Move Single Step 133
Move Tab (Edit Display Set Position Dialog
Box) 261
Move Tab (Edit VUE File Position Dialog
Box) 155
Move the Project Manager (Dock and
Undock) 143
Move View Cone Forward/Back, Left/Right
121
Move, Rotate, and Scale a Model
VUE File Position 151
N
Navigation Toolbar 57
Neutral Gray Background Option (Raytrace
Tab) 469
New Light Dialog Box 480
New ScheduleReview Project Dialog Box

518
New ScheduleReview Query Dialog Box
531
Next Object Command 32
O
Object Textures Command 36
offset 578
On-Site Drawing Generation Module 28
opaque 579
Open a Model File 82
Open an External Database 352
Open Model from Command Line 88
522
522
Opening a Model 81
Options Tab (Create Project Dialog Box)
85
orthogonal mode 579
orthogonal view 579
Outline Tab (Add Current/Edit View Dialog
Box) 387
Outline Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)
213
Outline Toggle 37
P
Page Setup Dialog Box 436
palettes 579
Pan 122
Paste Command 32
Pause a ScheduleReview Session 539
Pause Key Frame Motion 410
Performance Control 77
Performance Tips 551
Perspective Angle Command 38
Perspective Angle Toolbar 58
Perspective Command 38
perspective mode 579
perspective view 579
Photo-Realism Module 29
Photo-Realism Settings Dialog Box 462
Photo-Realism Toolbar 58
Pick Objects Dialog Box 257
Place a New Distant Light 479
Place a New Point Light 478
Place a New Spot Light 480
Place a Tag With a Leader Line 300
Place a Volume Annotation 325
587
Index
Place Annotation Dialog Box 449
Place Center Point Only 232
Place Eye Point Only 231
Place Far Clipping Plane 234
Place Many Text Annotations 450
Place Near Clipping Plane 234
Place One Text Annotation 450
Place Tag With No Leader 301
Placing 3D Points 277
Placing Data Annotations 317
Placing Measurements 279
Placing Volume Annotations 323
Plan Command 49
Play a ScheduleReview Project 539
Play Key Frame Motion 410
point 579
Point Cloud Integrator Module 29
point light 579
Position Control Changes 60
Position Control Toolbar 59
Position Tab (Data Annotation Properties
Dialog Box) 320
Position Tab (New Light Dialog Box) 482
Preface 17
Previous Object Command 32
Print Dialog Box 440
Print Preview Dialog Box 438
Print Views 439
Printing 435
Project Tab (ScheduleReview Settings
Dialog Box) 520
R
Range Box Snaplock Tab (Measurement
Collections Dialog Box) 295
Range Reject Tab (Motion Settings Dialog
Box) 113
Range Reject Tab (View Settings Dialog
Box) 216
raster data file 580
raster graphics 580
Rates Tab (Motion Settings Dialog Box)
108
Raytrace a View 489
Raytrace Option (Raytrace Tab) 469
Raytrace Tab (Photo-Realism Settings
Dialog Box) 463
raytracing 580
Recall a Partial View 393
Recall a Saved View 393
Recently Used Files Command 33
Record a ScheduleReview Session 541
Redo Command 32
588
Reflective Bounce Option (Raytrace Tab)

465
Reflective Threshold Option (Raytrace Tab)
465
refraction 580
Refresh Active Project 518
Refresh All Views 49
Refresh Command 49
Refresh Data Command 33
Rejoin a Collaboration Session 510
Remove a ScheduleReview Association
537
Rename a View Group 397
Rename Display Sets 272
Rename Group Dialog Box 384
rendering 580
Rendering Photo-Realistic Images 459
Report Collision Detection Results Dialog
Box 506
Reset a Toolbar 67
Reset/Reject button 580
Resolve Current Level Settings Dialog Box
223
Restart a ScheduleReview Session 540
Restore All Command 49
Restore Measurement Position 283
Return to Default View 100
Reverse Dim Display Sets 270
Review Example Workflow 175
Review Tab (ScheduleReview Settings
Dialog Box) 526
RGB file format 580
rotate 580
Rotate 122
Rotate Display Set 266
Rotate Tab (Edit Display Set Position
Dialog Box) 263
Rotate Tab (Edit VUE File Position Dialog
Box) 156
Rotate with Model Fit Command 47
Rotation Points per Axis Tab (Edit Display
Set Position Dialog Box) 264
Run Collision Detection 503
Run Collision Detection Against Point Cloud
Data 504
Run Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)
499
S
Save and Recall Views 391
Save and Recall Views Dialog Box 378
Save As VUE File 149
Save Command 31
Index
Save the Current View 392
scale 581
Scale Tab (Edit VUE File Position Dialog
Box) 157
ScheduleReview Settings Dialog Box 520
ScheduleReview Toolbar 61
Scroll Bars Command 49
Search Path Dialog Box 376
Select an Object 102
Select Collision Display Colors 502
Select Collision Sounds 502
Select Filters for Collision Types 500
Select Graphic Element Types 501
Select Level Settings 219
Select Licenses for Modules 544
Select Modules Utility Dialog Box 545
Select Objects and Range 501
Select ScheduleReview Projects Dialog Box
518
Selection Tab (Collision Detection Dialog
Box) 495
Send a Snapshot to SmartSketch 406
Set a Clipping Volume 345
Set a Raytrace Range 490
Set All Range Rejection 236
Set All Range Rejection Values Dialog Box
236
Set Ambient Light Level 205
Set Ambient Light Level Dialog Box 206
Set Background Color 208
Set Bearing Angles 116
Set Brightness Level 206
Set Brightness Level Dialog Box 206
Set Center Mode 123
Set Center Point 232
Set Clipping Planes 233
Set Continuous Motion 115
Set Display Options 116
Set Display Tag 208
Set Elevation Range Rejection 237
Set Eye Point 230
Set Global Lighting 470
Set Horizontal Encircle 135
Set Key Frame Motion 407
Set Light Direction 205
Set Light Direction Dialog Box 205
Set Lighting Intensity 209
Set Main Range Rejection 237
Set Motion Control to Display Set 132
Set Motion Control to Eye Point 132
Set Motion Rates 114
Set Number of Processors for Rendering
565
Set Plan Range Rejection 237

Set Plant North Mode 140
Set Priority Mode 123
Set Range Reject 209
Set Review Control Settings 528
Set ScheduleReview Animation Settings
527
Set ScheduleReview Project Settings 527
Set ScheduleReview Snapshot Settings
528
Set Single Step Motion 115
Set Snaplock Measurement 280
Set Step Direction 133
Set Stereo Distances 226
Set Stereo Settings 225
Set Stroking Tolerance 209
Set Sun Bearing Angles 210
Set Surface Encircle 137
Set Surface Measurement 281
Set Task Symbology 529
Set Textures 210
Set the Active Project 518
Set Toggle Step Direction 115
Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall 413
Set Up Partial Key Frame Recall Dialog Box
414
Set Up Partial View Recall 395
Set Up Partial View Recall Dialog Box 384
Set Vertical Encircle 136
Set View by Eye Point 231
Set View Cone Perspective 210
Set View Dependent Mode 138
Set View Dependent, Level Mode 139
Set View Independent Mode 139
Set Window Size 457
Set Window Size Dialog Box 458
Set Zoom Amount 204
Setting the Home View 91
Shade Display Sets 269
Shaded Command 36
Shaded with Outline Command 38
Shaded/Wireframe Toggle 39
Share the Project Database Over the
Network 74
Shortcut Function Keys 126
Show Display Set Membership 269
Show Display Sets 269
Show Only Selected Display Sets 270
Show Range Rejection Settings 237
Show/Hide for Elevation View Command
40
Show/Hide for Main View Command 40
Show/Hide for Plan View Command 40
589
Index
Simulation and Visual Effects Module 30
Single View Layout Command 50
SmartPlant 3D Tab (Create Project Dialog
Box) 87
SmartPlant Review Shortcut Keys 128
SmartPlant Review Utilities 543
Snap to an Object 277
snaplock points 581
Snaplock Tab (Measurement Collections
Dialog Box) 294
Snapshot Key Frame 411
Snapshot Key Frames Dialog Box 412
Snapshot Tab (ScheduleReview Settings
Dialog Box) 525
Snapshot View Dialog Box 404
Solar Tab (Global Lighting Dialog Box)
473
Solar Vector Dialog Box 477
Sound Tab (Collision Detection Dialog Box)
498
spot light 581
Standard Control Keys 127
Standard Toolbar 62
Start a Collaboration Session 509
Start Programs Automatically 446
Status Bar Command 33
Step Back Through a ScheduleReview
Session 540
Step Forward Through a ScheduleReview
Session 540
Stereo Distances Dialog Box 227
Stop a ScheduleReview Session 540
Stop Key Frame Motion 411
Stroking Tolerance Command 40
Style Tab (Edit Volume Annotation Dialog
Box) 330
surface 581
Surface Encircle Command 41
surface of revolution 581
surface points 581
Symbology Tab (Edit Tags Dialog Box)
305
Symbology Tab (Find Tags Dialog Box)
309
Symbology Tab (ScheduleReview Settings
Dialog Box) 523
T
Tags Toolbar 62
Take a Snapshot 403
Task Symbology Dialog Box 529
Text Command 50
590
Text Tab (Measurement Collections Dialog

Box) 292
Three View Layout Command 50
Tile Horizontally Command 50
Tile Vertically Command 50
Time Zones Dialog Box 474
Toolbars 51
Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) 68
Tools MiniBar 63
Tools Toolbar 63
translucent 581
transmittance 581
Transmittance Bounce Option (Raytrace
Tab) 467
Transmittance Threshold Option (Raytrace
Tab) 466
transparency 582
Troubleshoot 3D Navigation 565
Troubleshoot Label Display Problems 179
Troubleshooting 551
Animation and Lighting 558
Annotations 560
General Viewing Issues 556
Motion 560
Primavera Version Changes 561
Printing Limitations 562
Tips for Streaming Data 562
Viewing SmartPlant 3D Data 564
Turn Aspects On and Off 183
Turn Off Tag Display 312
Turn Off Text Annotation Display 454
Turn Off Volume Clipping 346
Type Filter Tab (Collision Detection Dialog
Box) 493
U
Unassign Materials 365
Unassign Materials Dialog Box 366
Understanding Projects and Project
Databases 71
Undo Command 31
Use Auto-Highlighting to Display Label Data
118
Use Classic Clipping Volume 347
Use Clipping Volume (3D Wireframe Box)
342
Use Keyboard-Only 3D Navigation 95
Use Mouse Drag Modes 116
Use Mouse Only or Mouse + Keyboard
Combinations (Fly Mode) 96
Use NetMeeting 509
Use One Click Measurement Mode 282
Index
Use Project Manager to Add a
ScheduleReview Project to a Model 519
Use Review Controls 538
Use the 3D Navigator 99
Use the Common Views Control 199
Use the Joystick 124
Use the Keyboard 126
Use the Search Path 89
Use the SmartPlant 3D Label Selector
Utility 161
Using 3D Navigation 93
Using Accessories 443
Using Collision Detection 491
Using ScheduleReview 515
Using SmartPlant Review in an Integrated
Environment 428
Using SmartPlant Review in Streaming
Mode 417
Using SmartPlant Review Modules 25
Using the Select Modules Utility 543
Using the SmartPlant License Checkout
Utility 546
Using the UoM Converter to Change the
Units of Measure for Labels 187
Using the View Cone 229
View SmartPlant 3D Labels in SmartPlant

Review 167
Viewing SmartPlant 3D Model Data 159
Views Toolbar 64
visible edge 582
XYZ Label Command 35
vector 582
vector graphics 582
View a ScheduleReview Project at a
Specific Percent Complete 539
View by Center Point 233
View Collision Reports 505
View Cone Tab (Add Current/Edit View
Dialog Box) 387
View Cone Tab (View Settings Dialog Box)
213
View Current Level Settings 220
View Display Sets 241
View Find Tags Results 309
View General Notes from SmartPlant 3D
171
View Generated PDF File 433
View in Stereo 224
View Items in the Model with Project
Manager 142
View Multiple VUE Files in a Single Session
423
View Next Tag 309
View Point Cloud Data 446
View Previous Tag 310
View Settings Dialog Box 211
W
Welcome to SmartPlant Review 23
What's New in SmartPlant Review? 19
Window Toolbar 65
wireframe 582
Wireframe Background Color Command
43
Wireframe Command 42
Wireframe with Outline Command 41
Work with Aspects 182
Working in an Integrated Environment 427
Working with Clipping Volumes 339
Working with Display Sets 239
Working with Materials 361
Working with Views 197
Working with VUE Files 145
World Map Dialog Box 475
X
Z
Zoom About a Point 204
Zoom In 203
Zoom Out 203
591

SmartPlant Review For Dummies

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SmartPlant Review For Dummies

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SmartPlant Review

Version 2010 - UPDATED

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Warranties and Liabilities

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

What's New in SmartPlant Review?

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

What's New in SmartPlant Review?

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

What's New in SmartPlant Review?

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

What's New in SmartPlant Review?

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

Welcome to SmartPlant Review

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

Welcome to SmartPlant Review

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

Using SmartPlant Review Modules

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

Using SmartPlant Review Modules

Benefits of Collaboration module:

Reduces administration and training costs as an add-on feature to NetMeeting. The

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

Using SmartPlant Review Modules

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

Using SmartPlant Review Modules

On-Site Drawing Generation Module

Benefits of the On-Site Drawing Generation module:

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

Using SmartPlant Review Modules

Point Cloud Integrator Module

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

Using SmartPlant Review Modules

Simulation and Visual Effects Module

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

Introducing the SmartPlant Review

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

Introducing the SmartPlant Review Interface

Next Object Command

Previous Object Command

SmartPlant Review User's Guide

Introducing the SmartPlant Review Interface

Menu Bar Command

Status Bar Command

Refresh Data Command

Format Readouts Command

Format Readouts Dialog Box

Recently Used Files Command

SmartPlant Review User's Guide